JP2022078199A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of improving amusement of a player toward games.

SOLUTION: A game machine includes: first determination means for performing, on the basis of an establishment of a first determination condition, a determination whose determination probability to become a specific first determination result is set at a first probability; ball entrance means for which a period is set where a game ball entrance becomes easy, if the specific first determination result is determined by the first determination means; second determination means for performing a determination whose determination probability to become a specific second determination result is set at a second probability, if a game ball enters the ball entrance means; and privilege game performance means for performing a privilege game becoming advantageous to a player, if the specific second determination result is determined by the second determination means.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Here, for a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, whether to change the state of the starting port provided on the gaming board from the first state in which the gaming ball is difficult to enter to the second state in which the gaming ball is easy to enter. There is one that executes the first lottery of whether or not. In such a conventional gaming machine, a second lottery is executed based on a start winning prize at the start opening, and when a specific lottery result is obtained in the second lottery, a winning game advantageous to the player is executed. As a result, both the result of the first lottery and the result of the second lottery were focused on, and the interest of the player was improved.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886

However, in the gaming machines such as the above examples, it is necessary to improve the interest of the gaming, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in playing a game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 executes a determination in which a determination probability of a specific first determination result is set to the first probability based on the establishment of the first determination condition. When the determination means and the first determination means determine the specific first determination result, the ball entry means for which the period for facilitating the entry of the game ball is set, and the ball entry means for the game ball. Is determined to be the specific second determination result by the second determination means that executes the determination in which the determination probability that becomes the specific second determination result is set to the second probability when the ball enters the ball, and the second determination means. When this is done, the player has a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is a gaming ball when the gaming machine according to claim 1 is determined by the second determination means to have a special second determination result different from the specific second determination result. It has an area where the ball can be entered and a specific area through which the game ball entered in the area can pass, and the privileged game executing means is based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the specific area. , The above-mentioned privilege game is executed.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the probability of being determined as the special second determination result is set higher than the second probability.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, based on the establishment of the first determination condition, the first determination means for executing the determination in which the determination probability that is the specific first determination result is set to the first probability, and the first determination means thereof. When the first determination means determines the result of the specific first determination, the ball entry means for which the period during which the game ball is easy to enter is set, and the case where the game ball enters the ball entry means. In addition, when the second determination means for executing the determination in which the determination probability for which the specific second determination result is set is set to the second probability and the second determination means determine that the determination probability is the specific second determination result, It has a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest can be improved.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine according to claim 1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the second determination means determines that the second determination result is a special second determination result different from the specific second determination result, the area where the game ball can enter and the game in which the game ball enters the area. It has a specific area through which the ball can pass, and the privilege game executing means executes the privilege game based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the specific area. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest can be improved.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the probability of being determined as the special second determination result is set higher than the second probability. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the inside of the 2nd variable winning apparatus. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting of the display screen in the third symbol display device, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen in the third symbol display device. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display screen in the third symbol display device. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display screen in the third symbol display device. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display screen in the third symbol display device. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display screen in the third symbol display device. (A) and (b) are timing charts showing the flow of pseudo-variation of the fusion symbol in the third symbol display device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control unit, and (b) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main control unit. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first jackpot type selection table, and (c) is a schematic diagram. The second is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the random number table, and (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the small hit type selection table schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the small hit scenario table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit scenario a, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small hit scenario a. It is a schematic diagram which shows the content of b schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal map fluctuation pattern selection table (normal), and (b) schematically shows the contents of the normal map fluctuation pattern selection table (time saving / V). It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the voice lamp control device, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the pseudo-variation pattern selection table, and (c). Is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a display control device. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surface B. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the transfer data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a drawing list schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start setting process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the through gate passing process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the V passage processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the main processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot control process executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot ending control process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which showed the small hit ending control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the pseudo-variation start setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern selection process which is executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the pseudo-variation start setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the hit-related command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the jackpot opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. (A) is a flowchart showing the final round command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the jackpot interval command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. (A) is a flowchart showing the jackpot ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the small hit opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. Is. (A) is a flowchart showing the small hit ending command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the V-pass command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. Is. It is a flowchart which showed the pseudo-variation display process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the error command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device. .. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in the display control device. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 3rd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the RAM in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the ordinary symbol variation process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the electric accessory opening / closing process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modification of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the pseudo-variation of a fusion symbol executed by the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the pseudo-variation of a fusion symbol executed by the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting of the display screen in the third symbol display device in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the display screen in the third symbol display device in the fourth embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the fourth embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main control device according to the fourth embodiment, and (b) shows the electrical configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device according to the fourth embodiment. It is a block diagram. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the main process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the pseudo-variation start setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the pseudo fluctuation start setting process at the time of fluctuation stop which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the hold ball number command reception process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern selection process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the pseudo-variation start time discrimination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the ordinary figure variation pattern selection process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the pseudo-variation setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. Is a front view of the inside of the second variable winning device 650.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

The inner frame 12 includes a large number of nails, a first ball entry device 64 having a first ball entry port 64a, a first variable winning device 65 having a first specific winning opening 65a, and a second specific winning opening 650a. The game board 13 (see FIG. 2) provided with the second variable winning device 650 and the like is detachably attached from the front side. A ball game is performed by the game ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 guides the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 11) that launches the ball to the front region of the game board 13 and the game ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Launch rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as the opening / closing axis of the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) can be visually recognized from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16. It has become.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing game balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the game ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a by the inclination.

Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is used by the player, for example, when the stage of the effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later, is changed, or when the effect content of the super reach is changed. Be manipulated.

The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and is not shown in the pachinko machine 10 as "city stage", "empty stage", and "island stage". There are three stages. Then, the first ball entry port 64a, which will be described later, that is, various effects such as the variable effect and the reach effect performed in association with the entry into the start winning opening (starting winning) are matched to the themes given to each stage. It is designed to be done. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during the period when the fluctuation effect is not performed or during the high-speed fluctuation, and each time the frame button 22 is operated, for example, "city stage" → " It is changed repeatedly in the order of "empty stage"-> "island stage"-> "city stage"-> ... Immediately after the power is turned on, for example, a "city stage" is set as the initial stage.

On the other hand, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen of the super reach effect mode during the normal reach when developing from the normal reach to the super reach when the pseudo variation effect is started. If the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the effect content at the time of super reach is changed.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 is lit by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach effect. Or it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying the time when the prize ball is being paid out and the time when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted in the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, a game ball is operated according to the operation. Is lent out. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area where the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine, a so-called cash machine, in which a game ball is directly lent to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit is not required. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion of the 40 to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing game balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. ing. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the game ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and the ball launching unit 112a is allowed to be driven inside the operation handle 51. A touch sensor 51a for pressing, a push button type stop switch 51b that stops the firing of the game ball during the pressing operation, and a variable that detects the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 by the change in electric resistance. It has a built-in resistor (not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the game ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the game ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening thereof is opened. The game ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "senryobako" or "dollar box") for receiving the game balls discharged from the lower plate 50 placed under the lower plate 50. It will be done. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 is a wooden base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, in addition to a large number of nails for ball guidance (only partially shown) and a windmill (not shown). , Rails 61, 62, 1st ball entry port 64a, 1st variable winning device 65 having 1st specific winning opening 65a, 2nd variable winning device 650 having 2nd specific winning opening 650a, normal symbol starting port (through) The gate) 67, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled and configured, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). A first ball entry device 64 having a first entry opening 64a, a first variable winning device 65 having a first specific winning opening 65a, a second variable winning device 650 having a second specific winning opening 650a, and a variable display device unit 80. Is arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. Therefore, for example, by providing a decorative movable accessory that is movable according to the game on the rear surface side of the base plate 60, the movement of the movable accessory can be visually recognized by the player, so that the range is limited. It is possible to use the game area in three dimensions, and there is an effect that various effects can be provided to the player.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back of the game board 13. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of the ball. The game area is an area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired) which is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 70 connecting the rails. This is the area where the game ball flows down.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the game ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 7) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2), and the game ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 may return to the ball guide passage again. Be prevented. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the game ball, and the game ball launched with a predetermined force or more hits the return rubber 69. , The momentum is dampened and bounced back toward the center.

The pachinko machine 10 has an open / close door that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball can enter the first entry port 64a and a closed state in which the game ball is prevented from entering the first entry port 64a. The first ball entry device 64 is provided. The opening / closing door of the first ball entry device 64 has a rectangular outer shape, substantially coincides with the outer circumference of the first ball entry port 64a, stands upright in parallel with the game board 13, and faces the first ball entry port 64a. By arranging the ball in the first ball opening 64a, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the first ball opening 64a. The open / close door is pivotally supported on the lower end side, and is configured to rotate 90 degrees toward the front side of the game board 13 around the shaft by operating (on) a solenoid (not shown). ing. As a result, the game ball flowing down the front side of the game board 13 is received by the upper surface of the opening / closing door, and the received game ball is guided to the inside of the first entry port 64a. Although the details will be described later, when the game ball enters the first entry slot 64a, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, and the game ball opens the through gate (normal symbol start opening) 67. When it passes, a lottery of ordinary symbols (second symbol) is performed. Specifically, the opening / closing door of the first ball entry device 64 is always set to the closed state, and when it hits a normal symbol, it is opened in a predetermined opening pattern (opening period, opening number of times). It is variable to. When the game ball enters the first ball entry port 64a, a special symbol lottery is executed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 execute an effect based on the lottery result.

In the special symbol lottery performed for entering the first ball opening 64a, it is determined whether or not the special symbol has won a big hit or a small hit, and the special symbol is a big hit or a small hit. If it is determined that, the big hit type or the small hit type is also determined.

When the hit / fail determination result of the special symbol becomes a big hit, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state (big hit game). Here, when the jackpot game is executed, after a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed (after the opening period has elapsed), the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65, which is normally closed, has a predetermined period. It is released (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed, or until 10 balls are won), and the opening is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). Then, after the opening of the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 is repeated a predetermined number of times, the jackpot game ends when a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses (the ending period elapses).

It should be noted that, by winning one game ball in the first variable winning device 65, 15 game balls are paid out to the player as prize balls. Further, the period from the execution of the jackpot game to the opening of the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 (opening period) and the specified door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). ) The period from the repetition to the end of the jackpot game (ending period) and the period during which the specific door 65f is closed during the opening operation of the specific door 65f (interval period), which is repeatedly executed, are appropriately set. do it.

During the jackpot game, a large number of game balls (for example, about 150 (for example, 10 rounds x 15 rounds)) are awarded in the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65, so that a larger amount of prizes than usual. Balls (about 1500 pieces (100 pieces x 10 shots)) are paid out.

The details will be described later, but for the jackpot of the special symbol, one of the jackpot types is determined from the two types of "big hit A" and "big hit B" (see Fig. 14 (b)), and the round set for the jackpot type. The specific door 65f is opened by the number of times (15R (round) in this embodiment). In addition, after the end of the special gaming state, the time-saving gaming state is given to the player a predetermined number of times based on the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of the jackpot (for example, three times when the jackpot A is won in the normal gaming state). ) Is given.

On the other hand, in the lottery of the normal symbol executed for the passage of the game ball to the through gate (normal symbol start port) 67, the hit / fail determination of the normal symbol is performed. When the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit, the opening / closing door of the first ball entry device 64 located below the through gate 67 is changed to the open state for a predetermined time (2 seconds in the present embodiment), and the first It becomes easy for the game ball to enter the ball entry port 64a. That is, when the normal symbol is hit, the game ball is likely to enter the first entrance 64a, and as a result, the special symbol is easily drawn.

When the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, the variable display of the normal symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and the predetermined time (for example, the selected variable time such as 5 seconds or 10 seconds) is set. After that, the normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If the game ball passes through the through gate 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37. Will be done. In the present embodiment, the variation display of the second symbol is executed not only in the second symbol display device 83 but also in the third symbol display device 81 in synchronization with the variation display of the second symbol display device 83. In the present embodiment, when the through gate 67 is passed, the number of passages is suspended up to 4 times, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may not be suspended or may be different from 4 times. ..

Further, below the through gate 67, a crune member 660 into which a game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 enters is arranged. This crune member is formed in a conical shape, and has a ball entry portion at an upper portion into which a game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 enters. The ball entry portion is configured such that the distance between the through gate 67 and the ball entry portion is less than one game ball so that a game ball other than the one that has passed through the through gate 67 does not enter the ball. A spiral flow path 660k is formed in which a game ball that has entered the ball entry portion is spirally flowed down along the inner wall of the crune member 660, and the end portion of the spiral flow path 660k is gently mortar-shaped toward the center. An inclined bottom surface portion 660t is formed. The spiral flow path 660k is configured to guide the game ball that has entered the ball entry portion to the outer end portion of the bottom surface portion 660t so that the game ball spirally flows down along the inner peripheral surface of the bottom surface portion 660t. Has been done. The bottom surface portion 660t has the same shape as the bottom surface of the already known croon, and gradually guides the game ball to the central portion while making the game ball make a circular motion along the inner circumference of the bottom surface. At the center of the bottom surface portion 660t, a ball outlet 660a slightly larger than one game ball (in this embodiment, a diameter of 12 mm) is formed so as to project downward in a cylindrical shape. Further, inside the ball outlet 660a, a flow path is spirally formed by a 0.5 mm protruding flow path wall, and the game ball spirally rotates inside the ball outlet 660a and outside the ball outlet 660a. It is configured to be discharged into.

In the present embodiment, only the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 passes inside the crune member 660, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a game ball that has not passed through the through gate 67 can enter the ball. It may be configured. With such a configuration, the frequency of entering the ball into the croon member 660 increases, and it is possible to make it easier to enter the first ball entry port 64a. Further, in the present embodiment, the spiral flow path 660k is formed inside the crune member 660, but the configuration is not limited to this, and a configuration in which the spiral flow path 660k is not provided may be used, or the bottom surface of the crune shape may be provided. May be formed only by the spiral flow path 660k without forming the above. Further, instead of the spiral flow path 660k, a deceleration portion made of a material having a high friction coefficient for decelerating the flow speed of the game ball may be formed. If it delays the flow of the game ball, it may be appropriately selected.

As a result, the game ball that has entered the entry portion of the crune member 660 slowly rolls along the inner peripheral wall of the crune member 660 in the spiral flow path 660k and is guided to the bottom surface portion 660t. The game ball guided to the bottom surface portion 660t is gradually guided to the ball outlet 660a while making a circular motion from the outer peripheral side to the center on the bottom surface portion 660t. Further, the diameter of the ball outlet 660a is slightly larger than that of the game ball, and the game ball spirally rotates inside the ball outlet 660a protruding downward due to the spiral flow path formed inside. While doing so, it is discharged to the outside of the ball outlet 660a. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the entry portion of the crune member 660 is configured to take about 10 seconds to be discharged from the ball outlet 660a. In addition, in this embodiment, since the fluctuation time for hitting a normal symbol is configured to be 10 seconds (see FIG. 17A), if the lottery result is a hit after passing through the through gate 67, it is possible to win. Since the game ball that has entered from the ball outlet 660a of the crune member 660 is discharged at the timing when the fluctuation ends, the game ball is first set at the timing when the opening / closing door of the first ball entry device 64 is opened. It can be made to flow down to the ball entry device 64. Therefore, even when the player has stopped firing the game ball, there is an effect that the game ball can be entered into the first ball entry port 64a at the timing when the opening / closing door is opened. Further, below the ball outlet 660a, a game nail KG is arranged at a position facing the ball outlet 660a. As a result, the game ball discharged from the ball outlet 660a and flowing down cannot directly flow down to the first ball entry device 64, the flow speed is reduced by the game nail KG, and the game ball is further distributed to the left and right. Therefore, since the time until the game ball reaches the first ball entry device 64 can be further delayed, it is possible to match the time lag from the determination of the normal symbol to the opening of the opening / closing door. , It is possible to make it easier for the game ball to enter the first ball entry port 64a.

In this embodiment, the crune member 660 is configured to delay by the fluctuation time of the hit variation of the normal symbol, but the time is not limited to this and may be 5 seconds or the like. With this configuration, it is possible to delay the period, although it is shorter than the per-variable period.

In the present embodiment, in the case of a miss (in the present embodiment, the probability of the miss is 4/5), a small hit different from the big hit (in the present embodiment, the jackpot 1/5) has a predetermined probability (in the present embodiment, the probability of the miss is 4/5). It is set at 1/4) of the small hit. If it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit, the small hit type is also determined. That is, when the special symbol becomes a small hit, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a specific gaming state (small hit game), and the opening / closing piece 650b of the second variable winning device 650, which is normally closed, is set for a predetermined period (for example). , Until 1.5 seconds have passed, or one round until 10 balls are won).

As a result, the ball can be won in the second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 4, but the V passage passage 650e3 is provided inside the second variable winning device 650 described above (see FIG. 4), and the sphere is a V passage passage 650e3. When the V detection switch 650e5 (see FIG. 4) detects that the game has passed through (hereinafter referred to as “passing through a specific area”), a jackpot game is given.

Details will be described later, but if you win a small hit with a special symbol, refer to the small hit type selection table 202c (see FIG. 15) and there are three types: "small hit A", "small hit B", and "small hit C". One of the small hit types is selected from. Then, the small hit game is executed based on the selected small hit type. Further, as will be described in detail later, only "small hit A" out of the three types of small hits is when a ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 as a result of the small hit game. It is set so that it can pass through the V passage flow path 650e3. That is, only "small hit A" is set so that a big hit can be given as a result of the small hit game.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 wins a big hit by a special symbol lottery (so-called type 1 game) and a small hit by a special symbol lottery, and goes to the second variable winning device 650 by the small hit game. A game (so-called type 1 and type 2 mixer) equipped with a game (so-called type 2 game) aiming at a big hit by passing the winning ball to a specific area (V detection switch 650e5 in this embodiment). Have.

By having such playability, the player can aim for a big hit with a plurality of opportunities, so that it is possible to alleviate the tiredness of the game.

Here, the second variable winning device 650 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 4 (a) to 4 (b). As shown in FIG. 2, the second variable winning device 650 is arranged at the lower left of the third symbol display device 81, and the firing handle 51 is arranged so that the game ball passes on the left side of the third symbol display device 81. When a game is played by an operated game method (hereinafter referred to as a left-handed game), it is easy for the game ball to win in the second specific winning opening 650a (the game ball passes through the right side of the third symbol display device 81). This is configured as a comparison with a game method in which the launch handle 51 is operated (hereinafter referred to as a right-handed game). The second variable winning device 650 is arranged on the front side of the game board and has a front cover body formed with a specific winning opening 650a for receiving a game ball flowing down the game area of the game board 13 and a front cover body thereof. An opening / closing piece 650b that is rotatably configured to open and close the specific winning opening 650a, and a flow path through which the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 650a and is arranged on the back side of the game board 13 flows down are formed. It is mainly composed of a flow path member 650h. In the second variable winning device 650, the front cover body of the game board 13 is fixed to the game board 13 with screws so as to cover the through hole machined by the router from the front side of the game board 13. A second specific winning opening 650a is arranged on the front cover body as an opening through which a game ball flowing down the front side of the game board 13 can enter, and the second specific winning opening 650a is covered with the closed state. As shown in FIG. 2, a variable opening / closing piece 650b is attached to an open state in which the game ball is guided to the second specific winning opening 650a. As shown in FIG. 2, the opening / closing piece 650b has a claw shape, the tip portion is tapered, and the other end side of the tip portion is rotatably supported by the front cover body. There is. The side of the opening / closing piece 650b facing the second specific winning opening 650a is formed to be recessed in an arc shape so as to guide the game ball to the second specific winning opening 650a when the opening / closing piece 650b is opened. The opening / closing piece 650b is configured to be variable between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid arranged in the second variable winning device 650. Since the mechanism for varying the opening / closing piece 650b is already known, the details thereof will be omitted.

A part of the through hole is exposed at the lower left of the front cover body, and the back side of the game board 13 is made visible by a transparent plastic member so as to be flush with the front surface of the game board 13. Is blocked. On the back side of this plastic member, a V passage flow path 650e3 and a V detection switch 650e5, which will be described later, are visibly configured, and a V detection switch 650e5 (specific area) is arranged at a position corresponding to the V detection switch 650e5. The letter "V" indicating that the switch is printed is printed. As a result, the player can visually confirm whether or not the game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 is detected by the V detection switch 650e5, further improving the interest of the game. can.

4 (a) to 4 (b) are views showing the flow path member 650h arranged on the back surface side of the game board 13 in the second variable winning device 650. FIG. 4A shows a switching valve 650b3 so that the game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 cannot (or is difficult) to pass through the V passage passage 650. It is a figure which showed the state which is rotated upward (the solenoid is not activated). In FIG. 4B, the solenoid is moved downward by the switching valve 650b3 so that the game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 can pass through the V passage flow path 650e3. It is a figure which showed the state which is rotated by operating.

The flow path member 650h formed on the back surface side of the second variable winning device 650 will be described with reference to FIG. 4A. The game ball winning in the second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 rolls in a flow path communicating with the through hole of the game board 13 formed inside the front cover body to the back side of the game board 13. Roll to. The flow path member 650h is fixed to the back surface side of the game board 13 with screws so that the inflow port 650a1 of the flow path member 650h is arranged at a position facing the through hole. The flow path member 650h forms a flow path through which a plurality of game balls can flow down due to the wall portion protruding toward the back surface. A flow path is formed so that the game ball that has passed through the inflow port 650a1 is distributed to either the discharge flow path 650e1 or the V passage flow path 650e3. A switching valve 650b3 is arranged at the abutting portion between the discharge flow path 650e1 and the V passage flow path 650e3, and the switching valve 650b3 rotates and operates to allow the game ball that has passed through the inflow port 650a1 to be discharged from the discharge flow path 650e1. It is configured to be distributed to the V passage flow path 650e3.

As shown in FIG. 4A, the discharge flow path 650e1 is an upper flow path in the flow path member 650h, and is inside the outer peripheral wall portion 650e7 and the flow path member 650h forming the outer periphery of the flow path member 650h. The inner wall portion 650f3 is formed so as to project to the back side with a width that allows one game ball to pass through at a position that is wider than the outer peripheral wall portion 650e7 so that one game ball can pass (15 mm in this embodiment). Has been done. The outer peripheral wall portion 650e7 is arranged below the inner wall portion 650f3 at intervals so that one or more game balls can pass through, and the inner wall portion 650f3 and the outer peripheral wall portion 650e7 arranged below the inner wall portion 650e3 have a V passage flow path 650e3. Is formed. Further, a partition wall 650f4 is provided to partition the discharge flow path 650e1 and the V passage flow path 650e3. The distance from the partition wall 650f4 to the inner wall portion 650f3 is configured to be less than one game ball so that the game ball cannot pass through the upper part of the partition wall 650f4, and the flowing game ball surely flows down to the V passage flow path 650e3. can do. The inner wall portion 650f3 is formed so as to be gently inclined downward to the left to a position directly below the inflow port 650a1 and has a width (1 ball can pass through) from the end portion to the outer peripheral wall portion 650e7 arranged on the right side. In this embodiment, it is formed with a space of 15 mm). A switching valve 650b3 is arranged at a position on the same upper surface as the outer peripheral wall portion 650e7 and the end portion of the inner wall portion 650f3.

As shown in FIG. 4A, the switching valve 650b3 has a plate shape having an upper surface on which one game ball can pass, and one end opposite to the inner wall portion 65f3 is a flow path member 650h. It is rotatably fixed to the wall. This shaft portion is connected to a link member operated by a solenoid (not shown), and when the solenoid operates, the link member rotates and the switching valve 650b3 is within the range of the arrow shown in FIG. 4 (a). It is configured to rotate with. When the solenoid is inactive, the switching valve 650b3 is urged and fixed at the position of the solid line shown in FIG. 4A, and is formed on the passage detection sensor 650as that can detect the passage of the game ball. The game ball that has passed through the inlet 650a1 is received on the upper surface and rolled (guided) to the discharge flow path 650e1. The game ball flowing down the discharge flow path 650e1 is detected by the discharge detection switch 650e6 arranged at the end of the discharge flow path 650e1 and guided to the flow path to be discharged to the outside of the game ball. A passage detection switch 650as in which an inflow port 650a1 through which the game ball can pass is formed is arranged, and the game ball is detected by the passage detection switch 650as to specify the second variable winning device 650. It is detected that a game ball has entered the winning opening 650a, and based on this, the winning ball is paid out and the number of winnings is counted.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 4B, when the solenoid operates and the switching valve 650b3 is rotated downward, the game ball that has passed through the inflow port 650a1 flows downward, and the V passage flow path 650e3 Since the entrance to the V passage is open, it flows into the V passage flow path 650e3. The above-mentioned V detection switch 650e5 is arranged at the end of the V passage flow path 650e3, and after being detected by the V detection switch 650e5, the game ball is guided to the flow path to be discharged to the outside.

In the present embodiment, when the winning / failing determination result of the special symbol is a small hit, the execution of the small hit game is started. The start of the small hit game is the small hit start setting process (S402 or S403 in FIG. 27) executed by the MPU201 of the main controller 110 in the small hit scenario a202g1 or the small hit scenario b202g2 (see FIGS. (A) to (c)). By setting in, it is determined that the small hit scenario a202g1 or b202g2 is set in the small hit control process (S1005 in FIG. 36) in the main process (FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 (FIG. 36). It is started by S1301: Yes) in FIG. 36. The start of the small hit game can be defined as the time when the fixed period (1s in the present embodiment), which is the period during which the symbol indicating the small hit is fixedly stopped and the symbol is fixed and stopped, has elapsed.

First, as common to the small hit scenario a202g1 and the small hit scenario b202g2, the switching valve 650b3 is rotated downward 1.5 seconds after the start of the small hit game execution, and the game ball can pass through the V passage flow path 650e3. Is set to. Then, 4 seconds after the start of the small hit game, the solenoid is deactivated and rotated upward, and the game ball is changed to a state in which it is impossible (difficult) to flow into the V passing flow path 650e3. On the other hand, the operation (opening) timing of the opening / closing piece 650b set so that the game ball can enter the second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 is the small hit type (that is, the small hit scenario). It is variably set depending on whether a202g1 is set or the small hit scenario b202g2 is set as a small hit type). Specifically, if the small hit type is small hit A (small hit type in which the small hit scenario a202g1 is set), as shown in FIG. 16B, 1.5 seconds after the start of the small hit game. It is opened and then closed 3 seconds after the start of the small hit game. On the other hand, if the small hit type is small hit B and small hit C (small hit type in which the small hit scenario b202g2 is set), it is released 4 seconds after the start of the small hit game, and then from the start of the small hit game. Closed after 5.5 seconds. With this configuration, if the small hit A, the opening / closing piece 650b is in the open state during the period when the game ball can flow into the V passage flow path 650e3, so that the game ball enters the V passage flow path 650e3. The game ball is detected by the V detection switch 650e5, and the jackpot game can be given to the player. On the other hand, in the small hits B and C, as shown in FIG. 16C, the opening / closing piece 650b is not opened during the period when the game ball can flow down to the V passing flow path 650e3, so that the opening / closing piece 650b is not opened to the V passing flow path 650e3. The game balls cannot flow in, and all the game balls that have entered the second specific winning opening 650a are guided to the discharge flow path 650e1. That is, the small hit A is a small hit in which the game ball can be detected by the V detection switch 650e5, and the small hit B and the small hit C cannot detect the game ball by the V detection switch 650e5. It is set to a possible (difficult) small hit.

In this way, it is possible to control whether or not the V detection switch 650e5 is detected by the small hit type, so that the small hit (small hit A in this embodiment) is given to the player. Small hits that are not performed (in this embodiment, small hits B and C) can be set according to the small hit type. Therefore, the probability (frequency) of giving a big hit can be adjusted by adjusting the selection ratio in the small hit type and adjusting the determination probability of the small hit. Therefore, it is possible to give the player an expectation not only for the determination of the big hit in the special symbol but also for the determination of the small hit. As a result, it is possible to further suppress the player from getting bored.

The game ball that has won the second variable winning device 650 is detected by the passage detection switch 650as arranged at the inflow port 650a1, and the ball that has flowed down the V passage flow path 650e3 is detected by the V detection switch 650e5. The ball flowing down the discharge flow path 650e1 is detected by the discharge detection switch 650e6. In this way, the total number of winning game balls (total number of game balls detected by the passage detection switch 650as of the inflow port 650a1) and the total number of ejected game balls (V detection switch 650e5, game detected by the discharge detection switch 650e6). By making it possible to detect (the total number of balls), it is possible to monitor whether or not the winning game balls have been ejected within a predetermined time. It is possible to easily detect fraudulent acts that intentionally leave a game ball in the second variable winning device 650.

The following detection sensor may be provided in the second variable winning device 650. For example, a switch capable of detecting the position of the switching valve 650b3 may be provided. By providing such a switch, it becomes possible to easily detect a defect in the switching valve 650b3.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. A first symbol display device 37 including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display is arranged in the upper right side of the front view (upper right side of FIG. 2) of the game area. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 11), and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 is configured to operate when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64a.

The first symbol display device 37 uses LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time or in a normal state by a lighting state, indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a fluctuating state by a lighting state, and the stop symbol corresponds to a big hit. Whether it is a symbol that has been hit, a symbol that corresponds to a small hit, or a symbol that is out of place is shown by the lighting state, the type of big hit or the type of small hit is shown by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is shown by the lighting state, and 7 The segment display device displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and the error. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors informs the various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. It is configured in.

Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when the game ball passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol display device 83 executes the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) by using it as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the ordinary symbol, the ordinary symbol (in the present embodiment, for example, "○ ×" displayed in the ordinary symbol display area Ds1 shown in FIG. 5). The variable display of the normal figure auxiliary symbol) is executed.

Further, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64a, which triggers the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, hits the normal symbol, so that the first ball entry device 64 is opened. It is configured only when That is, in the present embodiment, after passing through the through gate 67, the normal symbol starts to fluctuate, and then stops at the hit symbol, the opening period of the first ball entry device 64 (the hit game period of the normal symbol). In the meantime, the ball can enter the first ball entry port 64a. Triggered by entering the ball into the first ball entry port 64a, the first symbol display device 37 executes variable display of the special symbol (first symbol). Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol (in the present embodiment, the special symbol display shown in FIG. 5A) is synchronized with the variable display of the special symbol. The variation display of the area Ds2 etc.) is performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the fusion symbol which fused the variation of the normal symbol and the special symbol is variablely displayed in the main symbol display area Dm (see FIG. 5A) of the third symbol display device 81. As shown in FIG. 5A, the main symbol display area Dm is composed of a display area larger than the normal symbol display area Ds1 and the special symbol display area Ds2, and the player mainly visually recognizes the fused symbol. Is configured to perform the game. As a result, in the present embodiment, the normal symbol is hit, and the special symbol does not start to change until the ball enters the first entrance 64a. Therefore, the frequency of the special symbol change is a normal gaming machine ( The starting port of the special symbol will be lower than that of a gaming machine configured to allow the ball to enter at all times), but the fusion symbol will start to change when the gaming ball passes through the through gate 67, so the player It is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets bored and gets bored of the game early. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, not only the fusion symbol but also the dedicated symbol corresponding to the normal symbol and the special symbol (the normal symbol auxiliary symbol displayed in the ordinary symbol display area Ds1 and the special symbol display area Ds2) can be used. Since the displayed special symbol auxiliary symbol is also displayed), it is possible to individually identify the variable state of the normal symbol and the variable state of the special symbol, and it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. The details of the fusion symbol will be described later.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having a size of 15 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle, and right are used. A column (fusion symbol) is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays the first symbol display device 37. A decorative display is made accordingly. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81. Further, as shown in FIG. 5A, a normal figure reserved number display area Ds3 is set below the display area of the third symbol display device 81. When the right to start the fluctuation of the normal symbol through the through gate 67 is reserved and stored in the reserved quantity display area Ds3, the reserved symbol indicating the reserved quantity is shown in FIG. 5 (b). This is the area to be displayed as a "black circle pattern". It is configured to display one "black circle symbol" for one reserved quantity.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 9. The fusion symbol displayed in the main symbol display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is composed of 10 types of main symbols having numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is configured by adding a number from "0" to "9" inside a decorated rectangular decorative frame. Further, a left blinking display unit DF1, a middle blinking display unit DF2, and a right blinking display unit DF3 are formed at the lower end of each symbol row, and the left blinking display unit DF1 and the left blinking display unit DF1 are formed. The right blinking display unit DF3 in the right symbol column is configured to blink in response to the hit variation display of the normal symbol. In this case, the middle blinking display unit DF2 of the middle symbol row has a decorative function of blinking and displaying in response to the fluctuation of the middle symbol row. On the other hand, the left blinking display unit DF1 in the left symbol row, the middle blinking display unit DF2 in the middle symbol row, and the right blinking display unit DF3 in the right symbol row are configured to blink in response to the deviation variation display of the normal symbol. ing.

With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player of the fluctuation of the special symbol and the fluctuation of the normal symbol in the fused symbol while suppressing a sense of discomfort. Therefore, the player can easily play the game by visually recognizing the fusion pattern, simplifying the complicated game playability, and notifying the player.

FIG. 5B is a diagram showing a state in which the number of reserved symbols is two, the fluctuations of the ordinary symbol and the special symbol are deviated and stopped at the symbol, and the fused symbol is also stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, when the normal symbol is out of alignment, the “XX” symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 5 (b). On the other hand, when the normal symbol hits, the "○○" symbol (see FIG. 6 (b)) is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fusion symbol, when the normal symbol is out of alignment, the left blinking display unit DF1 and the right blinking display unit DF3 are stopped and displayed while being kept off (see FIG. 5 (b)). ..

FIG. 6A shows an example of the display mode in the third symbol display device 81 when the number of reserved balls in the normal figure is digested from the state of FIG. 5B described above and the fluctuation of the normal symbol starts. It is a figure. When the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started, the normal symbol auxiliary symbol in the normal symbol display area Ds1 is variablely displayed. This ordinary symbol auxiliary symbol is composed of a symbol string composed of a "○" symbol and a "x" symbol, and this symbol string is displayed in two columns in the normal symbol display area Ds1. When the variable display is started, the "○" symbol and the "×" symbol are repeatedly displayed in a variable manner at high speed. When the "○" symbols are displayed together in each symbol row, the hit of the normal symbol is displayed.

At the same time as the variable display of the normal symbol is started, each symbol column of the fused symbol in the main symbol display area Dm is also started to be scrolled and displayed in a variable manner. When the scroll display of each symbol row is started, the blinking display units DF1 to DF3 of each fusion symbol are also started to blink.

FIG. 6B is an example of a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed from the state of FIG. 6A described above and the stop display is performed with the winning symbol. It is a figure which showed about. In the normal symbol display area Ds1, the stop display is performed with "○" symbols indicating the hit of the normal symbol aligned. The fused symbol is displayed in a reach display mode in which "7" symbols are displayed in the left symbol row and the right symbol row, and the middle symbol row is scrolled and displayed. Further, the left blinking display unit DF1 and the right blinking display unit DF3 of the "7" symbol of the reach symbol displayed in the left symbol row and the right symbol row are displayed while being kept lit. The middle blinking display unit DF2 in the middle symbol column is displayed in a blinking state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the fusion symbol also starts the variable display in synchronization with the variable display of the normal symbol. Further, if the hit / fail determination result of the normal symbol is successful in accordance with the passage of the fluctuation time (variation period) of the normal symbol, the fused symbol is displayed in the reach display mode. In this case, the left symbol column stops fluctuating first, the left blinking display unit DF1 is turned on, and then the right blinking display unit DF3 stops and displays after a predetermined period (according to the stop timing of the normal symbol). (Stop display with reach symbol), and the right blinking display unit DF3 is displayed in the lit state. In this way, the left blinking display unit DF1 and the right blinking display unit DF3 start the fluctuation display in synchronization with the fluctuation of the normal symbol, and the right blinking display unit DF3 starts to display the fluctuation of the normal symbol according to the lapse of the fluctuation display time. It is configured to end the blinking display. As a result, the player can determine the end of the variation display of the normal symbol by paying attention to the right blinking display unit DF3.

If the result of the hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol is out of order, the fusion symbol is configured so that all the symbol rows are stopped and displayed in the non-reach out-of-reach symbol according to the lapse of the variation display time of the ordinary symbol. ing. In this case, the left symbol row is stopped first, then the right symbol row, and finally, the middle symbol row is stopped and displayed according to the fluctuation stop timing of the normal symbol. In this case, each blinking display unit is also displayed with the blinking display ending in the off state based on the timing at which the symbol row is stopped.

In FIG. 7 (a), the above-mentioned ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a hit with reference to FIG. 6 (b), and the electric accessory (opening / closing door) of the first ball entry device 64 is operated to open / close. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode which is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when the hit game period of a normal symbol which a door is an open state is reached. When the hit game of the normal symbol is started, the fusion symbol displays the characters "Put the game ball into the small attacker and rush into the super reach" while maintaining the reach display mode, and the player is given the first ball entry device. A notification mode for prompting the game ball to enter the first ball entry port 64a of 64 is displayed. In this case, the fusion symbol is displayed in the reach display mode, and the state in which the middle symbol sequence is scrolled at a low speed is maintained. In the present embodiment, a notification is displayed to urge the player to enter the game ball into the first entry port 64a at the timing when the normal symbol is hit, but the present invention is not limited to this and the normal symbol is hit. In that case, the notification may be performed from a predetermined number of seconds before (for example, 5 seconds before). Furthermore, a third symbol display device is provided by arranging a ball entrance for directing (general winning opening (when a prize is won, one ball is paid out to the player)) and allowing the player to win a prize in the entrance. It may be configured so that the effect of the fusion symbol displayed in 81 is variable. By doing so, the player can easily fire the game ball even during the fluctuation period of the normal symbol to play the game. Therefore, when the normal symbol hits, the player can play the game at the first entrance 64a. It is possible to suppress the problem that the ball cannot be inserted.

Furthermore, by setting a long opening period (for example, 10 seconds, etc.) until the first ball opening 64a becomes an open state, which is a hit of a normal symbol, the opening period is used to make the first ball. By giving the player an effect of firing the game ball toward the ball opening 64a, the player may be configured to easily enter the ball into the first ball opening 64a. Further, in the hit game of the normal symbol, the first ball entry port 64a is configured to be opened a plurality of times, and the first three times are opened for a short period (for example, opening for 0.5 seconds for an interval period (first ball entry). The period (the period during which the mouth 64a is closed) is opened in 0.5 seconds), then the interval period (the period during which the first entrance 64a is closed) is set for 5 seconds, and then the first ball is entered. The mouth 64a may be configured to be open for 1 second. By doing so, by utilizing the period until the fourth long-term opening, the operation of opening the first entry port 64a is added to indicate that the first entry port 64a is the opening period. Can be produced. Therefore, the opportunity for the player to enter the first ball entry port 64a can be configured in an easy-to-understand manner, and the problem of missing the opportunity for the player to enter the ball can be suppressed.

FIG. 7 (b) shows a case where the game ball enters the first entrance 64a during the hit game of the normal symbol described above with reference to FIG. 7 (a) and the change of the special symbol is started. It is a figure which showed the display mode which is displayed by the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. The dynamic display of the special symbol auxiliary symbol displayed in the special symbol display area Ds2 is started at the timing when the game ball enters the first entry slot 64a and the fluctuation of the special symbol starts. As shown in FIG. 7 (b), the special symbol auxiliary symbol is configured by arranging a sequence of symbols composed of “◯” symbols and “×” symbols on the left and right. The hit of the special symbol is notified by stopping and displaying the "○" symbol aligned on the left and right, and if it is off, it is notified by displaying it as a combination of the "○" symbol and the "×" symbol. Further, in the case of a small hit, the "x" symbols are aligned on the left and right and stopped and displayed to notify the player. Further, when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, each symbol row is displayed in a variable manner by switching between the "○" symbol and the "×" symbol at high speed.

As shown in FIG. 7B, in synchronization with the start of the variable display of the special symbol, the fusion symbol is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area while maintaining the reach display mode, and the main symbol is displayed. A super reach display mode effect in which a character or the like is displayed in the area Dm is displayed. FIG. 7B shows an example of the display mode of the super reach, in which the monster and the hero are displayed facing each other, and the characters "If the hero wins, a big hit !!" are displayed. Here, in the display mode example of the super reach shown, the display mode in which the monster and the hero fight and the hero wins is displayed, so that it is notified that the hit / fail determination result of the special symbol is a big hit.

In the present embodiment, the probability of hitting a normal symbol is 1/40 in the normal gaming state (other than the time-saving gaming state). Therefore, the change of the normal symbol is started 40 times, and the game ball enters the first ball entry port 64a at a rate of once. On the other hand, the winning probability of the special symbol is composed of 1/5, and the winning probability is set high in advance. Therefore, the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol itself is a chance that the probability of being awarded a hit is 1/5, and the display mode of the super reach in which the fluctuation of all the special symbols has a high expectation for the hit is displayed. It is configured to be.

FIG. 8A is a third symbol when the variation of the special symbol described above with reference to FIG. 7B is started, the result of the hit / fail judgment is incorrect, and the variation time of the special symbol ends. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode displayed by a display device 81. At the timing when the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the variation of the special symbol auxiliary symbol displayed in the special symbol display area Ds2 is stopped at the combination of the "○" symbol and the "x" symbol indicating the deviation. Further, the fusion symbol is also stopped and displayed at a symbol different from the reach symbol (in this embodiment, the symbol "6") according to the timing when the special symbol is stopped, and the medium blinking display unit DF2 is also displayed while maintaining the lighting state. .. Further, the character "Sorry !!" is displayed to inform the player that the determination result is out of order in an easy-to-understand manner. Before the display mode shown in FIG. 8 (a) is displayed, in the case of the super reach example shown in FIG. 7 (b), the display mode in which the hero loses to the monster is displayed, and then reduced. The fused symbol that has been displayed is enlarged and displayed in the main symbol display area Dm.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the normal symbol and the special symbol are displayed in a variable manner, but in the fused symbol, the variation of the normal symbol and the special symbol is fused as a variation of 1 and displayed in a variable manner to notify the player. do. As a result, in the present embodiment, the normal symbol is hit, and the special symbol does not start to change unless the ball enters the first ball opening 64a during the hit game of the normal symbol. Since the variation of the fusion symbol is started based on the above, the game can be enjoyed by the production of the fusion symbol even during the period when the variation of the special symbol has not started. Furthermore, since the hit of the normal symbol is displayed in the reach display mode of the fusion symbol, it is not necessary for the player to separately recognize the normal symbol and the special symbol, and the expectation that the hit of the special symbol is given is high. It is possible to inform in an easy-to-understand manner that the state has become. Furthermore, during the hit game of the normal symbol, the player is notified to enter the game ball into the first ball entry device 64 (corresponding to the small attacker in the production), so that the fusion symbol reaches. With the display mode, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player stops launching the game ball and misses the opportunity to enter the first ball entry port 64a.

Further, although not shown, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol is a big hit, in the case of the super reach example shown in FIG. 7 (b), the display mode in which the hero wins the monster is displayed, and then. , The reduced fusion pattern is enlarged and displayed. After that, the special symbol auxiliary symbol is stopped and displayed with all the "○" symbols, and the fusion symbol is notified that the same symbol as the reach symbol is stopped in the middle symbol row and the hit / fail judgment result is a hit (big hit). Will be done.

In this embodiment, the blinking display unit corresponding to the hit and miss of the normal symbol is configured to be variable, but the blinking display unit is not limited to this, and all the blinking display units blink in response to the fluctuation of the normal symbol. As a rule, all are blinked based on the fluctuation start timing of the normal symbol, and in the mode corresponding to the hit / fail judgment result at the fluctuation stop timing (for example, if it is a hit, all are on, if it is off, all are off). It may be configured to display a definite display. Further, in the present embodiment, the blinking display unit is used as a part of the symbol, but the background thereof may be the blinking display unit of the entire symbol, or a character may be attached to the symbol to form a part of the character. (For example, in the case of a cat character, only the bell part of the cat) may be used as the blinking display unit. With such a configuration, the blinking display unit becomes difficult for the player to understand, and the fusion symbol can be recognized as a symbol for notifying one lottery result (lottery result of a special symbol) and the game can be played. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, regarding the display corresponding to the fluctuation of the normal symbol in the fusion symbol, not only the blinking display but also the effect can be attached to the symbol and displayed so that the effect moves to indicate that the normal symbol is changing. Alternatively, it may be configured to notify by shaking a part of the symbol. Further, the normal figure auxiliary symbol may be configured to be displayed by substituting the blinking display unit or the effect of the fusion symbol. With this configuration, the area where the normal map auxiliary symbol is displayed can be used for the production of other games, and the display area can be effectively used.

Next, the pseudo-variation of the fusion symbol will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 (b) and 10 (a) to 10 (b). In the present embodiment, the fusion symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in order to show the player the variation between the normal symbol and the special symbol as one variation. However, when the change of the special symbol is started, the fused symbol maintains the reach display mode correspondingly, and is stopped and displayed at the timing when the change of the special symbol is stopped. In this case, if the game ball newly passes through the through gate 67 or the reserved ball of the normal symbol is stored, the normal symbol is newly changed even during the change of the special symbol. It will be started. Therefore, when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the fluctuation of the normal symbol may be in progress, and the fusion symbol cannot be changed at the fluctuation start timing of the normal symbol.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the fluctuation of the normal symbol is newly started during the fluctuation of the special symbol and the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the fluctuation of the fusion symbol is stopped. In order to match the timing with the start timing of the fluctuation of the normal symbol, it is configured to execute the pseudo fluctuation of the fusion symbol after the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped.

The flow of pseudo-variation of the fusion symbol will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 (a) to 10 (b). FIG. 10A shows a third symbol display when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order and two reserved balls whose lottery result is out of order are continuously stored in the reserved balls of the normal symbol. It is a timing chart explaining the flow of the pseudo-variation of the fusion symbol displayed by the apparatus 81.

As shown in FIG. 10A, first, when the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed triggered by the passage of the game ball to the through gate 67, the second symbol display device 83 displays the variation of the normal symbol. Is started (for example, the display mode shown in FIG. 6A is displayed). Then, when a predetermined time (for example, a selected fluctuation time such as 5 seconds or 10 seconds) elapses and the normal symbol fluctuation period ends, the winning symbol of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, FIG. 6 (b)). The display mode shown in is displayed.). Then, the opening / closing door of the first ball entry device 64 is opened, and the notification mode for urging the player to enter the game ball into the first ball entry port 64a of the first ball entry device 64 in the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed (for example, the display mode shown in FIG. 7A is displayed).

Then, when the game ball enters the first entrance 64a, a special symbol lottery is performed, and if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a pseudo fluctuation is performed when the variation display of the special symbol is set. Determine whether to set (discrimination timing). The details will be described later in the variation pattern selection process of FIG. 43, but it is determined whether or not there is a hit in the 2 hold of the normal symbol, and when it is determined that there is a hit in the 2 hold of the normal symbol, a pseudo variation is set. (Set the pseudo setting flag 223h to on). That is, as shown in FIG. 10 (a), when all 2 holds of the normal symbol are out of order, the pseudo fluctuation is not set at this point.

With this configuration, the lottery result for the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol is out of the question, but if the fluctuation within 2 holds starts the winning fluctuation, the fluctuation is continued as a pseudo fluctuation until the fluctuation. By continuing to change the fusion pattern, it is possible to perform various effects on the player during that period. Furthermore, even if the fluctuation is out of alignment, the player can have expectations. In addition, the frequency of stopping due to the result of the lottery that is out of the game can be reduced, and the player can be made to think that the frequency (probability) of hitting is high, and the game can be continuously played.

Further, when the variation of the special symbol is started in the third symbol display device 81 (for example, the display mode shown in FIG. 7B is displayed) and 5 seconds before the variation of the special symbol is stopped, the pseudo variation is generated. Determine again whether to set. The details will be described later in the pseudo-variation setting process of FIG. 45, but first, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-variation is already set (the pseudo-setting flag 223h is set to ON).

If the pseudo-variation is not set, it is determined whether or not there is a hit in the 2 hold of the normal symbol, and if it is determined that there is a hit in the 2 hold, the pseudo-variation is set (pseudo setting flag 223h). Set to on). On the other hand, if there is no hit within 2 hold of the normal symbol corresponding to the change display of the normal symbol to be started next, it is the execution period in which the normal symbol change that stops after the stop timing of the change display of the special symbol is executed. It is determined whether or not there is, and if it is the execution period in which the normal symbol variation that stops after the stop timing of the variation display of the special symbol is executed, the pseudo variation is set.

That is, as shown in FIG. 10A, when the normal symbol variation is executed, which is not within the 2 hold of the normal symbol but is stopped after the stop timing of the variation display of the special symbol. , Set pseudo-variation. At this time, in order to match the change of the normal symbol being executed with the end timing of the pseudo change to be set, the period from the end of the change of the special symbol being executed to the end of the change of the normal symbol (difference time t1). ) Is set as a pseudo-variable period.

Here, when the fluctuation of the fusion symbol is stopped based on the lapse of the fluctuation period of the special symbol, the fluctuation of the normal symbol is in progress, and the fluctuation of the fusion symbol is not started until the new normal symbol is changed. , Even though the reserved symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the next lottery game is not started, so that the player gets bored or feels uneasy that the game will not be played. Can be considered. However, in the present embodiment, it is determined that the normal symbol fluctuation is executed at the special symbol fluctuation stop timing 5 seconds before the fluctuation stop, and the pseudo fluctuation of the fusion symbol is determined in the period until the end. Since it is configured to set, the player can play the game comfortably by starting the change of the next fusion symbol with the stop of the fusion symbol at a good tempo.

In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not to execute the pseudo fluctuation 5 seconds before the end timing of the special symbol, but the determination is not limited to this, and the determination may be made at the timing of stopping the fluctuation. good. With this configuration, when the normal symbol starts to fluctuate after passing through the through gate 67 5 seconds before the special symbol fluctuates to stop, the fusion symbol starts to fluctuate until the normal symbol fluctuates. It is possible to prevent problems that are not done. Further, it may be configured so that the control load can be reduced by making a judgment based on both the advance timing such as 5 seconds before and the stop timing and increasing the chances of setting the pseudo fluctuation in advance.

FIG. 10B shows a third symbol when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order and two reserved balls whose lottery result is out of order are stored in order in the reserved balls of the normal symbol. It is a timing chart explaining the flow of the pseudo-variation of the fusion symbol displayed by the display device 81.

Similar to FIG. 10A, the lottery result of the normal symbol is a hit, the opening / closing door of the first entry device 64 is opened, and the special symbol triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first entry port 64a. If the lottery result is out of the question, it is determined whether or not to set the pseudo-variation when the variation display of the special symbol is set. As shown in FIG. 10B, when a hold that is a hit within 2 holds of a normal symbol is already stored, a pseudo-variation of up to 30 seconds ends the change of the special symbol at the start timing of the change of the special symbol. Set from. Here, the reason for the pseudo-variation of a maximum of 30 seconds is such that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 10 seconds in the case of a hit and a maximum of 10 seconds in the case of a deviation. Therefore, even if the longest 10 seconds of the fluctuation of the fluctuating normal symbol and the fluctuation of 2 hold are selected, the pseudo fluctuation continues to be executed until the end of the change of the normal symbol of the 2nd hold. Will be done. Therefore, the pseudo-variation ends earlier than the variation corresponding to the hold of the normal symbol that is a hit, and there is a time before the first entrance 64a opens, which makes the game awkward. Can be suppressed. In addition, the pseudo fluctuation of up to 30 seconds that is set is forced when the fluctuation of the normal symbol that is a hit ends, the first entry port 64a opens, the game ball enters, and the fluctuation of the special symbol starts. Ends. After that, the variation of the fusion symbol corresponding to the variation of the special symbol (in the present embodiment, the middle symbol sequence shown in FIG. 7 (a) re-variates from the effect of whether or not the re-variation is shown in FIG. 8 (b). The display that can be switched to the production) is executed.

As a result, if the hit variation of the normal symbol has already been determined (held within 2 hold) at the start of the change of the special symbol, the effect of re-variation is performed without displaying the effect of disengagement. By executing it, the normal symbol that is a hit is changed, and it is possible to perform an effect of whether or not the special symbol is changed again, and the frequency of the off-target effect is reduced, which makes the player feel sorry. The number of times to do it can be reduced. In addition, in the present embodiment, although the fluctuation of the normal symbol that is hit by the pseudo fluctuation is simulated, the fluctuation of the special symbol is 30 because the game ball could not be entered into the first entry port 64a. If it is not started even after the pseudo-variation period of seconds has elapsed, the re-variation is not started and the variation is ended with the effect of the pseudo-variation shown in FIG. 8 (b).

On the other hand, if the number of hold of the normal symbol is less than 2 at the start of the change of the special symbol and the winning hold is not stored in the 2 hold, the pseudo change is set at the start of the change of the special symbol. It is configured not to be. In that case, as shown in FIG. 10 (b), 5 seconds before the end of the fluctuation period of the special symbol, it was determined and stored whether or not there was a hit within the 2 hold of the currently stored normal symbol. In this case, a pseudo fluctuation of up to 30 seconds is set as in the case where the fluctuation is stored at the start of the fluctuation. Further, it may be determined whether or not the pseudo variation is set in the fixed period of the symbol (1s in the present embodiment).

In the present embodiment, it is configured to determine whether or not to set the pseudo-variation at the start of the change of the special symbol and 5 seconds before the end of the change of the special symbol. It may be at the end or only at the end of the fluctuation. Further, it may be configured to discriminate only at the start of fluctuation or every time the drawing hold is established, or it may be discriminated during a predetermined period (for example, every 100 ms), or the above conditions may be appropriately combined. May be good.

Next, with reference to FIG. 8B, the display content of the pseudo-variation of the fusion symbol in the third symbol display device 81 will be described. 8 (b) shows the third symbol display device after the change of the special symbol is stopped when it is determined that the pseudo variation is set at the pseudo variation determination timing described above with reference to FIGS. 10 (a) to 10 (b). It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode displayed in 81. As described above, when the fluctuation of the normal symbol is newly started during the fluctuation of the special symbol and the fluctuation of the normal symbol is in progress when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the fluctuation start timing of the special symbol and the fluctuation of the normal symbol are performed. In order to match the start timing, the variation of the special symbol is stopped, and after the out-of-order symbol of the special symbol (for example, FIG. 8A) is displayed, the pseudo variation effect of the fusion symbol is executed. There is.

As shown in FIG. 8B, since the normal symbol is changing, the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the normal symbol display area Ds1. Then, an aspect in which the fusion symbol shows a sign of re-variation is displayed, such as the middle symbol sequence of the fusion symbol in the main symbol display area Dm vibrating. Regarding the possibility that the special symbol may re-change by repeatedly hitting, the middle symbol row slightly presses the button. Also, with the words "Re-change chance by repeatedly hitting the button !!", press the frame button 22. By displaying the indicated mode, the player is notified in an easy-to-understand manner by producing a trembling effect in accordance with the frame button 22. In this way, by performing pseudo-variation, it is possible to match the fluctuation start timing of the special symbol with the fluctuation start timing of the normal symbol, and to show the variation between the normal symbol and the special symbol as one variation to the player. In addition to this, it has the effect of giving the player expectation for the re-change of the special symbol and suppressing the situation where the player gets tired of the game at an early stage. In the re-variation effect, when the hold that hits within 2 holds is stored, if the pseudo-variation is set, the probability that the sound effect when the frame button 22 is pressed is set to be high is set. , The trembling size of the middle symbol may be increased with high probability, a special symbol may be displayed, or a special lamp lighting mode may be executed. In such a case, by configuring the same effect to be executed with a low probability even when the winning hold is not stored, the player expects that the start of re-variation will be executed. You can play games. Further, when the pseudo fluctuation is executed, in order to suppress the problem that the game ball is not fired at the timing when the first ball entry port 64a is opened, the game ball is notified to be fired and the game ball is fired. By firing, the middle symbol row is configured to tremble, and the through gate 67 is notified to pass the game ball, so that the state in which the game ball enters the crune member 660 is maintained. It is even better to have a configuration that does.

FIG. 9A is an example of a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed from the state of FIG. 6A described above and the stop display is performed with the off-designed symbol. It is a figure which showed about. In the normal symbol display area Ds1, the "○" and "×" symbols indicating the deviation of the normal symbol are stopped and displayed in a aligned state. In the fusion symbol, the "7" symbol and the "5" symbol are displayed in the left symbol row and the right symbol row. Further, the blinking display areas DF1 and DF3 are also displayed in the lit state and the extinguished state, indicating that the normal symbol is off. In the middle symbol row, the blinking display area Df2 is turned off and displayed, and it is notified that the special symbol has not changed.

FIG. 9 (b) shows the third case when the change of the special symbol is started and the change time of the special symbol ends when the hit / fail determination result is a small hit, which is described above with reference to FIG. 7 (b). It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode displayed by a symbol display device 81. At the timing when the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the variation of the special symbol displayed in the special symbol display area Ds2 is stopped and displayed in a state where the "x" symbols indicating small hits are aligned. As shown in FIG. 9B, in synchronization with the start of the variable display of the special symbol, the fusion symbol is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area while maintaining the reach display mode, and the main symbol is displayed. A super reach display mode effect in which a character or the like is displayed in the area Dm is displayed. FIG. 9B shows an example of the display mode of the super reach, in which the monster and the hero are displayed facing each other, and the characters "If the hero wins, a big hit !!" are displayed. Here, in the display mode example of the super reach shown, the display mode in which the monster and the hero fight and the hero wins is displayed, so that it is notified that the hit / fail determination result of the special symbol is a big hit. Here, in the case of small hit fluctuation, a symbol imitating the second variable winning device 650 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the game ball is inserted into the second specific winning opening 650a before the end of the fluctuation period. A notification is executed to urge the game ball to make it ball. Here, when the player enters the game ball into the second specific winning opening 650a and is detected by the V detection switch 650e5, the hero performs a special move and defeats the monster in the opening production of the jackpot game. To. If the game ball cannot be entered into the second specific winning opening 650a or is not detected by the V detection switch 650e5, blackout is performed as it is and the next variation is executed. In this embodiment, the blackout effect is used, but the ending effect of the small hit game is configured to display the effect that the hero loses to the monster, and the result of the small hit game is displayed to the player. It may be configured as.

Next, the configuration of the back side of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the emission control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected (caulked structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened. (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing sticker is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the sealing sticker to open the board boxes 100, 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and the box It is cut to the cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the board boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. It is provided with a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 to pay out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 11). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator (not shown) for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 11). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 11, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. It is transmitted from the control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction. On the other hand, the payout control device 111 is configured to be able to send and receive data in both directions.

The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, various sensors (magnet sensor, radio wave sensor) for detecting a game ball and detecting illegal games. Various solenoids including a switch 208, an opening / closing piece solenoid 650f2 for opening / closing the opening / closing piece 650b of the second variable winning device 650, a switching valve solenoid 650c2 for driving the switching valve 650b3 in the second variable winning device 650, and the like. 209 is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

Further, a RAM erasing switch circuit 253, which will be described later, provided in the power supply device 115 is connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 has signals output from various switches 208 and RAM erasing output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253. Various processes are executed based on the signal SG2.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 31) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

When the payout control is executed, the payout motor 216 continuously pays out one prize ball at a time. More specifically, one prize ball is paid out every time the rotation amount of the payout motor 216 becomes a predetermined amount (for example, one rotation). Further, the rotation speed of the payout motor 216 is set so that a predetermined number (100) of prize balls are paid out in a predetermined time (10 seconds) by the payout motor 216. Further, every time a predetermined number (100) of prize balls are paid out, the payout of prize balls is suspended for a predetermined period (1 second). As a result, when it is necessary to continuously pay out a large amount of prize balls, for example, during a big hit, the payout motor 216 keeps paying out the prize balls without rest, and the payout motor 216 is prevented from generating heat. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from failing due to melting of the resin portion and the elastic body portion of the pachinko machine 10 due to the heat generated by the payout motor 216. Further, the heat generated in the payout motor 216 propagates to the touchable portion of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the portion touched by the player such as the operation of the lower plate unit 15 and the handle 51), causing the player to be injured such as a burn. It is possible to prevent it from being stored. The number of payouts and the payout pause period until the payout of the prize balls is stopped by the payout motor 216 are not limited to this, and may be arbitrarily determined as long as the heat generation of the payout motor 216 can be suppressed. can. For example, the payout may be suspended every time 5 or 25 prize balls are paid out by the payout motor 216. Further, for example, the rest period may be 0.5 seconds or 3 seconds.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice in a voice output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and produces a variation pattern (variable pattern effect). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as (variable display). The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display (variation) in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. It controls the production) and continuous notice production. Since the details of the display control device 114 are known, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply circuit (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 31).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, with reference to FIG. 12, the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 will be described. The main control device 110 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, and a display setting in the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 12, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and the like. used.

To set the display of the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-order stop type in the special symbol, and the small hit type counter CS3 used for selecting the small hit type of the special symbol. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the variation type counter CS1 used for selecting the variation pattern are used. Further, a random number counter C4 for the second hit is used for the lottery of ordinary symbols, a second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the random number counter C4 for the second hit, and the normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2 used for selecting the fluctuation pattern is used. Is used. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 33). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203e of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol holding ball execution area 203a composed of one execution area, and in this area, the first random number counter C1 is provided in accordance with the timing of entering the first ball entry port 64a. Each value of the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small hit type counter CS3 is stored. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b including one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and a ball is usually used in each of these areas. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the symbol start port (through gate) 67.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399) and reaches the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399) and then 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 33).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64a. It is stored in the execution area 203a. The value of the random number that becomes the big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by 202a, it is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and adds 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). It is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first entry port 64a. It is stored in the ball execution area 203a.

Here, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is removed.

On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol hold ball execution area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is that of a special symbol at the time of a big hit. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball execution area 203a.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In this first random number counter C1, there are 80 random numbers that are big hits of special symbols, and the random numbers "0 to 79" are stored in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 14A). Has been done. As described above, since the total number of random numbers that become big hits is 80 while the total number of random numbers is 400, the probability of becoming a big hit of a special symbol is "1/5".

Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the value of the first hit type counter C2 are provided in the ROM 202. The jackpot type is determined based on the first jackpot type selection table 202b (see FIG. 14B). As shown in FIG. 14 (b), in the case of a big hit of a special symbol, the big hit type when the random number value is "0 to 49" in the first hit type counter C2 is "big hit A". Become. Further, when the value is "50 to 99", the jackpot type is "big hit B".

Further, in the present embodiment, as a kind of missed special symbol (other than the big hit), a small hit is provided in which the second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 is opened. In the first random number counter C1, there are 100 random numbers that are small hits of the special symbol, and the random number values "300 to 399" are shown in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 14A). It is stored. Since the total number of random numbers that are small hits is 100 while the total number of random numbers is 400, the probability of being a small hit of a special symbol is "1/4".

Further, the value of the small hit type counter CS3 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 199, and the value of the small hit type counter CS3 and the value of the small hit type counter CS3 are provided in the ROM 202. The small hit type is determined based on the first small hit type selection table 202c (see FIG. 15). The content of the small hit game according to each small hit type will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 99, reach the maximum value (that is, 99), and then return to 0. In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 determines the stop symbol of the fusion symbol at the time of disconnection displayed by the third symbol display device 81. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is assigned to each of the "0" to "9" symbols. When the same symbol as the reach symbol is selected, the symbol obtained by adding 1 to the determined symbol is determined (for example, when the same "9" symbol as the reach symbol is determined, "9" symbol is determined. 0 "design is determined).

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, reach the maximum value (that is, 198), and then return to 0. The variation type counter CS1 determines the variation type of the super reach as the variation pattern of the special symbol (variation pattern of the fusion symbol). The variation pattern selection table 202e stored in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 stores the jackpot variation pattern selection table 202e1, the deviation variation pattern selection table 202e2, and the small hit variation pattern selection table 202e3, respectively. In each selection table, a plurality of super reach fluctuation pattern types are stored. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is set for each super reach type of each selection table, and the variation type acquired from the selection table corresponding to the hit / fail judgment result (either hit, miss, or small hit). The type of super reach is determined based on the value of the counter CS1. A fluctuation time is set for each super reach type, and the fluctuation time and the type of super reach are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the fluctuation pattern command. In the voice lamp control device 113, more detailed super reach details are determined based on the notified fluctuation pattern command and the acquired value of the effect counter 223 g. As a result, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced by executing the rough selection in the main control device 110 and performing the more detailed selection in the voice lamp control device 113. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the super reach determined by the main control device 110 is the same for each super reach, but the variation time is not limited to the same, and the super reach of a plurality of fluctuation times is set and selected. You may. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 may be configured to determine the fluctuation time.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, every time the timer is interrupted, and the sphere passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 on either the center or the right. Is acquired when is detected, and is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

Then, the value of the random number that is a hit of the normal symbol is set by the second hit random number table 202d stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is set by the second hit random number table. If it matches the value of the random number that is the set hit, it is judged to be a hit of the normal symbol.

There are 6 random numbers that hit the normal symbol in the normal game state, and the range is "0 to 5". These random number values are usually stored in the random number table 202d per symbol (see FIG. 14C). As described above, since the total number of random numbers that can be hit by the normal symbol is 6 while the total number of random values is 240 in the normal symbol, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is "1/40".

On the other hand, there are 240 random numbers that can be hit by ordinary symbols in the time-saving game state, and the range is "0 to 239". These random number values are usually stored in the random number table 202d per symbol (see FIG. 14C). In this way, while the total number of random numbers is 240 in the normal symbol, the total number of random values that hit the normal symbol is 240, so the probability of hitting the normal symbol is "1/1", and the normal symbol is always hit. It will be a hit.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67 in the normal gaming state, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is the normal symbol fluctuation type counter. It is executed for a period (5 to 10 seconds) according to the value of CS2. Then, if the value of the acquired second hit random number counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 5", it is determined to be a hit, and after the fluctuation display is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is lit and displayed. , The first ball entry port 64a is opened only "2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal gaming state, the first ball entry port 64a is opened only for "2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbol hits, but the opening time and the number of times are different. It can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 2 times".

When the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving game state (during the time-saving), it always hits the normal symbol, and the time during which the normal symbol is variablely displayed is set to 3 seconds. Further, when the normal symbol is hit, the opening pattern is set so that the first ball entry port 64a is opened "2 seconds x 2 times". As described above, in the time-saving game state, the game ball is configured to be easier to enter into the first ball entry port 64a than in the normal game state.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 33).

With such a configuration, the variation of the special symbol is likely to be executed during the time-saving game, and the possibility of a small hit or a large hit is high. Therefore, the possibility that the jackpot is executed by the player is higher than in the normal gaming state, and the jackpot can be continuously given to the player during the time-saving game. Therefore, the player can play the game in the expectation that the time-saving game will be executed, and the interest of the game can be further improved. Further, in the time-saving game state, the small hit type selection table 202c becomes a table dedicated to the time-saving game, and by setting a high ratio in which the small hit A is selected, the small hit game is executed during the time reduction. If this is done, the V detection switch 650e5 makes it easier to detect the game ball, and the probability that the jackpot game will be executed in a short time can be further increased.

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 sets a special symbol lottery and a variation pattern, and a normal symbol lottery and a variation pattern according to the value of the counter and the like. It is possible to carry out the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as.

In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 12, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 33) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 32) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interruption process (see FIG. 31) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Next, the ROM 202 provided in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 17. FIG. 13A is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 13A, the ROM 202 includes a first hit random number table 202a, a first big hit type selection table 202b, a small hit type selection table 202c, a second hit random number table 202d, and a variation pattern selection. At least a table 202e, a big hit scenario table 202f, a small hit scenario table 202g, and a normal map fluctuation pattern selection table 202h are provided.

As described above, the first random number table 202a is a table in which the value of the random number that is the big hit of the special symbol is defined. When the random number value defined in the first random number table 202a and the value of the first random number counter C1 match, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. In the first random number table 202a, a random number value that is a small hit of a special symbol is also set. The detailed contents of the first random number table 202a will be described later with reference to FIG. 14 (a).

The first jackpot type selection table 202b is a data table in which the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 for determining the jackpot type is set for each jackpot type. The detailed contents of the first jackpot type selection table 202b will be described later with reference to FIG. 14 (b).

The small hit type selection table 202c is a data table in which the determination value of the small hit type counter CS3 for determining the small hit type is set for each small hit type. The detailed contents of the first small hit type selection table 202c will be described later with reference to FIG.

The second hit random number table 202d is a data table in which the hit determination value of the normal symbol is stored. When the random number value defined in the second hit random number table 202d and the value of the second hit random number counter C4 match, it is determined to be a big hit of a normal symbol. The detailed contents of the second random number table 202d will be described later with reference to FIG. 14 (c). As described above, when it is determined that the normal symbol hits in the normal game state, the stop symbol is lit and displayed after the variation display for the predetermined time (10 seconds) is completed, and the first ball entrance 64a is displayed. The electric accessory (opening / closing door) attached to the door is opened only "2 seconds x 1 time".

On the other hand, in the time-saving game state (during the time-saving), the normal symbol always hits, the fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds, and after the fluctuation display is completed, the stop symbol is lit and displayed, and the first ball entrance 64a The electric accessory (opening / closing door) attached to the door is opened "2 seconds x 2 times".

The value of the second hit random number counter C4, which is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol, may be changed between the normal gaming state and the time saving gaming state (during the time saving).

The variation pattern selection table 202e is a data table used for determining the display mode of the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the display mode is defined for each value of the variation type counter CS1. In this variation pattern selection table 202e, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the lottery results of special symbols are defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14 (d), the variation pattern selection table 202e has a jackpot variation pattern selection table 202e1 (not shown) dedicated to the case where the hit / fail determination result is a jackpot, and the hit / fail determination result. With the deviation pattern selection table 202e2 (not shown) dedicated to the case of being out of the game and in the normal gaming state, and the small hit variation pattern selection table 202e3 (not shown) dedicated to the case where the hit / fail judgment result is a small hit. Each is at least configured.

The jackpot scenario table 202f is a data table used to determine an opening scenario for opening the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game, and a plurality of different tables corresponding to the winning jackpot types are defined. Has been done. Although not shown, the jackpot scenario table 202f is composed of a dedicated jackpot scenario a202f1 when the jackpot type is jackpot A and a dedicated jackpot scenario b202f2 when the jackpot type is jackpot B.

In this jackpot scenario, various events (scenario contents) are defined based on the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g (see FIG. 13B), which counts when the jackpot scenario is set. The opening / closing control of the specific door 65f is executed based on the content.

The small hit scenario table 202g rotates the opening / closing piece 650b to the right so that the game ball can enter the second specific winning opening 650a that opens the opening / closing piece 650b of the second variable winning device 650 during the small hit game. It is a data table used to determine the opening scenario to be operated and the operation scenario to operate the switching valve 650b3, and a plurality of different tables corresponding to the winning small hit types are specified. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 16A, the small hit scenario table 202g includes a small hit scenario a202g1 (see FIG. 16B) dedicated to the case where the small hit type is small hit A, and the small hit type. Is composed of a small hit scenario b202g2 (see FIG. 16C) dedicated to the case where is a small hit B or C.

In this small hit scenario, various events (scenario contents) are defined based on the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h (see FIG. 13B), which counts when the small hit scenario is set. The opening / closing control of the opening / closing piece 650b is executed based on the contents of the scenario, and the operation control of the switching valve 650b3 provided in the second variable winning device 650 is executed. Further, in the process of determining whether the ball has passed normally into the second specific winning opening 650a and the V passage channel 650e3, the range in which the ball can pass is also based on the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h. It is stipulated.

The normal map fluctuation pattern selection table 202h is a data table used for determining the display mode of the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol, and the display mode is defined for each value of the normal map fluctuation type counter CS2. A plurality of different tables corresponding to the lottery results of ordinary symbols are defined in the normal symbol variation pattern selection table 202h. Specifically, the normal map fluctuation pattern selection table 202h is a normal map fluctuation pattern selection table (normal) (see FIG. 17 (a)) dedicated to the normal gaming state, and a normal game dedicated to the time-saving gaming state. It is configured at least by the figure variation pattern selection table (time reduction) (see FIG. 17 (b)).

Next, the RAM 203 provided in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 13 (b). FIG. 13B is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 13B, the RAM 203 includes a special symbol holding ball execution area 203a, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol holding ball number counter 203c, a time saving medium counter 203d, and a counter buffer 203e. It has a V flag 203f, a big hit scenario counter 203g, a small hit scenario counter 203h, and other memory areas 203z.

The special symbol reserved ball execution area 203a is a storage area dedicated to the first ball entry port 64a, and has one execution area. In each of these areas, the first random number counter C1 and the first jackpot type are used. Each value of the counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small hit type counter CS3 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64a (starting winning), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS3 are acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the execution area. To.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the sphere passes through the normal symbol start port 67, and the acquired data is obtained from the four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area). Among the vacant areas, the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) having a smaller area number. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the data shift is performed only in the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which the winning data is stored.

In the pachinko machine 10, as soon as the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 and the value of the counter C4 is acquired in response to the passage through the through gate, the winning information command including those values is a voice lamp. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the fuzu winning information command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the counter C4 from the fuzu winning information command and uses them as the fuzu winning information in the RAM 223. It is stored in the winning information storage area 223a.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c maximizes the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the normal symbol start port 67. It is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time the ball passes through the through gate (normal symbol starting port) 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. Is incremented by 1 (see S604 in FIG. 29), and is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of a normal symbol (second symbol) is executed (see S505 in FIG. 28).

If the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203c (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4 when the ball passes through the through gate (normal symbol start port) 67, the second random number counter is used. The value of C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b (S606 in FIG. 29). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate (normal symbol start port) 67, if the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203c is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b. (S603: No in FIG. 29).

The value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (holding number M of variation display in the normal symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S506 in FIG. 28 and S605 in FIG. 29). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 is a hold ball of the fluctuation display held in the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual number of reserved balls in the variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the deviation, the deviation can be corrected by the hold ball number command to be received next.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the normal figure reserved number display area Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by this display reserved ball number command.

The time-saving medium counter 203d is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving gaming state (time-saving medium). If the value of the time-saving medium counter 203d is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving gaming state. If the value of the time reduction counter 203d is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (normal game state) of the normal symbol. The initial value of the time reduction / medium counter 203d is set to zero, and the main control device 110 sets a value according to the jackpot type at the end of the jackpot ending (that is, the jackpot end timing). Specifically, in the normal game state, 3 is set when the jackpot type is "big hit A", 0 is set when the jackpot type is "big hit B", and in the time-saving gaming state, the jackpot type is "big hit A". In the case of "", 9 is set, and in the case of "Big hit B", 3 is set. After that, 1 is subtracted every time the variation effect of the special symbol is completed until the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203d becomes 0 (S213 in FIG. 25).

When a lottery of ordinary symbols is performed, if the value (M) of the ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 0, the value of the time saving medium counter 203d is referred to. Then, if the value is 1 or more, the lottery result is acquired based on the random number table per normal symbol (for high probability) in the time-saving game state (S510 in FIG. 28), and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to 3 seconds. (S518 in FIG. 28), and an opening pattern of 2 seconds × 2 times is set as an opening pattern of the electric accessory (opening / closing door) attached to the first entry port 64a (S519 in FIG. 28). On the other hand, if the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203h is 0, the lottery result is acquired based on the random number table per normal symbol (for low probability) in the normal gaming state (S511 in FIG. 28), and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is further obtained. Is set to 10 seconds (S520 in FIG. 28), and an opening pattern of 2 seconds × 1 time is set as an opening pattern of the electric accessory (opening / closing door) attached to the first entry port 64a (S521 in FIG. 28). ).

As described above, the counter buffer 203e is a buffer area used for counting each counter value.

The V flag 203f is a flag for storing the detection that a ball has passed through the V passage flow path 650e3, which is a specific area of the second variable winning device 650, and is the value of the V flag 203f at the end of the small hit. Based on, a big hit is given. This V flag 203f is set to indicate the type of big hit based on the small hit type in the V-passing process (S705 in FIG. 30), is referred to in the small hit ending control process (S1405 in FIG. 37), and then. It is set to off (S1406 in FIG. 37).

In the present embodiment, the configuration in which the values of various counter values are added by the timer interrupt processing is shown, but any configuration can be used as long as it can measure an accurate period, for example, it is timed by RTC (real-time clock). It may be measured using the period.

The jackpot scenario counter 203g is a counter for updating the jackpot scenario in which the opening / closing timing of the specific door 65f is defined, and the specific door 65f is set during the jackpot based on the jackpot scenario updated by the jackpot scenario counter 203g. Open control is executed. This jackpot scenario counter 203g is incremented by 1 when it is determined in the jackpot control process that there is a jackpot scenario setting (S1102 in FIG. 34), and in the jackpot ending control process, the control based on the jackpot scenario ends and the jackpot scenario Is reset after the setting of is cleared (S1205 in FIG. 35).

The small hit scenario counter 203h is a counter for updating the small hit scenario in which the operation timing and the like of various devices (opening / closing piece 650b of the second variable winning device 650, switching valve 650b3) are defined, and the small hit scenario counter 203h. Operation control of various devices is executed during the small hit based on the small hit scenario updated by the counter 203h. This small hit scenario counter 203h is incremented by 1 when it is determined that there is a small hit scenario setting in the small hit control process (S1302 in FIG. 36), and control based on the small hit scenario in the small hit ending control process. Is finished and reset after the setting of the small hit scenario is cleared (S1404 in FIG. 37).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 14 to 17, details of various tables included in the ROM 202 provided in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described.

First, the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 14 (a). FIG. 14A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table 202a. As shown in FIG. 14A, in the first hit random number table 202a, the value “0 to 79” of the first hit random number counter C1 is used as the jackpot determination value, and the first hit random number counter C1 is used as the small hit determination value. The value "300 to 399" is set, and the value "80 to 299" of the first random number counter C1 is set as a determination value other than the big hit and the small hit (off).

That is, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment is configured such that the lottery of the special symbol is a big hit with a probability of "1/5" and a small hit with a probability of "1/4". Is a small hit with a high probability. With this configuration, even if the special symbol does not make a big hit, the player is likely to make a small hit and expect the player to pass the game ball to the V detection switch 650e5 in the small hit game. You can perform many opportunities and improve the interest of the game. In the present embodiment, the probability of a big hit or a small hit of a special symbol is constant even if the game state is variable, but a period for setting a high probability game state in which the probability of a big hit is high, or a time-saving game Some may be configured to increase the probability of a small hit. Further, a winning opening for starting the second special symbol may be provided, and the second special symbol may be configured to increase the probability of a small hit. Further, the configuration is such that a jackpot is executed when a game ball is detected by the V detection switch 650e5, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a high probability gaming state (probability change) is set until a predetermined condition is satisfied (until the next jackpot or a predetermined value). It may be configured to give (up to the change of the number of special symbols).

Next, the first jackpot type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 14 (b). FIG. 14B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table 202b. As shown in FIG. 14B, in the first jackpot type selection table 202b, the value “0 to 49” of the first hit type counter C2 is used as the determination value of the jackpot A, and “50 to 99” is determined as the determination value of the jackpot B. Is set.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, when the big hit game is started, the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 is opened, and a large amount of prize balls are put into the first specific winning opening 65a. The game to be acquired is executed. In addition, depending on the type of jackpot, a time-saving gaming state that is advantageous to the player is given after the jackpot game is completed.

Next, the contents of each jackpot type will be described. When the jackpot A is selected, in the normal gaming state, the jackpot game in which the first variable winning device 65 opens for 15 rounds (15R) is started, and after the jackpot game is completed, the time saving game state (time saving) is performed three times. Granted. On the other hand, in the reduced working hours game state, the jackpot game in which the first variable winning device 65 opens for 15 rounds (15R) is started, and after the end of the jackpot game, the reduced working hours gaming state (time saving) is given 9 times.

When the jackpot B is selected, in the normal gaming state, the jackpot game in which the first variable winning device 65 opens for 15 rounds (15R) is started, and after the jackpot game ends, the time saving game state (time saving) is not given. .. On the other hand, in the reduced working hours game state, the jackpot game in which the first variable winning device 65 opens for 15 rounds (15R) is started, and after the end of the jackpot game, the reduced working hours gaming state (time saving) is given three times. In this embodiment, the number of time reductions is limited, but it may be configured to be given until the next big hit. In this case, by setting the jackpot type to which the time reduction is not given (or the number of time reductions is limited), it is possible to prevent the jackpots from being excessively continuous.

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, by winning the big hit (big hit A or big hit B) of the special symbol, the game always shifts to the time-saving game state after the big hit game is completed, but the round of the big hit game The number is set to be less than the jackpot C or the jackpot D. This is because the jackpot (big hit C or jackpot D) executed by the game ball adding a specific area during the small hit game can make the player think that the jackpot has been won by himself / herself. This is to make the privilege by C or the jackpot D a more advantageous privilege for the player.

FIG. 14C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number table 202d. As shown in FIG. 14D, in the second hit random number table 202d, the value “0 to 5” of the second hit random number counter C4 is set as the hit determination value of the normal symbol in the normal gaming state, and in the time-saving gaming state. The value "0 to 239" of the second random number counter C4 is set.

That is, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, the lottery of the normal symbol is won with a probability of "1/40" in the normal gaming state, and is won with the probability of "1/1" in the time-saving gaming state.

FIG. 14D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202e. As shown in FIG. 14D, the variation pattern selection table 202e includes a variation pattern selection table 202e1 for big hits (not shown), a variation pattern selection table 202e2 for deviation (not shown), and a small hit. At least the variation pattern selection table 202e3 (not shown) is set. The jackpot variation pattern selection table 202e1 is a data table in which the display mode (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot is defined, and is based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. Various jackpot fluctuation patterns are selected. Similar to the above-mentioned jackpot variation pattern selection table, the deviation pattern selection table 202e2 and the small hit variation pattern selection table 202e3 also have various deviation patterns and various small hit variation patterns based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. Is selected.

Next, the small hit type selection table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table 202c.

As shown in FIG. 15, in the case of a small hit of a special symbol, the small hit type when the random number value is "0 to 4" in the small hit type counter CS3 is "small hit A". .. Further, when the random number value is "5 to 9", the small hit type is "small hit B". Further, when the random number value is "10 to 199", the small hit type is "small hit C".

Here, the small hit type will be described with reference to FIG. First, when "small hit A" is selected, the small hit game corresponding to the small hit scenario a202g1 is executed as shown in the small hit scenario table 202g of FIG. 16A. In the small hit game corresponding to the small hit scenario a202g1, as shown in FIG. 16B, the opening / closing piece 650b is inserted during the period during which the game ball can flow into the V passage flow path 650e3 in the second variable winning device 650. An open scenario is set to open for 1.5 seconds. That is, as a result of the small hit game, the game ball can be detected by the V detection switch 650e5, and in that case, the big hit can be given.

On the other hand, when "small hit B" and "small hit C" are selected, the small hit game corresponding to the small hit scenario b202g2 (see FIG. 16 (a)) is executed. The small hit scenario b202g2 corresponding to the small hit scenario b202g2 is executed. In the winning game, as shown in FIG. 16C, the opening / closing piece 650b is set to be closed during the period during which the game ball can flow into the V passage flow path 650e3 in the second variable winning device 650. That is, it is set to be impossible (difficult) to give a big hit as a result of a small hit game configured to make it difficult to win a prize in the V detection switch 650e5. In addition, "small hit A" and "small hit" are set. For both "B" and "small hit C", a fluctuation time of a special symbol for 20 seconds is set.

In this way, by making the opening pattern of the opening / closing piece 650b during the small hit game different depending on each small hit type, the game ball flows into the V passage flow path 650e3, which is a small hit advantageous to the player of the small hit game. It is possible to set a possible small hit game and a small hit game in which the game ball cannot flow into the V passage flow path 650e3, which is a disadvantageous small hit (difficult), and it is possible to provide various playability. ..

Next, the small hit scenario table 202g will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit scenario table 202g. The small hit scenario table 202g is defined so that the small hit scenario corresponding to each of the small hit types selected by the small hit type selection table 202c can be selected, and the small hit game is played based on the selected small hit scenario. Will be executed.

The small hit scenario table 202g has a small hit scenario a202g1 dedicated to the small hit A and a small hit scenario b202g2 dedicated to the small hit B or C as the selected small hit scenario.

First, the small hit scenario a202g1 will be described with reference to FIG. 16B. FIG. 16B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit scenario a202g1. When the small hit scenario a202g1 is set, the small hit scenario counter 203h starts counting (S1302 in FIG. 36), and various controls set corresponding to the counter values of the small hit scenario counter 203h are executed. .. The counter value is added in the main process of the main control device 110 executed in a cycle of 4 milliseconds, and when the value of the counter value is added by 1, 4 milliseconds have elapsed.

When the small hit scenario a202g1 is set and the counter value becomes 1, the small hit opening period is started. When the counter value reaches 375 (1.5 seconds have elapsed), the opening period of the small hit ends, and the game ball can pass through the V passage flow path 650e3 in the second variable winning device 650 (V route open state). ), The switching valve solenoid 650c2 is set to ON in order to rotate the switching valve 650b3 downward. Then, when the counter value is updated to 376, the open / close piece solenoid 650f2 is set to ON in order to open the open / close piece 650b of the second variable winning device 650 (start of one round). After that, when the counter value reaches 750 (3 seconds have elapsed), that is, 1.5 seconds have passed since the opening / closing piece 650b was opened, the opening / closing piece solenoid 650f2 is set to off in order to close the opening / closing piece 650b. (End of 1 round).

The closing conditions (end conditions) of the opening / closing piece 650b in one round of the pachinko machine 10 are 1.5 seconds after the opening / closing piece 650b is opened and 10 balls in the second specified winning opening 650a. Is a prize. Details will be described later, but if 10 balls win the second specific winning opening 650a within 1.5 seconds after the opening / closing piece 650b is opened, the value of the small hit scenario counter 203h is set to 749 ( It is configured to execute the process of updating up to (one before the end of one round). In the small hit game, since the opening period of one round is set short, in reality, 10 balls do not enter, and after the opening period elapses, it is before 10 balls enter. It is configured to finish one round. As a result, the prize ball is not excessively given in the small hit game, and the difference from the big hit game is made.

With this configuration, after that, by adding 1 to the counter value, the counter value becomes 750 and the operation control for closing the opening / closing piece 650b is executed. Therefore, the opening / closing piece closing control is performed for each of a plurality of round end conditions. It is not necessary to execute the above, the processing load can be reduced, and it is possible to prevent a problem in the operation control of the open / close piece solenoid 650f2 when the respective round end conditions occur at substantially the same timing. ..

Then, when the counter value is updated to 751, the ending period of the small hit is started, the ending display mode is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and when the counter value reaches 1000 (4 seconds have elapsed), the second variable prize is won. The switching valve solenoid 650c2 is set to off in order to rotate the switching valve 650b3 upward so that the game ball cannot pass (difficult) to the V passing flow path 650e3 in the device 650 (V route closed state). do. Then, when the counter value reaches 1500 (6 seconds have elapsed), the ending period of the small hit ends.

By setting as described above, in the V effective period from when the switching valve solenoid 650c2 is set to ON and the V route is open until the switching valve solenoid 650c2 is set to OFF and the V route is closed. Since the opening / closing piece solenoid 650f2 is set to ON and the opening / closing piece 650b is opened, the game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening 650a can flow down to the V passage flow path 650e3. That is, the period from when the open / close piece solenoid 650f2 is set to on and the open / close piece 650b is in the open state until the open / close piece solenoid 650f2 is set to off and the open / close piece 650b is in the closed state (counter values 376 to 750). ) Allows the game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening 650a to flow down to the V passage flow path 650e3, and the game ball is detected by the V detection switch 650e5 to give the player a jackpot game. A small hit game will be provided.

Next, the small hit scenario b202g2 will be described with reference to FIG. 16 (c). FIG. 16C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit scenario b202g2. This small hit scenario b202g2 is a small hit scenario in which the small hit type is set for the small hit B or the small hit C as described above, and it is difficult for the game ball to be detected by the V detection switch 650e5. This is a scenario that provides a small hit game.

When the small hit scenario b202g2 is set and the counter value becomes 1, the small hit opening period is started. When the counter value reaches 375 (1.5 seconds have elapsed), the opening period of the small hit ends, and the game ball can pass through the V passage flow path 650e3 in the second variable winning device 650 (V route open state). ), The switching valve solenoid 650c2 is set to ON in order to rotate the switching valve 650b3 downward.

Then, when the counter value reaches 1000 (4 seconds have elapsed), the opening period of the small hit is terminated, and the game ball cannot pass (difficult) to the V passage flow path 650e3 in the second variable winning device 650 (difficult). The switching valve solenoid 650c2 is set to off in order to rotate the switching valve 650b3 upward so as to be in the V route closed state).

When the counter value is updated to 1001, the open / close piece solenoid 650f2 is set to ON in order to open the open / close piece 650b of the second variable winning device 650 (start of one round). After that, when the counter value reaches 1375 (5.5 seconds have elapsed), that is, 1.5 seconds have passed since the opening / closing piece 650b was opened, the opening / closing piece solenoid 650f2 is set to off in order to close the opening / closing piece 650b. (End of 1 round).

Then, when the first round is completed, the small hit ending period is executed until the counter value reaches 1500 (6 seconds have elapsed).

By setting as described above, in the V effective period from when the switching valve solenoid 650c2 is set to ON and the V route is open until the switching valve solenoid 650c2 is set to OFF and the V route is closed. Since the opening / closing piece solenoid 650f2 is inactive and the opening / closing piece 650b is closed, the game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening 650a cannot flow down to the V passage flow path 650e3, and the second specific winning opening All the game balls that have entered the 650a are guided to the discharge flow path 650e1. That is, it is impossible to allow the game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening 650a to flow down to the V passage flow path 650e3, detect the game ball on the V detection switch 650e5, and give the player a jackpot game ( Difficult) small hit games will be provided.

As described above, in the small hit scenario a202g1 and the small hit scenario b202g2, the timing for setting the switching valve solenoid 650c2 on and off is the same as the small hit start timing (special figure stop timing), but the open / close piece solenoid. The timing for turning 650f2 on and off is different. By making the timing of turning on and off the open / close piece solenoid 650f2 different depending on the small hit type in this way, it is possible to control whether or not the V detection switch 650e5 detects it, so that the player is given a big hit. It is possible to set a small hit (small hit A in the present embodiment) and a small hit (small hits B and C in the present embodiment) in which the player is not given a big hit, providing various playability. be able to.

In the present embodiment, the start timing of the display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the opening effect of the small hit game is one second before the opening operation of the opening / closing piece 650b in both the small hit scenarios a202g1 and b202g2. Until that period, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect of the fusion symbol (battle effect between the monster and the hero), so whether it is a small hit game corresponding to the small hit scenario a202g1. It is configured so that it is difficult to determine whether the game is a small hit game corresponding to the small hit scenario b202g2. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to determine the small hit type according to the display period of the opening effect and to make the player recognize in advance whether the small hit can be detected by the V detection switch 650e5. It is possible to actually play the game and have the V detection switch 650e5 play the game with the expectation that the game ball will be detected.

Next, the normal map fluctuation pattern selection table 202h will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 17, the normal map fluctuation pattern selection table 202h includes a normal map variation pattern selection table (normal) (see FIG. 17 (a)) and a normal map variation pattern selection table (time reduction) (FIG. 17 (Fig. 17). b) See) is at least set.

First, the normal map fluctuation pattern selection table (normal) will be described with reference to FIG. 17 (a). FIG. 17A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal map fluctuation pattern selection table (normal). The normal symbol fluctuation pattern selection table (normal) is a data table in which the display mode (variation time) of the normal map fluctuation pattern selected in the normal gaming state is defined, and is set to the value of the normal symbol fluctuation type counter CS2. Various fluctuation patterns (fluctuation time and hit production time) are selected based on this.

In the normal symbol variation pattern selection table (normal), variation patterns A to C per normal symbol are set as variation patterns selected when the lottery result of the normal symbol in the normal game state is a hit, and the variation patterns A to C per normal symbol are set in the normal game state. As the fluctuation pattern selected when the lottery result of the normal symbol is out of order, the normal symbol out-of-order fluctuation patterns A to C are set.

First, the fluctuation patterns A to C per normal symbol selected when the lottery result of the normal symbol in the normal game state is a hit will be described. The normal symbol per variation pattern A is set when the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is "0 to 79", and the normal symbol per variation pattern B is set when the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is "80 to 149". The fluctuation pattern C per normal symbol is set when the value of the normal symbol fluctuation type counter CS2 is "150 to 198". In each of the fluctuation patterns A to C per normal symbol, a fluctuation time of 10 seconds and a hit effect time of 3 seconds are set.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time per hit of the normal symbol is configured to be 10 seconds, and as described above, the game ball that has entered the entry portion of the crune member 660 is discharged from the ball outlet 660a. It is configured to take about 10 seconds to complete. Therefore, if the lottery result is a hit after passing through the through gate 67, the game ball that has entered from the ball outlet 660a of the crune member 660 is discharged at the timing when the fluctuation ends, so that the first entry is made. The game ball can be made to flow down to the first ball entry device 64 at the timing when the opening / closing door of the device 64 is opened. Therefore, even when the player has stopped firing the game ball, there is an effect that the game ball can be entered into the first ball entry port 64a at the timing when the opening / closing door is opened.

Next, the normal symbol deviation variation patterns A to C selected when the lottery result of the normal symbol in the normal game state is out of order will be described. The normal symbol deviation variation pattern A is a variation pattern in which the fluctuation time set when the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is “0 to 29” is 10 seconds, and the normal symbol deviation variation pattern B is a normal symbol variation. The fluctuation time set when the value of the type counter CS2 is "30 to 99" is a fluctuation pattern of 7 seconds, and in the normal symbol deviation fluctuation pattern C, the value of the normal symbol fluctuation type counter CS2 is "100 to 198". This is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time set in the case of is 5 seconds.

Next, with reference to FIG. 17 (b), the normal map fluctuation pattern selection table (time reduction) will be described. FIG. 17B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal map fluctuation pattern selection table (time reduction). The normal map fluctuation pattern selection table (time reduction) is a data table in which the display mode (variation time) of the normal map fluctuation pattern selected in the time saving gaming state is defined. Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the probability of hitting the normal symbol in the time-saving gaming state is "1/1", and the normal symbol always hits.

Similar to the above-mentioned normal map fluctuation pattern selection table (normal), various fluctuation patterns are selected based on the value of the normal symbol fluctuation type counter CS2 in this normal map fluctuation pattern selection table (time reduction), and the jackpot fluctuation pattern is selected. Since the selected fluctuation pattern (variation time) is different only in that it differs, the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113. The ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores at least a variation pattern selection table 222a, a normal diagram variation pattern selection table 222b, a small hit variation pattern selection table 222c, and a pseudo variation pattern selection table 222d. The variation pattern selection table 222a will be briefly described because it is already known, but the rough variation content (variation time) indicated by the variation pattern command based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110. It will be referred to when determining more detailed fluctuation contents. This makes it possible to determine a wider variety of variation modes.

Similar to the fluctuation pattern table 222a, the normal map fluctuation pattern selection table 222b and the small hit fluctuation pattern selection table 222c are also based on the normal map fluctuation pattern command or the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110, and the fluctuation pattern command thereof. It is referred to when determining more detailed fluctuation contents from the rough fluctuation contents (variation time, fluctuation type) indicated by. This makes it possible to determine a wider variety of variation modes.

The pseudo-variation pattern selection table 222d is a table that defines the effect display contents of the pseudo-variation that is executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Here, the pseudo-variation is the change start timing and normal of the special symbol when the fluctuation of the normal symbol is newly started during the fluctuation of the special symbol and the fluctuation of the normal symbol is in progress when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped. It is a fluctuation executed after the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in order to match the fluctuation start timing of the symbol.

A detailed explanation will be described later with reference to FIG. 18B, but the pseudo-variation pattern is selected based on the set effect type and the value of the effect counter 223 g using the pseudo-variation pattern selection table 222d. Will be done.

Next, the pseudo-variation pattern selection table 222d will be described with reference to FIG. 18 (b). FIG. 18B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the pseudo-variation pattern selection table 222d. The pseudo-variation pattern selection table 222d is a data table used for determining the display mode of the pseudo-variation pattern, and the display mode is defined for each effect type of the pseudo-variation and the value of the effect counter 223g.

Here, the production type of the pseudo-variation will be described. As described above with reference to FIG. 10A, there is no hit within 2 hold of the normal symbol 5 seconds before the fluctuation of the special symbol stops, and the normal symbol stops after the stop timing of the next special symbol. When the fluctuation of the special symbol is being executed, the deviation pseudo-variation is set by the fluctuation time of the difference time t1 from the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol to the stop of the fluctuation of the normal symbol.

On the other hand, as described above with reference to FIG. 10 (b), if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol whose fluctuation starts is wrong and there is a hit within the 2 hold of the next normal symbol, the continuation pseudo is continued in a maximum of 30 seconds. Fluctuations are set.

The pseudo-variation pattern selection table 222d is referred to when selecting a pseudo-variation pattern based on the set effect type and the value of the effect counter 223 g in the pseudo-variation start setting process (S2102 in FIG. 44). Specifically, when the effect type is out of order, when the value of the effect counter 223 g is "0 to 30", "off pseudo-variation pattern A" is selected, and the value of the effect counter 223 g is ". If it is "31 to 100", "off-pseudo-variation pattern B" is selected, and if the value of the staging counter 223g is "101 to 198", "off-pseudo-variation pattern C" is selected. To.

On the other hand, when the effect type is continuous, if the value of the effect counter 223 g is "0 to 50", "continuation pseudo-variation pattern A" is selected, and the value of the effect counter 223 g is "51 to". If it is "130", "continuous pseudo-variation pattern B" is selected, and if the value of the effect counter 223g is "131 to 198", "continuous pseudo-variation pattern C" is selected.

Various continuous pseudo-variation patterns are pseudo-variations of up to 30 seconds, and can be switched to a re-variation effect (a fusion effect pattern variation effect corresponding to the special symbol variation) at the timing when the special symbol variation starts. It is configured. On the other hand, in various outlier pseudo-variation patterns, blackout is set in the set pseudo-variation period.

Next, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 18 (c). FIG. 18C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113. The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 includes a normal figure winning information storage area 223a, a normal figure fluctuation start flag 223b, a pseudo fluctuation flag 223c, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d, a fluctuation start flag 223e, and a stop type. At least a selection flag 223f, an effect counter 223g, a pseudo setting flag 223h, and a pseudo fluctuation setting area 23i are provided.

The general drawing prize information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and each of these areas has a second random number counter which is prize information. The value of C4 is stored. In this pachinko machine 10, when a game ball passes through a through gate (ordinary symbol start port) 67, it corresponds to the through gate passage from the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in response to the passage through the through gate. Various information (whether or not, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a lottery of ordinary symbols is performed is predicted (estimated) by the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is voiced from the main control device 110. The lamp control device 113 is notified by the winning information command.

When the winning information command is received in the voice lamp control device 113, various information (win / fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) notified by the winning information command is extracted as winning information, and the winning information is used as a general drawing. It is stored in the winning information storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the 4 areas (1st to 4th areas). Will be done. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

The normal map fluctuation start flag 223b is set to on when a normal map fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (S1713 in FIG. 40), and the third symbol display device is set in the normal map fluctuation pattern selection process. It is set to off when the variable display of the normal symbol in 81 is set (S2001 in FIG. 44). When the normal map fluctuation start flag 223b is turned on, the normal map fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the normal map fluctuation pattern extracted from the received normal map fluctuation pattern command.

The display fluctuation pattern command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1602 in FIG. 39) of the main process executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display normal map fluctuation pattern command, the display control device 114 has a normal map fluctuation pattern indicated by this display normal map fluctuation pattern command, and the third symbol display device 81 has a normal map of the third symbol. The display control of the variation effect is started so that the variation display is performed.

The pseudo-variation flag 223c is a flag used to determine whether or not the display mode of the fusion symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is undergoing pseudo-variation, and is set to ON in the pseudo-variation start setting process (FIG. 44). S2104), it is set to off in the fluctuation pattern setting process (S1904 in FIG. 43). When this pseudo fluctuation flag 223c is set to ON, even if the fluctuation start timing of the normal symbol is reached, the new fluctuation in the fusion symbol is not started and is displayed in the normal symbol auxiliary symbol (normal symbol display area Ds1). The fluctuation start is executed only by the symbol).

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, it is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the fluctuation effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the normal symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the normal symbol reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d displays the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol. It is designed to manage.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added by passing through the through gate 67, or in the main control device 110, the variable display in the normal symbol is executed and the reserved balls are held. When the number is subtracted, the normal symbol reserved ball number command indicating the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the normal symbol hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the normal figure hold ball number command. Then, it is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d (S1710 in FIG. 40). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the normal symbol hold ball counter 223d according to the normal symbol hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the normal symbol hold ball of the main control device 110 is used. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203c.

The value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d is used for displaying the normal symbol reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d in response to the reception of the normal symbol reserved ball number command, and also stores the stored normal symbol reserved ball number. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223b, a display normal figure reserved ball count command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives the command for the number of reserved balls for display, it holds the value of the number of reserved balls indicated by the command, that is, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of balls symbol is displayed in the normal figure reserved number display area Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d is changed while synchronizing with the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of normal symbol reserved ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

The variation start flag 223e is set to on when a variation pattern command of a special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (S1702 in FIG. 40), and is set in the variation pattern selection process (see S1802 in FIG. 42). 3 It is set to off when the variable display of the special symbol is set in the symbol display device 81 (S1901 in FIG. 43). When the variation start flag 223e is turned on, the variation pattern command for display is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1602 in FIG. 39) of the main process executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223f is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (S1705 in FIG. 40), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (S1808 in FIG. 42). When the stop type selection flag 223f is turned on, the stop symbol of the fusion symbol corresponding to the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type) is set. Further, the set stop symbol is notified to the display control device 114 by the display stop type command. In the display control device 114, the stop display of the variation effect is displayed so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command received from the voice lamp control device 113 is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is controlled.

The effect counter 223g is a counter used when determining a fluctuation pattern of pseudo fluctuations and various fluctuations. It is updated repeatedly in the range of 0 to 198. Although not shown, it is updated by 1 each time the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed (S1611 in FIG. 39).

The pseudo setting flag 223h is a flag set to be turned on in order to execute the pseudo fluctuation. This pseudo setting flag 223h is out of the lottery result of the special symbol (at the time of the start of the variation) in which the start of the variation display is set in the variation pattern selection process (see S1802 in FIG. 42). It is set to on when there is a hit in the hold (S1910 in FIG. 43). That is, the pseudo setting flag 223h is a flag indicating that it is determined that the pseudo change is executed after the special symbol is stopped during the change of the special symbol. Further, in the pseudo-variation setting process (see S1614 in FIG. 45), the pseudo-setting flag 223h is set to off 5 seconds before the stop of the special figure variation, and there is a hit within 2 hold of the next normal symbol, or , It is set to ON when it is the period during which the normal map fluctuation that stops after the stop timing of the special figure is executed (S2210, 2213 in FIG. 45). On the other hand, it is set to off in the pseudo-variation start setting process (S2107 in FIG. 41). By setting this pseudo setting flag 223h to ON, the start of the pseudo fluctuation is executed after the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped. As a result, it is possible to reduce the frequency with which the fusion symbol stops at the missed symbol and reduce the frequency with which the player is disappointed with the result of the missed determination. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved. Further, even if the fusion pattern is out of alignment, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored by having the player play the game with higher expectations.

The pseudo-variation setting area 223i is a storage area in which fluctuation data (variation period, fluctuation pattern, etc.) of pseudo-variation is set.

The hold number counter 223j is a counter for setting the number of hold symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, as described above, during the fluctuation of the special symbol or the pseudo-variation, the new variation of the normal symbol is not started in the fusion symbol, but is executed only in the normal symbol auxiliary symbol. In this case, the reserved symbol of the normal symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not updated, and one variation of the fusion symbol is configured to appear to correspond to one variation of the reserved symbol. are doing. However, in this case, there will be a difference between the actual number of reserved symbols and the number of displayed reserved symbols. Therefore, by independently providing a counter for displaying the reserved symbols, it is configured so that the difference from the actual number of reserved symbols can be grasped, and when a difference occurs as described later, a new normal symbol is added. In the fluctuation of the fusion symbol corresponding to the fluctuation start, the pseudo-continuous map fluctuation that performs pseudo-stop is executed, and the subtraction of the hold number counter 223j is executed at the timing of the pseudo-stop so that it matches the actual hold number. It is configured to make corrections. Therefore, even if there is a difference from the actual number of holds, correction can be made. If the hold of the normal symbol is not stored in the state where the difference has occurred, the difference from the actual hold is corrected by configuring the fusion symbol to fluctuate by 1 in a pseudo-off mode. It is good to correct it by configuring it as follows.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores commands received from the main control device 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read / written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 36) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 19 to 23, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the first control example will be described. FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and the number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches it, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset is applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by 1. When the MPU 231 executes the instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory 234a has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data that is continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, high-speed reading is possible for the data on the second and subsequent pages, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-consecutive data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory 234a is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, the instructions constituting the control program can be read. It may take time, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 described later of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory 234a has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) are generated when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to read and write data to and from the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b has one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) containing the data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in one bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. The process of transferring one page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other bank. The processes of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a in the NOR type ROM 234d, specifically, the first program stored in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be executed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored from the instructions. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and also specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the read thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM 234d is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (command code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after the address "0000H" is specified, and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The program storage area of the work RAM 233 for each fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is used. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instructions. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is programmed so that the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initialization process (see S2302 in FIG. 46) stored in the program storage area 233a and executed after the boot process by the boot program (S2301 in FIG. 46) is completed. Set the start address of the corresponding program.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read a control program from a work RAM configured by a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 23) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. By expanding the image drawn in the buffer and outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (FIG. 48 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes an image drawing process for the next frame, and also executes a process of displaying the image previously developed by drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 draws and displays an image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing process or display process is completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The image is drawn using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a facilitates a large capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 by the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display a third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is held without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to the 235e and the error message image area 235f, at least the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on and the third symbol area 235d are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area for storing the corresponding data. Further, in the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the first ball entry port 64a is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a variable image at power-on, which displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 110 by a variable effect.

When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S2303 and S2304 in FIG. 46).

An image that fluctuates when the power is turned on will be described. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image as the third symbol display device. Display on 81 (display of "○" and "x" on the third symbol display device 81).

At this time, when the display fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the instruction command for starting the fluctuation, the display control device 114 receives the main image at power-on. On the display screen of, the variable image when the power of the "○" symbol is turned on at the lower right position facing the screen and the variable image when the power is turned on of the "×" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol are displayed. It is displayed repeatedly in the middle. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the image is displayed for a certain period after the variation effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", the image is displayed for a certain period after the variation effect is stopped.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, when the player starts the game while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the ball is detected at the first ball-entry port 64a, the fluctuation image at the time of power-on is obtained. The image controller 237 is drawn from the MPU 231 so that the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the area 235b and the images are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is instructed to. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If a ball is detected in the first ball entry port 64a while the hour main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be done.

Returning to FIG. 19, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 20, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images will be described. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram illustrating two types of rear images and a range of rear images stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image, and FIG. 20 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing " FIG. 20B shows the back surface A corresponding to the “city stage” and the back surface B corresponding to the “empty stage”, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 21, as the rear image corresponding to each of the rear surfaces A and B, an image that is horizontally longer than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared on the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured so that the back image is continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a'are composed of an image corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The rear image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

When the frame button 22 is operated by the player to change the stage to the "city stage" or the "empty stage", the MPU 231 first positions the display area between the position a and the position a'in the corresponding rear image. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and further displayed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a'. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the positions a and c so as to flow toward the left with a smooth connection.

Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 20A, the back surface A corresponding to the city stage, which is the initial stage, is the back surface of the resident video RAM 235 in which all the image data corresponding to the entire range of the back surface A, that is, the position a to the position d is displayed. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, the game is played without changing the stage while the city stage, which is the initial stage, is displayed. Therefore, all the image data on the back A corresponding to the frequently displayed city stage is displayed in the back image area. By making it resident in 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20B, the back surface B corresponding to the empty stage contains only a part of the back surface, that is, the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b, for the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the rear image area 235c of.

Here, since the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at an arbitrary timing based on the intention of the player, even if the frame button 22 is operated at an arbitrary timing. In order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to make the entire range of image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all the rear images, but doing so makes it very resident video RAM 235. A large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is fixed in the range from the position a to the position a', and the position is from the position a including the initial position. Since the image data corresponding to the image between b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the frame button by the player When the stage is changed at an arbitrary timing by the operation of 22, the initial position of the back surface B is immediately displayed as the third symbol by using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. It can be displayed on the device 81, and can be displayed by scrolling or changing the color tone with the passage of time. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a part of the image is stored on the back surface B, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 and suppress an increase in cost.

Further, on the back surface B, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. During this period, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b'to the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the image data from the position b'to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b'to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

In the back surface B, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 19) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be reliably displayed.

Further, on the rear surface B, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to the images between the positions b'and b. Data is stored in duplicate. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b'on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image controller 237 is controlled. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so that the image between the positions a and c flows toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 19, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, is resident. As a result, when performing a variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, it seems that the variation effect is not immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37 after the ball enters the through gate 67. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the apparatus 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but instead enters the character symbol area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. Notify the display control device 114 by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 has an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the process of displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used to draw the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffers 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are used every 20 milliseconds as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a storage image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 by using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and a round effect. , A display data table corresponding to the ending effect and the demo effect is prepared.

The variation effect is an effect started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A or jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

By notifying the time saving period of the normal symbol in the ending effect, the player can easily recognize the time saving period of the normal symbol. The longer the time reduction period of this normal symbol, the more chances that the game ball will pass through the first entrance 64a, so that the lottery of the special symbol will be held more often, and the chance of winning the special symbol will also increase. Will increase. Therefore, since the opening / closing door attached to the first entry opening 64a becomes a big hit of the special symbol and the opening / closing door is opened, it becomes easy for the game ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a. In addition, since the opening / closing piece 650b is opened as a small hit with a special symbol, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the second specific winning opening 650a, and the game ball flows into the V passage flow path 650e3. It will be easier. Therefore, the longer the displayed normal symbol has a shorter time period, the stronger the expectation that the jackpot game will be given, and the player can have it, so that the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased. can. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

Further, since the first entry port 64a is a winning opening in which five game balls are paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters, it becomes a big hit of a normal symbol and opens and closes attached to the first entry opening 64a. When the door is opened and the game ball can easily enter the first entry port 64a, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where it is difficult to reduce the number of balls held or the number of balls held is not reduced even if the pachinko machine 10 is played. You can get the expectation that you can get a big hit of a special symbol without it. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to participate in the game, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

In addition, in the ending effect, by notifying that the lottery result of any of the reserved special symbol lottery becomes a big hit of the special symbol, the player can use the special symbol in the reserved special symbol lottery. Since it is possible to recognize that it will be a big hit, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that it will surely be a big hit with a special symbol. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to participate in the game, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the game is not performed on the pachinko machine 10.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α-blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be enlarged and displayed, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is specified for each address. It should be noted that one or a plurality of information regarding the effect and the character is defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are displayed with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. For this back type, display one of the backs A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "city stage", "sky stage", or "island stage"), or backside A to. Information that specifies whether to display a rear image different from C is described. Further, as the back surface type, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In this embodiment, a case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not the display should be performed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the rear image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating that) may be specified as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the lapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the third symbol can be the variation symbol in the previous variation effect or the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110. By managing by the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, it is possible to easily specify the third symbol to be displayed from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variablely displayed at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 22). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (FIG. 23) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable staging images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of staging images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer 233d corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. Is possible because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer 233d corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be created can be realized only based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. ..

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table, the transfer data table is prepared. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and the transfer timing thereof are specified.

If all the image data of the sprite used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to start the transfer at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 23). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. The Null data which means is specified.

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

As with the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 22, in the example of FIG. 22). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table is the display data table. If a transfer data table corresponding to the above exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (FIG. 23) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to start the transfer at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. do.

For example, in the example of FIG. 22, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified in the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Bull data is specified in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. , MPU231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 46) (S2305 in FIG. 46). Then, at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the transfer setting process, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (S4605 in FIG. 60 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (S2601 in FIG. 48 (b)), and the simple image is displayed. When the display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S2608 in FIG. 48 (b)) and the simple display setting process (FIG. 48) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. (See S2609 in (b)) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (FIGS. 49 to 57) and display setting processing (FIG. 58) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (S4501 in FIG. 60 (a)), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on, the simple image display flag 233c is referenced. Since there is resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, the resident image transfer setting process (FIG. 60 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (FIG. 61) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (FIG. 23), which will be described later, is generated, which describes the content of the image drawing instruction for the user. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (FIG. 23), which will be described later, is generated in which drawing instructions are described. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the image data of the sprite used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Null data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to the later drawing list (FIG. 23) that describes the instruction content for image drawing to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. do.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 moves the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (S2603 in FIG. 58). ), The pointer update process (S4205 in FIG. 58) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list described later. (See FIG. 23) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 23. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 23, a rear image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Design 2, ..., Error For each sprite such as a design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α-blending information, color information, and filter specification information, and the image controller 237 includes various types. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. Processing is performed, composition processing with other sprites is performed according to the α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to the color information, and filtering processing is performed by the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 has a drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and other contents of an image to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image, warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) are set to the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can be used according to the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α-blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., Hold ball number symbol 1, hold ball number symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 performs the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list contains this transfer data information, the image controller 237 uses the transfer data information to create an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 is performed based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time it is executed, the time counting counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S4207 in FIG. 58). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes that should be performed.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (S2302 in FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 231. .. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "Off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (S4713 in FIG. 61). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (S4714 in FIG. 61). The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as "drawing target buffer") that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (S4802 in FIG. 62).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and together with the drive signal, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when the value is "1", it is set to "0". It is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (FIG. 48 (b)) is executed, the process is performed (S4803 in FIG. 62).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are used every 20 milliseconds as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 24 to 37. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and is started periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this embodiment). There is a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by inputting the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are explained first, and then started up. The processing and the main processing will be described.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter CS3 are each added by 1, and their counter values are maximum. When the value (399, 99, 99, 239, 199 in this embodiment, respectively) is reached, the value is cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 and CS3 are stored in the corresponding buffer area (counter buffer 203i) of the RAM 203.

Next, it is a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, and a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern (variation time) of the third symbol to be variablely displayed on the third symbol display device 81. (S104), and then the start winning process associated with winning the first ball opening 64a (starting winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation processing (S104) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 25 to 27.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying in the second symbol display device 83 (see FIG. 11), is executed (S106), and the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is used. The through-gate passage process associated with the passage of the sphere is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing (S106) and the through gate passage processing (S107) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29. After executing the through-gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and further, the V-passing process (S109) is executed. The details of this V-passing process (S109) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After finishing the process of S109, another process to be executed periodically is executed (S110), and the timer interrupt process is terminated. The launch control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a, and launches the ball on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently being a big hit (S201). As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changed. If it is not fluctuating (S202: No), it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first entry port 64a (starting opening) (S203). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64a is detected over three timer interrupt processes. If it is determined that the ball has not entered the first ball entry port 64a (S203: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entry port 64a (S203: Yes), the first random number counter C1 and the first type counter C2 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stopped. The values of the type counter C3 and the small hit type counter CS3 are acquired and stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball execution area (S204).

When the process of S204 is completed, the first symbol display device 37 executes a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display (S205), and ends this process. The special symbol change start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 26.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S206). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time. If (S206: No) has not elapsed, the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (not shown), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S206, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S206: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S207). The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S205) described later with reference to FIG. 26. When this special symbol change start process (S205) is executed, the stop symbol of the special symbol is set based on the values of various counters stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area 203a. More specifically, in the case of a big hit of a special symbol, it is determined whether the big hit is the big hit A or the big hit B according to the value of the first hit type counter C2.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on at the predetermined LED of the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on. If it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S207 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol display performed by the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 26) (this lottery). The result) is determined whether it is a big hit of a special symbol (S208). If the result of this lottery is a jackpot with a special symbol (S208: Yes), a jackpot scenario corresponding to the jackpot type is set using the jackpot scenario table (not shown) (S209). When the processing of S209 is completed, the value of the time saving medium counter 203d is set from the first big hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 14B) based on the jackpot type and the gaming state gaming state (normal gaming state, time saving gaming state). Then (S210), the process proceeds to S215.

On the other hand, in the process of S208, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S208: No), then it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a small hit of the special symbol (S211). In the process of S211 if it is determined that the lottery result of this time is a small hit of a special symbol (S211: Yes), the small hit start setting process is executed to start the small hit (S212), S213. Move to the processing of. The details of the small hit start setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 27.

If it is determined in the process of S211 that the result of the lottery this time is not a small hit of the special symbol (S211: No), the result of the lottery this time is out of the special symbol, so the process proceeds to the process of S213 as it is.

In the process of S213, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203d is larger than 0 (S213), and when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203d is 1 or more (greater than 0) (S213: Yes). The value of the time reduction counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S214), and the process proceeds to S215. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the time saving / medium counter 203d is not 1 or more (0) (S213: No), the processing of S214 is skipped and the process proceeds to S215 processing.

In the process of S215 executed after the process of S210, S213, or S214, the LED lighting and the third symbol display device 81, which are the display modes of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol set in the process of S207, are turned on. A stop command is set to synchronize the fluctuation stop of the special symbol, the special symbol auxiliary symbol, etc. displayed in (S215).

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the special symbol change start processing (S205) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start processing (S205). This special symbol change start process (S205) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 25) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and is stored in the special symbol hold ball execution area 203a. This is a process for determining an effect pattern (variation pattern) of a variation effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 based on the values of various counters.

In the special symbol change start process, first, the value of the change type counter CS1 is acquired and stored in the special symbol hold ball execution area 203a (S301). Next, in the process of S301, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area 203a in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored is acquired (S302). Specifically, each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small hit type counter CS3 of the special symbol is acquired.

When the processing of S302 is completed, the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table 202a corresponding to the type of the special symbol acquired in the processing of S302 (S303). More specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S302 is compared with the jackpot determination value stored in the first random number table 202a, and the lottery result is acquired. As described above, when the value of the first random number counter C1 is "0 to 79", the lottery result is a big hit, and when the value is "300 to 399", the lottery result is a small hit (FIG. 14 (a). )reference).

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result acquired in the process of S303 is a big hit (S304). If the lottery result is determined to be a big hit in the process of S304 (S304: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the special symbol and the big hit type is set (S305).

More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S302 is referred to, compared with the random number value specified in the first jackpot type selection table 202b, and the jackpot of two types of special symbols is compared. Among the types (big hit A, big hit B), it is determined what the big hit type is. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", the jackpot A (15R jackpot) is set, and if it is in the range of "50 to 99", the jackpot B (15R) is set. The jackpot) is set (see FIG. 10 (b)).

In the process of S305, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the set jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B). Further, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When the processing of S305 is completed, the jackpot variation pattern is determined with reference to the jackpot variation pattern selection table 202e1 (see FIG. 14D) based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the processing of S301 (S306). ), The process proceeds to S312.

When the variation pattern is determined in the process of S306, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is determined, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined.

On the other hand, in the process of S304, when it is determined that the lottery result is not a big hit (S304: No), then it is determined whether the lottery result is a small hit (S307). When the lottery result is determined to be a small hit in the processing of S307 (S307: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the special symbol and the small hit type is set (S308), and the result is acquired in the processing of S301. The small hit variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S309), and the process proceeds to S312.

If it is determined in the process of S307 that the lottery result is not a small hit (S307: No), a display mode corresponding to the special symbol is set (S310).

When the processing of S310 is completed, the deviation variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the processing of S301 (S311), and the process proceeds to the processing of S312.

In the process of S311, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S306, the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the processing of S301 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1.

When the processing of S306, S309 or S311 is completed, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the processing of S306, S309 or S311 is set (S312). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S305, S308 or S310 is set (S313). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (FIG. 33). To. When the processing of S313 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the small hit start setting process (S212) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing this small hit start setting process (S212). This small hit start setting process (S212) is executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25), and is a process for setting the start of the small hit game.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, when the small hit game is started, the second variable winning device 650 is changed to an open state in which the ball can win (easily), and the ball winning the second variable winning device 650 is changed. By passing through a specific area (V detection switch 650e5), the big hit game is executed after the small hit game is completed.

That is, the game state in which the small hit game is executed is an advantageous state in which a ball can be won in the second variable winning device 650 (a prize ball can be obtained), and the big hit game is executed as compared with the normal game state. It is configured to be in an advantageous state where it is more likely to be done.

Returning to FIG. 27, the explanation will be continued. In the small hit start setting process (S212), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result this time is a small hit A (S401). If it is determined to be a small hit A in the processing of S401 (S401: Yes), the small hit scenario a202g1 corresponding to the small hit type (small hit A) is set using the small hit scenario table 202g (S401: Yes). S402), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S401 that it is not a small hit A (S401: No), the small hit scenario b202g2 corresponding to the small hit type (small hit B, C) is performed using the small hit scenario table 202g. Set (S403) and end this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation processing (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24), and the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83 (see FIG. 11) and the first ball entry are performed. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory (opening / closing door) attached to the mouth 64a.

In this normal symbol variation processing (S106), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S501). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the hit, and the electric accessory (opening / closing door) attached to the first ball entry port 64a is opened / closed. Includes during control. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S501: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S501: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502), and the second symbol display device 83 is used. If the display mode is not changing (S502: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S503). Next, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is larger than 0 (S504), and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is not larger than 0 (not 0). When it is determined (S504: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is larger than 0 (S504: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is subtracted by 1 (S505).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted, and the normal symbol reserved ball number command is set (S506). In the process of S506, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is acquired (S507).

After finishing the processing of S507, it is next determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time reduction of the normal symbol (whether the value of the time reduction counter 203d is larger than 0) (S508). If it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction (the value of the time reduction counter 203d is larger than 0) (S508: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot. (S509). As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over.

In the processing of S509, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S509: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 and the random number table per normal symbol for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S510). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 239", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol. That is, in the time-saving state, it always hits the normal symbol. (See FIG. 14 (c)).

On the other hand, in the processing of S509, if the special symbol is in the middle of a big hit (S509: Yes), the process proceeds to the processing of S511.

Further, in the process of S508, if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time reduction of the normal symbol (the value of the time reduction counter 203d is 0) (S508: No), the process proceeds to the process of S511. In the processing of S511, the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so that the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S507 is low. Based on the second hit random number table for the probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S511). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 5", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "6 to 239", the normal symbol is out of order. (See FIG. 14 (c)).

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the process of S510 or S511 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S512). If it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit (S512: Yes), the display mode at the time of hit is set in the second symbol display device 83 (S513), and the process proceeds to S515. In the process of S513, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

On the other hand, in the process of S512, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S512: No), the display mode at the time of detachment is set in the second symbol display device 83 (S514), and the process proceeds to S515. .. In the process of S514, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

In the process of S515, the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is acquired (S515), and then it is determined whether the time reduction is in progress (whether the value of the time reduction medium counter 203d is larger than 0) (S516).

If the pachinko machine 10 determines that the normal symbol is in the time reduction (the value of the time reduction counter 203d is larger than 0) (S516: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot. (S517). As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over.

In the processing of S517, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S517: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. A normal symbol variation pattern is selected based on the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 and the normal symbol variation pattern selection table for the time saving state, and the determined variation pattern is notified to the display control device 114. Figure A variation pattern command is set (S518). Specifically, the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol variation pattern selection table for the time saving state. For example, if the value of the normal symbol fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 79", the normal symbol fluctuation pattern D (variation time 3 seconds) is selected, and if it is in the range of "80 to 149", the normal symbol is normal symbol. The variation pattern E (variation time 3 seconds) is selected. If the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is in the range of "150 to 198", the normal symbol variation pattern F (variation time 3 seconds) is selected (see FIG. 17 (b)). The normal figure fluctuation pattern command is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (FIG. 33).

When the processing of S518 is completed, the game state is shortened, so the opening time of the electric accessory (opening / closing door) attached to the first entry port 64a is set to 2 seconds and the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S519). , End this process.

On the other hand, in the processing of S516, when the pachinko machine 10 determines that the normal symbol is not in the time reduction (the value of the time reduction counter 203d is 0) (S516: No), and in the processing of S517, the special symbol If the jackpot is in progress (S517: Yes), the process proceeds to S520.

In the processing of S520, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol. Therefore, the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 acquired in the processing of S515 and the normal state. A variation pattern per normal symbol is selected based on the normal map variation pattern selection table for the gaming state, and a normal map variation pattern command for notifying the determined variation pattern to the display control device 114 is set (S520). Specifically, the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol variation pattern selection table for the normal gaming state. For example, if the value of the normal symbol fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 79", the normal symbol fluctuation pattern A (variation time 10 seconds) is selected, and if it is in the range of "80 to 149", the normal symbol is normal symbol. The fluctuation pattern B (variation time 10 seconds) is selected. If the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is in the range of "150 to 198", the normal symbol variation pattern C (variation time 10 seconds) is selected (see FIG. 17A). The normal figure fluctuation pattern command is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (FIG. 33).

When the processing of S520 is completed, the gaming state is not in a short time, so the opening time of the electric accessory (opening / closing door) attached to the first entry port 64a is set to 2 seconds and the number of opening times is set to 1 (S521). , End this process.

In this way, when the game state of the normal symbol is the time-saving game state (during the time reduction), the game state of the normal symbol is compared with the normal game state (during the non-time reduction), and the variable display time is "10 seconds → Since it is shortened to "3 seconds" and the opening period of the electric accessory (opening / closing door) attached to the first entry port 64a is extended to "2 seconds x 1 time → 2 seconds x 2 times", the first entry The ball is in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the ball mouth 64a.

Further, in the process of S502, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502: Yes), whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S522). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S518 or the process of S520 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device 83.

If the fluctuation time has not elapsed in the process of S522 (S522: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S522, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S522: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S523). In the processing of S523, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the processing of S513, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lights up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to be displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is out of order and the display mode is set by the processing of S514, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to. When the stop display is set by the process of S523, and then the second symbol display update process (see S1008) of the main process (see FIG. 33) is executed, the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. When the process is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S513 or the process of S514.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, is the lottery result (current lottery result) of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process a hit of the ordinary symbol? Is determined (S524). If the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S524: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the result of this lottery is a hit of a normal symbol (S524: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory (opening / closing door) attached to the first entry port 64a is set (S525), and this processing is performed. finish.

When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory (opening / closing door) is set by the process of S525, and then the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1006) of the main process (see FIG. 33) is executed, the electric combination is executed. The opening / closing control of the object (opening / closing door) is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory (opening / closing door) is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S519 or the process of S521 are completed. After the process of S525 is executed, a normal figure stop command indicating the stop of the normal symbol is set (S526). This normal figure stop command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the stop of the normal symbol.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S601). Here, the passage of the sphere at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S601: Yes), the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203c (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S602). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S603).

Whether the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S601: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203c If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S603: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S601: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203c is added by 1 (S604). Then, based on the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c added in the process of S604, the normal symbol reserved ball number command is set (S605).

The normal figure reserved ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 33) described later. Inside, it is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the normal figure holding ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203c from the normal symbol holding ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the normal figure holding ball number counter of the RAM 223. Store in 223d.

When the processing of S605 is completed, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24) described above is set to the empty holding area (holding first) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. It is stored in the first area of the area (4th area on hold) (S606). In the process of S606, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 1, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, the normal figure pre-determination result is acquired based on the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the processing of S606 and the second random number table 202d (S607), and the normal figure is based on the normal figure pre-determination result. The winning information command is set (S608), and this process ends.

The general drawing winning information command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 33) to be executed later by the MPU 201. Then, it is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the Fuzu prize winning information command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the Fuzu pre-determination result from the Fuzu prize information command, and stores the extracted value in the Fuzu prize information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can perform an effect based on the result of the pre-determination of the normal drawing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the V-passing process (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the V-passing process (S109). This V-passing process (S109) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and is the passage of the game ball to the specific area (V detection switch 650e5) in the second variable winning device 650 normal? Is a process for determining.

In this V-passing process (S109), first, it is determined whether or not the V detection switch 650e5 provided in the V-passing flow path 650e3 of the second variable winning device 650 has detected the game ball (S701). In the process of S701, when it is determined that the V detection switch 650e5 has not detected the game ball, that is, when it is determined that the V detection switch 650e5 is not set to ON (S701: No), this process is performed. To finish. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S701 that the V detection switch 650e5 has detected the game ball (S701: Yes), then, within the V passable period currently set in the small hit scenario (FIG. 16). (B)-(c)) is determined (S702).

In the process of S702, if it is determined that it is not within the V passable period set in the small hit scenario (S702: No), an error command is set (S703), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S702, when it is determined that the V passable period set in the small hit scenario is within (S702: Yes), the value of the acquired first hit type counter is read (S704). ). That is, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S302 is referred to, compared with the random number value specified in the first jackpot type selection table 202b, and the jackpot type (big hit A) of two types of special symbols is compared. , The jackpot B), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", it is determined to be a jackpot A (15R jackpot), and if it is in the range of "50 to 99", the jackpot B (15R) is determined. It is determined to be a jackpot) (see FIG. 14 (b)).

Next, the V flag 203f indicating the jackpot type read in S704 is set to ON (S705), and the V pass command is set (S706). After that, the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203d corresponding to the jackpot type and the game state is set (S707).

In this way, even during a small hit game for winning a prize in the second variable winning device 650, a small period is provided for valid (normal) period and non-valid (abnormal) period for the winning. It is possible to prevent the act of illegally passing the ball to a specific area (V detection switch 650e5) during the hit game.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the V detection switch 650e5 detects a game ball outside the passable period, an error command is set and this process is terminated without setting the V flag 203f to ON. Therefore, even if the game ball passes through the specific area outside the passable period, the V flag 203f is not set to ON. Therefore, even if the game ball is illegally passed to the specific area during the small hit game, the small hit game The jackpot game is not executed after the end. Therefore, there is an effect that illegal games can be prevented.

In this embodiment, a configuration is used in which it is determined whether or not the timing at which the game ball passes through the specific region is normal, and the presence or absence of an abnormality (error) is determined. The configuration of may be used.

For example, the case where the V detection switch 650e5 detects two or more game balls in one small hit game may be determined as an abnormality. This is a configuration in which one game ball that can pass through a specific area (V detection switch 650e5) during one small hit game is made into one by controlling the operation of each configuration of the second variable winning device 650 in the present embodiment. Is adopted. Therefore, the case where the V detection switch 650e5 detects two or more game balls in one small hit game may be determined as an abnormality.

Further, in the present embodiment, after it is determined that the V detection switch 650e5 has detected the game ball, it is determined whether the detection of the game ball (passing through a specific area) is within the passable period. It is possible to process the detection of a game ball outside the possible period (passing through a specific area) as an abnormality. The detection switch 650e5 may be configured to determine whether or not the game ball has been detected.

Further, based on the detection results of the passage detection switch 650as for detecting the entry of the ball into the inflow port 650a1 of the second variable winning device 650 and the V detection switch 650e5 which is a specific region, one small hit game is performed. Even though the passage detection switch 650as does not detect the game ball, the case where the V detection switch 650e5 detects the game ball may be determined as an abnormality.

By doing so, for example, it is possible to monitor an illegal game in which a game ball is retained in the V passage flow path 650e3 and the game ball retained within the passable period is passed to a specific area.

In addition, a means for determining whether or not the small hit game this time is a small hit that can pass through V is provided, and the determination result is used to determine V in spite of the case of a small hit that cannot pass through V (difficult). When the detection switch 650e5 detects a game ball, it may be determined as an abnormality.

It should be noted that the plurality of abnormality monitoring processes described above are configured so that the game ball that first wins the second variable winning device 650 after the small hit game is executed as in the present embodiment can win the V passing flow path 650e3. By using it, it becomes possible to monitor fraudulent games more reliably.

That is, when an attempt is made to illegally pass a game ball through the V detection switch 650e5, which is a specific area, the V detection switch is used even though the second variable winning device 650 does not win any ball during the small hit game. When the 650e5 detects a game ball, it can be determined to be abnormal, and when even one ball is won by the second variable winning device 650 during the small hit game, the V detection switch 650e5 detects two game balls. It is possible to determine that it is abnormal.

Further, in the case of the small hit game in which the small hit game cannot pass through V, the game ball won by the second variable winning device 650 does not pass through the V detection switch 650e5, so that the V detection switch 650e5 is used. Since only one game ball passes through, but the V detection switch 650e5 detects the game ball during the small hit game in which V cannot pass, it can be determined to be abnormal.

If the discrimination result of each abnormality discrimination process described above is determined to be abnormal, an error command may be set and configured so that it can be output to the outside. In this case, the error command may be configured to include identification information that can identify the cause of the abnormality and priority information that indicates the priority of the abnormality that has occurred.

Here, the priority information is information for simply determining whether or not the generated abnormality is an abnormality caused by an illegal game, and for example, the number of balls won in the second variable winning device 650 ( An abnormality determined to have more balls (V detection switch 650e5) that have passed through a specific area than the passage detection switch 650as) has a high possibility of fraudulent game, so priority information with high priority is set and is small. An abnormality in which it is determined that the ball has passed the specific area outside the passable period during the hit game may be caused by the ball play, so priority information with a low priority is set.

As described above, although any abnormality cannot occur in a proper game, by setting a priority among them, when a plurality of abnormalities occur simultaneously in one pachinko machine 10, the abnormality has a high priority. It is possible to give priority to the notification, and there is an effect that the processing after the occurrence of an abnormality can be smoothly performed.

It should be noted that each abnormality determination process for the passage of the game ball to the specific area may be combined in all or a part thereof may be combined as appropriate.

As a result of each abnormality discrimination process described above, the error command set when the error is determined is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 as the main process described later (FIG. FIG. In the external output process (S1001) of 33), the command is transmitted to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 via the voice lamp control device 113 and the external output terminal plate (not shown). When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, the error content is extracted from the error command, and the notification based on the extracted content is notified by the third symbol display device 81, the voice output device 226, and the lamp display device 227. And execute using.

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S801) as a setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111, and the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S902). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process shifts to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the processing is also shifted to S912 in this case as well.

If the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and even in such a case, the process is transferred to S912. As will be described later in the process of S1015 in the main process (see FIG. 33), the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S912). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when an abnormality in the backup is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). .. In the RAM initialization process (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S910.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the power off occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S907: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S910, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1008 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1011 and S1012 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main processing, first, during the execution of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is input to each control device (periphery) on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24) is determined, and if the winning detection information is present, the number of acquired balls corresponds to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command. Further, the normal symbol reserved ball number command and the general figure winning information command set in the through gate passing process (see FIG. 29) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command or the like set in the big hit control process (see FIG. 34) and the small hit opening command or the like set in the small hit control process (see FIG. 36) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the error command set in the V-passing process (see FIG. 30) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

The external output processing in the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that various commands can be output to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 by an external terminal board (not shown). For example, various error commands can be output to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. There is.

Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is reset to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or the first 1 The jackpot control process for opening or closing the first specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed (S1004). The details of the jackpot control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 34. In this embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

When the processing of S1004 is completed, the small hit control processing is executed (S1005). The details of the small hit control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 36. In this embodiment, the small hit control process (S1005) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 64b attached to the first ball entry port 64a is executed (S1006). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 64b is set by the process of S524 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 28), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64b is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64b is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S516 or the processing of S518 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S507). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 26), the variation display according to the variation pattern is started in the first symbol display device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. At the same time, turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, turn on the red LED.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 26) ends, the variation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is executed. Is terminated, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the first symbol display device 37.

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1008). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S517 or the process of S519 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 28), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83. do. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, variable display is performed in which the symbol of "○" and the symbol of "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S522 of the normal symbol change process (see FIG. 28), the second symbol display device 83 is executed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S513 or the process of S514 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 28) after ending the variable display (see FIG. 28). Lit display).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1010). ), If the predetermined time has already passed (S1010: Yes), the process is transferred to S1001 and each process after S1001 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if a predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1010: No), in the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, in the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1011, S1012).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1011). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1012).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1008 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the processing of S1009, if the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: Yes), the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 31 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S1013 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1013), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (S1014). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1015), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1016), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S1009 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1001 to S1008, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1011 and S1012 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power cutoff occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cutoff state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, in the initial setting process (S901 in FIG. 32), By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1001. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 33), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and the first variable prize is won. This is a process for opening or closing the first specific winning opening 65a of the device 65.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot scenario is set (S1101). Specifically, the processing of S209 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 25) or the processing of S1406 of the small hit ending control processing (see FIG. 37) described later is executed, and it is determined whether or not the big hit scenario is set. do. That is, the result of the lottery of the special symbol becomes a big hit, and the big hit scenario is set based on the lottery result, or the big hit scenario is based on passing through a specific area (V detection switch 650e5) during the small hit game. Determine if it has been set. If it is determined in the process of S1101 that the jackpot scenario is not set (S1101: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1101 that the jackpot scenario is set (S1101: Yes), 1 is added to the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g (S1102), and the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g is changed. It is determined whether it is the timing of the opening start of the jackpot scenario (S1103). For example, when the jackpot scenario a is set (not shown), the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g corresponding to the opening start (opening start) is 1, so the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g is 1. To determine.

In the processing of S1103, if it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g is a value corresponding to the opening start (in the case of jackpot scenario a, the counter value is 1) (S1103: Yes), the jackpot opening command Is set (S1104), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g does not correspond to the opening start (S1103: No), then the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g corresponds to the round start (in the jackpot scenario a). If so, it is determined whether the counter value is 1251) (S1105).

If it is determined in the processing of S1105 that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g corresponds to the start of the round (S1105: Yes), the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a is opened in the processing of S1106. (Set the specific door solenoid 65f2 on so that the specific door 65f of the first specific winning opening 65a is open), and then set the round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds (set the specific door solenoid 65f2 to be on). S1107), this process is terminated.

The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice lamp is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1105, if it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g does not correspond to the value corresponding to the start of the round (S1105: No), then the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a is closed. It is determined whether the condition is satisfied (S1108). Here, as the closing condition of the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a in the present embodiment, 30 seconds have passed since the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a was opened, or specified. When a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are won after the winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a is opened, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

In the process of S1108, if it is determined that the closing condition of the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a is satisfied (S1108: Yes), the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g is set to the currently executed round. It is updated to the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the counter value corresponding to the end of the round (S1109), and the present processing is terminated. If it is determined in the process of S1108 that the closing condition is satisfied, the closing condition is cleared, and it is not determined that the closing condition is satisfied again in the next and subsequent jackpot control processes. ..

Here, the jackpot scenario is configured to update (add) the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g and execute an operation corresponding to the updated (added) counter value. Therefore, when the closing condition is satisfied by winning a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls in the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a, that is, a factor that does not accompany the passage of time (update of the counter value). When the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a is closed, the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g is configured to be updated to the value immediately before the counter value at which the corresponding operation control is executed. (It is configured so that the operation control is executed in the next jackpot control process).

By doing so, the operation control executed by a factor that does not accompany the passage of time (update of the counter value) (for example, the operation control that closes the specific winning opening when a predetermined number of balls win a prize) becomes a big hit scenario. It is possible to execute based on. Therefore, as a closing condition of the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a, the operation is controlled based on the jackpot scenario when the predetermined time elapses, and when the predetermined number of winnings are received, the operation is not based on the jackpot scenario. It is not necessary to perform complicated control such as executing motion control, which has the effect of facilitating the design and preventing the situation where both motion controls are mixed.

Returning to FIG. 34, the explanation will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S1108 that the closing condition of the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65 is not satisfied (S1108: No), then the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g corresponds to the end of the round. It is determined whether or not the value to be used (counter value is 8750 in the case of jackpot scenario a) (S1110).

If it is determined in the processing of S1110 that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g corresponds to the end of the round (S1110: Yes), the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a is closed in the processing of S1111. (The specific door solenoid 65f2 is set to be off so that the specific door 65f of the first specific winning opening 65a is closed), and this process is terminated. The discrimination process from S1105 to S1110 described above is repeatedly executed for the number of rounds of the jackpot set in the jackpot scenario.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1110, if it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g does not correspond to the value corresponding to the end of the round (S1110: No), then the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g corresponds to the interval start (corresponds to). In the case of the value jackpot scenario a, it is determined whether the counter value is 8751) (S1112). In the process of S1112, if it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203 g is a value corresponding to the start of the interval (S1112: Yes), an interval command is set (S1113), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1112, when it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g does not correspond to the value corresponding to the start of the interval (S1112: No), the jackpot ending control process (S1114) is executed next. This jackpot ending control process is a process executed during the ending period in the jackpot game, that is, a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) from the end of the final round of the jackpot game to the start of the change of the special symbol. ..

Next, the jackpot ending control process (S1114) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 35. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this jackpot ending control process (S1114). This jackpot ending control process (S1114) is a process executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 34).

In the jackpot ending control process, first, it is determined whether the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g is a value corresponding to the ending start (counter value is 40751 in the case of jackpot scenario a) (S1201). In the process of S1201, if it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g is a value corresponding to the ending start (S1201: Yes), the jackpot ending command is set (S1202), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g does not correspond to the ending start (S1201: No), then the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g corresponds to the ending end (in the jackpot scenario a). If so, it is determined whether the counter value is 42000) (S1203). If it is determined in the process of S1203 that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203 g does not correspond to the end of the ending (S1203: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1203, if it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g is a value corresponding to the end of the ending (S1203: Yes), the jackpot scenario setting is cleared (S1204), and then the jackpot scenario counter is set. The scenario counter 203g is reset to 0 (S1205). That is, the operation control of the jackpot game based on the jackpot scenario is terminated. Then, this process is terminated.

Next, the small hit control process (S1005) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this small hit control process (S1005). This small hit control process (S1005) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 33), and the setting of a command for causing the voice lamp control device 113 to execute various effects according to the small hit, and the second specification. It is a process of controlling the operation of the opening / closing piece solenoid 650f2 for opening / closing the opening / closing piece 650b attached to the winning opening 650a, and the switching valve solenoid 650c2 for rotating the switching valve 650b3 for switching the flow path.

In the small hit control process, first, it is determined whether or not the small hit scenario is set (S1301). Specifically, the processes of S402 and S403 of the small hit start setting process (see FIG. 27) are executed, and it is determined whether the small hit scenario is set. If the small hit scenario is not set in the process of S1301 (S1301: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if the small hit scenario is set in the processing of S1301 (S1301: Yes), 1 is added to the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h (S1302), and the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h is a small hit. It is determined whether it is the timing of the opening start of the scenario (S1303). For example, when the small hit scenario a202g1 is set (see FIG. 16B), the value of the counter 203h is 1 because the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h corresponding to the opening start (opening start) is 1. To determine if it is.

In the processing of S1303, if the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h is a value corresponding to the opening start (in the case of the small hit scenario a202g1, the counter value is 1) (S1303: Yes), the processing of S1304 is small. The hit opening command is set (S1304), and the process proceeds to S1305. Here, in the opening of the small hit, a display mode indicating the start of the small hit game is set on the third symbol display device 81 1 second before the opening timing of the opening / closing piece 650b regardless of the small hit type. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from discriminating the small hit type due to the difference in the length of the display mode of the opening. Further, at the time of a small hit, the effect of the fusion pattern (battle between the hero and the monster) may be continuously displayed without displaying the opening effect. With this configuration, the player recognizes the start of the small hit game as the opening timing of the opening / closing piece 650b, so that the small hit type can be difficult to identify.

On the other hand, if the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h does not correspond to the opening start (S1303: No), the process proceeds to S1305. In the process of S1305, it is determined whether the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h is the timing of turning on the switching valve solenoid 650c2 of the small hit scenario (opening the V passage flow path 650e3) (S1305). For example, when the small hit scenario a202g1 is set (see FIG. 16B), the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h corresponding to the switching valve solenoid on (V passage flow path 650e3 open) is 375. It is determined whether the value of the small hit scenario counter 203h is 375.

In the processing of S1305, when the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h is a value for turning on the switching valve solenoid 650c2 (in the case of the small hit scenario a202g1, the counter value is 375) (S1305: Yes), the processing of S1306. (The switching valve solenoid 650c2 is set to be turned on so that the switching valve 650b3 rotates downward in order to open the V passage flow path 650e3). Then, the process proceeds to S1307.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1305, if the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h is not the value corresponding to the switching valve solenoid on (if the small hit scenario a202g1, the counter value is 375) (S1305: No), the processing of S1307. Move to.

In the process of S1307, it is determined whether the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h is the timing of the switching valve solenoid off (V passage flow path 650e3 closed) of the small hit scenario (S1307). For example, when the small hit scenario a202g1 is set (see FIG. 16B), the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h corresponding to the switching valve solenoid off (V passage flow path 650e3 closed) is 1000. It is determined whether the value of the small hit scenario counter 203h is 1000.

In the processing of S1307, if the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h is a value corresponding to the switching valve solenoid off (the counter value is 1000 if the small hit scenario a202g1 is used) (S1307: Yes), the processing of S1308 is performed. , The switching valve solenoid 650c2 is set to off (to close the V passage flow path 650e3, the switching valve solenoid 650c2 is set to off so that the switching valve 650b3 rotates upward). Then, the process proceeds to S1309.

In the process of S1309, it is determined whether the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h is the timing of the start of the round of the small hit scenario (S1309). For example, when the small hit scenario a202g1 is set (see FIG. 16B), the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h corresponding to the round start (round start) is 376, so that the small hit scenario counter 203h Determine if the value is 376.

In the processing of S1309, if the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h is a value corresponding to the start of the round (the counter value is 376 in the case of the small hit scenario a202g1) (S1309: Yes), the processing of S1310 is small. Set the second specific winning opening 650a to be opened and closed based on the winning scenario (set the opening / closing piece solenoid 650f2 to be on so that the opening / closing piece 650b of the second specific winning opening 650a is in the open state), and proceed to the processing of S1311. Transition.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1309, if the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h is not a value corresponding to the start of the round (S1309: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S1311.

In the process of S1311, it is determined whether the round end condition is satisfied (S1311). Here, in the present embodiment, it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are won in total while the second specific winning opening 650a is open.

If it is determined in the process of S1311 that the round end condition of the second specific winning opening 650a is satisfied (S1311: Yes), the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h is set to 1 from the counter value corresponding to the round end. The value is updated to the subtracted value (S1312), and the process proceeds to S1313. If it is determined in the process of S1311 that the round end condition is satisfied, the round end condition is cleared, and it is configured so that it is not determined that the round end condition is satisfied again in the control from the next time onward. There is.

Here, the small hit scenario is configured to update (add) the counter value of the small hit counter 203h and execute an operation corresponding to the updated (added) counter value, as in the above-mentioned big hit scenario. There is. Therefore, when the round end condition is satisfied by winning a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls in the second specific winning opening 650a, that is, the round ends due to a factor that does not accompany the passage of time (counter value update). (The second specific winning opening 650a is closed), the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h is configured to be updated to the value immediately before the counter value at which the corresponding operation control is executed (the second specific winning opening 650a is closed). It is configured so that the operation control is executed in the next small hit control process).

By doing so, the motion control executed by a factor that does not accompany the passage of time (update of the counter value) (for example, the motion control that ends the round by winning a predetermined number of balls) is based on the small hit scenario. Can be executed. Therefore, as a condition for ending the round of the second specific winning opening 650a, the operation control is performed based on the small hit scenario when the predetermined time has elapsed, and the operation control is performed without based on the small hit scenario when there are a predetermined number of prizes. It is not necessary to perform complicated control such as executing the above, and there is an effect that the design can be facilitated and the situation where both operation controls are mixed can be prevented.

If it is determined in the process of S1311 that the round end condition of the second specific winning opening 650a is not satisfied (S1311: No), the process proceeds to the process of S1313. In the process of S1313, it is determined whether the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h is a value corresponding to the end of the round (the counter value is 750 in the case of the small hit scenario a202g1) (S1313). If it is determined in the processing of S1313 that the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h corresponds to the end of the round (S1313: Yes), the second specific winning opening 650a is set to be closed in the processing of S1313. (The opening / closing piece solenoid 650f2 is set to off so that the opening / closing piece 650b of the second specified winning opening 650a is closed), and the process proceeds to S1315.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1313 that the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h does not correspond to the value corresponding to the end of the round (S1313: No), the process proceeds to the process of S1315.

In the process of S1315, the small hit ending control process (S1315) is executed. This small hit ending control process is a process executed during the ending period in the small hit game, that is, a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) from the end of the round of the small hit game to the start of the change of the special symbol. Is.

Next, the small hit ending control process (S1314) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing this small hit ending control process (S1314). This small hit ending control process (S1314) is a process executed in the small hit control process (see FIG. 36).

In the small hit ending control process, first, it is determined whether the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h is a value corresponding to the ending start (the counter value is 751 in the case of the small hit scenario a202g1) (S1401). If it is determined in the process of S1401 that the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h is a value corresponding to the ending start (S1401: Yes), the small hit ending command is set (S1402), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h does not correspond to the ending start (S1401: No), then the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h corresponds to the ending end (small hit). In the case of the scenario a202g1, it is determined whether the counter value is 1500) (S1403). If it is determined in the process of S1403 that the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h does not correspond to the end of the ending (S1403: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h corresponds to the end of the ending (S1403: Yes), the setting of the small hit scenario is cleared and the small hit scenario counter 203h is reset to 0 (S1403: Yes). S1404). Then, the process proceeds to S1405.

In S1405, it is determined whether the V flag 203f is set to ON (S1405). If it is determined in the process of S1405 that the V flag 203f is not set to ON (S1405: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the V flag 203f is set to ON (S1405: Yes), then the jackpot scenario corresponding to the jackpot type indicated by the value of the V flag 203f set in S705 of FIG. 30 is performed. Set (S1406). Then, the V flag 203f is set to off (S1407), and this processing is terminated.

Since all the small hit games are set as one round game in this embodiment, unlike the big hit scenario in which the operation control of the big hit game is executed, the process of setting the command related to the number of rounds and the interval period (round). Although it does not have a scenario corresponding to the interval period), when a small hit game having a plurality of rounds is provided, a scenario similar to the big hit scenario used in the above-mentioned big hit game may be set.

Further, in the present embodiment, the small hit scenario is set for the period during which the small hit game is executed. For example, after the small hit game is completed, until a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses. You may set a small hit scenario for the interval. With this configuration, for example, it is possible to set the V-passing valid period until 1 second has elapsed after the end of the small hit game. Therefore, it is possible to set a period set across different gaming states by one scenario, and there is an effect that the capacity of control processing can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, when the game ball is detected by the V detection switch 650e5 in the small hit game, the big hit is based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired by the fluctuation of the small hit. It is configured to determine the type, but is not limited to this, and is configured to acquire the value of the first hit type counter C2 based on the detection of the game ball by the V detection switch 650e5 and determine the jackpot type. You may.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 38 to 45, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (S1501). Specifically, a predetermined predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power cutoff processing flag is turned on, the power cutoff process of the main process (FIG. 39) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "momentary power failure") in this start-up process. It is determined whether or not the voltage was started during the execution of (see S1618) (S1502). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 39, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see S1615 in FIG. 39), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S1618. The power cutoff processing flag is turned on before the power cutoff process is executed, and the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off after the power cutoff process is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power cutoff process of S1618 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power cutoff process in progress flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S1502: No), the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S1618 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU221 of the audio lamp control device 113 (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1503).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1506. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1503: Yes), the process proceeds to S1504 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1503: No), the process proceeds to S1508.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1503: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1504. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power cutoff process of S1618 was completed after the momentary power failure occurred, or it was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1503: No), and the data is transferred to the S1508.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S1502: Yes), the start-up processing this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and the voice lamp control device 113 is being executed during the power-off processing of S1618. MPU221 was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power cutoff process is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S1504 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1504, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1504). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, it is confirmed whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1505: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1506). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1505: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1507), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S1508, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S1508). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1618 is executed (see S1617 in FIG. 39). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1618 is executed, the process of S1508 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S1618 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1508: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1509), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1510), and then an interrupt occurs. Set the permission (S2211) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1508 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the start-up process is started after the power supply is completely cut off, for example, so that the process from S1504 to S1506 is performed to S1508. This is the case when the process is reached or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset (without receiving the power cutoff command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1508: No), S1509, which is the clearing process of the work area of RAM223, is skipped, the process is shifted to S1510, the initial value of RAM223 is set (S1510), and then interrupt permission is set. (S1511). Then, it shifts to the main process.

It should be noted that the reason for skipping the clear processing of S1509 is that when the processing of S1508 is reached via the processing of S1504 to S1506, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1504. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the previous process of S1601 was executed (S1601), 1 millisecond. If the above time has not passed (S1601: No), the process proceeds to S1611 without performing the processes of S1602 to S1610. In the processing of S1601, whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed is mainly related to display (directing) in S1602 to S1610, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). On the other hand, it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1612, the variation display setting process of S1613, and the pseudo variation setting process of S1614 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1612 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent reception omission of the command transmitted from the main controller 110, and by executing the processing of S2313 and S1614 in a short cycle, it is received by the command determination processing. Based on the command, the settings related to the variable effect can be made without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1601 (S1601: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1603 to S1614 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1601: Yes). S1602). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S1608 described later (S1603), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1604). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not at the time of turning on the power, the process shifts to the process of S1605 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S1605, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold ball number display update process is executed (S1606). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has passed when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen. The setting is transmitted to the display control device 114 as a command. In the hold ball number display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (Ds3) according to the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 223d is performed.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1607). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process to set to perform the production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1608), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S1609). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 34 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1609, the liquid crystal display execution management process is executed (S1610). In the liquid crystal display execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1608 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal display effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S1609 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

When the processing of S1610 is completed, the effect counter 223g is updated (S1611), and the process proceeds to the processing of S1612.

In the process of S1612, a command determination process for performing a process according to a command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1612). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 40.

Then, after the command determination process, the variable display setting process is executed (S1613). In the variation display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 42.

After the processing of S1613, the pseudo-variation setting processing is executed (S1614). Pseudo-variation is the change start timing of the special symbol and the change of the normal symbol when the change of the normal symbol is newly started during the change of the special symbol and the change of the normal symbol is in progress when the change of the special symbol is stopped. It is a variable effect performed to match the start timing. The pseudo-variation setting process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 45, but it is determined whether or not the pseudo-variation is executed by the fusion symbol even after the fluctuation of the fusion symbol corresponding to the variation of the special symbol is stopped. Is executed. The process is executed.

When the processing of S1614 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1615). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1615 (S1615: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (S1617), and the power-off process is executed (S1618). After the power cutoff process is executed, the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off (S1619), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the information on the occurrence of the power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power cutoff occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1615 (S1615: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1616), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1616: No), the process returns to the process of S1601 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1616: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S1612) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1612). This command determination process (S1612) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. ..

In the command determination process (S1612), first, the first command received from the main control unit 110 among the unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the fluctuation pattern is generated from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not a command has been received (S1701). When the variation pattern command is received (S1701: Yes), the variation start flag 223e is turned on (S1702), the variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command (S1703), and the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 42) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

If the variation pattern command has not been received (S1701: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1704). Then, when the stop type command is received (S1704: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223f of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1705), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1706), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 42) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1704: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop command corresponding to the special symbol has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1707). Then, when the stop command is received (S1707: Yes), the pseudo-variation start setting process is executed (S1708), and this process is terminated. The details of this pseudo-variation start setting process (S1708) will be described with reference to FIG. 41. However, if the pseudo-variation is set according to the stop timing of the special symbol, the pseudo-variation is fused. The process to be executed is executed according to the symbol.

Here, the pseudo-variation start setting process (S1708) will be described with reference to FIG. 41. In the pseudo-variation start setting process (S1708), first, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-setting flag 223h is set to ON (S2101). When it is determined that the pseudo setting flag 223h is set to ON (S2101: Yes), the pseudo variation setting is set in the pseudo variation setting area 223i. The processing of S2103 to S2107 is executed. In the process of S2103, the value of the effect counter 223 g is acquired (S2103), and the effect type (continuous effect or off effect, variation period) set in the pseudo-variation setting area 223i and the acquired value of the effect counter 223 g are used. Pseudo-variation pattern is selected from the pseudo-variation pattern selection table 222d (see FIG. 18B) according to the effect type (S2104). A display pseudo start command indicating the selected pseudo fluctuation pattern is set (S2105). This display pseudo-variation start command is a command for notifying the display control device 114 of the content of the selected pseudo-variation pattern. After that, the pseudo-variation flag 223c is set to on (S2106), and the pseudo-setting flag 223h is set to off (S2107). After that, this process ends. If the pseudo-variation pattern is continuous, the pseudo-variation pattern is set to continue for a maximum of 30 seconds, and the out-of-order pseudo-variation pattern is blacked out when the pseudo-variation period set in the pseudo-variation setting area 223i elapses. It is processed and set for directing.

On the other hand, in the process of S2101, when it is determined that the pseudo setting flag 223h is off (S2101: No), a display stop command is set (S2102), and this process is terminated. The display stop command set here is a command indicating the stop of the special symbol. Based on this command, the fusion symbol and the special symbol auxiliary symbol are stopped and displayed (fixed stop display) in synchronization.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the execution of the pseudo-variation is set at the stop timing of the special symbol (the timing at which the stop command is received), the start of the pseudo-variation is set. Therefore, the pseudo-variation can be smoothly continuously executed, and the natural fusion effect variation can be provided to the player.

Here, the description will be continued by returning to FIG. 40. In the process of S1707, if the stop command has not been received (S1707: No), then it is determined whether or not the normal figure reserved ball count command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1709). In the process of S1709, when the normal figure holding ball number command is received (S1709: Yes), the received normal symbol holding ball number command is sent to the normal symbol holding ball number counter corresponding to the received normal figure holding ball number command. The value included in is stored in, and the reserved ball number counter 223j is incremented by 1 and updated (S1710). Specifically, the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 (the number of holdings of the variation display in the normal symbol M) is extracted from the received normal symbol holding ball number command, and this is used as the voice lamp control device. It is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d of 113. After that, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 223d and the hold number counter 223j is set (S1711), and this process is terminated. do.

Here, in the present embodiment, the display control device 114 sets the display of the reserved symbol based on the value of the reserved number counter 223j. In the configuration of the present embodiment, as described above, when a specific condition is satisfied, pseudo-variation is executed in the fusion symbol over the variation of a plurality of ordinary symbols. In the meantime, in order to make it look as if it is one fluctuation, the display of the reserved symbol of the normal symbol is not subtracted (the effect that the "black circle symbol" is reduced (digested) is executed), and it is the actual number of reserved symbols of the normal symbol. There will be a difference in the number of pending symbols displayed. However, as will be described later, if there is a difference between the actual number of reserved symbols and the number of displayed pending symbols, a special variation is set at the start of the variation of the fusion symbol corresponding to the variation of the ordinary symbol. A short variation that pseudo-stops in seconds is executed, the value of the hold number counter 223j is subtracted at that timing, and the hold symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is also updated based on it. As a result, the difference can be corrected to a normal state, and a defect that gives the player a sense of discomfort can be suppressed. In addition, in this embodiment, the configuration is set to pseudo-stop during the actual fluctuation of the normal symbol, but if the hold corresponding to the next fluctuation in which the difference occurs is not stored, the fusion symbol is pseudo 2 It may be configured to perform an effect of digesting the hold in which the difference has occurred by varying 1 per second.

Here, since the normal symbol reservation ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 or when the normal symbol lottery is performed, it is through. Every time the passage through the gate is detected, or every time the lottery of the normal symbol is performed, the value of the normal symbol hold ball counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 is set by the process of S1710 to the normal symbol hold ball of the main control device 110. It can be adjusted to the value of the number counter 203c. Therefore, for example, even if the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the through gate passage is detected. At the time or at the time of lottery of the normal symbol, the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 can be modified to match the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. Further, for example, when the process of S1711 is executed, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 223d and the hold number counter 223j is issued. Set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the hold ball number symbol corresponding to the value of the hold number counter 223j is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1709, when the normal figure reserved ball number command is not received (S1709: No), then it is determined whether or not the normal figure fluctuation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 (S1712). Then, when the normal map fluctuation pattern command is received (S1712: Yes), the normal map fluctuation start flag 223b is set to ON (S1713), and the normal map fluctuation pattern is extracted from the received normal map fluctuation pattern command (S1713). S1714). After that, this process ends.

In the process of S1712, when the normal figure fluctuation pattern command is not received (S1712: No), then it is determined whether or not the normal figure winning information command is received from the main control device 110 (S1715). Then, when the Fuzu winning information command is received (S1715: Yes), the winning information based on the received Fuzu winning information command is stored in the Fuzu winning information storage area 223a (S1716), and this process is terminated. .. Here, the winning information includes information based on each value of the second random number counter C4 and the general map variation type counter CS2.

In the process of S1715, when the normal figure winning information command is not received (S1715: No), it is determined whether or not the normal figure stop command is received (S1717). When it is determined that the normal map stop command has been received (S1717: Yes), the normal map stop command for display is set (S1718). This display normal map stop command is a command for notifying the display control device 114 that it is the normal map stop timing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal figure stop command has not been received (S1717: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process corresponding to the received command is executed (S1717). ), End this process. The processing of S1719 is, for example, if the other command is a command used in the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and the command is used in the display control device 114. The command is set so that the command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the variation display setting process (S1613) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S1613). This variation display setting process (S1613) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. Various display variation pattern commands are generated and set based on the various variation pattern commands received from the main controller 110. Further, when the pseudo setting flag 223h is set to ON, the pseudo fluctuation start setting process (see S1708 in FIG. 41) is executed.

In the variation display setting process (S1613), first, it is determined whether the variation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1801). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S1801: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S1804 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223e is on (S1801: Yes), the fluctuation pattern selection process is executed (S1802). The details of this fluctuation pattern selection process (S1802) will be described later with reference to FIG. 43.

When the processing of S1802 is completed, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the acquired variation pattern type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (. S1803). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

Next, in the process of S1804, it is determined whether or not the normal map fluctuation start flag 223b provided in the RAM 233 is set to ON (S1804). Then, when it is determined that the normal map fluctuation start flag 223b is not on (that is, off) (S1804: No), the normal map fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110. The process proceeds to S1807. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal map fluctuation start flag 223b is on (S1804: Yes), the normal map fluctuation pattern selection process is executed (S1805). The details of this normal map fluctuation pattern selection process (S1805) will be described later with reference to FIG. 43.

When the processing of S1805 is completed, a display normal map fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the acquired normal map fluctuation pattern type, and the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. (S1806). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

Next, in the process of S1807, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223f provided in the RAM 233 is set to ON (S1807). When it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223f is not on (that is, it is off) (S1807: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control unit 110, so that this variable display is displayed. The setting process is terminated, and the process of S1812 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223f is on (S1807: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223f is turned off (S1808), and then in the process of S1706 of the command determination process (see FIG. 40). The stop symbol in the middle symbol sequence of the fusion symbol in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is extracted (S1809).

Next, based on the stop symbol in the middle symbol row of the fusion symbol instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110, the stop symbol in the middle symbol row of the fusion symbol of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 is set. (S1810), and set the display stop type command (S1811). After that, the process of S1812 is executed. The display stop type command is a command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop symbol of the middle symbol string of the fusion symbol.

In the process of S1812, it is determined that it is the pseudo stop timing of the pseudo-continuous map fluctuation (S1812). Pseudo-continuous symbol fluctuation is 2 seconds when the fluctuation of the fusion symbol corresponding to the normal symbol is set when the value of the normal symbol hold ball counter 223d and the hold count counter 223j is different. This is a special fluctuation pattern in which the normal symbol starts to fluctuate again after a pseudo stop at. In the process of S1802, it is determined whether or not it is the timing of this pseudo stop. When it is determined that it is the timing of the pseudo stop (S1812: Yes), the value of the hold number counter 223j is subtracted by 1 and updated (S1813), and the values of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 223d and the hold number counter 223j are used. A display-reserved ball count command based on is set (S1814). After that, this process ends. With this configuration, the hold number counter 223j is decremented by 1 at the timing of the pseudo stop, and one hold symbol is also consumed. Therefore, the actual number of holds and the number of displayed holds can be corrected. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1812 that it is not the pseudo stop timing of the pseudo-continuous map fluctuation (S1812: No), this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the variation pattern selection process (S1802) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this fluctuation pattern selection process (S1802). The variation pattern selection process (S1802) is a process executed in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.

When the variation pattern selection process is executed, first, the variation start flag 223e is set to off (S1901), and then in the process of S1703 of the command determination process (see FIG. 40), in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command. The variation pattern type is acquired from RAM 223 (S1902).

Then, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-variation flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1903). When it is determined that the pseudo-variation flag 223c is set to on (S1903: Yes), the pseudo-variation flag 223c is set to off (S1904). Next, the end of the pseudo-variation is set, a display command indicating the end of the pseudo-variation is generated, the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (1905), and then the process proceeds to S1906. .. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1903 that the pseudo-variation flag 223c is not on (that is, off) (S1903: No), the processes of S1904 and S1905 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S1906. In the process of S1906, the value of the effect counter 223 g is acquired (S1906). Next, the variation pattern is determined from the variation pattern selection table 222a or the small hit variation pattern selection table 222c corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol based on the acquired variation pattern and the value of the effect counter 223g (S1907).

When the processing of S1907 is completed, it is determined whether or not the result of determining whether the special symbol of the fluctuation is correct or not is incorrect (S1908). If the result of determining whether the special symbol of the change is correct or not is not out of place (that is, it is a hit) (S1908: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the special symbol of the change is wrong (S1908: Yes), it is determined whether or not there is a hit within the 2 hold of the next normal symbol (S1909). If there is no hit within 2 hold of the next normal symbol (S1909: No), this process ends. If there is a hit within 2 hold of the next normal symbol (S1909: Yes), the pseudo setting flag 223h is set to ON (S1910: Yes), and the continuous pseudo fluctuation is set in the pseudo fluctuation setting area 223i in a maximum of 30 seconds (S1909: Yes). After S1911), this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the normal map fluctuation pattern selection process (S1805) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this normal map fluctuation pattern selection process (S1805). This normal map variation pattern selection process (S1805) is a process executed in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.

When the normal map fluctuation pattern selection process is executed, first, the normal map fluctuation start flag 223b is turned off (S2001), and then, in the process of S1714 of the command determination process (see FIG. 40), it is extracted from the normal map fluctuation pattern command. The normal map variation pattern type in the variation effect is acquired from RAM 223 (S2002). When the processing of S2002 is completed, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d is decremented by 1 and updated (S2003). After that, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is changing (S2004). If the special symbol is not changing (S2004: No), then it is determined whether the pseudo-variation flag 223c is set to ON (that is, whether the fusion symbol is executing the pseudo-variation) (S2006). If it is determined that the pseudo-variation flag 223c is not set to on (that is, the fusion symbol is not pseudo-variable) (S2006: No), then whether the pseudo-setting flag 223h is set to on (that is,). , Whether the execution start of the pseudo-variation is confirmed) (S2007).

When it is determined that the pseudo setting flag 223h is off (S2007: No), the value of the hold number counter 223j is decremented by 1 and updated (S2008). Here, at the timing when the normal symbol variation pattern selection process (S1805), which is a process for starting a new variation of the normal symbol, is being executed, the fusion symbol is not pseudo-variated, and the start of the pseudo-variation is also determined. If not, the fusion symbol will also be displayed in a variable manner at the timing when the fluctuation of the normal symbol starts, so the value of the hold number counter 223j is subtracted and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The number of symbols is also digested (erasing one) and updated.

It is determined whether the value of the hold number counter 223j and the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 223d are equal (S2009). When it is determined that the value of the reserved ball number counter 223d and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d are different values (S2009: No), the pseudo-continuous normal figure corresponding to the type of the extracted normal figure fluctuation pattern is obtained. A fluctuation pattern is set (S2011). After that, the process of S2012 is executed. This pseudo-continuous map fluctuation pattern is provided corresponding to each fluctuation pattern shown in FIGS. 17 (a) to 17 (b), and is temporarily stopped 2 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, and then the fluctuation is restarted. , The variation effect of the fusion symbol similar to the variation pattern of the corresponding normal symbol is executed. In the present embodiment, during the time-saving game, a display is executed in which the game is temporarily stopped in 2 seconds, then re-varies for 1 second, and then stops again.

On the other hand, in the process of S2009, when it is determined that the value of the reserved ball number counter 223d and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d are the same value (S2009: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223g is acquired. , The type of the normal map variation pattern (variation effect of the fusion symbol) is selected from the normal map variation pattern selection table 222b based on the normal map variation pattern type and the value of the effect counter 223 g (S2010). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2004, when the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S2004: Yes), and in the process of S2006, when it is determined that the pseudo-variation flag 223c is set to ON. (S2006: Yes), and when it is determined that the pseudo setting flag 223h is set to ON in the processing of S2007 (S2007: Yes), the variation period based on the acquired normal map variation pattern type is the first. 3 The variable display of the normal symbol auxiliary symbol displayed in the normal symbol display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 81 is set (S2005), and then this process is terminated. In this way, when the pseudo fluctuation is executed in the fusion symbol, the fluctuation of the fusion symbol is not started in response to the start of the fluctuation of the new normal symbol, and the fluctuation is started only in the normal symbol auxiliary symbol. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the problem that the pseudo-variation of the fusion pattern becomes complicated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the pseudo-variation setting process (S1614) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this pseudo-variation setting process (S1614). This pseudo-variation setting process (S1614) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.

When the pseudo-variation setting process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-variation flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2201). When it is determined that the pseudo-variation flag 223c is set to ON (S2201: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the pseudo-variation being executed in the third symbol display device 81 has elapsed (S2202). .. The fluctuation time of the pseudo-variation executed in the third symbol display device 81 is set in S1911 in FIG. 43 or S2209 or S2212 in FIG. 45, and if this fluctuation time has not elapsed (S2202: No), the present invention. Finish the process and return to the main process.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2202, if the fluctuation time of the pseudo fluctuation being executed has elapsed (S2202: Yes), the pseudo fluctuation flag 223c is set to off (S2203), and the pseudo fluctuation is stopped by the stop type command. The stop is set by the set stop symbol (the symbol displayed in the middle symbol due to the pseudo fluctuation) (S2204). Next, a display command indicating the stop of the pseudo fluctuation is set (S2205), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2201 that the pseudo fluctuation flag 223c is not set to on (that is, set to off) (S2201: No), 5 seconds before the fluctuation of the special symbol that is out of alignment is stopped. (S2206). If it is determined that it is not 5 seconds before the fluctuation of the special symbol that is out of alignment stops (S2206: No), this process is terminated.

When it is determined that it is 5 seconds before the fluctuation of the special symbol of the deviation is stopped (S2206: Yes), it is determined whether the pseudo setting flag 223h provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2207). If it is determined that the pseudo setting flag 223h is set to ON (S2207: Yes), this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the pseudo setting flag 223h is not set on (that is, set to off) (S2207: No), it is determined whether or not there is a hit within 2 hold of the next normal symbol (S2207: No). S2208). If it is determined that there is a hit within 2 holds of the next normal symbol (S2208: Yes), the continuous pseudo-variation is set in a maximum of 30 seconds (S2209). Next, the pseudo setting flag 223h is set to ON (S2210), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no hit within the 2 hold of the next normal symbol (S2208: No), it is the period during which the change of the normal symbol that stops later is executed than the timing at which the change of the special symbol stops. (S2211). Here, the period during which the change of the normal symbol that stops after the timing at which the change of the special symbol stops is executed is the change of the special symbol in which the change of the currently changing normal symbol is executing the change. It is a period during which it can be determined that the fluctuation of the normal symbol that will start to fluctuate during the fluctuation of the special symbol will continue to fluctuate even after the fluctuation of the special symbol that is currently fluctuating has stopped.

If it is determined in the process of S2211 that it is not the period during which the change of the normal symbol that stops after the timing at which the change of the special symbol stops is executed (S2211: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the change of the normal symbol that stops later is executed than the timing at which the change of the special symbol stops (S2211: Yes), the change of the normal symbol being executed and the deviation pseudo-variation The off-pseudo fluctuation is set by t1 (see FIG. 10A) from the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol being executed to the end of the fluctuation of the normal symbol so that the stop timings match (S2212). ). Next, the pseudo setting flag 223h is set to ON (S2213), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by displaying the variation between the normal symbol and the special symbol together as one variation in the fusion symbol, the complicated game playability is easily notified to the player, and the game can be easily played. Can be done. Further, since the flow speed of the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is reduced upstream of the first entry port 650a so as to correspond to the period in which the normal symbol hits by the crune member 660, the game ball is played by the launcher. Even during the period when the ball is not fired, the chance of winning a prize in the first ball entrance 65a is increased.

Further, when the deviation fluctuation of the special symbol is executed, the judgment result within the 2 hold of the normal symbol is determined, and if the holding ball to be hit is stored, the period longer than the end of the fluctuation. Since the determination result of the deviation is not notified and the pseudo-variation is executed, the variation of the special symbol can be connected by the variation of the fusion symbol of one variation and produced by hitting the next normal symbol.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 46 to 62, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 46, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is set in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs initially processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the read thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d, so that the NOR type ROM has a high speed. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2301), and the display control device 114 is capable of executing various controls on the third symbol display device 81. To start.

Here, the boot process (S2301) will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S2301) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the third symbol display device 81 by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it can sufficiently store not only image data but also a control program and the like, while controlling. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2401). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2402). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2401.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to the predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2402, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instructions. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S2402, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts (S2403). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S2404), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S2301 in FIG. 46) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S2302 in FIG. 46) (S2405), the execution of the boot program is completed and the boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S2301) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, in the display control device 114. Since high processing performance can be maintained, diversified or complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 47, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2401 includes all the remaining boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2401 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S2402. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is indicated by an instruction pointer. It may execute the process set in 231a. Then, the processes of S2403 to S2405 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S2401 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfers a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2401. And S2402 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processes of S2403 to S2405 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. 1 It may be stored in the program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, the process of S2403 to S2405 may be executed without performing the process of S2401 and S2402. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary staging unit in the MPU 231, which is possible after the boot process, earlier.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 46. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2302). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the register group in the MPU 231, the I / O device, and the like. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct to execute the display process. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2303). This transfer instruction includes a start address and a final address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, transfer destination information (here, resident video RAM 235), and a transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads out the information of a part of this register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2303, then the power-on variable image A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the image data to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S2304). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. Is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2304, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S2305). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 60A) described later. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S4502 in FIG. 60 (b)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, during that time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 48 (b)), a simple command determination process (FIG. 48 (b) S2608) and the simple display setting process (see S2609 in FIG. 48 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the character ROM 234 can be stored in the resident video RAM 235. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image when the power is turned on is the third. By displaying the image on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, since the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. By using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, so that the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, the ball entered the first ball entry port 64a (starting prize), and the start instruction of the variation effect was controlled by the voice lamp from the main control device 110. When the display variation pattern command is received via the device 113, that is, when the variation pattern command for display is received, the variation image at power-on can be immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and a simple variation effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, so that it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery is possible. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S2305, the interrupt permission is set (S2306), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2306, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 48 (a). FIG. 48A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the command interrupt process is executed by the MPU 231.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2501), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 48 (b). FIG. 48B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 23) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing process or display process is completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 48 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2601), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2601: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. A command determination process (S2602) is executed so that the display device 81 can display the image, and then a display setting process (S2603) is executed.

In the command determination process (S2602), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. If the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. Set the data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process (S2602), all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 49 to 57.

In the display setting process (S2603), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2602) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S2604). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2603) or the simple display setting process (S2609). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S2605). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S2606). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2605), which are determined in the task process (S2604), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 23 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 62.

Next, the update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2607). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S2607, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command and the stop symbol counter are compared, and the third symbol display device is used. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2601 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2601: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2608) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S2609) is executed to shift to the process of S2604.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 49 to 57, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S2602), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 49, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2701), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2701: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2701: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S2603) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2702), and then the command. The type of the unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S2703).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2704), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2704: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2705), the process returns to S2701.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S2705) will be described with reference to FIG. 50 (a). FIG. 50A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S2801).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed in the main control device 110 at a distance of several seconds or more, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly for display. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S2801, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2801 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2802).

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2801, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counting counter 233h (S2803), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233f to 0 (S2804), set both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag to off (S2805)), and end this process.

By executing the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 50A), the display setting processing sets the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2801 while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2804. The drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the variable display data table, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed is specified, and at the same time, S2802 The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the processing, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table is measured by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2803, and when the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 49. In the processing of S2704, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2704: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2706). If there is a display variable type command (S2706: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S2707), and the process returns to S2701.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2707) will be described with reference to FIG. 50 (b). FIG. 50B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display (corresponding to the stop type table is determined (S2901)), the stop type table and the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 48 (b)). ) Is compared with the value of the stop symbol counter that is updated each time, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set (S2902).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2902 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is set. Set to on (S2903), end this stop type command processing, and return to the command determination processing.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2902 is described. In the above-mentioned task processing (S2604), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S2902 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S2903, and the specified stop is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2901 in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is completely out of order. Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete deviation is set by the process of S2902.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 will have a "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out of order". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in reality, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 is completely disengaged. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 49, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2706, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S2706: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a hit-related command among the unprocessed commands (S2708), and the hit-related command is determined. If there is a command (S2708: Yes), the hit-related command process is executed (S2709), and the process returns to the process of S2701.

Here, the details of the hit-related command processing (S2709) will be described with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing hit-related command processing. This hit-related command processing includes hit-related commands received from the voice lamp control device 113 (display jackpot opening command, display round number command, display final round command, display jackpot interval command, display jackpot ending command, and display. It is a process for executing the process corresponding to the small hit opening command for small hit, the small hit ending command for display, and the V passage command for display).

In the hit-related command processing (S2709), first, it is determined whether or not there is a display jackpot opening command among the unprocessed new commands (S3001), and if there is a display jackpot opening command (S3001: Yes). , The jackpot opening command process is executed (S3002), and the process proceeds to the process of S3003.

Here, the details of the jackpot opening command processing (S3002) will be described with reference to FIG. 52 (a). FIG. 52A is a flowchart showing the jackpot opening command process (S3002). This jackpot opening command process (S3002) is for executing the process corresponding to the jackpot opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the jackpot opening command processing, first, the jackpot opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3101). After that, the transfer data table corresponding to the jackpot opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3102), and the time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the set jackpot opening display data table (S3103). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3104). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S3105), the jackpot opening command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the hit-related command processing.

Returning to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display jackpot opening command among the unprocessed new commands in the processing of S3001 (S3001: No), the processing of S3002 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S3003. In the processing of S3003, it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S3003), and if there is a display round number command (S3003: Yes), the round number command processing is executed. Then (S3004), the process proceeds to S3005.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S3004) will be described with reference to FIG. 52 (b). FIG. 52B is a flowchart showing the round number command process (S3004). This round number command process (S3004) is for executing the process corresponding to the round number command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the round number command process, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3201). After that, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3202). Then, the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the set round number display data table (S3203). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3204). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S3205), the round number command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the hit-related command processing.

Returning to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display round number command among the unprocessed new commands in the processing of S3003 (S3003: No), the processing of S3004 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S3005. In the processing of S3005, it is determined whether or not there is a final round command for display among the unprocessed commands (S3005), and if there is a final round command for display (S3005: Yes), the final round command processing is executed. Then (S3006), the process proceeds to S3007.

Here, the details of the final round command processing (S3006) will be described with reference to FIG. 53 (a). FIG. 53A is a flowchart showing the final round command processing (S3006). This final round command process (S3006) is for executing the process corresponding to the final round command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the final round command processing, first, the final round display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3301). After that, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3302). Then, based on the set final round display data table, the time data is set in the time counter 233h (S3303). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3304). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S3305), the final round command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the hit-related command processing.

Returning to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no final display round command among the unprocessed new commands in the processing of S3005 (S3005: No), the processing of S3006 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S3007. In the processing of S3007, it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot interval command for display among the unprocessed commands (S3007), and if there is a jackpot interval command for display (S3007: Yes), the jackpot interval command processing is executed. Then (S3008), the process proceeds to S3009.

Here, the details of the jackpot interval command processing (S3008) will be described with reference to FIG. 53 (b). FIG. 53B is a flowchart showing the jackpot interval command processing (S3008). This jackpot interval command process (S3008) is for executing the process corresponding to the jackpot interval command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the jackpot interval command processing, first, the jackpot interval display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3401). After that, the transfer data table corresponding to the jackpot interval display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3402), and the time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the set jackpot interval display data table (S3403). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3404). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S3405), the jackpot interval command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the hit-related command processing.

Returning to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display jackpot interval command among the unprocessed new commands in the processing of S3007 (S3007: No), the processing of S3008 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S3009. In the processing of S3009, it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S3009), and if there is a jackpot ending command for display (S3009: Yes), the jackpot ending command processing is executed. Then (S3010), the process proceeds to S3011.

Here, the details of the jackpot ending command processing (S3010) will be described with reference to FIG. 54 (a). FIG. 54A is a flowchart showing the jackpot ending command process (S3010). This jackpot ending command process (S3010) is for executing the process corresponding to the jackpot ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the jackpot ending command processing, first, the jackpot ending display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3501). After that, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3502). Then, based on the set jackpot ending display data table, the time data is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S3503). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3504). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S3505), the jackpot ending command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the hit-related command processing.

Returning to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display jackpot ending command among the unprocessed new commands in the processing of S3009 (S3009: No), the processing of S3010 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S3011. In the processing of S3011, it is determined whether or not there is a small hit opening command for display among the unprocessed commands (S3011), and if there is a small hit opening command for display (S3011: Yes), the small hit opening command is used. The process is executed (S3012), and the process proceeds to the process of S3013.

Here, the details of the small hit opening command processing (S3012) will be described with reference to FIG. 54 (b). FIG. 54B is a flowchart showing the small hit opening command process (S3012). This small hit opening command process (S3012) is for executing the process corresponding to the small hit opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the small hit opening command process, first, the small hit opening display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3601). After that, the transfer data table corresponding to the small hit opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3602), and the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the set small hit opening display data table (S3603). ). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3604). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S3605), the small hit opening command process is terminated, and the process returns to the hit related command process.

Returning to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no small hit opening command for display among the unprocessed new commands in the process of S3011 (S3011: No), the process of S3012 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3013. In the processing of S3013, it is determined whether or not there is a small hit ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S3013), and if there is a small hit ending command for display (S3013: Yes), the small hit ending command is used. The process is executed (S3014), and the process proceeds to the process of S3015.

Here, the details of the small hit ending command processing (S3014) will be described with reference to FIG. 55 (a). FIG. 55 (a) is a flowchart showing the small hit ending command process (S3014). This small hit ending command process (S3014) is for executing the process corresponding to the small hit ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the small hit ending command processing, first, the small hit ending display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3701). After that, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3702). Then, based on the set small hit ending display data table, the time data is set in the time counter 233h (S3703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3704). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S3705), the small hit ending command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the hit-related command processing.

Returning to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display small hit ending command among the unprocessed new commands in the process of S3013 (S3013: No), the process of S3014 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3015. In the processing of S3015, it is determined whether or not there is a display V-pass command among the unprocessed commands (S3015), and if there is a display V-pass command (S3015: Yes), the V-pass command process is executed. Then (S3016), this process is terminated.

Here, the details of the V-pass command processing (S3016) will be described with reference to FIG. 55 (b). S3015 is a flowchart showing V-pass command processing (S3016). This V-pass command process (S3016) is for executing the process corresponding to the V-pass command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the V-pass command processing, first, the V-pass display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3801). After that, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3802). Then, the time data is set in the timekeeping counter 233h based on the set V passage display data table (S3803). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3804). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S3805), the V-pass command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the hit-related command processing.

Returning to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display V passage command among the unprocessed new commands in the process of S3015 (S3015: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 49, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2708, if it is determined that there is no hit-related command (S2708: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display pseudo start command among the unprocessed commands (S2710), and the display is used. If there is a pseudo start command (S2710: Yes), the pseudo variation display process is executed (S2711), and the process returns to the process of S2701.

Here, the details of the pseudo-variation display process (S2711) will be described with reference to FIG. 56. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a pseudo-variation display process. This pseudo-variation display process is a process for executing a process corresponding to the display pseudo start command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the pseudo-variation display process, first, a pseudo-display data table of the pseudo-variation pattern based on the stop type corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3901). After that, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3902). Then, based on the set pseudo display data table, the time data is set in the time counter 233h (S3903). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3904). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S3905), the round number command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the hit-related command processing.

Returning to FIG. 49, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2710, if it is determined that there is no display pseudo start command (S2710: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2712), and the rear surface is determined. If there is an image change command (S2712: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S2713), and the process returns to the process of S2701.

Here, the details of the rear image change command process (S2713) will be described with reference to FIG. 57 (a). FIG. 57A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process. This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the rear image change command process (S2713), first, the rear image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S4503) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the on state is set to on. (S4001). Then, among the rear image discrimination flags provided for each rear image type (back surface A, rear surface B), the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command is turned on, and the other rear surface is used. The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the image type is set to off (S4002), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag set by the process of S4001 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is specified from the rear image discrimination flag set by the process of S4002. .. When the specified back image type is back B, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those back images is not resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the task processing (S2604), when it is specified to display either the back surface A or the back surface B according to the back surface type of the rear image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination set by S4002 is specified. From the flag, the type of back image to be displayed at that time is specified, and the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. The RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the processing of S4002, when it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear image change command may be extracted and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 49. In the processing of S2712, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S2712: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2714), and there is an error command. If (S2714: Yes), error command processing is executed (S2715), and the process returns to S2701 processing.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S2715) will be described with reference to FIG. 57 (b). FIG. 57B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S4101). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S4102). Ends the process and returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S4101, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S4102 is determined and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the error discrimination flag corresponding to all the error types indicated by each error command is set to ON in the process in S4102. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 49. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S2714 (S2714: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2716), and the process returns to the process of S2701.

In the processing of S2701 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2701: Yes). ), The processing of S2702 to S2716 is executed again. Then, the processes of S2701 to S2716 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S2701 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area (S2701: No). ), Ends this command judgment process.

The simple command determination process (S2608) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 48B) is also the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment processing, only the commands required to display the power-on image, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are used from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Extract and execute the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 50 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 50 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, and for other commands, Performs the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 50A) executed in this case, the display data table corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image at power-on is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2801. In addition, the image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variable image required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable dynamic image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2802, the process of writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S2603), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 58, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S4201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S4201: No). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, the process of S4202 to S4204 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S4205. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S4201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S4202), S4203 to S4204 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S4203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S4203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S4203: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S4204).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 59 (a). FIG. 59A is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error discrimination flag is referred to and all the error discrimination set to ON is performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S4301).

In the task processing (S2604), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S4301, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S4302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 58. After the warning image setting process (S4204) or in the process of S4203, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is turned off (S4203: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4205.

In S4205, the pointer update process is executed (S4205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 59 (b). FIG. 59B is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S4401). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so that the respective values are sequentially started from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the process of S4401, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S4402). As a result, if it is End information (S4402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S4403), and if it is a demo display data table (S4403: Yes), the display data The time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counting counter 233h (S4404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S4405), and this processing is completed. Then, return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demo effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S4403, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S4403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S4403: No). S4406), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawing contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S4402: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the process returns to FIG. 58 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4206). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the drawing content developed in the processing of S4206 together with the warning image expanded earlier, and the display coordinates are displayed for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing, such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S4207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S4208). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S4208: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is 0 or less (S4208: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmed display flag is on. (S4209).

As a result, if the definite display flag is off (S4209: Yes), the definite display effect has not been performed yet, and it is time to perform the definite display effect. Therefore, first, the definite display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d. It is set (S4210), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4211). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the definite display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S4212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4213). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S4214), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S4215), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final symbol display effect of the stopped symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. The drawing content can be set as such. Further, by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the confirmed display data table, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect. Further, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. A wide variety of staging images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S4215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S2604), from the start of the fluctuation until the predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S4215, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S4209, if the confirmation display flag is on (S4209: No), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S4216). If the demo display flag is off (S4216: Yes), it means that the value of the time counting counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that the demo display data table is displayed. The contents are cleared by setting the buffer 233d (S4217) and then writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4218). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S4219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4220), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S4221), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the opening command is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set so that is displayed.

In the process of S4216, if the demo display flag is on (S4216: No), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S2609) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 48 (b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on is completed, the image of the variation image at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the stop type command for display for a predetermined time. The process of setting the display data table specified to be stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61, the details of the transfer setting process (S2605) described above, which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 60A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4501: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S4502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 60 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S4501, that is, if it is off (S4501: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S4503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 61.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S4502), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S2605) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 60 (b). FIG. 60B is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S4502).

In this resident image transfer setting process (S4502), first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S4601), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S4601). S4601: Yes), and further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S4602). In the process of S4602, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237 after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. .. When it is determined by the process of S4602 that the transfer process has not been completed (S4602: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S4602: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S4603. Further, as a result of the processing of S4601, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S4601: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S4603.

In the process of S4603, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S4603), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S4603: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S4604), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 describes the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S4603 (S4603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S4605), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 48 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2608 in FIG. 48 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S2609 in FIG. 48 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 49 to 57) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 58 and 59) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 61) (see S4501: No in FIG. 60 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, with reference to FIG. 61, a normal image transfer setting process (S4503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2605) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S4503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S4205) of the display setting process (S2603) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S4701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S4702), and if it is transfer data information (S4702: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is stored from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source final address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S4703) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S4704), and the process proceeds to S4705.

Further, in the process of S6502, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S4702: No), the processes of S4703 and S4704 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S4705. In the process of S4705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S4705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S4705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S4706).

In the process of S4706, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S4706 that the transfer process has not been completed (S4706: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S4706: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S4707. Further, as a result of the processing of S4705, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S4705: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S4707.

In the process of S4707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S4707), and if the transfer start flag is on (S4707: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S4708), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S4703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S4713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S4707: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag is on (S4709).

If the rear image change flag is on (S4709: Yes), it means that the rear image is changed. Therefore, after the rear image change flag is set to off (S4710), the rear image provided for each rear image type is set. Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S4711). Further, the start address (storage source start address), the final address (storage source final address), and the transfer destination (normally) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored. The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S4712), and the process proceeds to S4713.

In the process of S4709, if the rear image change flag is not on and is off (S4709: No), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

When the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the rear A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so that the image should be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. No data exists. Therefore, in the process of S4709, if the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the rear surface A, the normal image transfer process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S4713, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4713). The discrimination in the process of S4713 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. That is, the stored state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the stored state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is a normal video. It is determined that the image data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

If, as a result of the processing of S4713, the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4713: No), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S4713 (S4713: Yes), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S4714). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 includes the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the given address. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the processing of S4714, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S4715), and this normal transfer setting processing is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that became the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is the stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, among the image data used in the rear image, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2606), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2604) and the parameters (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α-blending information) required for drawing each sprite. , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2605), the drawing list shown in FIG. 23 is generated (S4801). That is, in the processing of S6601, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2604). Then, the specified stored RAM type and address are associated with the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2605), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller 237 (S4802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address is read in order from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. Then, in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the image expanded in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed in parallel at the same time. Can be done.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j after the processing of S4802 (S4803). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when the value is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 48 (b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the result of the lottery of the special symbol is a specific lottery result (small hit), the variable ball entry means (second variable winning device 650) in which the ball can be won. ), In the variable ball entry means, a specific area (V detection switch 650e5) that gives a privilege to the player by passing the ball, and a guided state and difficulty in passing the ball to the specific area. A guiding means (V gate 650d) that can be changed at predetermined intervals is provided in a regulated state. Then, when a specific lottery result is continuously won, at least one of the consecutively won specific lottery results is configured to be in a gaming state in which the ball easily passes through the specific area. There is.

As a result, it becomes possible to provide a player with a more advantageous gaming state when a specific lottery result is continuously won than when a specific lottery result is won independently, and the player can be continuously specified. There is an effect that the decrease in motivation for playing due to winning the lottery result can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment described above, when the small hit (small hit A) which is a specific lottery result is continuously won, that is, when the specific lottery result is continuously won, the ball covers a specific area. The configuration is shown in which a small hit game (advantageous privilege game) that is easy to pass is easily executed, but if the configuration is such that the advantageous privilege game can be easily executed by winning a specific lottery result multiple times, the present embodiment is used. A configuration other than the configuration used may be used.

For example, when a specific lottery result is won a plurality of times in a predetermined order, a configuration may be used in which the advantageous privilege game is easily executed. It should be noted that the predetermined order is a predetermined order, such as when the specific lottery result used in the present embodiment is won a plurality of times in succession, or when the specific lottery result and the loss are alternately repeated. The specific lottery results include those that win multiple times. In particular, by presetting the order including the case where the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order as a predetermined order, even if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the advantageous privilege game advantageous to the player is executed. Since it may be easier, there is an effect that the player can always have expectations.

Further, when the small hits are continuously won, the total time of the game time of the small hit game and the fluctuation time of the special symbol corresponding to the second small hit among the continuous small hits is the total time of the V gate 650d. It is configured so that it does not become an integral multiple of the operation cycle.

As a result, when small hits occur continuously, the continuous small hits do not cause the ball to flow down at the same timing with respect to the V gate 650d operating in a predetermined operation cycle. That is, by continuously generating small hit games, it is possible to make the ball flow down at different timings with respect to the V gate 650d operating in a predetermined operation cycle. Therefore, when the player wins the small hit game in succession, it is possible to provide a more advantageous gaming state than the case where the player wins the small hit game alone, and the player wins the small hit in succession. There is an effect that the decrease in motivation for playing can be suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the total time of the game time of the small hit game and the fluctuation time of the second special figure fluctuation display among the continuous small hits is the time corresponding to an integral multiple of the operation cycle of the V gate 650d. On the other hand, the V gate 650d is configured to be different by the time (1.5 seconds) or more in which it is in the induced state.

As a result, among the continuous small hit games, the timing at which the ball is allowed to flow down to the V gate 650d in the first small hit game is V in the second small hit game when the V gate 650d is in the regulated state. The timing at which the ball flows down to the gate 650d can increase the probability that the V gate 650d will be in the guided state, and when the player wins the small hit game in succession, he or she wins the small hit game alone. It is possible to provide a more advantageous gaming state than in the case of the above, and there is an effect that the decrease in the motivation for playing due to the continuous winning of small hits can be suppressed.

It is desirable that the time to be different is equal to or more than the time (1.5 seconds) that the V gate 650d is in the induced state with respect to an integral multiple of the operation cycle of the V gate 650d, but it may be less than that. .. In such a configuration, for example, when the operating cycle (5 seconds) of the V gate 650d is different from the time (for example, 1 second) shorter than the time (1.5 seconds) in which the V gate 650d is in the induced state. By winning small hits in succession for a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times), it is preferable to configure the V-gate 650d to differ by one lap (5 seconds) of the operation cycle.

With this configuration, for example, when the small hit game is continuously executed five times, the small hit game that can pass V is executed at least once among the consecutively executed small hit games. There is an effect that when a person is continuously won a small hit, it is possible to provide a more advantageous gaming state than when a single small hit is won.

Further, in the present embodiment, a period that is not an integral multiple of the period (1.5 seconds) in which the V gate 650d is in the induction state is set as the operation cycle of the V gate 650d. By doing so, for example, in a continuous small hit game, the timing for causing the ball to flow down to the V gate 650d with respect to the previous small hit game is the time (1.5 seconds) when the V gate 650d is in the guided state. Minutes) When the small hit games to be different are repeated multiple times (for example, 5 times) (when the total difference is one cycle or more of the operation cycle of the V gate 650d), even for different operation cycles of the V gate 650d. In the small hit game, the timing of letting the ball flow down to the V gate 650d can be changed. Therefore, there is an effect that a more advantageous gaming state can be provided to the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the predetermined condition (7 reserved balls) is satisfied at the timing when the change of the special symbol corresponding to the consecutively won small hits is executed, the consecutively won small hits are the players. It is configured to provide an advantageous gaming state for the player. This has the effect that the player can be enthusiastically played the game in order to always satisfy the predetermined condition, and the operation of the game can be improved.

Although it was shown that the number of reserved balls is 7 in the present embodiment as predetermined conditions, other conditions may be set, or the number of reserved balls satisfying the predetermined conditions may be changed. Further, a requirement other than the number of reserved balls may be set as a predetermined condition. For example, a lottery result of a special symbol may be a predetermined lottery result, and a gaming state different from the normal one may be set as a predetermined condition. Alternatively, it may be set as a predetermined condition that it is within a predetermined period (for example, a period until the change of the special symbol is executed 50 times) after the end of the specific game state such as the jackpot game.

Even with such a configuration, the player will enthusiastically play the game so as to satisfy a predetermined condition, and there is an effect that the operation of the game can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the small hits are continuously won, the small hits that can (easily) pass the ball through the specific area are determined, and the continuous small hit period is determined based on the determination result. A series of effects (continuous) can be executed using the variable display period of the special symbol corresponding to the small hit. With this configuration, for example, the first small hit can pass the ball through a specific area (difficult), and the second small hit can pass the ball through a specific area. When it is a possible (easy) small hit, as an effect corresponding to the first small hit, it is based on the fact that this small hit is an impossible (difficult) small hit to pass the ball through a specific area. It is possible to execute an effect (for example, a chance continuation effect) based on a small hit that allows the ball to pass through a specific area (easily) for the next small hit instead of the effect. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the frequency of performing the effect based on the (severe) small hit that cannot provide the player with an advantageous game state, it is possible to suppress the effect that the player feels dissatisfied with the game. It has the effect of suppressing the situation where a person gets tired of playing a game.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, in the case where the small hits executed when a specific lottery result is obtained are continuous, it is possible to provide a game state which is more advantageous than the case where the small hits are executed alone. , Based on the fact that the small hit is executed a plurality of times, the configuration may be such that it is possible to provide a gaming state that is more advantageous than the case where the small hit is executed alone.

For example, a gaming state that is more advantageous than the case where the small hit is executed alone based on the fact that the small hit is executed a plurality of times within a predetermined period (for example, 8 times which is the upper limit number of holdings and stored). It may be configured to be available. By doing so, there is an effect that the decrease in motivation for playing due to frequent small hits can be suppressed.

It is also more advantageous than a single small hit based on the fact that the small hits are executed multiple times in a predetermined order (for example, the small hits and the misses are executed alternately). It may be configured to be able to provide various gaming states. By doing so, there is an effect that the decrease in motivation for playing due to frequent small hits can be suppressed. Furthermore, by defining a predetermined order in combination with small hits and misses, it is possible to provide a game state that is advantageous to the player even if the lottery results of a plurality of special symbols are missed. It has the effect of being able to do it.

It should be noted that it is more advantageous than the case where the small hit is executed alone based on the fact that the small hit is executed multiple times in a predetermined order (for example, the small hit and the miss are executed alternately). When it is configured to be able to provide various gaming states, the variation time of the special symbol corresponding to the deviation is the same as the special variation time (special variation B to C) of the special symbol corresponding to the small hit described in the present embodiment. A special fluctuation time may be set in, and the timing at which a plurality of small hits are executed may be configured to be different from the opening timing of the guiding means. As a result, even if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, there is a possibility that the player will be provided with an advantageous gaming state. Therefore, apart from the lottery result of the special symbol, the player can play the game while expecting that an advantageous game state is provided, so that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage. effective.

In this case, it is advisable to unify (at least partially unify) the special variation time of the special symbol corresponding to the small hit and the special variation of the special symbol corresponding to the deviation. As a result, there are cases where the small hits are continuous and cases where the small hits are executed multiple times in a predetermined order (for example, the small hits and the misses are executed alternately), and the special case during the continuous production. It is possible to execute the same effect as the variation effect of the symbol, and there is an effect that the capacity of the display data displayed by the third symbol display device 81 can be reduced.

Specifically, when the number of balls entered on hold is 5 to 6 in the deviation pattern selection table 202c, which is referred to when the lottery result of the special symbol is deviation, the fluctuation time is 5.5 seconds. The special fluctuation pattern (special fluctuation pattern for deviation) is specified. By configuring in this way, for example, while the number of balls entered on hold is reduced from 7 to 6 to 5, the small hit A (first time) → missed → small hit A (second time) is special. When the symbol lottery is executed, after the first small hit A is completed, the deviation display (5.5 seconds) is executed, and then the fluctuation display of the small hit A (5.5 seconds) is executed. ) Later, the small hit A is executed. Therefore, the interval between the arrival timing of the winning ball V gate of the first small hit A and the arrival timing of the winning ball V gate of the second small hit A is 17 seconds. Since the operation cycle of the V gate 650d is 5 seconds, the timing of reaching the winning ball V gate of the first small hit A is the timing of reaching the winning ball V gate of the second small hit A. The timing differs by 2 seconds (delays by 2 seconds) with respect to the operation cycle.

In the above-mentioned example, the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol is unified between the case where the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order and the case of small hit, but the variation pattern of the special symbol in the case of out of order is shown. As the (variation time), a variation pattern having a variation time that is the total time of the special variation B (5.5 seconds) and the game time of the small hit A (6 seconds) may be used. By doing so, even if the deviation fluctuation is executed between the small hits as in the above example, the time required for the small hit fluctuation (the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the small hit game time). ) Can be unified. Therefore, it is possible to secure the same continuous effect time when the lottery result of the special symbol is in the order of small hit A → miss → small hit A and when the small hit A is won three times in a row. Therefore, by standardizing the continuous effect, there is an effect that the capacity of the display data displayed by the third symbol display device 81 can be reduced.

In addition, by making it difficult to recognize whether the lottery result of the special symbol during the continuous production is a small hit or a miss, it is possible to give expectations to the player until the end of the continuous production. There is.

The above-exemplified configuration shows the case where the lottery result of the special symbol other than the small hit is out of order, but the present invention is not limited to that. It may be a small hit (small hits B to C) in which B is not set. In this case, it is advisable to unify the small hit game time of the small hits B to C with the small hit A to standardize the continuous production.

Further, in the present embodiment, by setting the special fluctuation time as the fluctuation time of the special symbol, when the small hits are continuously executed (when the small hits are executed a plurality of times), the small hits are independently generated. It is configured to be able to provide a more advantageous gaming state than when it is executed, but other configurations may be used, for example, a door 650f (variable means) which is opened when a small hit is executed. The opening period and opening timing may be changed, the operation cycle of the V gate 650d (guidance means) may be changed, or the operation timing of the stopper 650c may be changed.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the small hit is executed a plurality of times, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol is set in advance so that one of the small hits becomes a small hit that can pass through V. However, as another configuration, the operation pattern of the V gate 650d may be set so that one of the small hits can pass through V when the small hit is executed a plurality of times. .. Even if such a configuration is used, it is possible to obtain the same effect as that of the first embodiment.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 63. In the first embodiment, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is configured to enter the crune member 660, and the speed at which the game ball flows down during the fluctuation period of the normal symbol (the speed at which the game ball moves vertically downward in the game area). Was delayed so that the ball could easily enter the first ball entry port 64a according to the period during which the normal symbol hits. In the second embodiment, the rotation holding device 690 is arranged below the through gate 67 instead of the crune member 660. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The rotation holding member 690 has a rotating portion 690c arranged at a position where the first concave portion 690a and the second concave portion 690b into which the game ball can enter face each other with the central axis 690z, and the rotating portion 690c from both the left and right sides. The side cover bodies 690d1 and 690d2 are arranged at positions where the game ball can rotate while the game ball is inserted (held) in the recess 690a or the second recess 690b. The side cover bodies 690d1 and 690d2 are arranged so as to be open so that the game ball can enter the first recess 690a or the second recess 690b of the rotating portion 690c from the upper part. Further, when the side cover bodies 690d1 and 690d2 are not arranged below the rotating portion 690c and the first recess 690a or the second recess 690b of the rotating portion 690c is in the lower position, the ball enters. The game ball can be made to flow down toward the first entry port 64a.

The rotating portion 690a is configured to rotate clockwise in the front view by a rotating motor (not shown) by the rotating shaft 690z. In this case, it is configured at a speed of rotating once in 20 seconds, and when a game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 enters the first recess 690a or the second recess 690b, the hit variation time of the normal symbol is 10 seconds. Therefore, it is configured to be discharged from below according to the timing. As in the first embodiment, the discharged game ball collides with the nail KG and the flow is delayed, and the ball is distributed to the right or left of the nail KG and enters the first ball entry port 64a. It is configured. In the present embodiment, when the first concave portion 690a or the second concave portion 690b of the rotating portion 690c does not face the upper portion, the ball is configured to flow downward without entering the ball, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be held by the side cover bodies 690d1 and 690d2 and may be configured to wait until the first recess 690a or the second recess 690b rotates upward. Further, two recesses in which the game ball can enter may be further provided so as to increase the possibility that the game ball enters the recess and enters the rotating portion 690c. Further, a plurality of rotation holding members 690 similar to those in the second embodiment may be arranged so that the plurality of game balls are held in the game area and the flow is delayed.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 67. FIG. 64 is a view showing a front view of the game board 13 in the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, the start gate 680 is arranged between the crune member 660 and the first ball entry device 64 (above the nail KG) with respect to the first embodiment. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The start gate 680 is a start switch that starts the hit game of the normal symbol when the normal symbol hits. When the determination result of the normal symbol is a hit, the fluctuation time elapses, the stop display is displayed on the hit symbol, and then the game ball is passed through the start gate 680, the hit game of the normal symbol is started. Since the winning game of the normal symbol to be started is the same as that of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

0.5 seconds after passing through the start gate 680, the opening / closing door of the first ball entry device 64 is opened, and the ball can enter the first ball entry port 64a. The game ball that has passed through the start gate 680 collides with the nail KG, is distributed in the left-right direction of the nail KG, and flows down to the first ball entry device 64. The period required from passing through the start gate 680 to being guided to the first ball entry device 64 is about 0.6 seconds to 1 second, and the period during which the first ball entry device 64 is in the open state. It is configured so that the game ball that has passed through the start gate 680 can easily enter the first ball entry port 64a.

In the present embodiment, the nail KG is arranged below the start gate 680 so as to be delayed so as to match the timing until the first ball entry port 64a is opened, but the present invention is not limited to this. The rotation holding member, the croon member, or the like as in the second embodiment may be arranged, or the game ball may be configured to flow down while being in contact with a rubber member or the like that reduces the flow speed of the game ball. Further, the opening period of the hit game of the normal symbol may be set as long as 5 seconds, and the delay member may be arranged according to the period.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment>
Next, the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 65. FIG. 65 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, the flag 203i per normal symbol is added to the first embodiment. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The normal symbol hit flag 203i is a flag indicating that the right to start the normal symbol hit game has been granted. After the normal symbol hit flag 203i is set to ON, when the game ball is passed through the start gate 680, the normal symbol hit game is started. The normal symbol per flag 203i is used in the process of S527 in the normal symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 66), which is one process in the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment. , Ordinary symbol is set to on when the hit fluctuation period ends. In the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the third embodiment, the normal symbol variation process (S106 of FIG. 28) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24) in the first embodiment is a normal symbol. The difference is that it has been changed to the variation processing 2 (see FIG. 66). As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the normal symbol variation processing 2 (S111) in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal symbol variation processing 2 (S111). In the ordinary symbol variation processing 2 (S111) in the third embodiment, the processing of S519 and S521 is deleted and the processing of S527 is added to the ordinary symbol variation processing (S106 in FIG. 24). do. Since other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The process of S519 and the process of S521 (see FIG. 24) are processes for setting the opening of the first ball entrance device 64 (setting a winning game of a normal symbol), but in the present embodiment, the start gate 680 is used. Since it is configured to start hitting a normal symbol when it passes, it is configured to be deleted and set when it passes through the start gate 680 (see S1458 and S1460 in FIG. 67). Further, in the process of S527, the normal symbol hit flag 203i is set to be on, and the normal symbol hit game is set to start when the game ball passes through the start gate 680. The process of S527 is a case where it is determined that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol set in the process of S522 has elapsed, and further, it is a case where it is determined that the lottery result is a hit in the process of S524. ..

Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the electric accessory opening / closing process 2 (S1020), which is one of the processes in the main process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment, will be described. FIG. 67 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the electric accessory opening / closing process 2 (S1020). In the main process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment, the electric accessory opening / closing process (S1006) in the main process (see FIG. 33) in the second embodiment is the electric accessory opening / closing process 2. The difference is that it is changed to (S1020). Since other points are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the electric accessory opening / closing process 2 (S1020 in FIG. 67), first, it is determined whether the flag 203i per normal symbol is on (S1451). When the normal symbol hit flag 203i is off (S1451: No), whether the electric accessory (corresponding to the opening / closing door of the first ball entry device 64) is in the opening / closing operation (that is, the opening operation or the opening operation from the closing operation). (Whether it is waiting for) (S1452). When the electric accessory is in operation (S1452: Yes), it is determined whether the opening time has elapsed (S1453). When it is determined that the opening time has elapsed (S1453: Yes), the corresponding opening / closing operation of the electric accessory is set (S1454). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, if No is determined in the processing of S1452 and S1453, this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1451, when it is determined that the normal symbol per symbol flag 203i is on (S1451: Yes), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the start gate 680 (S1455). If it is determined that the vehicle has not passed through the start gate 680 (S1455: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1455, when it is determined that the start gate 680 has passed (S1455: Yes), the normal symbol per flag 203i is set to ON (S1456), and the time reduction / medium counter 203d is 1 or more. That is, it is determined whether the time is shortened (S1457). If it is determined that the time is being shortened (S1457: Yes), it is determined whether or not the jackpot game is in progress (S1458). If it is not a big hit, the opening period per normal symbol is set to 2 seconds, and the interval is set to 2 times with an interval of 1 second (S1459). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1457 that the time is not shortened (S1457: No), or if it is determined in the processing of S1458 that the special symbol jackpot game is in progress, the opening period is once every 2 seconds. Set to. The period until the opening is started (opening period) is set to 0.5 seconds regardless of the state.

In this way, since the hit start of the normal symbol is started when the normal symbol has passed through the start gate 680, even the player who has stopped the launch of the game ball during the fluctuation of the normal symbol can also use the first entrance 64. It is possible to suppress the opportunity to enter the ball and make it easier to play the game.

In the example of the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, the start gate 680 is arranged at a position where the game ball can easily pass without providing the crune member 660 or the like, and it is early after the game ball is launched. It may be configured to pass through.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 86. The pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is configured so that the reserved ball is not stored for the special symbol, but the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment is configured so that the reserved ball is also stored for the special symbol. This is different from the first embodiment. The same elements and configurations as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 69 to 72, an example of the display content of the fusion symbol displayed by the third symbol display device 81 when the reserved ball of the special symbol in the fourth embodiment is stored will be described. .. FIG. 69 shows the timing (period) at which each change between the normal symbol and the special symbol is executed when three reserved balls of the normal symbol are stored and one reserved ball of the special symbol is stored. It is a timing chart showing the timing (period) in which the fusion symbol is variablely displayed correspondingly.

As shown in FIG. 69, first, the variation display of the fusion symbol is started in synchronization with the variation start timing of the normal symbol (see FIG. 6A). As shown in the first embodiment, when the normal symbol is a hit, the fused symbol is displayed in the reach display mode (see FIG. 6 (b)), and the execution period of the normal symbol hit game (normal symbol hit period). ), The reach display mode is displayed during the period when the first entry port 64a is open as shown in FIG. 7A, and the game ball enters the first entry opening 64a. In synchronization with the start of the variable display of the symbol, the display mode of the super reach is displayed in the fused symbol. In the example shown in FIG. 69, two game balls enter the first entrance 64a during the hit period of the normal symbol in which the first entrance 64a is open, and one reserved ball of the special symbol is stored. An example of the case where it is done is shown. During the variation display period of the special symbol (during the special symbol variation A), the hit period of the normal symbol ends, and among the reserved balls of the normal symbol, the variation display corresponding to the first reserved ball is the variation display of the special symbol. It is started during the period during which the special figure change A is being performed. In this case, the variable display of the fused symbol corresponding to the normal symbol is only the blinking display unit, and the auxiliary normal symbol is displayed in a variable display.

In the first embodiment, when the variation of the special symbol is started, the fusion symbol is simulated even after the variation period of the special symbol ends 5 seconds before the variation start time and the end timing of the variation display. It is configured to determine whether to display fluctuations (effects such as shaking). On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, it is configured to determine whether to execute the pseudo-variation at the start of the change of the special symbol and at the end timing of the change display. In the fourth embodiment, the condition for quasi-variating the fusion symbol is limited to the case where the reserved ball of the special symbol is not stored, and the pseudo-variation is executed when the reserved sphere of the special symbol is stored. It is configured so that it will not be done. With this configuration, the fluctuation of the fusion symbol corresponding to the special symbol (the variation of the fusion symbol indicating the lottery result of the special symbol) can be preferentially executed, which is a direct trigger for the start of the jackpot game. Notification corresponding to the fluctuation of the special symbol can be performed by the fusion symbol.

Here, as shown in FIG. 69, at the timing when the first game ball enters the first entry port 64a, the reserved ball of the special symbol is not yet stored, so that the special symbol changes. At the change timing at the start time (at the start of the change of the special figure change A), it is determined whether or not to set to execute the pseudo change of the fusion symbol after the change. The details will be described later, but in the fourth embodiment, when the lottery result in the change of the special symbol (special symbol change A) is out of order, there is no reserved ball of the special symbol and it hits within 2 hold of the normal symbol. If the hold to be is stored, the execution of the pseudo-variation is set (as a reservation set after the end of the variation time of the special symbol). With this configuration, if the reserved ball that is the hit of the normal symbol is stored in the 2 reserves, the first entry port 64a is immediately opened even after the change of the special symbol is completed, and the special symbol is set. Even if the fluctuation of is started (the timing when the game ball enters the first entry port 64a), the pre-variation of the fusion symbol is continuously executed by the pseudo-variation. It is possible to execute the variation of the fusion symbol in synchronization with the variation of the started special symbol, reduce the number of fluctuations of the fusion symbol that notifies the result of the lottery that is out of the game, and make the player think that the probability of winning is high. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

In the example shown in FIG. 69, at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol (at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol fluctuation B), the hold corresponding to the 2 hold of the normal symbol is not stored, so that the pseudo fluctuation is not set. It is determined whether or not to set the pseudo variation at the timing when the variation period of the special symbol is stopped (the timing when the variation period of the special variation B has elapsed). In addition to the same judgment as at the start of the fluctuation, if the hold ball of the special symbol is not stored and the hold that is a hit is not stored in the 2 hold of the normal symbol, the special symbol is not stored. It is determined whether or not the fluctuation of the normal symbol is continuously executed even after the movement is stopped, and if it is continuously executed, the pseudo fluctuation of the fusion symbol is set until the timing when the fluctuation ends. In the example shown in FIG. 69, since the reserved ball corresponding to the special figure fluctuation B is stored at the timing when the special figure fluctuation A stops fluctuating, the pseudo fluctuation is not set and the fusion symbol is also displayed in the reach display mode. The middle symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol different from the reach symbol (left and right stop symbol), and the player is notified that the lottery result is out of order.

When the fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation A is stopped, the fluctuation display of the fusion symbol that has been stopped and displayed in synchronization with the start of the fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation B is started. When the fluctuation starts, the fused symbol is scrolled and displayed at a high speed (a speed at which each symbol is invisible) after each symbol row is scrolled vertically at a low speed (a speed at which each symbol is visible). Scroll. At the start of the change of the special symbol, it is determined whether or not to set the pseudo change as in the case of the special change A. In the example shown in FIG. 69, when the special symbol fluctuation B starts to fluctuate, the reserved ball of the special symbol is not stored, but the reserved ball that hits within the 2 hold of the normal symbol is also not stored. Therefore, pseudo-variation is not set.

In the variation display of the fusion symbol corresponding to the special symbol variation A, it is displayed from the start of super reach (see FIG. 7 (b)), but in the variation display of the fusion symbol corresponding to the special symbol variation B, the fusion symbol is stopped. The variation display is started from the state as described above, and after the reach display is reached, a specific variation pattern in which the super reach display mode is displayed is set. In this case, since the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined on the main control device 110 side, is the variation pattern selection table 222a of the voice lamp control device 113 a variation in which the special symbol variation is executed by the reserved ball? A variation pattern of the fusion symbol in which the start of super reach is executed corresponding to the variation time that can be selected depending on whether or not (the game ball enters the first entry port 64a without the reserved ball). (Selected when the fusion symbol is started), and the variation pattern of the fusion symbol that is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing the lottery result after the reach display mode is set. Has been done.

With this configuration, there are cases where the fluctuation of the special symbol starts to fluctuate due to the reserved ball and cases where the fluctuation starts at the timing when the ball enters the first entry port 64a, and the fusion that has been executed up to that point. It is possible to display the corresponding fusion symbol in a variable state (difference between the case where it is displayed in the reach state and the case where it is displayed in the stopped state) of the symbol, and it is possible to suppress a problem that gives the player a sense of discomfort.

In addition, the timing at which the fluctuation of the fused symbol starts can be matched with the timing at which the fluctuation of the normal symbol starts, the timing at which the fluctuation of the special symbol starts, and the timing at which the fluctuation of the fused symbol stops. Since it is possible to match the timing at which the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped or the timing at which the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the player can be interested in the variation display of the fused symbol.

Next, with reference to FIG. 70, the variation content of the fusion symbol will be described when the reserved ball that is a hit within the 2 reserves of the normal symbol is stored at the start of the variation of the special symbol. FIG. 70 is a timing chart showing the fluctuation timing of the fusion symbol when the holding ball that is a hit is stored in the 2 holdings of the normal symbol at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol (at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol fluctuation C). be. In the example shown in FIG. 70, three reserved balls are stored in the normal symbol, and the reserved balls that are hit by the second stored reserved ball are stored. The fluctuation of the normal symbol during the fluctuation (during the fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation C) is a hit, and when the first entry port 64a is opened, two game balls enter the first entry opening 64a. This is an example showing the variation mode of the fusion symbol when one reserved ball of the special symbol is stored. At the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol fluctuation C, the reserved ball that hits within 2 holds of the normal symbol is stored, and at the start of the fluctuation (at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol fluctuation C), the reserved ball of the special symbol is still stored. It is not determined that the special symbol has been changed (even when the ball is continuously entered into the first entry port 64a, the setting process for starting the fluctuation of the special symbol is performed before the game ball entered later is determined. (Executed), so that a pseudo-variation of up to 30 seconds is set to be executed in the fusion symbol after the end of the special figure variation C. On the other hand, after the variation start setting of the special symbol is set (the pseudo setting start setting (including the process of turning on the pseudo setting flag 223h) is set), the special symbol corresponding to the special symbol variation D is set by the main controller 110. When the hold command of is received, the set pseudo-variation start setting is canceled (the process of setting the pseudo-setting flag 223h to off).

In the variation of the fusion symbol corresponding to the special symbol variation C, the display mode from the start of the super reach is displayed by the fusion symbol as in the special symbol variation A described with reference to FIG. 69. The variation display of the fusion symbol is also stopped and displayed at the timing when the variation time of the special figure variation C elapses (the variation period ends). Since the lottery result of the special symbol variation C is shown as an example of the case where the lottery result is out of order, a symbol different from the reach symbol indicating that the lottery result is out of order is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row. (See FIG. 8 (a)). It is determined whether or not the pseudo-variation is performed at the end timing of the fluctuation time of the special figure variation C. In the example shown in FIG. 70, the reserved ball of the special symbol is stored. No settings are performed.

Next, it is determined whether to execute the pseudo-variation setting based on the fluctuation start timing of the special figure variation D, and in the example shown in FIG. 70, it corresponds to the second hold (hold 2) of the normal symbol. Since the reserved ball is stored, the pseudo-variation of up to 30 seconds is set to be executed after the end of the special figure variation D. In this case, since the winning game corresponding to the hold 2 of the normal symbol is executed in the fluctuation period of the fusion symbol corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation D (including the pseudo fluctuation period), the third symbol is displayed in the fluctuation period of the fusion symbol. The device 81 is set to display a notice display mode for notifying in advance that the hit game of the normal symbol is executed (open notice is set). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 72 (b), 3 seconds before the hit game of the normal symbol, the characters "Fire a game ball and hold charge chance !!" are fused symbols (directed symbols (designs of monsters, etc.). ) Is set to be displayed in the layer on the front side of). The notice display mode shown in FIG. 72 (b) is a display mode executed during the variable period of the special symbol, and it is notified that the number of reserved balls increases when the game ball is fired. Further, as shown in FIG. 72 (a), the game ball is fired during the period in which the pseudo-variation is executed (the state where there is no reserved ball of the special symbol) after the variation period of the special symbol ends. Then, as a notice display mode indicating that the fusion symbol is re-variable, a display mode of "launching a game ball and re-variation chance !!" is displayed. As shown in FIG. 70, when the notice display mode is set from the change period of the fusion symbol to the pseudo change period, the notice display mode is switched and displayed at the timing of the pseudo change. Has been done.

With this configuration, even for a player who has stopped launching the game ball during the fluctuation period of the fusion symbol, the game ball is hit by the normal symbol and the game ball is inserted into the first entry slot 64a. It is possible to suppress problems that miss opportunities. In this embodiment, when the variation display of the fusion symbol corresponding to the variation of the special symbol is executed, the notice display mode is set to be displayed when the normal symbol hits, but the special symbol When the number of reserved balls is the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment), the notice display mode may not be set. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the problem that the player is wasted to shoot the game ball and the profit is impaired.

In this embodiment, the notice display mode is switched between the change period and the stop period of the special symbol, but the period during which the first entrance 64a is opened (corresponding to the opening period shown in FIG. 70) and before the opening period. It may be configured to switch the notice display mode with and. With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player that it is a period during which the game ball can enter the first entrance 64a, and the player can enter the first entrance 64a. It is possible to raise the degree of expectation for.

At the timing when the fluctuation period of the special figure fluctuation D ends, the determination of whether to execute the pseudo fluctuation setting is executed, and since the pseudo fluctuation setting has already been executed at the start of the fluctuation, a maximum of 30 is executed based on the setting. Pseudo-variations in seconds (see FIG. 8 (b)) are performed. As already described in the first embodiment, when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64a, the fusion symbol also starts to change again based on the new start of the change of the special symbol. To. On the other hand, even if the opening period of the normal symbol (including the ball ejection period, which is the period from when the game ball enters the first ball entry port 64a and is detected by the detection switch) is completed, the first ball entry port 64a If the game ball is not detected by the detection switch that detects the game ball that has entered the ball, the pseudo-variation (variation display) of the fusion symbol is displayed as a fixed stop display. As for the variation of the fusion symbol corresponding to the special symbol variation D, the scroll display is started from the state where the fusion symbol is stopped and displayed, and the super reach display mode is passed through the reach display mode. Is executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which the variation display of the special symbol is super reach has been described, but a non-reach deviation that does not become reach may be set, and variations corresponding to the result of determining whether or not the special symbol is correct or not may be set. It may be configured according to the embodiment.

As described above, in the present embodiment, there are cases where the reserved ball of the special symbol starts to fluctuate, and a fusion symbol corresponding to the normal symbol by entering the first ball opening 64a in a state where the reserved ball is not stored. Since it is configured to switch the variation mode between the case where the variation (scroll display) is executed and the case where the variation of the fusion symbol corresponding to the special symbol is switched and displayed, the fusion symbol starts the variation display. A series of effects up to notifying whether or not a hit (judgment result of a special symbol) is obtained can be executed every variable in the same flow (scroll display starts from the stopped state of the fusion symbol, and the reach display mode is passed. , The flow in which the same medium symbol as the reach symbol is stopped and the hit is notified by doublet). Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that gives the player a sense of discomfort.

If the reserved ball of the special symbol is stored and the lottery result for the change is out of order, the fusion symbol is variablely displayed over the fluctuation period of the special symbol stored in the reserved ball. It may be configured to produce a variable display of 1. With this configuration, the number of times the fusion symbol stops due to coming off can be reduced, and the player can be made to think that the frequency of being notified by a hit is higher than the probability of an actual hit.

Further, it may be configured to execute one variation of the fusion symbol over a period during which a plurality of continuous variation displays of the normal symbol are executed. With this configuration, by connecting the fluctuation time to the reserved ball of the normal symbol that is a hit and making it within one fluctuation of the fusion symbol, it is possible to reduce the frequency at which the fusion symbol stops due to disengagement. Further, the fluctuation time corresponding to the deviation of the normal symbol may be shortened so that a plurality of deviation fluctuations can be completed in a short period of time.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 71 to 72, a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 72A is a diagram showing a display area in the third symbol display device 81. The display area of the third symbol display device 81 in the fourth embodiment is the normal symbol display area Ds1 in the lower part of the normal symbol display area Ds1 with respect to the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment. However, it differs from the first embodiment in that the special figure holding actual number display area Ds5 is added to the lower part of the special symbol display area Ds2, and the normal figure holding number display area Ds3 is changed to the fusion holding number display area Ds6. do. The description of the same configuration will be omitted.

The normal figure reserved actual number display area Ds4 is a display area in which a notification mode indicating the reserved number of ordinary symbols is displayed. In the present embodiment, "a" is used when the number of held items is 0, "b" is used when the number of items held is 1, "c" is used when the number of items held is 2, and the number of items held is 2. When it is 3, "d" is displayed, and when the number of reserved pieces is 4, "e" is displayed (see FIG. 71 (b)). In this way, by displaying the symbols, the actual number of reserved symbols is configured so that it is difficult for the player to understand at first glance. With this configuration, in the present embodiment, the number of reserved pieces displayed in the fusion hold number display area Ds6, which will be described later, may be different due to the execution of pseudo-variation or the like, but they are different. This can be made difficult for the player to notice, and the player can play by recognizing the reserved number displayed in the fusion reserved number display area Ds6 as the actual reserved number.

Further, in the special symbol actual reserved quantity display area Ds5, the reserved quantity of the special symbol is displayed. In the display shown here, the reserved number is notified in the same display form as that displayed in the above-mentioned normal figure reserved actual number display area Ds4. By configuring in this way, it is difficult for the player to understand the actual number of reserved special symbols, and it is the variable display corresponding to the normal symbol that the fusion symbol scrolls and fluctuates. It is difficult to understand whether the display is variable and corresponds to the design. Therefore, the player can concentrate only on the result notified by the fusion symbol, and can play the game without understanding the complicated game characteristics.

Here, the reserved symbols displayed in the fusion reserved quantity display area Ds6 will be described with reference to FIG. 71 (b). Based only on the fact that the game ball passes through the through gate 67 and the hold is newly stored, the "black circle" symbol is displayed in the fusion hold quantity display area Ds6, and the right (hold) that the fusion symbol is variablely displayed. It is notified that it is stored. The fusion hold number display area Ds6 is configured to be able to display up to four "black circle" symbols, and is configured to be able to notify that the number of holds in which the fusion symbol fluctuates is four. In the state where the "black circle" symbol is displayed in the fusion hold quantity display area Ds6, that is, in the state where the hold of the normal symbol is stored, the game ball enters the first entry slot 64a during the change of the special symbol. When the reserved ball of the special symbol is stored, the color of the reserved symbol of the reserved symbol (the reserved symbol with the earliest variation order) stored in the front is changed as shown in FIG. 71 (b). Displayed (eg red, etc.). With this configuration, after the changing special symbol stops changing, the reserved special symbol change starts, but the reserved symbol displayed at that timing is digested (the front row displayed). It is possible to erase the reserved symbol and slide the display position of the reserved symbol displayed after that to display it. If the reserved symbol that has already been variably displayed is displayed, the reserved symbol displayed in the non-variable state (“black circle” symbol) displayed next is variably displayed. .. If there is no reserved symbol displayed next, a newly variable reserved symbol is displayed and displayed. When the reserved symbol is not displayed in the fusion reserved quantity display area Ds6, even if the reserved symbol is stored, the newly variable reserved symbol is similarly displayed.

With this configuration, the reserved symbols displayed in the fusion pending quantity display area Ds6 can be updated (digested) and displayed according to the fluctuation start timing of the special symbol, and the player can suppress discomfort. Can provide the game that was played. Further, when the reserved ball is stored in the special symbol, the color of the reserved symbol is variably displayed, so that the player can have a feeling of expectation for a big hit. In this embodiment, the lottery probability of winning a special symbol is set higher than the lottery probability of winning a normal symbol, so that the actual jackpot expectation is also high. In the present embodiment, the color of the reserved symbol is varied, but the color of the reserved symbol is different from the expected degree based on the lottery result of the reserved ball of the special symbol (for example, red is the expected degree). Is high, blue is low, etc.).

Further, by configuring in this way, there is a difference between the actual number of reserved symbols and the number of pending items displayed in the fusion reserved number display area Ds6, but if there is a difference, the deviation of the ordinary symbol will fluctuate. Pseudo continuous fluctuation accompanied by pseudo stop is executed by the fluctuation of the fusion symbol displayed in a variable manner in response to, and the pending symbol displayed in the fusion hold quantity display area Ds6 is digested at the timing of re-variation after the pseudo stop timing. This makes it possible to match the difference in the number of pending items.

In the present embodiment, the maximum number of pending numbers displayed in the fusion pending quantity display area Ds6 is 4, but the maximum number of 8 is limited to the actual reserved number of normal symbols and special symbols. It may be configured to correspond and notify. In this case, the reserved symbols in the fusion reserved quantity display area Ds6 displayed at the timing when the special symbol changes and the timing when the normal symbol starts to change may be updated.

As described above, FIGS. 72 (a) to 72 (b) are diagrams showing an example of a notice display mode in which a normal symbol is hit during the fluctuation period of the special symbol (including the pseudo fluctuation period). Since it is as described above, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 73. The fourth embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are changed. Since the other points are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the fourth embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the content of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed. The difference between the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 73 (b). Since other points are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 73A is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment. In the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment, a special symbol holding ball storage area 203j and a special symbol holding ball number counter 203k are added to the first embodiment. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special symbol holding ball storage area 203j has four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas has a first random number counter C1 and a first hit type counter C2. , Stop type selection counter C3, and small hit type counter CS3 are stored respectively.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64a (starting winning), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS3 are acquired, and the acquired data is the four holding areas (4 holding areas (starting winning). Among the vacant areas (holding 1st area to holding 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203j is the special symbol. It is shifted (moved) to the reserved ball execution area 203a, and a determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS3 stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area 203a. ..

When the data is shifted from the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203j to the special symbol reserved ball execution area 203a, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) having a smaller area number. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203j, the data is shifted only in the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which the winning data is stored.

In the pachinko machine 10, the ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64a, and as soon as each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS3 is acquired according to the starting winning, those values are included. The special figure winning information command (big hit, missed reach, or missed winning information command) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the special figure winning information command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 receives each counter C1 to C3 from the special figure winning information command (big hit, missed reach, or missed winning information command). Each value of CS3 is extracted and stored in the special figure winning information storage area 223k of the RAM 223 as the special figure winning information.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k is performed by the special symbol variation display (third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry into the first ball entry port 64a (starting prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display) up to 4 times. The initial value of the value N of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203k is set to zero, and the maximum value is obtained each time a ball enters the first entry port 64a and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol increases. 1 is added up to 4 (see S424 in FIG. 76), and 1 is subtracted each time a new variation display of a special symbol is executed (see S223 in FIG. 75).

When a ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64a, if the value of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203k (number of holdings of variation display in the special symbol N) is less than 4, a random number per first. Each value of the counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small hit type counter CS3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203j (FIG. 76). S426). On the other hand, if the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203k is 4 when the ball wins the first ball opening 64a (starting winning), nothing is newly stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203j. Not done (S423: No in FIG. 76).

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k (the number of reserved balls N in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S224 in FIG. 75 and S425 in FIG. 76). The special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 has a special symbol held in the main control device 110 by the special symbol reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k is changed. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of reserved balls in the variable display itself. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special figure reserved ball counter 223 m of the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual number of reserved balls in the variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the deviation, the deviation can be corrected by the special figure reserved ball number command received next.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the special figure reserved ball number command, and notifies the display control device 114 of the reserved ball number of the special figure each time the reserved ball number changes. Send a hold ball count command for display. The display control device 114 sets the special figure reserved ball number symbol in the special figure reserved actual number display area Ds5 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number of the special figure notified by this display reserved ball number command. indicate.

Next, the details of the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 73 (b). FIG. 73B is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment. In the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment, the special figure winning information storage area 223k, the special figure holding ball number counter 223m, the special figure pseudo-variation flag 223p, and the special figure pseudo setting with respect to the first embodiment. Flag 223q has been added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special figure winning information storage area 223k has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and each of these areas stores prize information. In the pachinko machine 10, when the starting prize for the first ball opening 64a is detected in the main control device 110, the first random number counter C1 and the first type counter C2 acquired according to the starting winning. And various information obtained when a special symbol corresponding to the starting prize is drawn from each value of the small hit type counter CS3 (win / fail, big hit or small hit type in case of big hit or small hit, fluctuation pattern). Is predicted (estimated) in the main control device 110, and various predicted information is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 by a special figure winning information command (big hit, missed reach, or missed winning information command). You will be notified.

When the special figure winning information command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 displays various information (win / fail, big hit or small hit type in case of big hit or small hit, fluctuation pattern) notified by the special figure winning information command. It is extracted as winning information, and the winning information is stored in the special figure winning information storage area 223k. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the 4 areas (1st to 4th areas). Will be done. That is, the smaller the area number, the more the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223m is a variation effect (variation) of the special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k of the main control device 110. (Display), which is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the special symbol variation effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the special symbol is set based on the special figure reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the special figure reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special figure reserved ball number counter 223 m counts the number of reserved balls of the special symbol. It is designed to manage.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the start winning is detected and the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added, or in the main control device 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted. If this is the case, a special symbol hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203k after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k of the main control device 110 from the special figure reserved ball number command. Then, it is stored in the special figure reserved ball number counter 223 m (see S1736 in FIG. 81). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special figure hold ball counter 223 m according to the special figure hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol hold ball of the main control device 110 is updated. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the number counter 203k.

The value of the special figure holding ball number counter 223m is used for displaying the special figure holding ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special figure reserved ball counter 223 m in response to the reception of the special figure reserved ball number command, and the stored special figure reserved ball number. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223m, a display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the number of hold balls corresponding to the value of the special figure hold ball number counter 223 m of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the special figure reserved actual number display area Ds5 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223m is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of special symbol reserved ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment>
Next, the control process executed by the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 76. For the same processing as in the first embodiment, the illustration and description thereof will be omitted, and only the different control processing will be illustrated and described.

The timer interrupt process 2 executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 74. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the contents of the timer interrupt process 2. In the timer interrupt process 2 (FIG. 74), the special symbol variation process (S104) is changed to the special symbol variation process 2 (S120) with respect to the timer interrupt process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, and the special symbol is changed. The difference is that the start winning process (S105) is added after the variation process 2. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Details of the special symbol variation process 2 (S120) and the start winning process (S105) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76.

First, the special symbol variation process 2 (S120) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 75. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation processing 2 (S120). In the special symbol variation processing 2 (FIG. 75, S104) in the fourth embodiment, the processes from S203 to S204 are the processes of S221 to S225 with respect to the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 25, S104) in the first embodiment. It differs in that it has been changed to. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k (the number of times of holding the variable display in the special symbol N) is acquired ( S221). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k is larger than 0 (S222), and if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k is 0 (S222 :). No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k is not 0 (S222: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203k is subtracted by 1 (S223), and the value is changed by calculation. A special symbol reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k is set (S224). The special figure reserved ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the special figure holding ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203k from the special figure holding ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the special figure holding ball number counter of the RAM 223. Store at 223m.

After setting the special symbol reserved ball number command by the process of S224, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203j is shifted (S225). In the process of S225, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203j is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data.

Next, with reference to FIG. 76, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process 2 (see FIG. 74), determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64a, and if there is a starting winning. In addition, it is a process for executing the hold process of the value indicated by various random number counters.

When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64a (S421). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64a is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball opening 64a (S421: Yes), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k (the number of times of holding the variable display in the special symbol N) is acquired (S422). .. Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S423).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first ball opening 64a (S421: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64a, the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k is less than 4. If not (S423: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64a (S421: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203k is less than 4 (S423: Yes), the number of special symbol reserved balls The value (N) of the counter 203k is added by 1 (S424). Then, a special symbol reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k changed by the calculation is set (S425).

The special figure reserved ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. Upon receiving the special figure holding ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203k from the special figure holding ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the special figure holding ball number counter of the RAM 223. Store at 223m.

After setting the special figure reserved ball number command by the processing of S425, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second, which were updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing 2 described above. Each value of the winning random number counter C4 and the small hit type counter CS3 is stored in the first area of the empty holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203j of the RAM 203 (S426). .. In the process of S426, the value of the special symbol hold ball counter 203k is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area. After that, the process of S427 is executed.

In the process of S427, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in S426 is determined to be a big hit at the start of fluctuation. Whether the gaming state at the start of the fluctuation is a high-probability gaming state or a low-probability gaming state is determined from the determination result of the reserved ball stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203j, and the judgment of success or failure is made. Perform in advance (pre-reading judgment of hit / fail judgment result). In the process of S427, not only the hit / fail determination result but also the stop type and the fluctuation pattern are determined and stored in the corresponding hold area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203j.

If it is determined to be a jackpot in the process of S427 (S427: Yes), a jackpot winning information command, which is a kind of winning information command, is set based on the stop type and the fluctuation pattern (S428). Here, for example, if the jackpot A is a super reach, the jackpot winning information command corresponding to the jackpot A is set. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S427 that it is out of alignment (S427: No), it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern is super reach (S429). In the process of S429, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is super reach (S429: Yes), the out-of-reach winning information command, which is a kind of winning information command, is set (S430). On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern different from that of Super Reach (S429: No), a missed prize information command, which is a kind of prize information command, is set (S431). The winning information command is configured so that the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 can identify the type of the selected fluctuation pattern.

When the winning information command is set, the winning information command is output to the voice lamp control device 113 in the processing of the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment>
Next, the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 86. For the same processing as in the first embodiment, the illustration and description thereof will be omitted, and only the different control processing will be illustrated and described.

The main process 2 executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 77. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the contents of the main process 2. In the main process 2 (FIG. 77), the command determination process (S1612) is changed to the command determination process 2 (S1620) with respect to the main process (FIG. 39) in the first embodiment, and the variable display setting process (S1613) is performed. The difference is that the variation display setting process 2 (S1630) is changed and the pseudo variation setting process (S1614) is changed to the pseudo variation setting process 2 (S1640). As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Details of the command determination process 2 (S1620), the variation display setting process 2 (S1630), and the pseudo variation setting process 2 (S1640) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 78 to 86.

First, the command determination process 2 (S1620) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 78. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 2 (S1620). In the command determination process 2 (FIG. 78, S1620) in the fourth embodiment, the pseudo-variation start setting process (S1708) is the pseudo-variation start setting process with respect to the command determination process (FIG. 40, S1612) in the first embodiment. 2 (S1720) is changed, the processing of S1709 to S1711 is changed to the processing of S1729 to S1730, and the processing of S1715 to S1716 is changed to the processing of S1731 to S1732. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When a stop command is received in the process of S1707 (S1707: Yes), the pseudo-variation start setting process 2 is executed (S1720), and this process is terminated. The details of the pseudo-variation start setting process 2 (S1720) will be described with reference to FIG. 79. However, if the pseudo-variation is set according to the fluctuation stop timing of the special symbol, the pseudo-variation is described. The process of executing (see FIG. 8B) by the fusion symbol is executed.

Here, the pseudo-variation start setting process 2 (S1720) will be described with reference to FIG. 79. In the pseudo-variation start setting process 2 (FIG. 79, S1720) in the fourth embodiment, the process of S2120 is added to the pseudo-variation start setting process (FIG. 41, S1708) in the first embodiment, and the processes of S2120 and S2107 are added. The difference is that the process of S2102 is executed after the process of. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of S2101, when it is determined that the pseudo setting flag 223h is off (that is, when the pseudo variation setting is not executed) (S2101: No), the pseudo setting process when the variation is stopped is executed (that is, the pseudo variation setting is not executed). S2120), this process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 80, this pseudo setting process at the time of variable stop (S2120) will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the contents of the pseudo setting process (S2120) when the fluctuation is stopped. In the variable stop pseudo setting process (FIG. 80, S2120), first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol to be variable stop is out of the special symbol (S2121). If it is determined that the special symbol is a hit (S2121: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment (S2121: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the number of reserved balls of the special figure, that is, the value of the counter of the number of reserved balls of the special figure 223m is 0 (S2122). ).

In the process of S2122, if it is determined that the value of the number of reserved balls in the special figure is not 0, that is, 1 or more (S2122: No), the present process is terminated as it is. Here, in the present embodiment, when the reserved ball of the special symbol is stored, the fluctuation of the special symbol is continuously started after the special symbol is stopped, so that it is not necessary to execute the pseudo fluctuation or the like. , Pseudo-variation settings, etc. are not executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the number of balls reserved for the special figure is 0 (S2122: Yes), it is determined whether or not there is a hit within the 2 reserved balls of the next normal symbol (S2123). If it is determined that there is a hit within 2 holds of the next normal symbol (S2123: Yes), the continuous pseudo-variation is set in a maximum of 30 seconds (S2124). Then, the process proceeds to S2127. In this way, if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol to be stopped is also wrong when there is no reserved ball of the special symbol, the fusion symbol is also stopped in a manner of notifying the loss, but the normal symbol 2 If there is a hit in the hold, it can be displayed together with the change of the fusion symbol corresponding to the next change of the special symbol by delaying the fixed stop in the off mode by pseudo fluctuation. .. As a result, it is possible to reduce the frequency at which the notification result of the fusion symbol is stopped and displayed when it is out of alignment.

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no hit within the 2 hold of the next normal symbol (S2123: No), it is the period during which the change of the normal symbol that stops later is executed than the timing at which the change of the special symbol stops. (S2125). Here, the period during which the change of the normal symbol that stops after the timing at which the change of the special symbol stops is executed is the change of the special symbol in which the change of the currently changing normal symbol is executing the change. It is a period during which it can be determined that the fluctuation of the normal symbol that will start to fluctuate during the fluctuation of the special symbol will continue to fluctuate even after the fluctuation of the special symbol that is currently fluctuating has stopped.

If it is determined in the process of S2125 that it is not the period during which the change of the normal symbol that stops after the timing at which the change of the special symbol stops is executed (S2125: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is a period in which the fluctuation of the normal symbol that stops later is executed than the timing at which the fluctuation of the special symbol stops (S2125: Yes), the pseudo-variation setting process of the first embodiment (FIG. 45). , S1614), the deviation pseudo-variation is performed after the execution of the special symbol change is completed so that the change of the normal symbol during execution and the stop timing of the deviation pseudo-variation match. Is set in the difference second t1 (see FIG. 10A) until the end of (S2212). Then, the process proceeds to S2127.

In the process of S2127, the value of the effect counter 223 g is acquired (S2127), and the effect type (continuous effect or off effect, variation period) set in the pseudo-variation setting area 223i and the acquired value of the effect counter 223 g are used. Pseudo-variation pattern is selected from the pseudo-variation pattern selection table 222d (see FIG. 18B) according to the effect type (S2128). Then, a display pseudo start command indicating the selected pseudo fluctuation pattern is set (S2129). This display pseudo-variation start command is a command for notifying the display control device 114 of the content of the selected pseudo-variation pattern. After that, the pseudo-variation flag 223c is set to ON (S2130), and this process ends. If the pseudo-variation pattern is continuous, the pseudo-variation pattern is set to continue for a maximum of 30 seconds, and the out-of-order pseudo-variation pattern is blacked out when the pseudo-variation period set in the pseudo-variation setting area 223i elapses. It is processed and set for directing.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by displaying the variation between the normal symbol and the special symbol together as one variation in the fusion symbol, the complicated game playability is easily notified to the player, and the game can be easily played. Can be done. Further, since the flow speed of the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is reduced upstream of the first entry port 650a so as to correspond to the period in which the normal symbol hits by the crune member 660, the game ball is played by the launcher. Even during the period when the ball is not fired, the chance of winning a prize in the first ball entrance 65a is increased.

Further, when the deviation fluctuation of the special symbol is executed, the judgment result within the 2 hold of the normal symbol is determined, and if the holding ball to be hit is stored, the period longer than the end of the fluctuation. Since the determination result of the deviation is not notified and the pseudo-variation is executed, the variation of the special symbol can be connected by the variation of the fusion symbol of one variation and produced by hitting the next normal symbol.

Returning to FIG. 79, the description will be continued. After the processing of the fluctuation stop pseudo setting processing (S2120) is executed, the processing of S2102 is executed. Here, the command to indicate that the pseudo-variation is executed when the special symbol is stopped and the pseudo-variation is executed, and the fusion symbol is stopped and displayed when the fusion symbol is stopped and displayed without the pseudo-variation. Each of the indicated commands is set as a display stop command (S2102). After that, this process ends.

Next, the explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 78. In the process of S1707, when it is determined that the stop command has not been received (S1707: No), it is determined whether the reserved ball number command of the normal figure (ordinary symbol) or the special figure (special symbol) has been received (S1707: No). S1729). When it is determined that the reserved ball number command of the normal figure or the special figure is received (S1729: Yes), the reserved ball number command reception process is executed (S1730). In the hold ball number command reception process (S1730), when a command indicating the hold ball number of a normal figure or a special figure is received, the hold ball number is updated and stored, and the third symbol display device 81 displays the command. A process of setting to update the display of each actual hold quantity to be displayed to the number corresponding to the command, a process of instructing the display of the hold symbol to be displayed in the fusion hold quantity display area, and the like are executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 81, the reserved ball number command reception process (S1730) in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the content of the control process of the hold ball number command reception process (S1730).

In the hold ball number command reception process (FIG. 81, S1730), first, it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1731). If it is determined that the command for the number of reserved balls is not received, the process of (S1733) is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol reserved ball number command has been received (S1731: Yes), the reserved ball number of the normal figure is extracted from the received command and the corresponding reserved ball number is set to the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d. It is stored (stored), and is updated by adding 1 to the value of the hold count counter 223j. Here, the reserved ball number counter 223j is a counter for displaying the reserved symbol in the fusion reserved number display area Ds6, and is configured to display the reserved symbol corresponding to the value of the reserved ball number counter 223j.

After executing the process of S1732, the process of S1733 is executed. In the process of S1733, it is determined whether or not the special figure reserved ball number command is received from the main control device 110 (S1733). If it is determined that the special figure reserved ball count command has not been received (S1733: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure reserved ball number command has been received (S1733: Yes), the reserved ball number of the special figure (special symbol) is extracted from the received command and corresponds to the corresponding reserved ball number. The value is stored in the special figure reserved ball number counter 223m (S1734). It is determined whether the value of the special figure holding ball counter 223m is a value larger than 0, that is, whether the holding ball of the special symbol is stored (S1735). When it is determined that the value of the special figure reserved ball number counter 223m is 0 (S1735: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure reserved ball number counter 223m is larger than 0 (S1735: Yes), the pseudo-variation setting flag 223h is turned on, that is, the execution of the pseudo-variation is already set. It is determined whether or not it is done (S1736). When the pseudo-variation setting flag 223h is set to on (S1736: Yes), the pseudo-variation setting flag 223h is set to off (S1737), and the process of S1738 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pseudo setting flag 223h is off (S1736: No), the process of S1738 is executed.

Here, when the special symbol reserved ball count command is received and a new memory is stored from the state where there is no reserved ball of the special symbol, if the pseudo-variation already set is set, the setting is set. It is configured to execute the process of canceling (corresponding to the process of S1737). As a result, it is possible to suppress the problem that the pseudo-variation is executed in the fused symbol when the variation of the special symbol is continuously started.

In the process of S1738, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the fluctuation period (S1738). When it is determined that the special symbol is in the fluctuation period (S1738: Yes), the value of the hold count counter 223j is larger than 0, that is, the hold symbol is displayed in the fusion hold number display area Ds6. It is determined whether the state is present (S1739). When it is determined that the value of the hold quantity counter 223j is larger than 0 (S1739: Yes), the fusion hold symbol corresponding to the special figure hold ball number counter 223m (hold displayed in the fusion hold number display area Ds6). The display of the symbol) is selected based on the lottery result stored in the special figure winning information storage area 223k (S1740). Here, if the lottery result of the newly entered special symbol is a hit, the reserved ball is likely to be changed to a reserved symbol with a high expectation such as red, and if it is out of the range, the expectation such as blue etc. A lottery that is easy to change to a low reserved symbol is executed. When the reserved ball of the special symbol is stored, the color of the displayed reserved symbol is always changed and displayed. On the other hand, when the value of the hold number counter 223j is 0 (S1739: No), 1 is added to the value of the hold number counter 223j to update (S1741). After that, the process of S1740 is executed. When the value of the hold number counter 223j is 0, it means that the hold symbol is not displayed in the fusion hold number display area Ds6. Therefore, in order to newly display the hold symbol, the value of the hold number counter 223j is 1. The color of the newly displayed reserved symbol is determined by the process of S1740. In the process of S1741, a display hold number command indicating the value of the special figure hold number counter 223m and the value of the hold number counter 223j is set. Also in the process of S1749, a display command for variably displaying the reserved symbol is set.

Returning to FIG. 78, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S1712 that the normal map fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S1712: No), the process of S1731 is executed. In the process of S1731, it is determined whether or not the normal figure or special figure winning information command has been received (S1731). When it is determined that the normal figure or special figure winning information command has been received (S1731: Yes), the information indicated by the received normal figure or special figure winning information command is stored in the normal figure winning information storage area 223a and the special figure winning information storage. Each is stored in the area 223k (S1732). After that, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 82, the variation display setting process 2 (S1630), which is one of the processes in the main process 2 (see FIG. 77) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the contents of the control process of the variable display setting process 2 (S1630). In the variation display setting process 2 (S1630) in the fourth embodiment, the variation pattern selection process (S1803) is the variation pattern selection process 2 (S1820) with respect to the variation display setting process (FIG. 42, S1613) in the first embodiment. ), The normal map variation pattern selection process (S1805) is changed to the normal map variation pattern selection process 2 (S1830), which is different from the first embodiment. Since other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

If it is determined in the process of S1801 that the variation start flag 223e is on (S1801: Yes), the variation pattern selection process 2 is executed (S1820). In the variation pattern selection process 2 (S1820), a process of selecting a variation pattern of the fusion symbol corresponding to the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol is executed.

Next, the variation pattern selection process 2 (S1820) will be described with reference to FIG. 83. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the contents of the control process of the variation pattern selection process 2 (S1820). In the variation pattern selection process 2 (S1820) in the fourth embodiment, the processes S1908 to S1911 are deleted from the variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 43, S1802) in the first embodiment, and the pseudo variation starts. The difference is that the discrimination process (S1920) is added.

Next, with reference to FIG. 84, a pseudo-variation start time determination process (S1920), which is one process in the variation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 83, S1820) in the fourth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the contents of the control process of the pseudo-variation start time determination process (S1920). In the pseudo-variation start time determination process (S1920), the setting of whether or not to execute the pseudo-variation in the fusion symbol is executed after the variation is completed at the variation start timing of the special symbol.

In the pseudo-variation start time determination process (S1920), first, it is determined whether or not the hit / fail determination result of the special symbol of the variation is out of order (S1921). If it is determined that the hit / fail determination result is a hit (S1921: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hit / fail determination result is out of order, it is determined whether the value of the special figure reserved ball number counter 223m is larger than 0 (S1922). When it is determined that the value of the special figure holding ball counter 223m is a value larger than 0 (S1922: Yes), the special figure fluctuation is continuously executed and it is not necessary to execute the pseudo fluctuation, so that the pseudo fluctuation is performed. Ends this process without setting. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure holding ball number counter 223m is 0 (S1922: No), whether the holding that is a hit is stored in the 2 holdings of the normal symbol, or the general drawing winning information storage area 223a (S1923). When it is determined that the hold that is a hit is stored in the 2 hold of the normal symbol (S1923: Yes), the pseudo setting flag 223h is set to ON (S1924). The fluctuation time of the pseudo fluctuation is set to a maximum of 30 seconds (S1925). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1923, when it is determined that the hold that is a hit is not stored in the 2 hold of the normal symbol (S1923: No), this process is terminated.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, when the fluctuation of the special symbol starts, the result of the hit / fail judgment at which the fluctuation starts is out of order, and in a state where the reserved ball of the special symbol is not stored, the hit is within 2 hold of the normal symbol. If the reserved sphere is stored, the process of setting the pseudo-variation of the fusion symbol is executed after the end of the special symbol fluctuation time at which the fluctuation starts. Therefore, even if the fusion symbol is notified of the deviation determination result, the variation of the next hit normal symbol ends, and the variation of the fusion symbol does not stop until the end of the period in which the winning game is executed. In addition, since it is continued by pseudo-variation, it is possible to suppress the frequency of being notified of the deviation, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the player is discouraged and the motivation for the game is reduced.

In this embodiment, the pseudo-variation is set when there is a hit within 2 holds of the normal symbol, but 1 hold may be used, or 4 holds may be appropriately determined and set. Furthermore, when the reserved ball of the special symbol is stored, the pseudo fluctuation is not set, but the fluctuation period of the fusion symbol is set so as to be combined with the fluctuation period of the reserved special symbol. It may be configured in. In such a case, when the reservation of the special symbol to be a hit is stored, the expectation for the hit can be increased as the fluctuation period of the fusion symbol is longer by configuring the structure so that it can be easily combined.

Returning to FIG. 82, the description will be continued. In the process of S1804, when the normal map variation start flag 223b is set to ON (S1804: Yes), the normal map variation pattern selection process 2 is executed (S1830). In the normal symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (S1830), at the start of variation of the normal symbol, a process of selecting the variation pattern of the fusion symbol or the auxiliary symbol corresponding to the variation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 85, the normal map variation pattern selection process 2 (S1830), which is one process in the variation display setting process 2 (FIG. 82, S1630), will be described. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the contents of the control process of the normal map variation pattern selection process 2 (S1830). In the normal map variation pattern selection process 2 (S1830) in the fourth embodiment, each process of S2021 to S2022 is added to the normal map variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 44, S1805) in the first embodiment. It differs in that. Since other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

After executing the process of S2005, it is determined whether or not the hit / fail determination result of the normal symbol that starts to fluctuate is a hit (S2021). When it is determined that the result of the hit / fail determination of the normal symbol that starts to fluctuate is a hit (S2021: Yes), the opening notice is set corresponding to the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (S2022). Note that this opening notice is set only when the special symbol is changing and it hits the period during which the change of the special symbol is executed (including the period during which the corresponding fusion symbol is quasi-changed). The opening notice set here is a notice mode for notifying the player of the launch of the game ball shown in FIGS. 72 (a) to 72 (b).

With this configuration, when the special symbol is fluctuating, the fusion symbol is scrolled and displayed in response to the fluctuation of the special symbol, and it is difficult to determine the result of the hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol. However, since the opening notice is executed 3 seconds before the normal symbol hits, it is possible to suppress the problem of missing the opportunity to insert the game ball into the first entry slot 64a.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 77. After the process of the variation display setting process 2 (S1630) is executed, the process of the pseudo variation setting process 2 (S1640) is executed. In the pseudo-variation setting process 2 (S1640), it is determined whether it is the timing to execute the pseudo-variation, and a process of executing the display setting of the pseudo-variation and the like is executed.

Here, the pseudo-variation setting process 2 (S1640) will be described with reference to FIG. 86. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the contents of the control process of the pseudo-variation setting process 2. The pseudo-variation setting process 2 (S1640) in the fourth embodiment is the first embodiment in that the processes of S2221 to S2222 are added to the pseudo-variation setting process (FIGS. 45 and S1614) in the first embodiment. Is different. Since the other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of S2201, when the pseudo-variation flag 223c is off, that is, when the pseudo-variation is not executed in the fusion symbol (S2201: No), it is determined whether or not it is the stop timing of the out-of-order special figure variation (S2221). ). If it is determined that it is not the stop timing of the out-of-order special figure fluctuation (S2221: No), this process is terminated. It is determined whether the value of the special figure reserved ball number counter 223m is larger than 0 (S2222). When it is determined that the value of the special figure reserved ball number counter 223m is larger than 0 (S2222: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure reserved ball number counter 223m is 0 (S222: No), the process of S2207 is executed.

The processes of S2207 to S2213 have already been described in the first embodiment, but if the conditions for setting the pseudo-variation are met by determining whether to set the pseudo-variation, the setting of the pseudo-variation is executed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the reserved ball is also configured to be stored in the special symbol, and the variation corresponding to the variation between the normal symbol and the special symbol is executed by one variation in the fusion symbol. bottom. As a result, even if the game is complicated, the player can easily play the game by looking at the fusion pattern and playing the game.

In addition, when the fusion symbol corresponding to the change of the special symbol is stopped and displayed, if the normal figure is changing and there is a period until the timing when the next normal figure change starts, the changing normal figure is stopped and displayed. Since the pseudo-variation is executed in the period until it is executed, it is possible to make the stop and start of the fusion symbol continuous at a good tempo.

In addition, when the fusion symbol corresponding to the change of the special symbol is stopped and displayed, if the hold that is a hit is stored in the 2 holds of the normal symbol, the change of the hold that is a hit is stopped and the winning game is played. The fluctuation of the fusion symbol is not fixedly stopped by the pseudo-variation until the period during which is executed is completed, and when the ball enters the first entry port 64a, the fusion symbol continues until the period of the special symbol fluctuation. Since the fluctuation is executed, it is possible to reduce the chance that the fusion symbol is stopped and displayed in the notification result indicating the deviation, and it is possible to suppress the problem of reducing the motivation of the player.

In this embodiment, the pseudo-variation is executed when the fluctuation of the fusion symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, but the pseudo-variation is executed when the fluctuation of the fusion symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped. It may be configured in.

A pachinko machine may be a combination of some or all of the above-described embodiments.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments will be shown.

<Characteristic A group> (Displays a design that combines normal and special figures)
A first determination means for executing the first determination based on the establishment of the first determination condition, and a second determination means for executing the second determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition. When the first determination result by the first determination means is a specific determination result, the granting means for giving a specific period during which the second determination condition is likely to be satisfied, and the second determination result by the second determination means. In a gaming machine having a privileged game executing means for executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player when is a specific second determination result, the first identification is made based on the establishment of the first determination condition. If the display means for dynamically displaying information and the second determination condition are satisfied during the period during which the first identification information is dynamically displayed, the result of the second determination by the second determination means is used. The gaming machine A1 is characterized by having a notification control means for notifying the information by the first identification information.

Here, for a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, whether to change the state of the starting port provided on the gaming board from the first state in which the gaming ball is difficult to enter to the second state in which the gaming ball is easy to enter. There is one that executes the first lottery of whether or not. In such a conventional gaming machine, a second lottery is executed based on a start winning prize at the start opening, and when a specific lottery result is obtained in the second lottery, a winning game advantageous to the player is executed. In this type of gaming machine, a display device composed of a liquid crystal display or the like is provided, and each time the second lottery is executed, the display device executes a variable display of a symbol indicating the result of the second lottery. It is common. Further, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, a symbol is executed based on the entry of the gaming ball depending on whether the gaming ball has entered the starting port in the first state or the second state. It has also been proposed to improve the interest by changing the display mode of the variable display (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the mode of the variable display of the symbol indicating the result of the second lottery is merely changed depending on whether or not the ball has entered the starting port in the second state, and the first lottery is performed. The result itself was displayed regardless of the result of the second lottery. Therefore, since the result of the first lottery and the result of the second lottery are displayed separately on the display device, it may be difficult to understand the result of each lottery during the game. Therefore, there is a problem that the player may not be able to easily perform the game.

According to the gaming machine A1, the second determination result is also notified by the first identification information dynamically displayed based on the establishment of the first determination condition, so that the player pays attention to the first identification information to play the game. If this is done, the timing at which the first determination condition is satisfied and the second determination result can be known, and the game can be easily performed.

In the gaming machine A1, when the result of the first determination is a specific determination result, the first identification information is the first identification in a specific display mode based on the elapse of a predetermined period. A gaming machine A2 comprising a first display control means for displaying a part of information.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A1, information based on the result of the first determination is displayed by the first identification information, so that the player can see the first determination and the second by the first identification information. There is an effect that the result of the judgment can be notified together.

The gaming machine A2 has a first period determining means for determining a first period based on the result of the first determination, and the predetermined period is the first period. Machine A3.

In the gaming machine A2 or A3, if the second determination condition is not satisfied even after the specific period has elapsed after the specific display mode is displayed by the first identification information, the first identification is performed. A gaming machine A4 characterized in that the dynamic display of information is stopped.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of either the gaming machine A2 or A3, the effect that the first identification information is dynamically displayed for a long time and the problem that the result of the next first determination cannot be displayed can be suppressed. There is.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, a variable ball-entry means that can be changed into a first state in which the game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state. The second determination means is established based on the fact that a game ball has entered the variable ball entry means, and the granting means has the variable ball entry means in the specific period. A gaming machine A5 characterized by being variable to a state.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, when the first determination is a specific determination result, the variable ball entry means is changed to the first state, so that the player It is possible to set a period during which it is easy to enter the variable ball entry means, and there is an effect that the game is changed and the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the game machines A1 to A5, the first identification information is configured by displaying a combination of a plurality of identification symbol rows, and is displayed in at least one of the plurality of identification symbol rows. The feature is that the result of the first determination is notified by the information, and the result of the second determination is notified by another symbol sequence including the identification symbol sequence to which the result of the first determination is notified. Game machine A6.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the symbol sequence in which the first determination result and the second determination result are shared by the first identification information composed of a plurality of identification symbol sequences. It has the effect that it can be notified by and can be configured in an easy-to-understand manner by reducing the number of symbol rows.

<Characteristic B group> (Structure to win a prize according to the usual figure)
It is possible to change between a launching means capable of launching a gaming ball, a first state in which the gaming ball launched by the launching means can enter, and a second state in which it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter than the first state. The first determination means for executing the first determination based on the variable ball entry means and the game ball entering the variable entry means, and the first determination by the first determination means are specific first. 1 A privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result, a second determination means for executing a second determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, and a second determination means thereof. Based on the fact that the second determination by the determination means is a specific second determination result, the variable control means for changing the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state, and the variable ball entry means. Is also arranged on the upstream side, and is characterized by having a delay means for discharging the game ball in the direction in which the variable ball entry means is arranged after rolling the game ball for a specific period or more. Game machine B1.

Here, for a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, whether to change the state of the starting port provided on the gaming board from the first state in which the gaming ball is difficult to enter to the second state in which the gaming ball is easy to enter. There is one that executes the first lottery of whether or not. In such a conventional gaming machine, a second lottery is executed based on a start winning prize at the start opening, and when a specific lottery result is obtained in the second lottery, a winning game advantageous to the player is executed. In this type of gaming machine, a display device composed of a liquid crystal display or the like is provided, and each time the second lottery is executed, the display device executes a variable display of a symbol indicating the result of the second lottery. It is common. Further, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, a symbol is executed based on the entry of the gaming ball depending on whether the gaming ball has entered the starting port in the first state or the second state. It has also been proposed to improve the interest by changing the display mode of the variable display (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, even if the state of the starting port is changed to the second state based on the first lottery, the game ball reaches the starting port in a timely manner during the second state. If not done, the second lottery would not be executed. Therefore, there is a problem that it becomes difficult to insert the game ball into the start port when the start port is in the second state during the period when the player is not firing the game ball.

According to the gaming machine B1, since the gaming ball is ejected after being rolled by the delaying means upstream of the variable entering means for a specific period or more, the variable entering means is used during the period when the gaming ball is not launched by the launching means. Even in the first state, there is an effect that the gaming ball can easily enter the variable ball entry means.

The game machine B1 has a specific area through which the game ball can pass and a detection means capable of detecting that the game ball has passed through the specific area, and is based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means. , The gaming machine B2, characterized in that the above-mentioned determination conditions are satisfied.

With the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B1, the determination condition is satisfied when the gaming ball passes through a specific area, so that the player can be interested in the rolling of the gaming ball. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine B2, the delay means is provided by a ball entry portion on which the game ball can enter, a flow speed deceleration section that reduces the flow rate of the game ball that has entered the ball entry section, and a flow speed deceleration section thereof. It has at least a discharge portion for discharging the game ball to the outside of the delay means, and the ball entry portion is arranged at a position where the game ball that has passed through the specific region is easily guided. Characterized gaming machine B3.

In the gaming machine B3, the gaming machine B4 is characterized in that the gaming ball deceleration unit has at least a rolling path in which the gaming ball rolls in a spiral shape.

In the game machine B3 or B4, the game machine B5 is characterized in that the game ball deceleration unit has at least a mortar-shaped rolling path on which the game ball rolls in a circumferential shape.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, after the display means for displaying the identification information based on the result of the second determination according to the second determination condition and the identification information displayed on the display means are dynamically displayed. The variable control means has the dynamic display means for stopping and displaying with the identification information based on the result of the second determination, and the variable control means has the identification based on the specific second determination result by the dynamic display means. When the information is stopped and displayed, the variable ball-entry means is changed from the second state to the first state, and the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means during the specific period. The gaming machine B6 is characterized in that it is configured in a period shorter than the dynamic display period.

In the gaming machine B6, the specific period is composed of a period in which the period required for the gaming ball discharged from the delay means to enter the variable ball entry means is deducted from the dynamic display period. The gaming machine B7 characterized by being.

<Characteristic C group> (Pseudo fluctuation after special map fluctuation according to the normal map fluctuation start timing)
Based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, the acquisition means for acquiring information, the storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number, and the establishment of the first determination condition. Based on this, the first determination means that executes the first determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and the first effect when the first determination is executed by the first determination means. When the first display means for displaying the result of the first determination and the first display means display that the first determination is a specific result after the execution during the effect period, the gaming ball is inserted. A second determination means for executing a second determination and a second determination by the second determination means are executed based on the entry means for facilitating the ball and the entry of the game ball into the entry means. In this case, after the second effect is executed in the second effect period, the second display means for displaying the result of the second determination and the second display means indicate that the second determination is a specific result. When a specific condition is satisfied in a gaming machine having a privileged game executing means for executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player when displayed, the end timing of the second effect period and the first The gaming machine C1 is characterized by having a correction means for correcting the difference from the start timing of the effect period.

According to the gaming machine C1, the difference between the end timing of the second effect period and the start timing of the first effect period is corrected so as to be small, so that the first effect and the second effect can be easily executed alternately. , It is possible to suppress the trouble that the players get tired of the game by enjoying the mutual production. Further, when the first determination is a specific determination result, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the ball entry means, so that the relationship between the end timing of the first effect period and the start timing of the second effect period increases. There is an effect that the production can be executed more alternately.

From the second effect period determining means for determining the second effect period and the second effect period determined by the second effect period determination means on the gaming machine C1 based on the execution of the second determination. It has a duplication determining means for determining whether the first effect is executed over a period outside the period or based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the correction means has the first effect over a period outside the period. The gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the correction is executed when it is determined that the above-mentioned correction is executed.

According to the gaming machine C2, the correction is executed only when there is a difference from the execution start of the first effect, so that the effect that the start timing of the first effect and the end timing of the second effect can be closer to each other can be obtained. be.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the determination result determined by the first determination means is determined in advance before the first determination condition for the information stored in the storage means is satisfied. When it is determined in advance by the determination means and the pre-first determination means that the specific determination result is determined, the first effect is executed until the end of the first effect based on the first determination for the information. 2 The gaming machine C3 characterized by having an extension means for extending the production period.

According to the gaming machine C3, since the second effect is extended until the timing when the game ball next enters the ball entry means, the interval at which the second effect is continuously executed is shortened, and the player can be early. It is possible to suppress the trouble of getting bored.

In either of the gaming machines C2 and C3, the duplication determining means executes the determination with the execution start timing of the second effect as the fulfillment of the predetermined condition.

In the gaming machine C4, since the second effect period can be determined in advance at the execution start timing of the second effect according to the execution start timing of the first effect, there is an effect that control can be easily performed.

In any of the gaming machines C2 to C4, the duplication discriminating means executes the discriminating on the condition that the predetermined period has been reached since the start of the second staging period, assuming that the predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine C5 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine C5, the end timing of the second effect can be adjusted to the start timing of the first effect during the second effect period, so that when the first effect is executed after the start of the second effect. Has the effect of being able to make corrections.

<Characteristic D group> (Pseudo-change is executed after the special figure change by pre-reading the judgment result of the normal symbol)
Based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, the acquisition means for acquiring information, the storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the establishment of the first determination condition. Based on this, the first determination means that executes the first determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and the first effect when the first determination is executed by the first determination means. When the first display means for displaying the result of the first determination and the first display means display that the first determination is a specific result after the execution during the effect period, the game ball is inserted. A second determination means for executing a second determination based on the entry means for facilitating the ball and the entry of a game ball into the entry means, and a second determination by the second determination means are executed. In this case, after the second effect is executed in the second effect period, the second display means for displaying the result of the second determination and the second display means indicate that the second determination is a specific result. In a gaming machine having a privileged game executing means for executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player when displayed, the information is stored in the storage means before the first determination condition is satisfied. Based on the information, the pre-determination means for preliminarily determining the determination result determined by the first determination means and the second effect period are variable based on the determination result determined by the pre-determination means. A gaming machine D1 characterized by having a variable setting means for setting.

Here, for a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, whether to change the state of the starting port provided on the gaming board from the first state in which the gaming ball is difficult to enter to the second state in which the gaming ball is easy to enter. There is one that executes the first lottery of whether or not. In such a conventional gaming machine, a second lottery is executed based on a start winning prize at the start opening, and when a specific lottery result is obtained in the second lottery, a winning game advantageous to the player is executed. In this type of gaming machine, a display device composed of a liquid crystal display or the like is provided, and each time the second lottery is executed, the display device executes a variable display of a symbol indicating the result of the second lottery. It is common. Further, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, a symbol is executed based on the entry of the gaming ball depending on whether the gaming ball has entered the starting port in the first state or the second state. It has also been proposed to improve the interest by changing the display mode of the variable display (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the mode of the variable display of the symbol indicating the result of the second lottery is merely changed depending on whether or not the ball has entered the starting port in the second state, and the first lottery is performed. The result itself was displayed regardless of the result of the second lottery. Therefore, since the result of the first lottery and the result of the second lottery are displayed separately and independently on the display device, there is a problem that it is difficult to improve the relationship between the first lottery and the second lottery.

According to the gaming machine D1, the determination result of the first determination is determined in advance to change the second effect period, so that the determination result of the first determination is executed after the start of the execution of the second effect. The second effect period can be changed, and there is an effect that the first effect and the second effect can be executed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

The gaming machine D1 has a first effect period determining means for determining one effect period from a plurality of periods when the first determination is executed, and the variable setting means is a front. When the pre-article determination means determines that the first determination has a specific result, the first effect is continued until at least the end of the first effect period corresponding to the determined first determination. The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the second effect period of the second effect being executed or executed is variably set based on the longest period that can be determined by the period determination means.

According to the gaming machine D2, the second effect period is at least continued until the end of the first effect in which the next first determination is a specific determination result, so that the player can continuously execute the second effect in a short period of time. It has the effect of making it easier to play and improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, when the second determination is the specific determination result, the gaming machine D1 or D2 has a prohibiting means for prohibiting the second effect period from being changed by the variable setting means. The featured gaming machine D3.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1 or D2, when the second determination is a specific determination result, the second effect period is not changed by the prohibition means, so that the privileged game is executed. It has the effect of suppressing the variable start timing.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the first effect and the second effect are at least executed by dynamically displaying a common effect symbol on the display means. D4.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines D1 to D3, the first effect and the second effect are executed by dynamically displaying a common effect symbol, so that the player is given the first effect. There is an effect that the first effect and the second effect can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

<Characteristic E group> (Notifies the jackpot judgment by the fluctuation of the normal map and the fluctuation of the special map)
Based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, the acquisition means for acquiring information, the storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the establishment of the first determination condition. Based on this, the first determination means that executes the first determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and the result of the first determination when the first determination is executed by the first determination means. The first effect executing means for executing the first effect based on the above, the ball entry means for facilitating the entry of the game ball when the first determination is a specific result, and the game ball for the ball entry means. A second determination means for executing a second determination based on the fact that the ball has entered the ball, and a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the second determination by the second determination means is a specific determination result. The privilege game executing means to be performed, and the continuous effect executing means for executing the continuous effect based on the result of the second determination, which is the continuation of the first effect when the second determination by the second determination means is executed. The gaming machine E1 characterized by having the above.

According to the gaming machine E1, since the results of the first determination and the second determination are executed in a continuous effect, it is possible to make the player appear as if the two determinations are the result of one determination. effective.

In the gaming machine E1, the first effect executed based on the first determination being a specific result is executed at least continuously during the period when the ball entry means is easy to enter. A gaming machine E2 characterized by being present.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effect of the game machine E1, the first effect is continuously executed during the period when the ball means is easy to enter, so that the game ball enters the ball entry means. There is an effect that it can be easily continued with the continuous effect executed when the second determination is executed.

The game machine E1 or E2 has a display means for dynamically displaying a plurality of symbol sequences as the first effect, and the first effect executing means has the plurality of symbol sequences based on the result of the first determination. Of these, at least two are stopped by a combination indicating the result of the first determination, and the continuous effect executing means uses the second symbol sequence other than the symbol sequence stopped by the first staging executing means. The gaming machine E3 is characterized in that it is stopped by a combination of symbols stopped by the first staging execution means in the previous term and a combination of related symbols based on the result of the determination.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1 or E2, it is possible to combine a plurality of symbols and notify the first determination and the second determination in order, as compared with the case where the symbols are set separately. Has the effect of being able to simplify and notify.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the gaming machine E4 is characterized in that the ball entering means is configured so that the ball cannot be entered except during the period during which the ball can be easily entered.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the second determination is not executed except when the first determination is a specific determination result, so that the second determination is executed. It has the effect of making it easier to understand the timing.

<Characteristic F group> (Game quality)
Based on the establishment of the first determination condition, the first determination means for executing the determination in which the determination probability resulting in the specific first determination result is set to the first probability, and the specific first determination by the first determination means. When it is determined to be the result, the ball entry means in which the period for facilitating the entry of the game ball is set, and the determination that the specific second determination result is obtained when the game ball enters the entry means. A second determination means that executes a determination in which the probability is set to the second probability, and a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the second determination means determines that the specific second determination result is executed. A gaming machine F1 characterized by having a privileged gaming execution means.

According to the gaming machine F1, since the probability that the privilege game is executed can be set by combining the first determination probability and the second determination probability, there is an effect that a novel game can be provided to the player.

When the second determination means determines in the gaming machine F1 that the second determination result is a special second determination result different from the specific second determination result, the area in which the gaming ball can enter and the area in which the gaming ball can enter are entered. It has a specific area through which the ball has passed, and the privileged game executing means is characterized in that the privileged game is executed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the specific area. Gaming machine F2.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1, even if it is not determined as a specific second determination result, a special second determination result is obtained, so that the gaming ball can pass through a specific area. There is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved because the opportunity to become is given.

The gaming machine F3 is characterized in that the probability of being determined as the special second determination result is set higher than the second probability in the gaming machine F2.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F2, the frequency of being determined as a special second determination result increases, and the player gets tired of performing a game of trying to enter a specific area. Can be prevented.

In the gaming machine F2 or F3, a variable member that can be changed into a first state in which a gaming ball that has entered the region can pass through the specific region and a second state in which it is more difficult to pass than the first state. The gaming machine F4 is characterized by having a variable control means for varying the variable member from the second state to the first state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F2 or F3, it is possible to change between a state in which the gaming machine F2 or F3 can pass and a state in which it is difficult to pass through the specific area. It has the effect of being able to be controlled.

The gaming machine F4 has a timing determining means for determining the timing at which the gaming ball can enter the region based on the determination of the special second determination result by the second determining means. The gaming machine F5 is characterized in that the predetermined condition is satisfied at a predetermined predetermined timing based on the special second determination result.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F4, it is possible to change whether or not the gaming ball can pass to the specific area at the timing determined by the timing determining means, so that the gaming ball can be easily reached to the specific area. There is an effect that the ratio of passing through can be controlled.

Each of the gaming machines is a gaming machine Z1 characterized by being a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is equipped with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the winning opening), the identification information dynamically displayed in the display means may be fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. Further, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

The gaming machine Z2, wherein each gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the display of the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

The gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that each of the gaming machines is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
64a 1st entrance

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Here, for a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, whether to change the state of the starting port provided on the gaming board from the first state in which the gaming ball is difficult to enter to the second state in which the gaming ball is easy to enter. There is one that executes the first lottery of whether or not. In such a conventional gaming machine, a second lottery is executed based on a start winning prize at the start opening, and when a specific lottery result is obtained in the second lottery, a winning game advantageous to the player is executed. As a result, both the result of the first lottery and the result of the second lottery were focused on, and the interest of the player was improved.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886

However, in the gaming machines such as the above examples, it is necessary to improve the interest of the gaming, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in playing a game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 stores up to a predetermined number of acquisition means for acquiring information and the information acquired by the acquisition means based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. The storage means that can be used, the first determination means that executes the first determination based on the information stored in the storage means based on the establishment of the first determination condition, and the first determination means. When the first determination is executed, the first display control means capable of displaying the mode showing the result of the first determination on the display means after the first effect is executed in the first effect period, and the above. When the display means displays an aspect for showing that the first determination is a specific first determination result, the ball entry means that facilitates the entry of the game ball and the game ball in the entry means. The second determination means capable of executing the second determination based on the fact that the ball has entered the ball, and the mode corresponding to the result of the second determination means are displayed on the display means until the display is started. After executing the second effect displayed on the display means, it is possible to cause the display means to start displaying an aspect corresponding to the result of the second determination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry means. 2nd display control means and a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player after the display means displays an aspect indicating that the second determination is a specific second determination result. And, it is possible to determine in advance the determination result determined by the first determination means before the first determination condition for the information stored in the storage means is satisfied. It has a pre-first determination means, and is preliminarily determined to be determined to be the specific first determination result by the pre-first determination means, and the information determined by the pre-first determination means is used. The mode indicating that it is the corresponding specific first determination result is displayed on the display means, and the game ball enters the ball entry means for which the game ball can easily enter the ball. The mode corresponding to the result of the second determination can be started to be displayed on the display means, and the first effect is configured to dynamically display the identification information capable of showing the result of the first determination. The redynamic display effect in which the dynamic display of the identification information is started after the identification information is temporarily stopped and displayed can be executed until the identification information is stopped and displayed in the first effect of 1. In the gaming machine, the first effect is newly started after the mode for showing the second determination result is displayed on the display means. It is configured so that the third effect displayed on the display means can be executed in the period up to .

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, it is possible to store up to a predetermined number of acquisition means for acquiring information and the information acquired by the acquisition means based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. The first determination is executed by the storage means, the first determination means that executes the first determination based on the information stored in the storage means based on the establishment of the first determination condition, and the first determination means. When this is done, the first display control means capable of displaying the mode showing the result of the first determination on the display means after the first effect is executed in the first effect period, and the first determination are specified. When the mode for showing that it is the first determination result of the above is displayed on the display means, the ball entry means that facilitates the entry of the game ball and the game ball have entered the ball entry means. Based on the above, the second determination means capable of executing the second determination and the mode corresponding to the result of the second determination means are displayed on the display means until the display is started on the display means. A second display control capable of causing the display means to start displaying an aspect corresponding to the result of the second determination based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry means after executing the second effect. It has a means and a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player after the display means displays an aspect indicating that the second determination is a specific second determination result. , The pre-first determination means capable of preliminarily determining the determination result determined by the first determination means before the first determination condition for the information stored in the storage means is satisfied. , And the specific first determination means determines in advance that the specific first determination result is determined, and the specific information corresponding to the information determined by the prior first determination means. An aspect indicating that it is the first determination result is displayed on the display means, and the result of the second determination is based on the fact that the game ball has entered the ball entry means, which facilitates the entry of the game ball. The corresponding mode can be started to be displayed on the display means, and the first effect is configured so that identification information capable of showing the result of the first determination is dynamically displayed, and the identification information is displayed. The re-dynamic display effect in which the dynamic display of the identification information is started after the temporary stop display is performed is configured to be executable until the identification information is stopped and displayed in the first effect of 1. The game machine has the table in the period from when the mode for showing the second determination result is displayed on the display means until the first effect is newly started. It is configured so that the third effect displayed on the display means can be executed . Therefore, there is an effect that the interest can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the inside of the 2nd variable winning apparatus. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting of the display screen in the third symbol display device, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen in the third symbol display device. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display screen in the third symbol display device. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display screen in the third symbol display device. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display screen in the third symbol display device. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display screen in the third symbol display device. (A) and (b) are timing charts showing the flow of pseudo-variation of the fusion symbol in the third symbol display device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows the outline of various counters. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control unit, and (b) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main control unit. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first jackpot type selection table, and (c) is a schematic diagram. The second is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the random number table, and (d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the contents of the small hit type selection table schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the small hit scenario table, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit scenario a, and (c) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small hit scenario a. It is a schematic diagram which shows the content of b schematically. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal map fluctuation pattern selection table (normal), and (b) schematically shows the contents of the normal map fluctuation pattern selection table (time saving / V). It is a schematic diagram. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the voice lamp control device, (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the pseudo-variation pattern selection table, and (c). Is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a display control device. (A) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the back surface B. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the transfer data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a drawing list schematically. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start setting process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the through gate passing process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the V passage processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the main processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot control process executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot ending control process executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which showed the small hit ending control process which is executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the pseudo-variation start setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern selection process executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the ordinary figure fluctuation pattern selection process which is executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the pseudo-variation start setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the boot process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the hit-related command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the jackpot opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. (A) is a flowchart showing the final round command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the jackpot interval command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. (A) is a flowchart showing the jackpot ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the small hit opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. Is. (A) is a flowchart showing the small hit ending command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the V-pass command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. Is. It is a flowchart which showed the pseudo-variation display process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the error command process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the pointer update process executed by the MPU in the display control device. .. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. be. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in the display control device. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the 3rd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the RAM in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the ordinary symbol variation process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the electric accessory opening / closing process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in 3rd Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the modification of the 3rd Embodiment. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the pseudo-variation of a fusion symbol executed by the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which showed the flow of the pseudo-variation of a fusion symbol executed by the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 4th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting of the display screen in the third symbol display device in the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a diagram showing the display screen in the third symbol display device in the fourth embodiment. It is a figure which showed an example. (A) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display screen displayed on the third symbol display device in the fourth embodiment. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the main control device according to the fourth embodiment, and (b) shows the electrical configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device according to the fourth embodiment. It is a block diagram. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control unit in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process which is executed by MPU in the main control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the main process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the pseudo-variation start setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the pseudo fluctuation start setting process at the time of fluctuation stop which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the hold ball number command reception process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation pattern selection process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the pseudo-variation start time discrimination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the ordinary figure variation pattern selection process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the pseudo-variation setting process 2 executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control apparatus in 4th Embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. Is a front view of the inside of the second variable winning device 650.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

The inner frame 12 includes a large number of nails, a first ball entry device 64 having a first ball entry port 64a, a first variable winning device 65 having a first specific winning opening 65a, and a second specific winning opening 650a. The game board 13 (see FIG. 2) provided with the second variable winning device 650 and the like is detachably attached from the front side. A ball game is performed by the game ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 guides the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 11) that launches the ball to the front region of the game board 13 and the game ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Launch rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as the opening / closing axis of the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) can be visually recognized from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16. It has become.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing game balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the game ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a by the inclination.

Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is used by the player, for example, when the stage of the effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later, is changed, or when the effect content of the super reach is changed. Be manipulated.

The stage is an effect mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are unified, and is not shown in the pachinko machine 10 as "city stage", "empty stage", and "island stage". There are three stages. Then, the first ball entry port 64a, which will be described later, that is, various effects such as the variable effect and the reach effect performed in association with the entry into the start winning opening (starting winning) are matched to the themes given to each stage. It is designed to be done. The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during the period when the fluctuation effect is not performed or during the high-speed fluctuation, and each time the frame button 22 is operated, for example, "city stage" → " It is changed repeatedly in the order of "empty stage"-> "island stage"-> "city stage"-> ... Immediately after the power is turned on, for example, a "city stage" is set as the initial stage.

On the other hand, the third symbol display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen of the super reach effect mode during the normal reach when developing from the normal reach to the super reach when the pseudo variation effect is started. If the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the effect content at the time of super reach is changed.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 is lit by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach effect. Or it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying the time when the prize ball is being paid out and the time when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to the region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, a game ball is operated according to the operation. Is lent out. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area where the remaining amount information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on and the remaining amount is displayed as a numerical value as the remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine, a so-called cash machine, in which game balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit does not require the ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit is not required. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion of the 40 to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing game balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. ing. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the game ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and the ball launching unit 112a is allowed to be driven inside the operation handle 51. A touch sensor 51a for pressing, a push button type stop switch 51b that stops the firing of the game ball during the pressing operation, and a variable that detects the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 by the change in electric resistance. It has a built-in resistor (not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the game ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the game ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening thereof is opened. The game ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "senryobako" or "dollar box") for receiving the game balls discharged from the lower plate 50 placed under the lower plate 50. It will be done. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 is a wooden base plate 60 machined into a substantially square shape in front view, in addition to a large number of nails for ball guidance (only partially shown) and a windmill (not shown). , Rails 61, 62, 1st ball entry port 64a, 1st variable winning device 65 having 1st specific winning opening 65a, 2nd variable winning device 650 having 2nd specific winning opening 650a, normal symbol starting port (through) The gate) 67, the variable display device unit 80, and the like are assembled and configured, and the peripheral edge thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). A first ball entry device 64 having a first entry opening 64a, a first variable winning device 65 having a first specific winning opening 65a, a second variable winning device 650 having a second specific winning opening 650a, and a variable display device unit 80. Is arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. Therefore, for example, by providing a decorative movable accessory that is movable according to the game on the rear surface side of the base plate 60, the movement of the movable accessory can be visually recognized by the player, so that the range is limited. It is possible to use the game area in three dimensions, and there is an effect that various effects can be provided to the player.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer periphery of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back of the game board 13. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of the ball. The game area is an area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired) which is the front surface of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 70 connecting the rails. This is the area where the game ball flows down.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the game ball launched from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 7) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2), and the game ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 may return to the ball guide passage again. Be prevented. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the game ball, and the game ball launched with a predetermined force or more hits the return rubber 69. , The momentum is dampened and bounced back toward the center.

The pachinko machine 10 has an open / close door that can be changed between an open state in which a game ball can enter the first entry port 64a and a closed state in which the game ball is prevented from entering the first entry port 64a. The first ball entry device 64 is provided. The opening / closing door of the first ball entry device 64 has a rectangular outer shape, substantially coincides with the outer circumference of the first ball entry port 64a, stands upright in parallel with the game board 13, and faces the first ball entry port 64a. By arranging the ball in the first ball opening 64a, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the first ball opening 64a. The open / close door is pivotally supported on the lower end side, and is configured to rotate 90 degrees toward the front side of the game board 13 around the shaft by operating (on) a solenoid (not shown). ing. As a result, the game ball flowing down the front side of the game board 13 is received by the upper surface of the opening / closing door, and the received game ball is guided to the inside of the first entry port 64a. Although the details will be described later, when the game ball enters the first entry slot 64a, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, and the game ball opens the through gate (normal symbol start opening) 67. When it passes, a lottery of ordinary symbols (second symbol) is performed. Specifically, the opening / closing door of the first ball entry device 64 is always set to the closed state, and when it hits a normal symbol, it is opened in a predetermined opening pattern (opening period, opening number of times). It is variable to. When the game ball enters the first ball entry port 64a, a special symbol lottery is executed, and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 execute an effect based on the lottery result.

In the special symbol lottery performed for entering the first ball opening 64a, it is determined whether or not the special symbol has won a big hit or a small hit, and the special symbol is a big hit or a small hit. If it is determined that, the big hit type or the small hit type is also determined.

When the hit / fail determination result of the special symbol becomes a big hit, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state (big hit game). Here, when the jackpot game is executed, after a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed (after the opening period has elapsed), the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65, which is normally closed, has a predetermined period. It is released (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed, or until 10 balls are won), and the opening is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). Then, after the opening of the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 is repeated a predetermined number of times, the jackpot game ends when a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) elapses (the ending period elapses).

It should be noted that, by winning one game ball in the first variable winning device 65, 15 game balls are paid out to the player as prize balls. Further, the period from the execution of the jackpot game to the opening of the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 (opening period) and the specified door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). ) The period from the repetition to the end of the jackpot game (ending period) and the period during which the specific door 65f is closed during the opening operation of the specific door 65f (interval period), which is repeatedly executed, are appropriately set. do it.

During the jackpot game, a large number of game balls (for example, about 150 (for example, 10 rounds x 15 rounds)) are awarded in the first specific winning opening 65a of the first variable winning device 65, so that a larger amount of prizes than usual. Balls (about 1500 pieces (100 pieces x 10 shots)) are paid out.

The details will be described later, but for the jackpot of the special symbol, one of the jackpot types is determined from the two types of "big hit A" and "big hit B" (see Fig. 14 (b)), and the round set for the jackpot type. The specific door 65f is opened by the number of times (15R (round) in this embodiment). In addition, after the end of the special gaming state, the time-saving gaming state is given to the player a predetermined number of times based on the jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of the jackpot (for example, three times when the jackpot A is won in the normal gaming state). ) Is given.

On the other hand, in the lottery of the normal symbol executed for the passage of the game ball to the through gate (normal symbol start port) 67, the hit / fail determination of the normal symbol is performed. When the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit, the opening / closing door of the first ball entry device 64 located below the through gate 67 is changed to the open state for a predetermined time (2 seconds in the present embodiment), and the first It becomes easy for the game ball to enter the ball entry port 64a. That is, when the normal symbol is hit, the game ball is likely to enter the first entrance 64a, and as a result, the special symbol is easily drawn.

When the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, the variable display of the normal symbol is started on the second symbol display device 83, and the predetermined time (for example, the selected variable time such as 5 seconds or 10 seconds) is set. After that, the normal symbol indicating the lottery result is stopped and displayed. If the game ball passes through the through gate 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37. Will be done. In the present embodiment, the variation display of the second symbol is executed not only in the second symbol display device 83 but also in the third symbol display device 81 in synchronization with the variation display of the second symbol display device 83. In the present embodiment, when the through gate 67 is passed, the number of passages is suspended up to 4 times, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the configuration may not be suspended or may be different from 4 times. ..

Further, below the through gate 67, a crune member 660 into which a game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 enters is arranged. This crune member is formed in a conical shape, and has a ball entry portion at an upper portion into which a game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 enters. The ball entry portion is configured such that the distance between the through gate 67 and the ball entry portion is less than one game ball so that a game ball other than the one that has passed through the through gate 67 does not enter the ball. A spiral flow path 660k is formed in which a game ball that has entered the ball entry portion is spirally flowed down along the inner wall of the crune member 660, and the end portion of the spiral flow path 660k is gently mortar-shaped toward the center. An inclined bottom surface portion 660t is formed. The spiral flow path 660k is configured to guide the game ball that has entered the ball entry portion to the outer end portion of the bottom surface portion 660t so that the game ball spirally flows down along the inner peripheral surface of the bottom surface portion 660t. Has been done. The bottom surface portion 660t has the same shape as the bottom surface of the already known croon, and gradually guides the game ball to the central portion while making the game ball make a circular motion along the inner circumference of the bottom surface. At the center of the bottom surface portion 660t, a ball outlet 660a slightly larger than one game ball (in this embodiment, a diameter of 12 mm) is formed so as to project downward in a cylindrical shape. Further, inside the ball outlet 660a, a flow path is spirally formed by a 0.5 mm protruding flow path wall, and the game ball spirally rotates inside the ball outlet 660a and outside the ball outlet 660a. It is configured to be discharged into.

In the present embodiment, only the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 passes inside the crune member 660, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a game ball that has not passed through the through gate 67 can enter the ball. It may be configured. With such a configuration, the frequency of entering the ball into the croon member 660 increases, and it is possible to make it easier to enter the first ball entry port 64a. Further, in the present embodiment, the spiral flow path 660k is formed inside the crune member 660, but the configuration is not limited to this, and a configuration in which the spiral flow path 660k is not provided may be used, or the bottom surface of the crune shape may be provided. May be formed only by the spiral flow path 660k without forming the above. Further, instead of the spiral flow path 660k, a deceleration portion made of a material having a high friction coefficient for decelerating the flow speed of the game ball may be formed. If it delays the flow of the game ball, it may be appropriately selected.

As a result, the game ball that has entered the entry portion of the crune member 660 slowly rolls along the inner peripheral wall of the crune member 660 in the spiral flow path 660k and is guided to the bottom surface portion 660t. The game ball guided to the bottom surface portion 660t is gradually guided to the ball outlet 660a while making a circular motion from the outer peripheral side to the center on the bottom surface portion 660t. Further, the diameter of the ball outlet 660a is slightly larger than that of the game ball, and the game ball spirally rotates inside the ball outlet 660a protruding downward due to the spiral flow path formed inside. While doing so, it is discharged to the outside of the ball outlet 660a. Therefore, the game ball that has entered the entry portion of the crune member 660 is configured to take about 10 seconds to be discharged from the ball outlet 660a. In addition, in this embodiment, since the fluctuation time for hitting a normal symbol is configured to be 10 seconds (see FIG. 17A), if the lottery result is a hit after passing through the through gate 67, it is possible to win. Since the game ball that has entered from the ball outlet 660a of the crune member 660 is discharged at the timing when the fluctuation ends, the game ball is first set at the timing when the opening / closing door of the first ball entry device 64 is opened. It can be made to flow down to the ball entry device 64. Therefore, even when the player has stopped firing the game ball, there is an effect that the game ball can be entered into the first ball entry port 64a at the timing when the opening / closing door is opened. Further, below the ball outlet 660a, a game nail KG is arranged at a position facing the ball outlet 660a. As a result, the game ball discharged from the ball outlet 660a and flowing down cannot directly flow down to the first ball entry device 64, the flow speed is reduced by the game nail KG, and the game ball is further distributed to the left and right. Therefore, since the time until the game ball reaches the first ball entry device 64 can be further delayed, it is possible to match the time lag from the determination of the normal symbol to the opening of the opening / closing door. , It is possible to make it easier for the game ball to enter the first ball entry port 64a.

In this embodiment, the crune member 660 is configured to delay by the fluctuation time of the hit variation of the normal symbol, but the time is not limited to this and may be 5 seconds or the like. With this configuration, it is possible to delay the period, although it is shorter than the per-variable period.

In the present embodiment, in the case of a miss (in the present embodiment, the probability of the miss is 4/5), a small hit different from the big hit (in the present embodiment, the jackpot 1/5) has a predetermined probability (in the present embodiment, the probability of the miss is 4/5). It is set at 1/4) of the small hit. If it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit, the small hit type is also determined. That is, when the special symbol becomes a small hit, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to a specific gaming state (small hit game), and the opening / closing piece 650b of the second variable winning device 650, which is normally closed, is set for a predetermined period (for example). , Until 1.5 seconds have passed, or one round until 10 balls are won).

As a result, the ball can be won in the second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650. The details will be described later with reference to FIG. 4, but the V passage passage 650e3 is provided inside the second variable winning device 650 described above (see FIG. 4), and the sphere is a V passage passage 650e3. When the V detection switch 650e5 (see FIG. 4) detects that the game has passed through (hereinafter referred to as “passing through a specific area”), a jackpot game is given.

Details will be described later, but if you win a small hit with a special symbol, refer to the small hit type selection table 202c (see FIG. 15) and there are three types: "small hit A", "small hit B", and "small hit C". One of the small hit types is selected from. Then, the small hit game is executed based on the selected small hit type. Further, as will be described in detail later, only "small hit A" out of the three types of small hits is when a ball enters the second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 as a result of the small hit game. It is set so that it can pass through the V passage flow path 650e3. That is, only "small hit A" is set so that a big hit can be given as a result of the small hit game.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 wins a big hit by a special symbol lottery (so-called type 1 game) and a small hit by a special symbol lottery, and goes to the second variable winning device 650 by the small hit game. A game (so-called type 1 and type 2 mixer) equipped with a game (so-called type 2 game) aiming at a big hit by passing the winning ball to a specific area (V detection switch 650e5 in this embodiment). Have.

By having such playability, the player can aim for a big hit with a plurality of opportunities, so that it is possible to alleviate the tiredness of the game.

Here, the second variable winning device 650 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 4 (a) to 4 (b). As shown in FIG. 2, the second variable winning device 650 is arranged at the lower left of the third symbol display device 81, and the firing handle 51 is arranged so that the game ball passes on the left side of the third symbol display device 81. When a game is played by an operated game method (hereinafter referred to as a left-handed game), it is easy for the game ball to win in the second specific winning opening 650a (the game ball passes through the right side of the third symbol display device 81). This is configured as a comparison with a game method in which the launch handle 51 is operated (hereinafter referred to as a right-handed game). The second variable winning device 650 is arranged on the front side of the game board and has a front cover body formed with a specific winning opening 650a for receiving a game ball flowing down the game area of the game board 13 and a front cover body thereof. An opening / closing piece 650b that is rotatably configured to open and close the specific winning opening 650a, and a flow path through which the game ball that has entered the specific winning opening 650a and is arranged on the back side of the game board 13 flows down are formed. It is mainly composed of a flow path member 650h. In the second variable winning device 650, the front cover body of the game board 13 is fixed to the game board 13 with screws so as to cover the through hole machined by the router from the front side of the game board 13. A second specific winning opening 650a is arranged on the front cover body as an opening through which a game ball flowing down the front side of the game board 13 can enter, and a closed state covering the second specific winning opening 650a. As shown in FIG. 2, a variable opening / closing piece 650b is attached to an open state in which the game ball is guided to the second specific winning opening 650a. As shown in FIG. 2, the opening / closing piece 650b has a claw shape, the tip portion is tapered, and the other end side of the tip portion is rotatably supported by the front cover body. There is. The side of the opening / closing piece 650b facing the second specific winning opening 650a is formed to be recessed in an arc shape so as to guide the game ball to the second specific winning opening 650a when the opening / closing piece 650b is opened. The opening / closing piece 650b is configured to be variable between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid arranged in the second variable winning device 650. Since the mechanism for varying the opening / closing piece 650b is already known, the details thereof will be omitted.

A part of the through hole is exposed at the lower left of the front cover body, and the back side of the game board 13 is made visible by a transparent plastic member so as to be flush with the front surface of the game board 13. Is blocked. On the back side of this plastic member, a V passage flow path 650e3 and a V detection switch 650e5, which will be described later, are visibly configured, and a V detection switch 650e5 (specific area) is arranged at a position corresponding to the V detection switch 650e5. The letter "V" indicating that the switch is printed is printed. As a result, the player can visually confirm whether or not the game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 is detected by the V detection switch 650e5, further improving the interest of the game. can.

4 (a) to 4 (b) are views showing the flow path member 650h arranged on the back surface side of the game board 13 in the second variable winning device 650. FIG. 4A shows a switching valve 650b3 so that the game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 cannot (or is difficult) to pass through the V passage passage 650. It is a figure which showed the state which is rotated upward (the solenoid is not activated). In FIG. 4B, the solenoid is moved downward by the switching valve 650b3 so that the game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 can pass through the V passage flow path 650e3. It is a figure which showed the state which is rotated by operating.

The flow path member 650h formed on the back surface side of the second variable winning device 650 will be described with reference to FIG. 4A. The game ball winning in the second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 rolls in a flow path communicating with the through hole of the game board 13 formed inside the front cover body to the back side of the game board 13. Roll to. The flow path member 650h is fixed to the back surface side of the game board 13 with screws so that the inflow port 650a1 of the flow path member 650h is arranged at a position facing the through hole. The flow path member 650h forms a flow path through which a plurality of game balls can flow down due to the wall portion protruding toward the back surface. A flow path is formed so that the game ball that has passed through the inflow port 650a1 is distributed to either the discharge flow path 650e1 or the V passage flow path 650e3. A switching valve 650b3 is arranged at the abutting portion between the discharge flow path 650e1 and the V passage flow path 650e3, and the switching valve 650b3 rotates and operates to allow the game ball that has passed through the inflow port 650a1 to be discharged from the discharge flow path 650e1. It is configured to be distributed to the V passage flow path 650e3.

As shown in FIG. 4A, the discharge flow path 650e1 is an upper flow path in the flow path member 650h, and is inside the outer peripheral wall portion 650e7 and the flow path member 650h forming the outer periphery of the flow path member 650h. The inner wall portion 650f3 is formed so as to project to the back side with a width that allows one game ball to pass through at a position that is wider than the outer peripheral wall portion 650e7 so that one game ball can pass (15 mm in this embodiment). Has been done. The outer peripheral wall portion 650e7 is arranged below the inner wall portion 650f3 at intervals so that one or more game balls can pass through, and the inner wall portion 650f3 and the outer peripheral wall portion 650e7 arranged below the inner wall portion 650e3 have a V passage flow path 650e3. Is formed. Further, a partition wall 650f4 is provided to partition the discharge flow path 650e1 and the V passage flow path 650e3. The distance from the partition wall 650f4 to the inner wall portion 650f3 is configured to be less than one game ball so that the game ball cannot pass through the upper part of the partition wall 650f4, and the flowing game ball surely flows down to the V passage flow path 650e3. can do. The inner wall portion 650f3 is formed so as to be gently inclined downward to the left to a position directly below the inflow port 650a1, and has a width (1 ball can pass through from the end portion to the outer peripheral wall portion 650e7 arranged on the right side). In this embodiment, it is formed with a space of 15 mm). A switching valve 650b3 is arranged at a position on the same upper surface as the outer peripheral wall portion 650e7 and the end portion of the inner wall portion 650f3.

As shown in FIG. 4A, the switching valve 650b3 has a plate shape having an upper surface on which one game ball can pass, and one end opposite to the inner wall portion 65f3 is a flow path member 650h. It is rotatably fixed to the wall. This shaft portion is connected to a link member operated by a solenoid (not shown), and when the solenoid operates, the link member rotates and the switching valve 650b3 is within the range of the arrow shown in FIG. 4 (a). It is configured to rotate with. When the solenoid is inactive, the switching valve 650b3 is urged and fixed at the position of the solid line shown in FIG. 4A, and is formed on the passage detection sensor 650as that can detect the passage of the game ball. The game ball that has passed through the inlet 650a1 is received on the upper surface and rolled (guided) to the discharge flow path 650e1. The game ball flowing down the discharge flow path 650e1 is detected by the discharge detection switch 650e6 arranged at the end of the discharge flow path 650e1 and guided to the flow path to be discharged to the outside of the game ball. A passage detection switch 650as in which an inflow port 650a1 through which the game ball can pass is formed is arranged, and the game ball is detected by the passage detection switch 650as to specify the second variable winning device 650. It is detected that a game ball has entered the winning opening 650a, and the payout of the winning ball, the counting of the number of winnings, and the like are executed based on the detection.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 4B, when the solenoid operates and the switching valve 650b3 is rotated downward, the game ball that has passed through the inflow port 650a1 flows downward, and the V passage flow path 650e3 Since the entrance to the V passage is open, it flows into the V passage flow path 650e3. The above-mentioned V detection switch 650e5 is arranged at the end of the V passage flow path 650e3, and after being detected by the V detection switch 650e5, the game ball is guided to the flow path to be discharged to the outside.

In the present embodiment, when the winning / failing determination result of the special symbol is a small hit, the execution of the small hit game is started. The start of the small hit game is the small hit start setting process (S402 or S403 in FIG. 27) executed by the MPU201 of the main controller 110 in the small hit scenario a202g1 or the small hit scenario b202g2 (see FIGS. (A) to (c)). By setting in, it is determined that the small hit scenario a202g1 or b202g2 is set in the small hit control process (S1005 in FIG. 36) in the main process (FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 (FIG. 36). It is started by S1301: Yes) in FIG. 36. The start of the small hit game can be defined as the time when the fixed period (1s in the present embodiment), which is the period during which the symbol indicating the small hit is fixedly stopped and the symbol is fixed and stopped, has elapsed.

First, as common to the small hit scenario a202g1 and the small hit scenario b202g2, the switching valve 650b3 is rotated downward 1.5 seconds after the start of the small hit game execution, and the game ball can pass through the V passage flow path 650e3. Is set to. After that, 4 seconds after the start of the small hit game, the solenoid is deactivated and rotated upward, and the game ball is changed to a state in which it is impossible (difficult) to flow into the V passing flow path 650e3. On the other hand, the operation (opening) timing of the opening / closing piece 650b set so that the game ball can enter the second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 is the small hit type (that is, the small hit scenario). It is variably set depending on whether a202g1 is set or the small hit scenario b202g2 is set as a small hit type). Specifically, if the small hit type is small hit A (small hit type in which the small hit scenario a202g1 is set), as shown in FIG. 16B, 1.5 seconds after the start of the small hit game. It is opened and then closed 3 seconds after the start of the small hit game. On the other hand, if the small hit type is small hit B and small hit C (small hit type in which the small hit scenario b202g2 is set), it is released 4 seconds after the start of the small hit game, and then from the start of the small hit game. Closed after 5.5 seconds. With this configuration, if the small hit A, the opening / closing piece 650b is in the open state during the period when the game ball can flow into the V passage flow path 650e3, so that the game ball enters the V passage flow path 650e3. The game ball is detected by the V detection switch 650e5, and the jackpot game can be given to the player. On the other hand, in the small hits B and C, as shown in FIG. 16C, the opening / closing piece 650b is not opened during the period when the game ball can flow down to the V passing flow path 650e3, so that the opening / closing piece 650b is not opened to the V passing flow path 650e3. The game balls cannot flow in, and all the game balls that have entered the second specific winning opening 650a are guided to the discharge flow path 650e1. That is, the small hit A is a small hit in which the game ball can be detected by the V detection switch 650e5, and the small hit B and the small hit C cannot detect the game ball by the V detection switch 650e5. It is set to a possible (difficult) small hit.

In this way, it is possible to control whether or not the V detection switch 650e5 is detected by the small hit type, so that the small hit (small hit A in this embodiment) is given to the player. Small hits that are not performed (in this embodiment, small hits B and C) can be set according to the small hit type. Therefore, the probability (frequency) of giving a big hit can be adjusted by adjusting the selection ratio in the small hit type and adjusting the determination probability of the small hit. Therefore, it is possible to give the player an expectation not only for the determination of the big hit in the special symbol but also for the determination of the small hit. As a result, it is possible to further suppress the player from getting bored.

The game ball that has won the second variable winning device 650 is detected by the passage detection switch 650as arranged at the inflow port 650a1, and the ball that has flowed down the V passage flow path 650e3 is detected by the V detection switch 650e5. The ball flowing down the discharge flow path 650e1 is detected by the discharge detection switch 650e6. In this way, the total number of winning game balls (total number of game balls detected by the passage detection switch 650as of the inflow port 650a1) and the total number of ejected game balls (V detection switch 650e5, game detected by the discharge detection switch 650e6). By making it possible to detect (the total number of balls), it is possible to monitor whether or not the winning game balls have been ejected within a predetermined time. It is possible to easily detect fraudulent acts that intentionally leave a game ball in the second variable winning device 650.

The following detection sensor may be provided in the second variable winning device 650. For example, a switch capable of detecting the position of the switching valve 650b3 may be provided. By providing such a switch, it becomes possible to easily detect a defect in the switching valve 650b3.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. A first symbol display device 37 including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display is arranged in the upper right side of the front view (upper right side of FIG. 2) of the game area. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 11), and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 37 is configured to operate when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64a.

The first symbol display device 37 uses LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a short time or in a normal state by a lighting state, indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a fluctuating state by a lighting state, and the stop symbol corresponds to a big hit. Whether it is a symbol that has been hit, a symbol that corresponds to a small hit, or a symbol that is out of place is shown by the lighting state, the type of big hit or the type of small hit is shown by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is shown by the lighting state, and 7 The segment display device displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and the error. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors informs the various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. It is configured in.

Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when the game ball passes through the through gate 67, the second symbol display device 83 executes the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) by using it as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the ordinary symbol, the ordinary symbol (in the present embodiment, for example, "○ ×" displayed in the ordinary symbol display area Ds1 shown in FIG. 5). The variable display of the normal figure auxiliary symbol) is executed.

Further, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64a, which triggers the start of fluctuation of the special symbol, hits the normal symbol, so that the first ball entry device 64 is opened. It is configured only when That is, in the present embodiment, after passing through the through gate 67, the normal symbol starts to fluctuate, and then stops at the hit symbol, the opening period of the first ball entry device 64 (the hit game period of the normal symbol). In the meantime, the ball can enter the first ball entry port 64a. Triggered by entering the ball into the first ball entry port 64a, the first symbol display device 37 executes variable display of the special symbol (first symbol). Further, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol (in the present embodiment, the special symbol display shown in FIG. 5A). The variation display of the area Ds2 etc.) is performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the fusion symbol which fused the variation of the normal symbol and the special symbol is variablely displayed in the main symbol display area Dm (see FIG. 5A) of the third symbol display device 81. As shown in FIG. 5A, the main symbol display area Dm is composed of a display area larger than the normal symbol display area Ds1 and the special symbol display area Ds2, and the player mainly visually recognizes the fused symbol. Is configured to perform the game. As a result, in the present embodiment, the normal symbol is hit, and the special symbol does not start to change until the ball enters the first entrance 64a. Therefore, the frequency of the special symbol change is a normal gaming machine ( The starting port of the special symbol will be lower than that of a gaming machine configured to allow the ball to enter at all times), but the fusion symbol will start to change when the gaming ball passes through the through gate 67, so the player It is possible to suppress the problem that the player gets bored and gets bored of the game early. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, not only the fusion symbol but also the dedicated symbol corresponding to the normal symbol and the special symbol (the normal symbol auxiliary symbol displayed in the ordinary symbol display area Ds1 and the special symbol display area Ds2) can be used. Since the displayed special symbol auxiliary symbol is also displayed), it is possible to individually identify the variable state of the normal symbol and the variable state of the special symbol, and it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game. The details of the fusion symbol will be described later.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large liquid crystal display having a size of 15 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbols of left, middle, and right are used. A column (fusion symbol) is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays the first symbol display device 37. A decorative display is made accordingly. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81. Further, as shown in FIG. 5A, a normal figure reserved number display area Ds3 is set below the display area of the third symbol display device 81. When the right to start the fluctuation of the normal symbol through the through gate 67 is reserved and stored in the reserved quantity display area Ds3, the reserved symbol indicating the reserved quantity is shown in FIG. 5 (b). This is the area to be displayed as a "black circle pattern". It is configured to display one "black circle symbol" for one reserved quantity.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 9. The fusion symbol displayed in the main symbol display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 is composed of 10 types of main symbols having numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is configured by adding a number from "0" to "9" inside a decorated rectangular decorative frame. Further, a left blinking display unit DF1, a middle blinking display unit DF2, and a right blinking display unit DF3 are formed at the lower end of each symbol row, and the left blinking display unit DF1 and the left blinking display unit DF1 are formed. The right blinking display unit DF3 in the right symbol column is configured to blink in response to the hit variation display of the normal symbol. In this case, the middle blinking display unit DF2 of the middle symbol row has a decorative function of blinking and displaying in response to the fluctuation of the middle symbol row. On the other hand, the left blinking display unit DF1 in the left symbol row, the middle blinking display unit DF2 in the middle symbol row, and the right blinking display unit DF3 in the right symbol row are configured to blink in response to the deviation variation display of the normal symbol. ing.

With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player of the fluctuation of the special symbol and the fluctuation of the normal symbol in the fused symbol while suppressing a sense of discomfort. Therefore, the player can easily play the game by visually recognizing the fusion pattern, simplifying the complicated game playability, and notifying the player.

FIG. 5B is a diagram showing a state in which the number of reserved symbols is two, the fluctuations of the ordinary symbol and the special symbol are deviated and stopped at the symbol, and the fused symbol is also stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, when the normal symbol is out of alignment, the “XX” symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 5 (b). On the other hand, when the normal symbol hits, the "○○" symbol (see FIG. 6 (b)) is stopped and displayed. Further, in the fusion symbol, when the normal symbol is out of alignment, the left blinking display unit DF1 and the right blinking display unit DF3 are stopped and displayed while being kept off (see FIG. 5 (b)). ..

FIG. 6A shows an example of the display mode in the third symbol display device 81 when the number of reserved balls in the normal figure is digested from the state of FIG. 5B described above and the fluctuation of the normal symbol starts. It is a figure. When the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started, the normal symbol auxiliary symbol in the normal symbol display area Ds1 is variablely displayed. This ordinary symbol auxiliary symbol is composed of a symbol string composed of a "○" symbol and a "x" symbol, and this symbol string is displayed in two columns in the normal symbol display area Ds1. When the variable display is started, the "○" symbol and the "×" symbol are repeatedly displayed in a variable manner at high speed. When the "○" symbols are displayed together in each symbol row, the hit of the normal symbol is displayed.

At the same time as the variable display of the normal symbol is started, each symbol column of the fusion symbol in the main symbol display area Dm is also started to be scrolled and displayed in a variable manner. When the scroll display of each symbol row is started, the blinking display units DF1 to DF3 of each fusion symbol are also started to blink.

FIG. 6B is an example of a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed from the state of FIG. 6A described above and the stop display is performed with the winning symbol. It is a figure which showed about. In the normal symbol display area Ds1, the stop display is performed with "○" symbols indicating the hit of the normal symbol aligned. The fused symbol is displayed in a reach display mode in which "7" symbols are displayed in the left symbol row and the right symbol row, and the middle symbol row is scrolled and displayed. Further, the left blinking display unit DF1 and the right blinking display unit DF3 of the "7" symbol of the reach symbol displayed in the left symbol row and the right symbol row are displayed while being kept lit. The middle blinking display unit DF2 in the middle symbol column is displayed in a blinking state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the fusion symbol also starts the variable display in synchronization with the variable display of the normal symbol. Further, if the hit / fail determination result of the normal symbol is successful in accordance with the passage of the fluctuation time (variation period) of the normal symbol, the fused symbol is displayed in the reach display mode. In this case, the left symbol column stops fluctuating first, the left blinking display unit DF1 is turned on, and then the right blinking display unit DF3 stops and displays after a predetermined period (according to the stop timing of the normal symbol). (Stop display with reach symbol), and the right blinking display unit DF3 is displayed in the lit state. In this way, the left blinking display unit DF1 and the right blinking display unit DF3 start the fluctuation display in synchronization with the fluctuation of the normal symbol, and the right blinking display unit DF3 starts to display the fluctuation of the normal symbol as the fluctuation display time elapses. It is configured to end the blinking display. As a result, the player can determine the end of the variation display of the normal symbol by paying attention to the right blinking display unit DF3.

If the result of the hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol is out of order, the fusion symbol is configured so that all the symbol rows are stopped and displayed in the non-reach out-of-reach symbol according to the lapse of the variation display time of the ordinary symbol. ing. In this case, the left symbol row is stopped first, then the right symbol row, and finally, the middle symbol row is stopped and displayed according to the fluctuation stop timing of the normal symbol. In this case, each blinking display unit is also displayed with the blinking display ending in the off state based on the timing at which the symbol row is stopped.

In FIG. 7 (a), the above-mentioned ordinary symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol indicating a hit with reference to FIG. 6 (b), and the electric accessory (opening / closing door) of the first ball entry device 64 is operated to open / close. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode which is displayed on the 3rd symbol display device 81 when the hit game period of a normal symbol which a door is an open state is reached. When the hit game of the normal symbol is started, the fusion symbol displays the characters "Put the game ball into the small attacker and rush into the super reach" while maintaining the reach display mode, and the player is given the first ball entry device. A notification mode for prompting the game ball to enter the first ball entry port 64a of 64 is displayed. In this case, the fusion symbol is displayed in the reach display mode, and the state in which the middle symbol sequence is scrolled at a low speed is maintained. In the present embodiment, a notification is displayed to urge the player to enter the game ball into the first entry port 64a at the timing when the normal symbol is hit, but the present invention is not limited to this and the normal symbol is hit. In that case, the notification may be performed from a predetermined number of seconds before (for example, 5 seconds before). Furthermore, a third symbol display device is provided by arranging a ball entrance for directing (general winning opening (when a prize is won, one ball is paid out to the player)) and allowing the player to win a prize in the entrance. It may be configured so that the effect of the fusion symbol displayed in 81 is variable. By doing so, the player can easily fire the game ball even during the fluctuation period of the normal symbol to play the game. Therefore, when the normal symbol hits, the player can play the game at the first entrance 64a. It is possible to suppress the problem that the ball cannot be inserted.

Furthermore, by setting a long opening period (for example, 10 seconds, etc.) until the first ball opening 64a becomes an open state, which is a hit of a normal symbol, the opening period is used to make the first ball. By giving the player an effect of firing the game ball toward the ball opening 64a, the player may be configured to easily enter the ball into the first ball opening 64a. Further, in the hit game of the normal symbol, the first ball entry port 64a is configured to be opened a plurality of times, and the first three times are opened for a short period (for example, opening for 0.5 seconds for an interval period (first ball entry). The period (the period during which the mouth 64a is closed) is opened in 0.5 seconds), then the interval period (the period during which the first entrance 64a is closed) is set for 5 seconds, and then the first ball is entered. The mouth 64a may be configured to be open for 1 second. By doing so, by utilizing the period until the fourth long-term opening, the operation of opening the first entry port 64a is added to indicate that the first entry port 64a is the opening period. Can be produced. Therefore, the opportunity for the player to enter the first ball entry port 64a can be configured in an easy-to-understand manner, and the problem of missing the opportunity for the player to enter the ball can be suppressed.

FIG. 7 (b) shows a case where the game ball enters the first entrance 64a during the hit game of the normal symbol described above with reference to FIG. 7 (a) and the change of the special symbol is started. It is a figure which showed the display mode which is displayed by the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81. The dynamic display of the special symbol auxiliary symbol displayed in the special symbol display area Ds2 is started at the timing when the game ball enters the first entry slot 64a and the fluctuation of the special symbol starts. As shown in FIG. 7 (b), the special symbol auxiliary symbol is configured by arranging a sequence of symbols composed of “◯” symbols and “×” symbols on the left and right. The hit of the special symbol is notified by stopping and displaying the "○" symbol aligned on the left and right, and if it is off, it is notified by displaying it as a combination of the "○" symbol and the "×" symbol. Further, in the case of a small hit, the "x" symbols are aligned on the left and right and stopped and displayed to notify the player. Further, when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, each symbol row is switched between the "○" symbol and the "x" symbol at high speed and displayed in a variable manner.

As shown in FIG. 7B, in synchronization with the start of the variable display of the special symbol, the fusion symbol is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area while maintaining the reach display mode, and the main symbol is displayed. A super reach display mode effect in which a character or the like is displayed in the area Dm is displayed. FIG. 7B shows an example of the display mode of the super reach, in which the monster and the hero are displayed facing each other, and the characters "If the hero wins, a big hit !!" are displayed. Here, in the display mode example of the super reach shown, the display mode in which the monster and the hero fight and the hero wins is displayed, so that it is notified that the hit / fail determination result of the special symbol is a big hit.

In the present embodiment, the probability of hitting a normal symbol is 1/40 in the normal gaming state (other than the time-saving gaming state). Therefore, the change of the normal symbol is started 40 times, and the game ball enters the first ball entry port 64a at a rate of once. On the other hand, the winning probability of the special symbol is composed of 1/5, and the winning probability is set high in advance. Therefore, the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol itself is a chance that the probability of being given a hit is 1/5, and the display mode of the super reach in which the fluctuation of all the special symbols has a high expectation for the hit is displayed. It is configured to be.

FIG. 8A shows the third symbol when the fluctuation time of the special symbol ends when the variation of the special symbol described above with reference to FIG. 7B is started and the hit / fail determination result is incorrect. It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode displayed by a display device 81. At the timing when the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the variation of the special symbol auxiliary symbol displayed in the special symbol display area Ds2 is stopped at the combination of the "○" symbol and the "x" symbol indicating the deviation. Further, the fusion symbol is also stopped and displayed at a symbol different from the reach symbol (in this embodiment, the symbol "6") according to the timing when the special symbol is stopped, and the medium blinking display unit DF2 is also displayed while maintaining the lighting state. .. Further, the characters "Sorry !!" are displayed to inform the player that the determination result is out of order in an easy-to-understand manner. Before the display mode shown in FIG. 8 (a) is displayed, in the case of the super reach example shown in FIG. 7 (b), the display mode in which the hero loses to the monster is displayed, and then reduced. The fused symbol that has been displayed is enlarged and displayed in the main symbol display area Dm.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the normal symbol and the special symbol are displayed in a variable manner, but in the fused symbol, the variation of the normal symbol and the special symbol is fused as a variation of 1 and displayed in a variable manner to notify the player. do. As a result, in the present embodiment, the normal symbol is hit, and the special symbol does not start to change unless the ball enters the first ball opening 64a during the hit game of the normal symbol. Since the variation of the fusion symbol is started based on the above, the game can be enjoyed by the production of the fusion symbol even during the period when the variation of the special symbol has not started. Furthermore, since the hit of the normal symbol is displayed in the reach display mode of the fusion symbol, it is not necessary for the player to separately recognize the normal symbol and the special symbol, and the expectation that the hit of the special symbol is given is high. It is possible to inform in an easy-to-understand manner that the state has become. Furthermore, during the hit game of the normal symbol, the player is notified to enter the game ball into the first ball entry device 64 (corresponding to the small attacker in the production), so that the fusion symbol reaches. With the display mode, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player stops launching the game ball and misses the opportunity to enter the first ball entry port 64a.

Further, although not shown, when the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol is a big hit, in the case of the super reach example shown in FIG. 7 (b), the display mode in which the hero wins the monster is displayed, and then. , The reduced fusion pattern is enlarged and displayed. After that, the special symbol auxiliary symbol is stopped and displayed with all the "○" symbols, and the fusion symbol is notified that the same symbol as the reach symbol is stopped in the middle symbol row and the hit / fail judgment result is a hit (big hit). Will be done.

In this embodiment, the blinking display unit corresponding to the hit and miss of the normal symbol is configured to be variable, but the blinking display unit is not limited to this, and all the blinking display units blink in response to the fluctuation of the normal symbol. As a rule, all are blinked based on the fluctuation start timing of the normal symbol, and in the mode corresponding to the hit / fail judgment result at the fluctuation stop timing (for example, if it is a hit, all are on, and if it is off, all are off). It may be configured to display a definite display. Further, in the present embodiment, the blinking display unit is used as a part of the symbol, but the background thereof may be the blinking display unit of the entire symbol, or a character may be attached to the symbol to form a part of the character. (For example, in the case of a cat character, only the bell part of the cat) may be used as the blinking display unit. With such a configuration, the blinking display unit becomes difficult for the player to understand, and the fusion symbol can be recognized as a symbol for notifying one lottery result (lottery result of a special symbol) and the game can be played. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game in an easy-to-understand manner.

In addition, regarding the display corresponding to the fluctuation of the normal symbol in the fusion symbol, not only the blinking display but also the effect can be attached to the symbol and displayed so that the effect moves to indicate that the normal symbol is changing. Alternatively, it may be configured to notify by shaking a part of the symbol. Further, the normal figure auxiliary symbol may be configured to be displayed by substituting the blinking display unit or the effect of the fusion symbol. With this configuration, the area where the normal drawing auxiliary symbol is displayed can be used for the production of other games, and the display area can be effectively used.

Next, the pseudo-variation of the fusion symbol will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 (b) and 10 (a) to 10 (b). In the present embodiment, the fusion symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in order to show the player the variation between the normal symbol and the special symbol as one variation. However, when the change of the special symbol is started, the fused symbol maintains the reach display mode correspondingly, and is stopped and displayed at the timing when the change of the special symbol is stopped. In this case, if the game ball newly passes through the through gate 67 or the reserved ball of the normal symbol is stored, the normal symbol is newly changed even during the change of the special symbol. It will be started. Therefore, when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the fluctuation of the normal symbol may be in progress, and the fusion symbol cannot be changed at the fluctuation start timing of the normal symbol.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the fluctuation of the normal symbol is newly started during the fluctuation of the special symbol and the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the fluctuation of the fusion symbol is stopped. In order to match the timing with the start timing of the fluctuation of the normal symbol, it is configured to execute the pseudo fluctuation of the fusion symbol after the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped.

The flow of pseudo-variation of the fusion symbol will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 (a) to 10 (b). FIG. 10A shows a third symbol display when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order and two reserved balls whose lottery result is out of order are continuously stored in the reserved balls of the normal symbol. It is a timing chart explaining the flow of the pseudo-variation of the fusion symbol displayed by the apparatus 81.

As shown in FIG. 10A, first, when the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed triggered by the passage of the game ball to the through gate 67, the second symbol display device 83 displays the variation of the normal symbol. Is started (for example, the display mode shown in FIG. 6A is displayed). Then, when a predetermined time (for example, a selected fluctuation time such as 5 seconds or 10 seconds) elapses and the normal symbol fluctuation period ends, the winning symbol of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (for example, FIG. 6B). The display mode shown in is displayed.). Then, the opening / closing door of the first ball entry device 64 is opened, and the notification mode for urging the player to enter the game ball into the first ball entry port 64a of the first ball entry device 64 in the third symbol display device 81. Is displayed (for example, the display mode shown in FIG. 7A is displayed).

Then, when the game ball enters the first entrance 64a, a special symbol lottery is performed, and if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a pseudo fluctuation is performed when the variation display of the special symbol is set. Determine whether to set (discrimination timing). The details will be described later in the variation pattern selection process of FIG. 43, but it is determined whether or not there is a hit in the 2 hold of the normal symbol, and when it is determined that there is a hit in the 2 hold of the normal symbol, a pseudo variation is set. (Set the pseudo setting flag 223h to on). That is, as shown in FIG. 10 (a), when all 2 holds of the normal symbol are out of order, the pseudo fluctuation is not set at this point.

With this configuration, the lottery result in the fluctuation of the ordinary symbol is out of the question, but if the fluctuation within 2 holds starts the winning fluctuation, the fluctuation is continued as a pseudo fluctuation until the fluctuation. By continuing to change the fusion pattern, it is possible to perform various effects on the player during that period. Furthermore, even if the fluctuation is out of alignment, the player can have expectations. In addition, the frequency of stopping due to the result of the lottery that is out of the game can be reduced, and the player can be made to think that the frequency (probability) of hitting is high, and the game can be continuously played.

Further, when the variation of the special symbol is started in the third symbol display device 81 (for example, the display mode shown in FIG. 7B is displayed) and 5 seconds before the variation of the special symbol is stopped, the pseudo variation is generated. Determine again whether to set. The details will be described later in the pseudo-variation setting process of FIG. 45, but first, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-variation is already set (the pseudo-setting flag 223h is set to ON).

If the pseudo-variation is not set, it is determined whether or not there is a hit in the 2 hold of the normal symbol, and if it is determined that there is a hit in the 2 hold, the pseudo-variation is set (pseudo setting flag 223h). Set to on). On the other hand, if there is no hit within 2 hold of the normal symbol corresponding to the change display of the normal symbol to be started next, it is the execution period in which the normal symbol change that stops after the stop timing of the change display of the special symbol is executed. It is determined whether or not there is, and if it is the execution period in which the normal symbol variation that stops after the stop timing of the variation display of the special symbol is executed, the pseudo variation is set.

That is, as shown in FIG. 10A, when the normal symbol variation is executed, which does not fall within the 2 hold of the normal symbol but stops after the stop timing of the variation display of the special symbol. , Set pseudo-variation. At this time, in order to match the change of the normal symbol being executed with the end timing of the pseudo change to be set, the period from the end of the change of the special symbol being executed to the end of the change of the normal symbol (difference time t1). ) Is set as a pseudo-variable period.

Here, when the fluctuation of the fusion symbol is stopped based on the lapse of the fluctuation period of the special symbol, the fluctuation of the normal symbol is in progress, and the fluctuation of the fusion symbol is not started until the new normal symbol is changed. , Even though the reserved symbol is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the next lottery game is not started, so that the player gets bored or feels uneasy that the game will not be played. Can be considered. However, in the present embodiment, it is determined that the normal symbol fluctuation is executed at the special symbol fluctuation stop timing 5 seconds before the fluctuation stop, and the pseudo fluctuation of the fusion symbol is determined in the period until the end. Since it is configured to set, the player can comfortably play the game by starting the change of the next fusion symbol with the stop of the fusion symbol at a good tempo.

In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not to execute the pseudo fluctuation 5 seconds before the end timing of the special symbol, but the determination is not limited to this, and the determination may be made at the timing of stopping the fluctuation. good. With this configuration, when the normal symbol starts to fluctuate after passing through the through gate 67 5 seconds before the special symbol fluctuates to stop, the fusion symbol starts to fluctuate until the normal symbol fluctuates. It is possible to prevent problems that are not performed. Further, it may be configured so that the control load can be reduced by making a judgment based on both the advance timing such as 5 seconds before and the stop timing and increasing the chances of setting the pseudo fluctuation in advance.

FIG. 10B shows a third symbol when the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order and two reserved balls whose lottery result is out of order are stored in order in the reserved balls of the normal symbol. It is a timing chart explaining the flow of the pseudo-variation of the fusion symbol displayed by the display device 81.

Similar to FIG. 10A, the lottery result of the normal symbol is a hit, the opening / closing door of the first entry device 64 is opened, and the special symbol triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first entry port 64a. If the lottery result is out of the question, it is determined whether or not to set the pseudo-variation when the variation display of the special symbol is set. As shown in FIG. 10B, when a hold that is a hit within 2 holds of a normal symbol is already stored, a pseudo-variation of up to 30 seconds ends the change of the special symbol at the start timing of the change of the special symbol. Set from. Here, the reason for the pseudo-variation of a maximum of 30 seconds is such that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 10 seconds in the case of a hit and a maximum of 10 seconds in the case of a deviation. Therefore, even if the longest 10 seconds of the fluctuation of the fluctuating normal symbol and the fluctuation of 2 hold are selected, the pseudo fluctuation continues to be executed until the end of the change of the normal symbol of the 2nd hold. Will be done. Therefore, the pseudo-variation ends earlier than the variation corresponding to the hold of the normal symbol that is a hit, and there is a time before the first entrance 64a opens, which makes the game awkward. Can be suppressed. In addition, the pseudo fluctuation of up to 30 seconds that is set is forced when the fluctuation of the normal symbol that is a hit ends, the first entry port 64a opens, the game ball enters, and the fluctuation of the special symbol starts. Ends. After that, the variation of the fusion symbol corresponding to the variation of the special symbol (in the present embodiment, the middle symbol sequence shown in FIG. 7 (a) re-variates from the effect of whether or not the re-variation is shown in FIG. 8 (b). The display that can be switched to the production) is executed.

As a result, if the hit variation of the normal symbol has already been determined (held within 2 hold) at the start of the change of the special symbol, the effect of re-variation is performed without displaying the effect of disengagement. By executing it, the normal symbol that is a hit is changed, and it is possible to perform an effect of whether or not the special symbol is changed again, and the frequency of the off-target effect is reduced, which makes the player feel sorry. The number of times to do it can be reduced. In addition, in the present embodiment, although the fluctuation of the normal symbol that is hit by the pseudo fluctuation is simulated, the fluctuation of the special symbol is 30 because the game ball could not be entered into the first entry port 64a. If it is not started even after the pseudo-variation period of seconds has elapsed, the re-variation is not started and the variation is ended with the effect of the pseudo-variation shown in FIG. 8 (b).

On the other hand, if the number of hold of the normal symbol is less than 2 at the start of the change of the special symbol and the winning hold is not stored in the 2 hold, the pseudo change is set at the start of the change of the special symbol. It is configured not to be. In that case, as shown in FIG. 10 (b), 5 seconds before the end of the fluctuation period of the special symbol, it was determined and stored whether or not there was a hit within 2 holds of the currently stored normal symbol. In this case, a pseudo fluctuation of up to 30 seconds is set as in the case where the fluctuation is stored at the start of the fluctuation. Further, it may be determined whether or not the pseudo variation is set in the fixed period of the symbol (1s in the present embodiment).

In the present embodiment, it is configured to determine whether or not to set the pseudo-variation at the start of the change of the special symbol and 5 seconds before the end of the change of the special symbol. It may be at the end or only at the end of the fluctuation. Further, it may be configured to discriminate only at the start of fluctuation or every time the drawing hold is established, or it may be discriminated during a predetermined period (for example, every 100 ms), or the above conditions may be appropriately combined. May be good.

Next, with reference to FIG. 8B, the display content of the pseudo-variation of the fusion symbol in the third symbol display device 81 will be described. 8 (b) shows the third symbol display device after the change of the special symbol is stopped when it is determined that the pseudo variation is set at the pseudo variation determination timing described above with reference to FIGS. 10 (a) to 10 (b). It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode displayed in 81. As described above, when the fluctuation of the normal symbol is newly started during the fluctuation of the special symbol and the fluctuation of the normal symbol is in progress when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the fluctuation start timing of the special symbol and the fluctuation of the normal symbol are performed. In order to match the start timing, the variation of the special symbol is stopped, and after the out-of-order symbol of the special symbol (for example, FIG. 8A) is displayed, the pseudo variation effect of the fusion symbol is executed. There is.

As shown in FIG. 8B, since the normal symbol is changing, the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the normal symbol display area Ds1. Then, an aspect in which the fusion symbol shows a sign of re-variation is displayed, such as the middle symbol sequence of the fusion symbol in the main symbol display area Dm vibrating. Regarding the possibility that the special symbol may re-change by repeatedly hitting, the middle symbol row slightly presses the button. Also, with the words "Re-change chance by repeatedly hitting the button !!", press the frame button 22. By displaying the indicated mode, the player is notified in an easy-to-understand manner by producing a trembling effect in accordance with the frame button 22. In this way, by performing pseudo-variation, it is possible to match the fluctuation start timing of the special symbol with the fluctuation start timing of the normal symbol, and to show the variation between the normal symbol and the special symbol as one variation to the player. In addition to this, it has the effect of giving the player expectation for the re-change of the special symbol and suppressing the situation where the player gets tired of the game at an early stage. In the re-variation effect, when the hold that hits within 2 holds is stored, if the pseudo-variation is set, the probability that the sound effect when the frame button 22 is pressed is set to be high is set. , The trembling size of the middle symbol may be increased with high probability, a special symbol may be displayed, or a special lamp lighting mode may be executed. In such a case, by configuring the same effect to be executed with a low probability even when the winning hold is not stored, the player expects that the start of re-variation will be executed. You can play games. Further, when the pseudo fluctuation is executed, in order to suppress the problem that the game ball is not fired at the timing when the first ball entry port 64a is opened, the game ball is notified to be fired and the game ball is fired. By firing, the middle symbol row is configured to tremble, and the through gate 67 is notified to pass the game ball, so that the state in which the game ball enters the crune member 660 is maintained. It is even better to have a configuration that does.

FIG. 9A is an example of a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed from the state of FIG. 6A described above and the stop display is performed with the off-designed symbol. It is a figure which showed about. In the normal symbol display area Ds1, the "○" and "×" symbols indicating the deviation of the normal symbol are stopped and displayed in a aligned state. In the fusion symbol, the "7" symbol and the "5" symbol are displayed in the left symbol row and the right symbol row. Further, the blinking display areas DF1 and DF3 are also displayed in the lit state and the extinguished state, indicating that the normal symbol is off. In the middle symbol row, the blinking display area Df2 is turned off and displayed, and it is notified that the special symbol has not changed.

FIG. 9 (b) shows the third case when the change of the special symbol is started and the change time of the special symbol ends when the hit / fail determination result is a small hit, as described above with reference to FIG. 7 (b). It is a figure which showed an example of the display mode displayed by a symbol display device 81. At the timing when the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the variation of the special symbol displayed in the special symbol display area Ds2 is stopped and displayed in a state where the "x" symbols indicating small hits are aligned. As shown in FIG. 9B, in synchronization with the start of the variable display of the special symbol, the fusion symbol is reduced and displayed in the upper left of the display area while maintaining the reach display mode, and the main symbol is displayed. A super reach display mode effect in which a character or the like is displayed in the area Dm is displayed. FIG. 9B shows an example of the display mode of the super reach, in which the monster and the hero are displayed facing each other, and the characters "If the hero wins, a big hit !!" are displayed. Here, in the display mode example of the super reach shown, the display mode in which the monster and the hero fight and the hero wins is displayed, so that it is notified that the hit / fail determination result of the special symbol is a big hit. Here, in the case of small hit fluctuation, a symbol imitating the second variable winning device 650 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the game ball is inserted into the second specific winning opening 650a before the end of the fluctuation period. A notification is executed to urge the game ball to make it ball. Here, when the player enters the game ball into the second specific winning opening 650a and is detected by the V detection switch 650e5, the hero performs a special move and defeats the monster in the opening production of the jackpot game. To. If the game ball cannot be entered into the second specific winning opening 650a or is not detected by the V detection switch 650e5, blackout is performed as it is and the next variation is executed. In this embodiment, the blackout effect is used, but the ending effect of the small hit game is configured to display the effect that the hero loses to the monster, and the result of the small hit game is displayed to the player. It may be configured as.

Next, the configuration of the back side of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the emission control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected (caulked structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened. (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to remove the seal to open the board boxes 100, 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100, 102, the box base side and the box It is cut to the cover side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. It is provided with a case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 11). ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator (not shown) for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball jam (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 11). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 11, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in. In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. It is transmitted from the control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction. On the other hand, the payout control device 111 is configured to be able to send and receive data in both directions.

The input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, various sensors (magnet sensor, radio wave sensor) for detecting a game ball and detecting illegal games. Various solenoids including a switch 208, an opening / closing piece solenoid 650f2 for opening / closing the opening / closing piece 650b of the second variable winning device 650, and a switching valve solenoid 650c2 for driving the switching valve 650b3 in the second variable winning device 650. 209 is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

Further, a RAM erasing switch circuit 253, which will be described later, provided in the power supply device 115 is connected to the input / output port 205, and the MPU 201 has signals output from various switches 208 and RAM erasing output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253. Various processes are executed based on the signal SG2.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is configured. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 31) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

When the payout control is executed, the payout motor 216 continuously pays out one prize ball at a time. More specifically, one prize ball is paid out every time the rotation amount of the payout motor 216 becomes a predetermined amount (for example, one rotation). Further, the rotation speed of the payout motor 216 is set so that a predetermined number (100) of prize balls are paid out in a predetermined time (10 seconds) by the payout motor 216. Further, every time a predetermined number (100) of prize balls are paid out, the payout of prize balls is suspended for a predetermined period (1 second). As a result, when it is necessary to continuously pay out a large amount of prize balls, for example, during a big hit, the payout motor 216 keeps paying out the prize balls without rest, and the payout motor 216 is prevented from generating heat. be able to. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the pachinko machine 10 from failing due to melting of the resin portion and the elastic body portion of the pachinko machine 10 due to the heat generated by the payout motor 216. Further, the heat generated in the payout motor 216 propagates to the touchable portion of the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the portion touched by the player such as the operation of the lower plate unit 15 and the handle 51), causing the player to be injured such as a burn. It is possible to prevent it from being stored. The number of payouts and the payout pause period until the payout of the prize balls is stopped by the payout motor 216 are not limited to this, and may be arbitrarily determined as long as the heat generation of the payout motor 216 can be suppressed. can. For example, the payout may be suspended every time 5 or 25 prize balls are paid out by the payout motor 216. Further, for example, the rest period may be 0.5 seconds or 3 seconds.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice in a voice output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and produces a variation pattern (variable pattern effect). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as (variable display). The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory and the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It is transmitted to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls to display the error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command on the third symbol display device 81 without delay.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display (variation) in the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. It controls the production) and continuous notice production. Since the details of the display control device 114 are known, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply circuit (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251. When this voltage becomes less than 22 volt, it is determined that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a period sufficient for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain normal values. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 31).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erasing signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data and issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, with reference to FIG. 12, the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110 will be described. The main control device 110 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, and a display setting in the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 12, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform a special symbol lottery, a normal symbol lottery, a display setting in the first symbol display device 37, a display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and the like. used.

To set the display of the special symbol lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the jackpot type of the special symbol are selected. The first hit type counter C2 used for the special symbol, the stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the out-of-order stop type in the special symbol, and the small hit type counter CS3 used for selecting the small hit type of the special symbol. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the variation type counter CS1 used for selecting the variation pattern are used. Further, a random number counter C4 for the second hit is used for the lottery of ordinary symbols, a second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the random number counter C4 for the second hit, and the normal figure fluctuation type counter CS2 used for selecting the fluctuation pattern is used. Is used. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 33). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203e of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol holding ball execution area 203a consisting of one execution area, and in this area, the first random number counter C1 is provided in accordance with the timing of entering the first ball entry port 64a. Each value of the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small hit type counter CS3 is stored. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b composed of one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to fourth areas), and a ball is usually used in each of these areas. The value of the second random number counter C4 is stored in accordance with the timing of passing through the symbol start port (through gate) 67.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 399) and reaches the maximum value (for example, 399 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 399) and then 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of 0 to 399, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 33).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol holding ball of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64a. It is stored in the execution area 203a. The value of the random number that becomes the big hit of the special symbol is set by the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table. If it matches the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot set by 202a, it is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol is a big hit, and adds 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). It is configured to return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the special symbol of the RAM 203 is held at the timing when the ball wins the first entry port 64a. It is stored in the ball execution area 203a.

Here, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area 203a is not a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number that is out of the special symbol, the first. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the symbol display device 37 is the one when the special symbol is removed.

On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area 203a is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol, it corresponds to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37. The display mode is that of a special symbol at the time of a big hit. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol holding ball execution area 203a.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 399. In this first random number counter C1, there are 80 random numbers that are big hits of special symbols, and the random numbers "0 to 79" are stored in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 14A). Has been done. As described above, since the total number of random numbers that become big hits is 80 while the total number of random numbers is 400, the probability of becoming a big hit of a special symbol is "1/5".

Further, the value of the first hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the value of the first hit type counter C2 are provided in the ROM 202. The jackpot type is determined based on the first jackpot type selection table 202b (see FIG. 14B). As shown in FIG. 14 (b), in the case of a big hit of a special symbol, the big hit type when the random number value is "0 to 49" in the first hit type counter C2 is "big hit A". Become. Further, when the value is "50 to 99", the jackpot type is "big hit B".

Further, in the present embodiment, as a kind of missed special symbol (other than the big hit), a small hit is provided in which the second specific winning opening 650a of the second variable winning device 650 is opened. In the first random number counter C1, there are 100 random numbers that are small hits of the special symbol, and the random number values "300 to 399" are shown in the first random number table 202a (see FIG. 14A). It is stored. Since the total number of random numbers that are small hits is 100 while the total number of random numbers is 400, the probability of being a small hit of a special symbol is "1/4".

Further, the value of the small hit type counter CS3 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 199, and the value of the small hit type counter CS3 and the value of the small hit type counter CS3 are provided in the ROM 202. The small hit type is determined based on the first small hit type selection table 202c (see FIG. 15). The content of the small hit game according to each small hit type will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 99, reach the maximum value (that is, 99), and then return to 0. In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 determines the stop symbol of the fusion symbol at the time of disconnection displayed by the third symbol display device 81. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is assigned to each of the "0" to "9" symbols. When the same symbol as the reach symbol is selected, the symbol obtained by adding 1 to the determined symbol is determined (for example, when the same "9" symbol as the reach symbol is determined, "9" symbol is determined. 0 "design is determined).

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, 0 to 198, reach the maximum value (that is, 198), and then return to 0. The variation type counter CS1 determines the variation type of the super reach as the variation pattern of the special symbol (variation pattern of the fusion symbol). The variation pattern selection table 202e stored in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 stores the jackpot variation pattern selection table 202e1, the deviation variation pattern selection table 202e2, and the small hit variation pattern selection table 202e3, respectively. In each selection table, a plurality of super reach fluctuation pattern types are stored. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is set for each super reach type of each selection table, and the variation type acquired from the selection table corresponding to the hit / fail judgment result (either hit, miss, or small hit). The type of super reach is determined based on the value of the counter CS1. A fluctuation time is set for each super reach type, and the fluctuation time and the type of super reach are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the fluctuation pattern command. In the voice lamp control device 113, more detailed super reach details are determined based on the notified fluctuation pattern command and the acquired value of the effect counter 223 g. As a result, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced by executing the rough selection in the main control device 110 and performing the more detailed selection in the voice lamp control device 113. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the super reach determined by the main control device 110 is the same for each super reach, but the variation time is not limited to the same, and the super reach of a plurality of fluctuation times is set and selected. You may. Further, the voice lamp control device 113 may be configured to determine the fluctuation time.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is sequentially added in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically, for example, every time the timer is interrupted, and the sphere passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 on either the center or the right. Is acquired when is detected, and is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

Then, the value of the random number that is a hit of the normal symbol is set by the second hit random number table 202d stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is set by the second hit random number table. If it matches the value of the random number that is the set hit, it is judged to be a hit of the normal symbol.

There are 6 random numbers that can be hit by a normal symbol in a normal game state, and the range is "0 to 5". These random number values are usually stored in the random number table 202d per symbol (see FIG. 14C). As described above, since the total number of random numbers that can be hit by the normal symbol is 6 while the total number of random values is 240 in the normal symbol, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is "1/40".

On the other hand, there are 240 random numbers that can be hit by ordinary symbols in the time-saving game state, and the range is "0 to 239". These random number values are usually stored in the random number table 202d per symbol (see FIG. 14C). In this way, while the total number of random numbers is 240 in the normal symbol, the total number of random values that hit the normal symbol is 240, so the probability of hitting the normal symbol is "1/1", and the normal symbol is always hit. It will be a hit.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the ball passes through the normal symbol start port 67 in the normal gaming state, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is the normal symbol fluctuation type counter. It is executed for a period (5 to 10 seconds) according to the value of CS2. Then, if the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 5", it is determined to be a hit, and after the fluctuation display is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is lit and displayed. , The first ball entry port 64a is opened only "2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal gaming state, the first ball entry port 64a is opened only for "2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbol hits, but the opening time and the number of times are different. It can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 2 times".

When the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving game state (during the time-saving), it always hits the normal symbol, and the time during which the normal symbol is variablely displayed is set to 3 seconds. Further, when the normal symbol is hit, the opening pattern is set so that the first ball entry port 64a is opened "2 seconds x 2 times". As described above, in the time-saving game state, the game ball is configured to be easier to enter into the first entry port 64a than in the normal game state.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 33).

With such a configuration, the variation of the special symbol is likely to be executed during the time-saving game, and the possibility of a small hit or a large hit is high. Therefore, the possibility that the jackpot is executed by the player is higher than in the normal gaming state, and the jackpot can be continuously given to the player during the time-saving game. Therefore, the player can play the game in the expectation that the time-saving game will be executed, and the interest of the game can be further improved. Further, in the time-saving game state, the small hit type selection table 202c becomes a table dedicated to the time-saving game, and by setting a high ratio in which the small hit A is selected, the small hit game is executed during the time reduction. If this is done, the V detection switch 650e5 makes it easier to detect the game ball, and the probability that the jackpot game will be executed in a short time can be further increased.

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control device 110 sets a special symbol lottery and a variation pattern, and a normal symbol lottery and a variation pattern according to the value of the counter and the like. It is possible to carry out the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as.

In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 12, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, at the time of turning on the power (including turning on the power by eliminating the power failure, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 33) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 32) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to input the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interruption process (see FIG. 31) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Next, the ROM 202 provided in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 17. FIG. 13A is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 13A, the ROM 202 includes a first hit random number table 202a, a first big hit type selection table 202b, a small hit type selection table 202c, a second hit random number table 202d, and a variation pattern selection. At least a table 202e, a big hit scenario table 202f, a small hit scenario table 202g, and a normal map fluctuation pattern selection table 202h are provided.

As described above, the first random number table 202a is a table in which the value of the random number that is the big hit of the special symbol is defined. When the random number value defined in the first random number table 202a and the value of the first random number counter C1 match, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. In the first random number table 202a, a random number value that is a small hit of a special symbol is also set. The detailed contents of the first random number table 202a will be described later with reference to FIG. 14 (a).

The first jackpot type selection table 202b is a data table in which the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 for determining the jackpot type is set for each jackpot type. The detailed contents of the first jackpot type selection table 202b will be described later with reference to FIG. 14 (b).

The small hit type selection table 202c is a data table in which the determination value of the small hit type counter CS3 for determining the small hit type is set for each small hit type. The detailed contents of the first small hit type selection table 202c will be described later with reference to FIG.

The second hit random number table 202d is a data table in which the hit determination value of the normal symbol is stored. When the random number value defined in the second hit random number table 202d and the value of the second hit random number counter C4 match, it is determined to be a big hit of a normal symbol. The detailed contents of the second random number table 202d will be described later with reference to FIG. 14 (c). As described above, when it is determined that the normal symbol hits in the normal game state, the stop symbol is lit and displayed after the variation display for the predetermined time (10 seconds) is completed, and the first ball entrance 64a is displayed. The electric accessory (opening / closing door) attached to the door is opened only "2 seconds x 1 time".

On the other hand, in the time-saving game state (during the time-saving), the normal symbol always hits, the fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds, and after the fluctuation display is completed, the stop symbol is lit and displayed, and the first ball entrance 64a The electric accessory (opening / closing door) attached to the door is opened "2 seconds x 2 times".

The value of the second hit random number counter C4, which is determined to be a hit of the normal symbol, may be changed between the normal gaming state and the time saving gaming state (during the time saving).

The variation pattern selection table 202e is a data table used for determining the display mode of the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the display mode is defined for each value of the variation type counter CS1. In this variation pattern selection table 202e, a plurality of different tables corresponding to the lottery results of special symbols are defined. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14 (d), the variation pattern selection table 202e has a jackpot variation pattern selection table 202e1 (not shown) dedicated to the case where the hit / fail determination result is a jackpot, and the hit / fail determination result. With the deviation pattern selection table 202e2 (not shown) dedicated to the case of being out of the game and in the normal gaming state, and the small hit variation pattern selection table 202e3 (not shown) dedicated to the case where the hit / fail judgment result is a small hit. Each is at least configured.

The jackpot scenario table 202f is a data table used to determine an opening scenario for opening the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game, and a plurality of different tables corresponding to the winning jackpot types are defined. Has been done. Although not shown, the jackpot scenario table 202f is composed of a dedicated jackpot scenario a202f1 when the jackpot type is jackpot A and a dedicated jackpot scenario b202f2 when the jackpot type is jackpot B.

In this jackpot scenario, various events (scenario contents) are defined based on the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g (see FIG. 13B), which counts when the jackpot scenario is set. The opening / closing control of the specific door 65f is executed based on the content.

The small hit scenario table 202g rotates the opening / closing piece 650b to the right so that the game ball can enter the second specific winning opening 650a that opens the opening / closing piece 650b of the second variable winning device 650 during the small hit game. It is a data table used for determining the opening scenario to be operated and the operation scenario to operate the switching valve 650b3, and a plurality of different tables corresponding to the winning small hit types are specified. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 16A, the small hit scenario table 202g includes a small hit scenario a202g1 (see FIG. 16B) dedicated to the case where the small hit type is small hit A, and the small hit type. Is composed of a small hit scenario b202g2 (see FIG. 16C) dedicated to the case where is a small hit B or C.

In this small hit scenario, various events (scenario contents) are defined based on the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h (see FIG. 13B), which counts when the small hit scenario is set. The opening / closing control of the opening / closing piece 650b is executed based on the content of the scenario, and the operation control of the switching valve 650b3 provided in the second variable winning device 650 is executed. Further, in the process of determining whether the ball has passed normally into the second specific winning opening 650a and the V passage channel 650e3, the range in which the ball can pass is also based on the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h. It is stipulated.

The normal map fluctuation pattern selection table 202h is a data table used for determining the display mode of the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol, and the display mode is defined for each value of the normal map fluctuation type counter CS2. A plurality of different tables corresponding to the lottery results of ordinary symbols are defined in the normal map variation pattern selection table 202h. Specifically, the normal map fluctuation pattern selection table 202h is a normal map fluctuation pattern selection table (normal) (see FIG. 17 (a)) dedicated to the normal gaming state, and a normal game dedicated to the time-saving gaming state. It is configured at least by the figure variation pattern selection table (time reduction) (see FIG. 17 (b)).

Next, the RAM 203 provided in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 13 (b). FIG. 13B is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 provided in the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 13B, the RAM 203 includes a special symbol holding ball execution area 203a, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol holding ball number counter 203c, a time saving medium counter 203d, and a counter buffer 203e. It has a V flag 203f, a big hit scenario counter 203g, a small hit scenario counter 203h, and other memory areas 203z.

The special symbol reserved ball execution area 203a is a storage area dedicated to the first ball entry port 64a, and has one execution area. In each of these areas, the first random number counter C1 and the first jackpot type are used. Each value of the counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small hit type counter CS3 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64a (starting winning), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS3 are acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the execution area. To.

The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the sphere passes through the normal symbol start port 67, and the acquired data is obtained from the four reserved areas (reserved first area to reserved fourth area). Among the vacant areas, the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b is shifted to the execution area ( It is moved), and a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) having a smaller area number. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b, the data shift is performed only in the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which the winning data is stored.

In the pachinko machine 10, as soon as the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 and the value of the counter C4 is acquired in response to the passage through the through gate, the winning information command including those values is a voice lamp. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the fuzu winning information command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the counter C4 from the fuzu winning information command and uses them as the fuzu winning information in the RAM 223. It is stored in the winning information storage area 223a.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c maximizes the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball at the normal symbol start port 67. It is a counter that counts up to 4 times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time the ball passes through the through gate (normal symbol starting port) 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. Is incremented by 1 (see S604 in FIG. 29), and is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of a normal symbol (second symbol) is executed (see S505 in FIG. 28).

If the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203c (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4 when the ball passes through the through gate (normal symbol start port) 67, the second random number counter is used. The value of C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b (S606 in FIG. 29). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate (normal symbol start port) 67, if the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203c is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203b. (S603: No in FIG. 29).

The value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (holding number M of variation display in the normal symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S506 in FIG. 28 and S605 in FIG. 29). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 is a hold ball of the fluctuation display held in the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203c is changed. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual number of reserved balls in the variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the deviation, the deviation can be corrected by the hold ball number command to be received next.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol in the normal figure reserved number display area Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by this display reserved ball number command.

The time-saving medium counter 203d is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving gaming state (time-saving medium). If the value of the time-saving medium counter 203d is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving gaming state. If the value of the time reduction counter 203d is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (normal game state) of the normal symbol. The initial value of the time reduction / medium counter 203d is set to zero, and the main control device 110 sets a value according to the jackpot type at the end of the jackpot ending (that is, the jackpot end timing). Specifically, in the normal game state, 3 is set when the jackpot type is "big hit A", 0 is set when the jackpot type is "big hit B", and in the time-saving gaming state, the jackpot type is "big hit A". In the case of "", 9 is set, and in the case of "Big hit B", 3 is set. After that, 1 is subtracted every time the variation effect of the special symbol is completed until the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203d becomes 0 (S213 in FIG. 25).

When a lottery of ordinary symbols is performed, if the value (M) of the ordinary symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 0, the value of the time saving medium counter 203d is referred to. Then, if the value is 1 or more, the lottery result is acquired based on the random number table per normal symbol (for high probability) in the time-saving game state (S510 in FIG. 28), and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to 3 seconds. (S518 in FIG. 28), and an opening pattern of 2 seconds × 2 times is set as an opening pattern of the electric accessory (opening / closing door) attached to the first entry port 64a (S519 in FIG. 28). On the other hand, if the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203h is 0, the lottery result is acquired based on the random number table per normal symbol (for low probability) in the normal gaming state (S511 in FIG. 28), and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is further obtained. Is set to 10 seconds (S520 in FIG. 28), and an opening pattern of 2 seconds × 1 time is set as an opening pattern of the electric accessory (opening / closing door) attached to the first entry port 64a (S521 in FIG. 28). ).

As described above, the counter buffer 203e is a buffer area used for counting each counter value.

The V flag 203f is a flag for storing the detection that a ball has passed through the V passage flow path 650e3, which is a specific area of the second variable winning device 650, and is the value of the V flag 203f at the end of the small hit. Based on, a big hit is given. This V flag 203f is set to indicate the type of big hit based on the small hit type in the V-passing process (S705 in FIG. 30), is referred to in the small hit ending control process (S1405 in FIG. 37), and then. It is set to off (S1406 in FIG. 37).

In the present embodiment, the configuration in which the values of various counter values are added by the timer interrupt processing is shown, but any configuration can be used as long as it can measure an accurate period, for example, it is timed by RTC (real-time clock). It may be measured using the period.

The jackpot scenario counter 203g is a counter for updating the jackpot scenario in which the opening / closing timing of the specific door 65f is defined, and the specific door 65f is set during the jackpot based on the jackpot scenario updated by the jackpot scenario counter 203g. Open control is executed. This jackpot scenario counter 203g is incremented by 1 when it is determined in the jackpot control process that there is a jackpot scenario setting (S1102 in FIG. 34), and in the jackpot ending control process, the control based on the jackpot scenario ends and the jackpot scenario Is reset after the setting of is cleared (S1205 in FIG. 35).

The small hit scenario counter 203h is a counter for updating the small hit scenario in which the operation timing and the like of various devices (opening / closing piece 650b of the second variable winning device 650, switching valve 650b3) are defined, and the small hit scenario counter 203h. Operation control of various devices is executed during the small hit based on the small hit scenario updated by the counter 203h. This small hit scenario counter 203h is incremented by 1 when it is determined that there is a small hit scenario setting in the small hit control process (S1302 in FIG. 36), and control based on the small hit scenario in the small hit ending control process. Is finished and reset after the setting of the small hit scenario is cleared (S1404 in FIG. 37).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 14 to 17, details of various tables included in the ROM 202 provided in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described.

First, the first random number table 202a will be described with reference to FIG. 14 (a). FIG. 14A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table 202a. As shown in FIG. 14A, in the first hit random number table 202a, the value “0 to 79” of the first hit random number counter C1 is used as the jackpot determination value, and the first hit random number counter C1 is used as the small hit determination value. The value "300 to 399" is set, and the value "80 to 299" of the first random number counter C1 is set as a determination value other than the big hit and the small hit (off).

That is, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment is configured such that the lottery of the special symbol is a big hit with a probability of "1/5" and a small hit with a probability of "1/4". Is a small hit with a high probability. With this configuration, even if the special symbol does not make a big hit, the player is likely to make a small hit and expect the player to pass the game ball to the V detection switch 650e5 in the small hit game. You can perform many opportunities and improve the interest of the game. In the present embodiment, the probability of a big hit or a small hit of a special symbol is constant even if the game state is variable, but a period for setting a high probability game state in which the probability of a big hit is high, or a time-saving game Some may be configured to increase the probability of a small hit. Further, a winning opening for starting the second special symbol may be provided, and the second special symbol may be configured to increase the probability of a small hit. Further, the configuration is such that a jackpot is executed when a game ball is detected by the V detection switch 650e5, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a high probability gaming state (probability change) is set until a predetermined condition is satisfied (until the next jackpot or a predetermined value). It may be configured to give (up to the change of the number of special symbols).

Next, the first jackpot type selection table 202b will be described with reference to FIG. 14 (b). FIG. 14B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first random number table 202b. As shown in FIG. 14B, in the first jackpot type selection table 202b, the value “0 to 49” of the first hit type counter C2 is used as the determination value of the jackpot A, and “50 to 99” is determined as the determination value of the jackpot B. Is set.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, when the big hit game is started, the specific door 65f of the first variable winning device 65 is opened, and a large amount of prize balls are put into the first specific winning opening 65a. The game to be acquired is executed. In addition, depending on the type of jackpot, a time-saving gaming state that is advantageous to the player is given after the jackpot game is completed.

Next, the contents of each jackpot type will be described. When the jackpot A is selected, in the normal gaming state, the jackpot game in which the first variable winning device 65 opens for 15 rounds (15R) is started, and after the jackpot game is completed, the time saving game state (time saving) is performed three times. Granted. On the other hand, in the reduced working hours game state, the jackpot game in which the first variable winning device 65 opens for 15 rounds (15R) is started, and after the end of the jackpot game, the reduced working hours gaming state (time saving) is given 9 times.

When the jackpot B is selected, in the normal gaming state, the jackpot game in which the first variable winning device 65 opens for 15 rounds (15R) is started, and after the jackpot game ends, the time saving game state (time saving) is not given. .. On the other hand, in the reduced working hours game state, the jackpot game in which the first variable winning device 65 opens for 15 rounds (15R) is started, and after the end of the jackpot game, the reduced working hours gaming state (time saving) is given three times. In this embodiment, the number of time reductions is limited, but it may be configured to be given until the next big hit. In this case, by setting the jackpot type to which the time reduction is not given (or the number of time reductions is limited), it is possible to prevent the jackpots from being excessively continuous.

As described above, in this pachinko machine 10, by winning the big hit (big hit A or big hit B) of the special symbol, the game always shifts to the time-saving game state after the big hit game is completed, but the round of the big hit game The number is set to be less than the jackpot C or the jackpot D. This is because the jackpot (big hit C or jackpot D) executed by the game ball adding a specific area during the small hit game can make the player think that the jackpot has been won by himself / herself. This is to make the privilege by C or the jackpot D a more advantageous privilege for the player.

FIG. 14C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the second random number table 202d. As shown in FIG. 14D, in the second hit random number table 202d, the value “0 to 5” of the second hit random number counter C4 is set as the hit determination value of the normal symbol in the normal gaming state, and in the time-saving gaming state. The value "0 to 239" of the second random number counter C4 is set.

That is, in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment, the lottery of the normal symbol is won with a probability of "1/40" in the normal gaming state, and is won with the probability of "1/1" in the time-saving gaming state.

FIG. 14D is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern selection table 202e. As shown in FIG. 14D, the variation pattern selection table 202e includes a variation pattern selection table 202e1 for big hits (not shown), a variation pattern selection table 202e2 for deviation (not shown), and a small hit. At least the variation pattern selection table 202e3 (not shown) is set. The jackpot variation pattern selection table 202e1 is a data table in which the display mode (variation time) of the variation pattern selected when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot is defined, and is based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. Various jackpot fluctuation patterns are selected. Similar to the above-mentioned jackpot variation pattern selection table, the deviation pattern selection table 202e2 and the small hit variation pattern selection table 202e3 also have various deviation patterns and various small hit variation patterns based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. Is selected.

Next, the small hit type selection table 202c will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit type selection table 202c.

As shown in FIG. 15, in the case of a small hit of a special symbol, the small hit type when the random number value is "0 to 4" in the small hit type counter CS3 is "small hit A". .. Further, when the random number value is "5 to 9", the small hit type is "small hit B". Further, when the random number value is "10 to 199", the small hit type is "small hit C".

Here, the small hit type will be described with reference to FIG. First, when "small hit A" is selected, the small hit game corresponding to the small hit scenario a202g1 is executed as shown in the small hit scenario table 202g of FIG. 16A. In the small hit game corresponding to the small hit scenario a202g1, as shown in FIG. 16B, the opening / closing piece 650b is inserted during the period during which the game ball can flow into the V passage flow path 650e3 in the second variable winning device 650. An open scenario is set to open for 1.5 seconds. That is, as a result of the small hit game, the game ball can be detected by the V detection switch 650e5, and in that case, the big hit can be given.

On the other hand, when "small hit B" and "small hit C" are selected, the small hit game corresponding to the small hit scenario b202g2 (see FIG. 16 (a)) is executed. The small hit scenario b202g2 corresponding to the small hit scenario b202g2 is executed. In the winning game, as shown in FIG. 16C, the opening / closing piece 650b is set to be closed during the period during which the game ball can flow into the V passage flow path 650e3 in the second variable winning device 650. That is, it is set to be impossible (difficult) to give a big hit as a result of a small hit game configured to make it difficult to win a prize in the V detection switch 650e5. In addition, "small hit A" and "small hit" are set. For both "B" and "small hit C", a fluctuation time of a special symbol for 20 seconds is set.

In this way, by making the opening pattern of the opening / closing piece 650b during the small hit game different depending on each small hit type, the game ball flows into the V passage flow path 650e3, which is a small hit advantageous to the player of the small hit game. It is possible to set a possible small hit game and a small hit game in which the game ball cannot flow into the V passage flow path 650e3, which is a disadvantageous small hit (difficult), and it is possible to provide various playability. ..

Next, the small hit scenario table 202g will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit scenario table 202g. The small hit scenario table 202g is defined so that the small hit scenario corresponding to each of the small hit types selected by the small hit type selection table 202c can be selected, and the small hit game is played based on the selected small hit scenario. Will be executed.

The small hit scenario table 202g has a small hit scenario a202g1 dedicated to the small hit A and a small hit scenario b202g2 dedicated to the small hit B or C as the selected small hit scenario.

First, the small hit scenario a202g1 will be described with reference to FIG. 16B. FIG. 16B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit scenario a202g1. When the small hit scenario a202g1 is set, the small hit scenario counter 203h starts counting (S1302 in FIG. 36), and various controls set corresponding to the counter values of the small hit scenario counter 203h are executed. .. The counter value is added in the main process of the main control device 110 executed in a cycle of 4 milliseconds, and when the value of the counter value is added by 1, 4 milliseconds have elapsed.

When the small hit scenario a202g1 is set and the counter value becomes 1, the small hit opening period is started. When the counter value reaches 375 (1.5 seconds have elapsed), the opening period of the small hit ends, and the game ball can pass through the V passage flow path 650e3 in the second variable winning device 650 (V route open state). ), The switching valve solenoid 650c2 is set to ON in order to rotate the switching valve 650b3 downward. Then, when the counter value is updated to 376, the open / close piece solenoid 650f2 is set to ON in order to open the open / close piece 650b of the second variable winning device 650 (start of one round). After that, when the counter value reaches 750 (3 seconds have elapsed), that is, 1.5 seconds have passed since the opening / closing piece 650b was opened, the opening / closing piece solenoid 650f2 is set to off in order to close the opening / closing piece 650b. (End of 1 round).

The closing conditions (end conditions) of the opening / closing piece 650b in one round of the pachinko machine 10 are 1.5 seconds after the opening / closing piece 650b is opened and 10 balls in the second specified winning opening 650a. Is a prize. Details will be described later, but if 10 balls win the second specific winning opening 650a within 1.5 seconds after the opening / closing piece 650b is opened, the value of the small hit scenario counter 203h is set to 749 ( It is configured to execute the process of updating up to (one before the end of one round). In the small hit game, since the opening period of one round is set short, in reality, 10 balls do not enter, and after the opening period elapses, it is before 10 balls enter. It is configured to finish one round. As a result, the prize ball is not excessively given in the small hit game, and the difference from the big hit game is made.

With this configuration, after that, by adding 1 to the counter value, the counter value becomes 750 and the operation control for closing the opening / closing piece 650b is executed. Therefore, the opening / closing piece closing control is performed for each of a plurality of round end conditions. It is not necessary to execute the above, the processing load can be reduced, and it is possible to prevent a problem in the operation control of the open / close piece solenoid 650f2 when the respective round end conditions occur at substantially the same timing. ..

Then, when the counter value is updated to 751, the ending period of the small hit is started, the ending display mode is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and when the counter value reaches 1000 (4 seconds have elapsed), the second variable prize is won. The switching valve solenoid 650c2 is set to off in order to rotate the switching valve 650b3 upward so that the game ball cannot pass (difficult) to the V passing flow path 650e3 in the device 650 (V route closed state). do. Then, when the counter value reaches 1500 (6 seconds have elapsed), the ending period of the small hit ends.

By setting as described above, in the V effective period from when the switching valve solenoid 650c2 is set to ON and the V route is open until the switching valve solenoid 650c2 is set to OFF and the V route is closed. Since the opening / closing piece solenoid 650f2 is set to ON and the opening / closing piece 650b is opened, the game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening 650a can flow down to the V passage flow path 650e3. That is, the period from when the open / close piece solenoid 650f2 is set to on and the open / close piece 650b is in the open state until the open / close piece solenoid 650f2 is set to off and the open / close piece 650b is in the closed state (counter values 376 to 750). ) Allows the game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening 650a to flow down to the V passage flow path 650e3, and the game ball is detected by the V detection switch 650e5 to give the player a jackpot game. A small hit game will be provided.

Next, the small hit scenario b202g2 will be described with reference to FIG. 16 (c). FIG. 16C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the small hit scenario b202g2. This small hit scenario b202g2 is a small hit scenario in which the small hit type is set for the small hit B or the small hit C as described above, and it is difficult for the game ball to be detected by the V detection switch 650e5. This is a scenario that provides a small hit game.

When the small hit scenario b202g2 is set and the counter value becomes 1, the small hit opening period is started. When the counter value reaches 375 (1.5 seconds have elapsed), the opening period of the small hit ends, and the game ball can pass through the V passage flow path 650e3 in the second variable winning device 650 (V route open state). ), The switching valve solenoid 650c2 is set to ON in order to rotate the switching valve 650b3 downward.

Then, when the counter value reaches 1000 (4 seconds have elapsed), the opening period of the small hit is terminated, and the game ball cannot pass (difficult) to the V passage flow path 650e3 in the second variable winning device 650 (difficult). The switching valve solenoid 650c2 is set to off in order to rotate the switching valve 650b3 upward so as to be in the V route closed state).

When the counter value is updated to 1001, the open / close piece solenoid 650f2 is set to ON in order to open the open / close piece 650b of the second variable winning device 650 (start of one round). After that, when the counter value reaches 1375 (5.5 seconds have elapsed), that is, 1.5 seconds have passed since the opening / closing piece 650b was opened, the opening / closing piece solenoid 650f2 is set to off in order to close the opening / closing piece 650b. (End of 1 round).

Then, when the first round is completed, the small hit ending period is executed until the counter value reaches 1500 (6 seconds have elapsed).

By setting as described above, in the V effective period from when the switching valve solenoid 650c2 is set to ON and the V route is open until the switching valve solenoid 650c2 is set to OFF and the V route is closed. Since the opening / closing piece solenoid 650f2 is inactive and the opening / closing piece 650b is closed, the game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening 650a cannot flow down to the V passage flow path 650e3, and the second specific winning opening All the game balls that have entered the 650a are guided to the discharge flow path 650e1. That is, it is impossible to allow the game ball that has entered the second specific winning opening 650a to flow down to the V passage flow path 650e3, detect the game ball on the V detection switch 650e5, and give the player a jackpot game ( Difficult) small hit games will be provided.

As described above, in the small hit scenario a202g1 and the small hit scenario b202g2, the timing for setting the switching valve solenoid 650c2 on and off is the same as the small hit start timing (special figure stop timing), but the open / close piece solenoid. The timing for turning 650f2 on and off is different. By making the timing of turning on and off the open / close piece solenoid 650f2 different depending on the small hit type in this way, it is possible to control whether or not the V detection switch 650e5 detects it, so that the player is given a big hit. It is possible to set a small hit (small hit A in the present embodiment) and a small hit (small hits B and C in the present embodiment) in which the player is not given a big hit, providing various playability. be able to.

In this embodiment, the start timing of the display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the opening effect of the small hit game is one second before the opening operation of the opening / closing piece 650b in both the small hit scenarios a202g1 and b202g2. Until that period, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect of the fusion symbol (battle effect between the monster and the hero), so whether it is a small hit game corresponding to the small hit scenario a202g1. It is configured so that it is difficult to determine whether the game is a small hit game corresponding to the small hit scenario b202g2. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to determine the small hit type according to the display period of the opening effect and to make the player recognize in advance whether the small hit can be detected by the V detection switch 650e5. It is possible to actually play the game and have the V detection switch 650e5 play the game with the expectation that the game ball will be detected.

Next, the normal map fluctuation pattern selection table 202h will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 17, the normal map fluctuation pattern selection table 202h includes a normal map variation pattern selection table (normal) (see FIG. 17 (a)) and a normal map variation pattern selection table (time reduction) (FIG. 17 (Fig. 17). b) See) is at least set.

First, the normal map fluctuation pattern selection table (normal) will be described with reference to FIG. 17 (a). FIG. 17A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal map fluctuation pattern selection table (normal). The normal symbol fluctuation pattern selection table (normal) is a data table in which the display mode (variation time) of the normal map fluctuation pattern selected in the normal gaming state is defined, and is set to the value of the normal symbol fluctuation type counter CS2. Various fluctuation patterns (fluctuation time and hit production time) are selected based on this.

In the normal symbol variation pattern selection table (normal), variation patterns A to C per normal symbol are set as variation patterns selected when the lottery result of the normal symbol in the normal game state is a hit, and the variation patterns A to C per normal symbol are set in the normal game state. As the fluctuation pattern selected when the lottery result of the normal symbol is out of order, the normal symbol out-of-order fluctuation patterns A to C are set.

First, the fluctuation patterns A to C per normal symbol selected when the lottery result of the normal symbol in the normal game state is a hit will be described. The normal symbol per variation pattern A is set when the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is "0 to 79", and the normal symbol per variation pattern B is set when the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is "80 to 149". The fluctuation pattern C per normal symbol is set when the value of the normal symbol fluctuation type counter CS2 is "150 to 198". In each of the fluctuation patterns A to C per normal symbol, a fluctuation time of 10 seconds and a hit effect time of 3 seconds are set.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time per hit of the normal symbol is configured to be 10 seconds, and as described above, the game ball that has entered the entry portion of the crune member 660 is discharged from the ball outlet 660a. It is configured to take about 10 seconds to complete. Therefore, if the lottery result is a hit after passing through the through gate 67, the game ball that has entered from the ball outlet 660a of the crune member 660 is discharged at the timing when the fluctuation ends, so that the first entry is made. The game ball can be made to flow down to the first ball entry device 64 at the timing when the opening / closing door of the device 64 is opened. Therefore, even when the player has stopped firing the game ball, there is an effect that the game ball can be entered into the first ball entry port 64a at the timing when the opening / closing door is opened.

Next, the normal symbol deviation variation patterns A to C selected when the lottery result of the normal symbol in the normal game state is out of order will be described. The normal symbol deviation variation pattern A is a variation pattern in which the fluctuation time set when the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is “0 to 29” is 10 seconds, and the normal symbol deviation variation pattern B is a normal symbol variation. The fluctuation time set when the value of the type counter CS2 is "30 to 99" is a fluctuation pattern of 7 seconds, and in the normal symbol deviation fluctuation pattern C, the value of the normal symbol fluctuation type counter CS2 is "100 to 198". This is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time set in the case of is 5 seconds.

Next, with reference to FIG. 17 (b), the normal map fluctuation pattern selection table (time reduction) will be described. FIG. 17B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal map fluctuation pattern selection table (time reduction). The normal map fluctuation pattern selection table (time reduction) is a data table in which the display mode (variation time) of the normal map fluctuation pattern selected in the time saving gaming state is defined. Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the probability of hitting the normal symbol in the time-saving gaming state is "1/1", and the normal symbol always hits.

Similar to the above-mentioned normal map fluctuation pattern selection table (normal), various fluctuation patterns are selected based on the value of the normal symbol fluctuation type counter CS2 in this normal map fluctuation pattern selection table (time reduction), and the jackpot fluctuation pattern is selected. Since the selected fluctuation pattern (variation time) is different only in that it differs, the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113. The ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores at least a variation pattern selection table 222a, a normal diagram variation pattern selection table 222b, a small hit variation pattern selection table 222c, and a pseudo variation pattern selection table 222d. The variation pattern selection table 222a will be briefly described because it is already known, but the rough variation content (variation time) indicated by the variation pattern command based on the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110. It will be referred to when determining more detailed fluctuation contents. This makes it possible to determine a wider variety of variation modes.

Similar to the variation pattern table 222a, the normal map variation pattern selection table 222b and the small hit variation pattern selection table 222c are also based on the normal map variation pattern command or the variation pattern command output from the main controller 110, and the variation pattern command thereof. It is referred to when determining more detailed fluctuation contents from the rough fluctuation contents (variation time, fluctuation type) indicated by. This makes it possible to determine a wider variety of variation modes.

The pseudo-variation pattern selection table 222d is a table that defines the effect display contents of the pseudo-variation that is executed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Here, the pseudo-variation is the change start timing and normal of the special symbol when the fluctuation of the normal symbol is newly started during the fluctuation of the special symbol and the fluctuation of the normal symbol is in progress when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped. It is a fluctuation executed after the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in order to match the fluctuation start timing of the symbol.

A detailed explanation will be described later with reference to FIG. 18B, but the pseudo-variation pattern is selected based on the set effect type and the value of the effect counter 223 g using the pseudo-variation pattern selection table 222d. Will be done.

Next, the pseudo-variation pattern selection table 222d will be described with reference to FIG. 18 (b). FIG. 18B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the pseudo-variation pattern selection table 222d. The pseudo-variation pattern selection table 222d is a data table used for determining the display mode of the pseudo-variation pattern, and the display mode is defined for each effect type of the pseudo-variation and the value of the effect counter 223g.

Here, the production type of the pseudo-variation will be described. As described above with reference to FIG. 10A, there is no hit within 2 hold of the normal symbol 5 seconds before the fluctuation of the special symbol stops, and the normal symbol stops after the stop timing of the next special symbol. When the fluctuation of the special symbol is being executed, the deviation pseudo-variation is set by the fluctuation time of the difference time t1 from the stop of the fluctuation of the special symbol to the stop of the fluctuation of the normal symbol.

On the other hand, as described above with reference to FIG. 10 (b), if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol whose fluctuation starts is wrong and there is a hit within the 2 hold of the next normal symbol, the continuation pseudo is continued in a maximum of 30 seconds. Fluctuations are set.

The pseudo-variation pattern selection table 222d is referred to when selecting a pseudo-variation pattern based on the set effect type and the value of the effect counter 223 g in the pseudo-variation start setting process (S2102 in FIG. 44). Specifically, when the effect type is out of order, when the value of the effect counter 223 g is "0 to 30", "off pseudo-variation pattern A" is selected, and the value of the effect counter 223 g is ". If it is "31 to 100", "off-pseudo-variation pattern B" is selected, and if the value of the staging counter 223g is "101 to 198", "off-pseudo-variation pattern C" is selected. To.

On the other hand, when the effect type is continuous, if the value of the effect counter 223 g is "0 to 50", "continuation pseudo-variation pattern A" is selected, and the value of the effect counter 223 g is "51 to". If it is "130", "continuous pseudo-variation pattern B" is selected, and if the value of the effect counter 223g is "131 to 198", "continuous pseudo-variation pattern C" is selected.

Various continuous pseudo-variation patterns are pseudo-variations of up to 30 seconds, and can be switched to a re-variation effect (a fusion pattern variation effect corresponding to the special symbol variation) at the timing when the special symbol variation starts. It is configured. On the other hand, in various outlier pseudo-variation patterns, blackout is set in the set pseudo-variation period.

Next, the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 18 (c). FIG. 18C is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113. The RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 includes a normal figure winning information storage area 223a, a normal figure fluctuation start flag 223b, a pseudo fluctuation flag 223c, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d, a fluctuation start flag 223e, and a stop type. At least a selection flag 223f, an effect counter 223g, a pseudo setting flag 223h, and a pseudo fluctuation setting area 23i are provided.

The general drawing prize information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and each of these areas has a second random number counter which is prize information. The value of C4 is stored. In this pachinko machine 10, when a game ball passes through a through gate (ordinary symbol start port) 67, it corresponds to the through gate passage from the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in response to the passage through the through gate. Various information (whether or not, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained when a lottery of ordinary symbols is performed is predicted (estimated) by the main control device 110, and the predicted various information is voiced from the main control device 110. The lamp control device 113 is notified by the winning information command.

When the winning information command is received in the voice lamp control device 113, various information (win / fail, stop type, fluctuation pattern) notified by the winning information command is extracted as winning information, and the winning information is used as a general drawing. It is stored in the winning information storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the 4 areas (1st to 4th areas). Will be done. That is, the smaller the area number, the more the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

The normal map fluctuation start flag 223b is set to on when a normal map fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (S1713 in FIG. 40), and the third symbol display device is set in the normal map fluctuation pattern selection process. It is set to off when the variable display of the normal symbol in 81 is set (S2001 in FIG. 44). When the normal map fluctuation start flag 223b is turned on, the normal map fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the normal map fluctuation pattern extracted from the received normal map fluctuation pattern command.

The display fluctuation pattern command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S1602 in FIG. 39) of the main process executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display normal map fluctuation pattern command, the display control device 114 has a normal map fluctuation pattern indicated by this display normal map fluctuation pattern command, and the third symbol display device 81 has a normal map of the third symbol. The display control of the variation effect is started so that the variation display is performed.

The pseudo-variation flag 223c is a flag used to determine whether or not the display mode of the fusion symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is undergoing pseudo-variation, and is set to ON in the pseudo-variation start setting process (FIG. 44). S2104), it is set to off in the fluctuation pattern setting process (S1904 in FIG. 43). When this pseudo fluctuation flag 223c is set to ON, even if the fluctuation start timing of the normal symbol is reached, the new fluctuation in the fusion symbol is not started and is displayed in the normal symbol auxiliary symbol (normal symbol display area Ds1). The fluctuation start is executed only by the symbol).

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, it is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the fluctuation effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the normal symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the normal symbol reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d displays the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol. It is designed to manage.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added by passing through the through gate 67, or in the main control device 110, the variable display in the normal symbol is executed and the reserved balls are held. When the number is subtracted, the normal symbol reserved ball number command indicating the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the normal symbol hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 from the normal figure hold ball number command. Then, it is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d (S1710 in FIG. 40). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the normal symbol hold ball counter 223d according to the normal symbol hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the normal symbol hold ball of the main control device 110 is used. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203c.

The value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d is used for displaying the normal symbol reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d in response to the reception of the normal symbol reserved ball number command, and also stores the stored normal symbol reserved ball number. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223b, a display normal figure reserved ball count command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives the command for the number of reserved balls for display, it holds the value of the number of reserved balls indicated by the command, that is, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the number of balls symbol is displayed in the normal figure reserved number display area Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d is changed while synchronizing with the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of normal symbol reserved ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

The variation start flag 223e is set to on when a variation pattern command of a special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (S1702 in FIG. 40), and is set in the variation pattern selection process (see S1802 in FIG. 42). 3 It is set to off when the variable display of the special symbol is set in the symbol display device 81 (S1901 in FIG. 43). When the variation start flag 223e is turned on, the variation pattern command for display is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output process (S1602 in FIG. 39) of the main process executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted toward the device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223f is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (S1705 in FIG. 40), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (S1808 in FIG. 42). When the stop type selection flag 223f is turned on, the stop symbol of the fusion symbol corresponding to the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type) is set. Further, the set stop symbol is notified to the display control device 114 by the display stop type command. In the display control device 114, the stop display of the variation effect is displayed so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command received from the voice lamp control device 113 is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is controlled.

The effect counter 223g is a counter used when determining a fluctuation pattern of pseudo fluctuations and various fluctuations. It is updated repeatedly in the range of 0 to 198. Although not shown, it is updated by 1 each time the main process executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed (S1611 in FIG. 39).

The pseudo setting flag 223h is a flag set to be turned on in order to execute the pseudo fluctuation. This pseudo setting flag 223h is out of the lottery result of the special symbol (at the time of the start of the variation) in which the start of the variation display is set in the variation pattern selection process (see S1802 in FIG. 42). It is set to on when there is a hit in the hold (S1910 in FIG. 43). That is, the pseudo setting flag 223h is a flag indicating that it is determined to execute the pseudo change after the special symbol is stopped during the change of the special symbol. Further, in the pseudo-variation setting process (see S1614 in FIG. 45), the pseudo-setting flag 223h is set to off 5 seconds before the stop of the special figure variation, and there is a hit within 2 hold of the next normal symbol, or , It is set to ON when it is the period during which the normal map fluctuation that stops after the stop timing of the special figure is executed (S2210, 2213 in FIG. 45). On the other hand, it is set to off in the pseudo-variation start setting process (S2107 in FIG. 41). By setting this pseudo setting flag 223h to ON, the start of the pseudo fluctuation is executed after the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped. As a result, it is possible to reduce the frequency with which the fusion symbol stops at the missed symbol and reduce the frequency with which the player is disappointed with the result of the missed determination. Therefore, the interest of the game can be improved. Further, even if the fusion pattern is out of alignment, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored by having the player play the game with higher expectations.

The pseudo-variation setting area 223i is a storage area in which fluctuation data (variation period, fluctuation pattern, etc.) of pseudo-variation is set.

The hold number counter 223j is a counter for setting the number of hold symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, as described above, during the fluctuation of the special symbol or the pseudo-variation, the new variation of the normal symbol is not started in the fusion symbol, but is executed only in the normal symbol auxiliary symbol. In this case, the reserved symbol of the normal symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not updated, and one variation of the fusion symbol is configured to appear to correspond to one variation of the reserved symbol. are doing. However, in this case, there will be a difference between the actual number of reserved symbols and the number of displayed reserved symbols. Therefore, by independently providing a counter for displaying the reserved symbols, it is configured so that the difference from the actual number of reserved symbols can be grasped, and when a difference occurs as described later, a new normal symbol is added. In the fluctuation of the fusion symbol corresponding to the fluctuation start, the pseudo-continuous map fluctuation that performs pseudo-stop is executed, and the subtraction of the hold number counter 223j is executed at the timing of the pseudo-stop so that it matches the actual hold number. It is configured to make corrections. Therefore, even if there is a difference from the actual number of holds, correction can be made. If the hold of the normal symbol is not stored in the state where the difference has occurred, the difference from the actual hold is corrected by configuring the fusion symbol to fluctuate by 1 in a pseudo-off mode. It is good to correct it by configuring it as follows.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read / written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 36) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 19 to 23, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in the first control example will be described. FIG. 20 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected to the image controller 237 via a bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot and the number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, fetches it, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure, the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by 1. When the MPU 231 executes the instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory 234a has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data that is continuously arranged on a plurality of pages, high-speed reading is possible for the data on the second and subsequent pages, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-consecutive data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory 234a is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, the instructions constituting the control program can be read. It may take a long time, and even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores a control program executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 described later of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory 234a has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, in order to further enhance the interest of the player, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further, the control program and fixed value data can be stored in the second program storage area 234a1. As described above, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and is, for example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) are generated when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to read and write data to and from the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b has one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) containing the data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs a known error correction process, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in one bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. The process of transferring one page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other bank. The processes of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a in the NOR type ROM 234d, specifically, the first program stored in the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be executed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored from the instructions. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and also specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is stored in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and assigns the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the read thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM 234d is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (command code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after the address "0000H" is specified, and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The program storage area of the work RAM 233 for each fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is used. The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of programs among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instructions. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is programmed so that the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initialization process (see S2302 in FIG. 46) stored in the program storage area 233a and executed after the boot process by the boot program (S2301 in FIG. 46) is completed. Set the start address of the corresponding program.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read a control program from a work RAM configured by a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on the drawing list (see FIG. 23) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. By expanding the image drawn in the buffer and outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Parallel processing in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (FIG. 48 (b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes an image drawing process for the next frame, and also executes a process of displaying the image previously developed by drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 draws and displays an image. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing process or display process is completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The image is drawn using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a facilitates a large capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is configured with the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing an image, but at the time of drawing an image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the above and the time required for the reading can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so that it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 by the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display a third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is held without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to the 235e and the error message image area 235f, at least the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on and the third symbol area 235d are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area for storing the corresponding data. Further, in the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the ball entering the first ball entry port 64a is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a variable image at power-on, which displays the lottery result performed by the main control device 110 by a variable effect.

When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S2303 and S2304 in FIG. 46).

An image that fluctuates when the power is turned on will be described. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image as the third symbol display device. Display on 81 (display of "○" and "x" on the third symbol display device 81).

At this time, when the display fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the instruction command for starting the fluctuation, the display control device 114 receives the main image at power-on. On the display screen of, the variable image when the power of the "○" symbol is turned on at the lower right position facing the screen and the variable image when the power is turned on of the "×" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol are displayed. It is displayed repeatedly in the middle and alternately. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the image is displayed for a certain period after the variation effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", the image is displayed for a certain period after the variation effect is stopped.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, when the player starts the game while the main image at the time of power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the ball is detected at the first ball-entry port 64a, the fluctuation image at the time of power-on is obtained. The image controller 237 is drawn from the MPU 231 so that the power-on variation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image resident in the area 235b and the images are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Is instructed to. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If a ball is detected in the first ball entry port 64a while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be done.

Returning to FIG. 19, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Here, with reference to FIG. 20, the back image and the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c among the back images will be described. FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram illustrating two types of rear images and a range of rear images stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each rear image, and FIG. 20 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing " FIG. 20B shows the back surface A corresponding to the “city stage” and the back surface B corresponding to the “empty stage”, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 21, as the rear image corresponding to each of the rear surfaces A and B, an image that is horizontally longer than the display area displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is prepared in the character ROM 234. The image controller 237 draws an image so that the rear image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared on the back surfaces A and B (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured so that the back image is continuous at the positions a and c. The image between the position c and the position d and the image between the position a and the position a'are composed of an image corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between the position c and the position d. Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. The rear image is scrolled and displayed in a simple connection.

When the frame button 22 is operated by the player to change the stage to the "city stage" or the "empty stage", the MPU 231 first positions the display area between the position a and the position a'in the corresponding rear image. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Then, with the passage of time, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and further displayed. When the area reaches the image between the position c and the position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is displayed again on the third symbol display device 81 as an image from the position a to the position a'. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the image between the positions a and c so as to flow toward the left with a smooth connection.

Next, in each back image, the range of the back image stored in the back image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 20A, the back surface A corresponding to the city stage, which is the initial stage, is the back surface of the resident video RAM 235 in which all the image data corresponding to the entire range of the back surface A, that is, the position a to the position d is displayed. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, the game is played without changing the stage while the city stage, which is the initial stage, is displayed. Therefore, all the image data on the back A corresponding to the frequently displayed city stage is displayed in the back image area. By making it resident in 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20B, the back surface B corresponding to the empty stage contains only a part of the back surface, that is, the image data corresponding to the image between the position a and the position b, for the resident video RAM 235. It is stored in the rear image area 235c of.

Here, since the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at an arbitrary timing based on the intention of the player, even if the frame button 22 is operated at an arbitrary timing. In order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to make the entire range of image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 for all the rear images, but doing so makes it very resident video RAM 235. A large capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the rear image displayed first when the stage is changed is fixed in the range from the position a to the position a', and the position is from the position a including the initial position. Since the image data corresponding to the image between b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the frame button by the player When the stage is changed at an arbitrary timing by the operation of 22, the initial position of the back surface B is immediately displayed as the third symbol by using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. It can be displayed on the device 81, and can be displayed by scrolling or changing the color tone with the passage of time. Further, since only the image data corresponding to a part of the image is stored on the back surface B, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 and suppress an increase in cost.

Further, on the back surface B, after the image at the initial position is displayed, the range from the position a to the position b is scrolled from left to right using the image data resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. During this period, the range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b'to the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the image data from the position b'to the position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while scrolling the range from the position a to the position b, so that the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 can be transferred. After scrolling the range from position a to position b using the image data corresponding to the rear image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b'to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the symbol display device 81.

In the back surface B, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is stored in a sub area dedicated to the back image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 19) of the normal video RAM 236. As a result, the back image data stored in the sub area dedicated to the back image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the back image can be reliably displayed.

Further, on the rear surface B, the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to the images between the positions b'and b. Data is stored in duplicate. Then, under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b'on the third symbol display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the rear image is scrolled and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in a smooth connection. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data of the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position c and the position d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area, and then the image controller 237 is controlled. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between the position a and the position a'is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display area. do. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can be repeatedly scrolled and displayed with a smooth connection so that the image between the positions a and c flows toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 19, the description will be continued. The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, is resident. As a result, when performing a variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, it seems that the variation effect is not immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37 after the ball enters the through gate 67. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the apparatus 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but instead enters the character symbol area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. Notify the display control device 114 by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of other errors is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 has an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the process of displaying the image for one frame on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used to draw the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first frame buffers 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are used every 20 milliseconds as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing the control program and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing the work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a time counting counter 233h, and a storage image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a kind of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 by using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and a round effect. , A display data table corresponding to the ending effect and the demo effect is prepared.

The variation effect is an effect started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A or jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

By notifying the time saving period of the normal symbol in the ending effect, the player can easily recognize the time saving period of the normal symbol. The longer the time reduction period of this normal symbol, the more chances that the game ball will pass through the first entrance 64a, so that the lottery of the special symbol will be held more often, and the chance of winning the special symbol will also increase. Will increase. Therefore, since the opening / closing door attached to the first entry opening 64a becomes a big hit of the special symbol and the opening / closing door is opened, it becomes easy for the game ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a. In addition, since the opening / closing piece 650b is opened as a small hit with a special symbol, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the second specific winning opening 650a, and the game ball flows into the V passage flow path 650e3. It will be easier. Therefore, the longer the displayed normal symbol has a shorter time period, the stronger the expectation that the jackpot game will be given, and the player can have it, so that the player's motivation to participate in the game can be increased. can. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

Further, since the first entry port 64a is a winning opening in which five game balls are paid out as prize balls when a game ball enters, it becomes a big hit of a normal symbol and opens and closes attached to the first entry opening 64a. When the door is opened and the game ball can easily enter the first entry port 64a, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state where it is difficult to reduce the number of balls held or the number of balls held is not reduced even if the pachinko machine 10 is played. You can get the expectation that you can get a big hit of a special symbol without it. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to participate in the game, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

In addition, in the ending effect, by notifying that the lottery result of any of the reserved special symbol lottery becomes a big hit of the special symbol, the player can use the special symbol in the reserved special symbol lottery. Since it is possible to recognize that it will be a big hit, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that it will surely be a big hit with a special symbol. Therefore, since it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to participate in the game, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed from the stop of one variation effect. The third symbol consisting of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the game is not performed on the pachinko machine 10.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of an image for one frame.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α-blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be enlarged and displayed, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with other sprites. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, and characters used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is specified for each address. It should be noted that one or a plurality of information regarding the effect and the character is defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are displayed with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. For this back type, display one of the backs A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "city stage", "sky stage", or "island stage"), or backside A to. Information that specifies whether to display a back image different from C is described. Further, as the back surface type, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back surfaces A to C, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A to C as the drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified with the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In this embodiment, a case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. It may be specified as the position information indicating whether or not the display should be performed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the rear image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the rear type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating that) may be specified as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the lapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the third symbol can be the variation symbol in the previous variation effect or the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110. By managing by the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, the third symbol to be easily displayed can be specified from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is variablely displayed at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. Therefore, during that time, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the variation effect performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H" which is the start address of the display data table, and the data table is described in the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 22). "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (FIG. 23) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, the drawing instruction of the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, in the display control device 114, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image is diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable staging images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of staging images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer 233d corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. Is possible because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than gaming machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer 233d corresponding to the effect mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be created can be realized only based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. ..

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table, the transfer data table is prepared. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and the transfer timing thereof are specified.

If all the image data of the sprite used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to start the transfer at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 23). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. The Null data which means is specified.

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

As with the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 22, in the example of FIG. 22). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table is the display data table. If a transfer data table corresponding to the above exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (FIG. 23) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. do.

For example, in the example of FIG. 22, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified in the address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Bull data is specified in the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be always stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image are transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on variable image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. , MPU231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 46) (S2305 in FIG. 46). Then, at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the transfer setting process, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to off (S4605 in FIG. 60 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 every time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (S2601 in FIG. 48 (b)), and the simple image is displayed. When the display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S2608 in FIG. 48 (b)) and the simple display setting process (FIG. 48) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. (See S2609 in (b)) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (FIGS. 49 to 57) and display setting processing (FIG. 58) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (S4501 in FIG. 60 (a)), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on, the simple image display flag 233c is referenced. Since there is resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, the resident image transfer setting process (FIG. 60 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is executed. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (FIG. 61) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (FIG. 23), which will be described later, is generated, which describes the content of the image drawing instruction for the user. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (FIG. 23), which will be described later, is generated in which drawing instructions are described. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the image data of the sprite used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Null data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to the later drawing list (FIG. 23) that describes the instruction content for image drawing to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. do.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 moves the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (S2603 in FIG. 58). ), The pointer update process (S4205 in FIG. 58) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list described later. (See FIG. 23) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

If the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, by describing the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. 23. FIG. 23 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 23, a rear image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Design 2, ..., Error For each sprite such as a design), detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described. In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α-blending information, color information, and filter specification information, and the image controller 237 includes various types. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. Processing is performed, composition processing with other sprites is performed according to the α blending information, color tone correction processing is performed according to the color information, and filtering processing is performed by the method specified by the information according to the filter specification information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 has a drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and other contents of an image to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image, warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can be used according to the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α-blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., Hold ball number symbol 1, hold ball number symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 is the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list contains this transfer data information, the image controller 237 uses the transfer data information to create an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 is performed based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time it is executed, the time counting counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S4207 in FIG. 58). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes that should be performed.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (S2302 in FIG. 46) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data discrimination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (FIG. 61) executed by the MPU 231. .. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as that one sprite is always in an unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "Off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and refers to the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (S4713 in FIG. 61). If the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (S4714 in FIG. 61). The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as "drawing target buffer") that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (S4802 in FIG. 62).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and together with the drive signal, the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated when the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, when the value is "0", it is set to "1", and when the value is "1", it is set to "0". It is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (FIG. 48 (b)) is executed, it is performed (S4803 in FIG. 62).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately specifying the images, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 24 to 37. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and is started periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this embodiment). There is a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by inputting the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are explained first, and then started up. The processing and the main processing will be described.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the process of reading various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter C5 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random number counter C4, and the small hit type counter CS3 are each added by 1, and their counter values are maximum. When the value (399, 99, 99, 239, 199 in this embodiment, respectively) is reached, the value is cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 and CS3 are stored in the corresponding buffer area (counter buffer 203i) of the RAM 203.

Next, it is a process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, and a special symbol variation process for setting a variation pattern (variation time) of the third symbol to be variablely displayed on the third symbol display device 81. (S104), and then the start winning process associated with winning the first ball opening 64a (starting winning) is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation processing (S104) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 25 to 27.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying in the second symbol display device 83 (see FIG. 11), is executed (S106), and the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is used. The through-gate passage process associated with the passage of the sphere is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing (S106) and the through gate passage processing (S107) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29. After executing the through-gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and further, the V-passing process (S109) is executed. The details of this V-passing process (S109) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the processing of S109 is completed, other processing to be periodically executed is executed (S110), and the timer interrupt processing is terminated. The launch control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a, and launches the ball on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining on / off of. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 25, the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently being hit (S201). As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is in the big hit (S201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changed. If it is not fluctuating (S202: No), it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first entry port 64a (starting opening) (S203). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64a is detected over three timer interrupt processes. If it is determined that the ball has not entered the first ball entry port 64a (S203: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entry port 64a (S203: Yes), the first random number counter C1 and the first type counter C2 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stopped. The values of the type counter C3 and the small hit type counter CS3 are acquired and stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball execution area (S204).

When the process of S204 is completed, the first symbol display device 37 executes a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display (S205), and ends this process. The special symbol change start process will be described later with reference to FIG. 26.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S206). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time. If (S206: No) has not elapsed, the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (not shown), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S206, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S206: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stopped symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S207). The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S205) described later with reference to FIG. 26. When this special symbol change start process (S205) is executed, the stop symbol of the special symbol is set based on the values of various counters stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area 203a. More specifically, in the case of a big hit of a special symbol, it is determined whether the big hit is the big hit A or the big hit B according to the value of the first hit type counter C2.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on at the predetermined LED of the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on. If it is off, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S207 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol display performed by the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 26) (this lottery). The result) is determined whether it is a big hit of a special symbol (S208). If the result of this lottery is a jackpot with a special symbol (S208: Yes), a jackpot scenario corresponding to the jackpot type is set using the jackpot scenario table (not shown) (S209). When the processing of S209 is completed, the value of the time saving medium counter 203d is set from the first big hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 14B) based on the jackpot type and the gaming state gaming state (normal gaming state, time saving gaming state). Then (S210), the process proceeds to S215.

On the other hand, in the process of S208, if the current lottery result is out of the special symbol (S208: No), then it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a small hit of the special symbol (S211). In the process of S211 if it is determined that the lottery result of this time is a small hit of a special symbol (S211: Yes), the small hit start setting process is executed to start the small hit (S212), S213. Move to the processing of. The details of the small hit start setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 27.

If it is determined in the process of S211 that the result of the lottery this time is not a small hit of the special symbol (S211: No), the result of the lottery this time is out of the special symbol, so the process proceeds to the process of S213 as it is.

In the process of S213, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter 203d is larger than 0 (S213), and when it is determined that the value of the time reduction counter 203d is 1 or more (greater than 0) (S213: Yes). The value of the time reduction counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S214), and the process proceeds to S215. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the time saving / medium counter 203d is not 1 or more (0) (S213: No), the processing of S214 is skipped and the process proceeds to S215 processing.

In the process of S215 executed after the process of S210, S213, or S214, the LED lighting and the third symbol display device 81, which are the display modes of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol set in the process of S207, are turned on. A stop command is set to synchronize the fluctuation stop of the special symbol, the special symbol auxiliary symbol, etc. displayed in (S215).

Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the special symbol change start processing (S205) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the special symbol change start processing (S205). This special symbol change start process (S205) is a process executed in the special symbol change process (see FIG. 25) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and is stored in the special symbol hold ball execution area 203a. This is a process for determining an effect pattern (variation pattern) of a variation effect performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 based on the values of various counters.

In the special symbol change start process, first, the value of the change type counter CS1 is acquired and stored in the special symbol hold ball execution area 203a (S301). Next, in the process of S301, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area 203a in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored is acquired (S302). Specifically, each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small hit type counter CS3 of the special symbol is acquired.

When the processing of S302 is completed, the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table 202a corresponding to the type of the special symbol acquired in the processing of S302 (S303). More specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S302 is compared with the jackpot determination value stored in the first random number table 202a, and the lottery result is acquired. As described above, when the value of the first random number counter C1 is "0 to 79", the lottery result is a big hit, and when the value is "300 to 399", the lottery result is a small hit (FIG. 14 (a). )reference).

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result acquired in the process of S303 is a big hit (S304). If the lottery result is determined to be a big hit in the process of S304 (S304: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the special symbol and the big hit type is set (S305).

More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S302 is referred to, compared with the random number value specified in the first jackpot type selection table 202b, and the jackpot of two types of special symbols is compared. Among the types (big hit A, big hit B), it is determined what the big hit type is. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", the jackpot A (15R jackpot) is set, and if it is in the range of "50 to 99", the jackpot B (15R) is set. The jackpot) is set (see FIG. 10 (b)).

In the process of S305, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the set jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B). Further, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When the processing of S305 is completed, the jackpot variation pattern is determined with reference to the jackpot variation pattern selection table 202e1 (see FIG. 14D) based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the processing of S301 (S306). ), The process proceeds to S312.

When the variation pattern is determined in the process of S306, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is determined, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined.

On the other hand, in the process of S304, when it is determined that the lottery result is not a big hit (S304: No), then it is determined whether the lottery result is a small hit (S307). When the lottery result is determined to be a small hit in the processing of S307 (S307: Yes), a display mode corresponding to the special symbol and the small hit type is set (S308), and the result is acquired in the processing of S301. The small hit variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 (S309), and the process proceeds to S312.

If it is determined in the process of S307 that the lottery result is not a small hit (S307: No), a display mode corresponding to the special symbol is set (S310).

When the processing of S310 is completed, the deviation variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the processing of S301 (S311), and the process proceeds to the processing of S312.

In the process of S311, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S306, the value of the variation type counter CS1 acquired in the processing of S301 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1.

When the processing of S306, S309 or S311 is completed, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the processing of S306, S309 or S311 is set (S312). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S305, S308 or S310 is set (S313). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (FIG. 33). To. When the processing of S313 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the small hit start setting process (S212) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing this small hit start setting process (S212). This small hit start setting process (S212) is executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 25), and is a process for setting the start of the small hit game.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10, when the small hit game is started, the second variable winning device 650 is changed to an open state in which the ball can win (easily), and the ball winning the second variable winning device 650 is changed. By passing through a specific area (V detection switch 650e5), the big hit game is executed after the small hit game is completed.

That is, the game state in which the small hit game is executed is an advantageous state in which a ball can be won in the second variable winning device 650 (a prize ball can be obtained), and the big hit game is executed as compared with the normal game state. It is configured to be in an advantageous state where it is more likely to be done.

Returning to FIG. 27, the explanation will be continued. In the small hit start setting process (S212), first, it is determined whether or not the lottery result this time is a small hit A (S401). If it is determined to be a small hit A in the processing of S401 (S401: Yes), the small hit scenario a202g1 corresponding to the small hit type (small hit A) is set using the small hit scenario table 202g (S401: Yes). S402), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S401 that it is not a small hit A (S401: No), the small hit scenario b202g2 corresponding to the small hit type (small hit B, C) is performed using the small hit scenario table 202g. Set (S403) and end this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation processing (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24), and the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83 (see FIG. 11) and the first ball entry are performed. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory (opening / closing door) attached to the mouth 64a.

In this normal symbol variation processing (S106), first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S501). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the hit, and the electric accessory (opening / closing door) attached to the first ball entry port 64a is opened / closed. Includes during control. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S501: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S501: No), it is determined whether the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502), and the second symbol display device 83 is used. If the display mode is not changing (S502: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S503). Next, it is determined whether the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is larger than 0 (S504), and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is not larger than 0 (not 0). When it is determined (S504: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is larger than 0 (S504: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is subtracted by 1 (S505).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted, and the normal symbol reserved ball number command is set (S506). In the process of S506, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b is acquired (S507).

After finishing the processing of S507, it is next determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time reduction of the normal symbol (whether the value of the time reduction counter 203d is larger than 0) (S508). If it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction (the value of the time reduction counter 203d is larger than 0) (S508: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot. (S509). As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over.

In the processing of S509, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S509: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. Based on the value of the second random number counter C4 and the random number table per normal symbol for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S510). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the random number table per ordinary symbol for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 239", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol. That is, in the time-saving state, it always hits the normal symbol. (See FIG. 14 (c)).

On the other hand, in the processing of S509, if the special symbol is in the middle of a big hit (S509: Yes), the process proceeds to the processing of S511.

Further, in the process of S508, if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time reduction of the normal symbol (the value of the time reduction counter 203d is 0) (S508: No), the process proceeds to the process of S511. In the processing of S511, the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so that the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S507 is low. Based on the second hit random number table for the probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S511). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "0 to 5", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "6 to 239", the normal symbol is out of order. (See FIG. 14 (c)).

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the process of S510 or S511 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S512). If it is determined that the normal symbol is a hit (S512: Yes), the display mode at the time of hit is set in the second symbol display device 83 (S513), and the process proceeds to S515. In the process of S513, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol “◯” is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

On the other hand, in the process of S512, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S512: No), the display mode at the time of detachment is set in the second symbol display device 83 (S514), and the process proceeds to S515. .. In the process of S514, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

In the process of S515, the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is acquired (S515), and then it is determined whether the time reduction is in progress (whether the value of the time reduction medium counter 203d is larger than 0) (S516).

If the pachinko machine 10 determines that the normal symbol is in the time reduction (the value of the time reduction counter 203d is larger than 0) (S516: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot. (S517). As for the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. Includes the middle of a predetermined time after the jackpot game is over.

In the processing of S517, if the special symbol is not in the jackpot (S517: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time saving state. A normal symbol variation pattern is selected based on the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 and the normal symbol variation pattern selection table for the time saving state, and the determined variation pattern is notified to the display control device 114. Figure A variation pattern command is set (S518). Specifically, the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol variation pattern selection table for the time saving state. For example, if the value of the normal symbol fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 79", the normal symbol fluctuation pattern D (variation time 3 seconds) is selected, and if it is in the range of "80 to 149", the normal symbol is normal symbol. The variation pattern E (variation time 3 seconds) is selected. If the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is in the range of "150 to 198", the normal symbol variation pattern F (variation time 3 seconds) is selected (see FIG. 17 (b)). The normal figure fluctuation pattern command is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (FIG. 33).

When the processing of S518 is completed, the game state is shortened, so the opening time of the electric accessory (opening / closing door) attached to the first entry port 64a is set to 2 seconds and the number of times of opening is set to 2 (S519). , End this process.

On the other hand, in the processing of S516, when the pachinko machine 10 determines that the normal symbol is not in the time reduction (the value of the time reduction counter 203d is 0) (S516: No), and in the processing of S517, the special symbol If the jackpot is in progress (S517: Yes), the process proceeds to S520.

In the processing of S520, the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the big hit of the special symbol. Therefore, the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 acquired in the processing of S515 and the normal state. A variation pattern per normal symbol is selected based on the normal map variation pattern selection table for the gaming state, and a normal map variation pattern command for notifying the determined variation pattern to the display control device 114 is set (S520). Specifically, the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal symbol variation pattern selection table for the normal gaming state. For example, if the value of the normal symbol fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 79", the normal symbol fluctuation pattern A (variation time 10 seconds) is selected, and if it is in the range of "80 to 149", the normal symbol is normal symbol. The fluctuation pattern B (variation time 10 seconds) is selected. If the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2 is in the range of "150 to 198", the normal symbol variation pattern C (variation time 10 seconds) is selected (see FIG. 17A). The normal figure fluctuation pattern command is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (FIG. 33).

When the processing of S520 is completed, the gaming state is not in a short time, so the opening time of the electric accessory (opening / closing door) attached to the first entry port 64a is set to 2 seconds and the number of opening times is set to 1 (S521). , End this process.

In this way, when the game state of the normal symbol is the time-saving game state (during the time reduction), the game state of the normal symbol is compared with the normal game state (during the non-time reduction), and the variable display time is "10 seconds → Since it is shortened to "3 seconds" and the opening period of the electric accessory (opening / closing door) attached to the first entry port 64a is extended to "2 seconds x 1 time → 2 seconds x 2 times", the first entry The ball is in a state where it is easy for the ball to enter the ball mouth 64a.

Further, in the process of S502, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502: Yes), whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S522). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S518 or the process of S520 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device 83.

If the fluctuation time has not elapsed in the process of S522 (S522: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S522, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S522: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S523). In the processing of S523, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the processing of S513, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lights up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to be displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is out of order and the display mode is set by the processing of S514, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. Is set to. When the stop display is set by the process of S523, and then the second symbol display update process (see S1008) of the main process (see FIG. 33) is executed, the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is displayed. When the process is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S513 or the process of S514.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, is the lottery result (current lottery result) of the ordinary symbol performed by the ordinary symbol variation process a hit of the ordinary symbol? Is determined (S524). If the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S524: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the result of this lottery is a hit of a normal symbol (S524: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory (opening / closing door) attached to the first entry port 64a is set (S525), and this processing is performed. finish.

When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory (opening / closing door) is set by the process of S525, and then the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1006) of the main process (see FIG. 33) is executed, the electric combination is executed. The opening / closing control of the object (opening / closing door) is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory (opening / closing door) is continued until the opening time and the number of opening times set in the process of S519 or the process of S521 are completed. After the process of S525 is executed, a normal figure stop command indicating the stop of the normal symbol is set (S526). This normal figure stop command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the stop of the normal symbol.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S601). Here, the passage of the sphere at the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S601: Yes), the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203c (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is acquired. (S602). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S603).

Whether the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S601: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203c If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S603: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 (S601: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203c is added by 1 (S604). Then, based on the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c added in the process of S604, the normal symbol reserved ball number command is set (S605).

The normal figure reserved ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 33) described later. Inside, it is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the normal figure holding ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203c from the normal symbol holding ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the normal figure holding ball number counter of the RAM 223. Store in 223d.

When the processing of S605 is completed, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24) described above is set to the empty holding area (holding first) of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. It is stored in the first area of the area (4th area on hold) (S606). In the process of S606, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203c is referred to, and if the value is 1, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, the normal figure pre-determination result is acquired based on the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the processing of S606 and the second random number table 202d (S607), and the normal figure is based on the normal figure pre-determination result. The winning information command is set (S608), and this process ends.

The general drawing winning information command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 33) to be executed later by the MPU 201. Then, it is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the Fuzu prize winning information command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the Fuzu pre-determination result from the Fuzu prize information command, and stores the extracted value in the Fuzu prize information storage area 223a of the RAM 223. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can perform an effect based on the result of the pre-determination of the normal drawing.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the V-passing process (S109) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the V-passing process (S109). This V-passing process (S109) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24), and is the passage of the game ball to the specific area (V detection switch 650e5) in the second variable winning device 650 normal? Is a process for determining.

In this V-passing process (S109), first, it is determined whether or not the V detection switch 650e5 provided in the V-passing flow path 650e3 of the second variable winning device 650 has detected the game ball (S701). In the process of S701, when it is determined that the V detection switch 650e5 has not detected the game ball, that is, when it is determined that the V detection switch 650e5 is not set to ON (S701: No), this process is performed. To finish. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S701 that the V detection switch 650e5 has detected the game ball (S701: Yes), then, within the V passable period currently set in the small hit scenario (FIG. 16). (B)-(c)) is determined (S702).

In the process of S702, if it is determined that it is not within the V passable period set in the small hit scenario (S702: No), an error command is set (S703), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S702, when it is determined that the V passable period set in the small hit scenario is within (S702: Yes), the value of the acquired first hit type counter is read (S704). ). That is, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S302 is referred to, compared with the random number value specified in the first jackpot type selection table 202b, and the jackpot type (big hit A) of two types of special symbols is compared. , The jackpot B), it is determined what the jackpot type is. As described above, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 49", it is determined to be a jackpot A (15R jackpot), and if it is in the range of "50 to 99", the jackpot B (15R) is determined. It is determined to be a jackpot) (see FIG. 14 (b)).

Next, the V flag 203f indicating the jackpot type read in S704 is set to ON (S705), and the V pass command is set (S706). After that, the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203d corresponding to the jackpot type and the game state is set (S707).

In this way, even during a small hit game for winning a prize in the second variable winning device 650, a small period is provided for valid (normal) period and non-valid (abnormal) period for the winning. It is possible to prevent the act of illegally passing the ball to a specific area (V detection switch 650e5) during the hit game.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the V detection switch 650e5 detects a game ball outside the passable period, an error command is set and this process is terminated without setting the V flag 203f to ON. Therefore, even if the game ball passes through the specific area outside the passable period, the V flag 203f is not set to ON. Therefore, even if the game ball is illegally passed to the specific area during the small hit game, the small hit game The jackpot game is not executed after the end. Therefore, there is an effect that illegal games can be prevented.

In this embodiment, a configuration is used in which it is determined whether or not the timing at which the game ball passes through the specific region is normal, and the presence or absence of an abnormality (error) is determined. The configuration of may be used.

For example, the case where the V detection switch 650e5 detects two or more game balls in one small hit game may be determined as an abnormality. This is a configuration in which one game ball that can pass through a specific area (V detection switch 650e5) during one small hit game is made into one by controlling the operation of each configuration of the second variable winning device 650 in the present embodiment. Is adopted. Therefore, the case where the V detection switch 650e5 detects two or more game balls in one small hit game may be determined as an abnormality.

Further, in the present embodiment, after it is determined that the V detection switch 650e5 has detected the game ball, it is determined whether the detection of the game ball (passing through a specific area) is within the passable period. It is possible to process the detection of a game ball outside the possible period (passing through a specific area) as an abnormality. The detection switch 650e5 may be configured to determine whether or not the game ball has been detected.

Further, based on the detection results of the passage detection switch 650as for detecting the entry of the ball into the inflow port 650a1 of the second variable winning device 650 and the V detection switch 650e5 which is a specific region, one small hit game is performed. Even though the passage detection switch 650as does not detect the game ball, the case where the V detection switch 650e5 detects the game ball may be determined as an abnormality.

By doing so, for example, it is possible to monitor an illegal game in which a game ball is retained in the V passage flow path 650e3 and the game ball retained within the passable period is passed to a specific area.

In addition, a means for determining whether or not the small hit game this time is a small hit that can pass through V is provided, and the determination result is used to determine V in spite of the case of a small hit that cannot pass through V (difficult). When the detection switch 650e5 detects a game ball, it may be determined as an abnormality.

It should be noted that the plurality of abnormality monitoring processes described above are configured so that the game ball that first wins the second variable winning device 650 after the small hit game is executed as in the present embodiment can win the V passing flow path 650e3. By using it, it becomes possible to monitor fraudulent games more reliably.

That is, when an attempt is made to illegally pass a game ball through the V detection switch 650e5, which is a specific area, the V detection switch is used even though the second variable winning device 650 does not win any ball during the small hit game. When the 650e5 detects a game ball, it can be determined to be abnormal, and when even one ball is won by the second variable winning device 650 during the small hit game, the V detection switch 650e5 detects two game balls. It is possible to determine that it is abnormal.

Further, in the case of the small hit game in which the small hit game cannot pass through V, the game ball won by the second variable winning device 650 does not pass through the V detection switch 650e5, so that the V detection switch 650e5 is used. Since only one game ball passes through, but the V detection switch 650e5 detects the game ball during the small hit game in which V cannot pass, it can be determined to be abnormal.

If the discrimination result of each abnormality discrimination process described above is determined to be abnormal, an error command may be set and configured so that it can be output to the outside. In this case, the error command may be configured to include identification information that can identify the cause of the abnormality and priority information that indicates the priority of the abnormality that has occurred.

Here, the priority information is information for simply determining whether or not the generated abnormality is an abnormality caused by an illegal game, and for example, the number of balls won in the second variable winning device 650 ( An abnormality determined to have more balls (V detection switch 650e5) that have passed through a specific area than the passage detection switch 650as) has a high possibility of fraudulent game, so priority information with high priority is set and is small. An abnormality in which it is determined that the ball has passed the specific area outside the passable period during the hit game may be caused by the ball play, so priority information with a low priority is set.

As described above, although any abnormality cannot occur in a proper game, by setting a priority among them, when a plurality of abnormalities occur simultaneously in one pachinko machine 10, the abnormality has a high priority. It is possible to give priority to the notification, and there is an effect that the processing after the occurrence of an abnormality can be smoothly performed.

It should be noted that each abnormality determination process for the passage of the game ball to the specific area may be combined in all or a part thereof may be combined as appropriate.

As a result of each abnormality discrimination process described above, the error command set when the error is determined is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 as the main process described later (FIG. FIG. In the external output process (S1001) of 33), the command is transmitted to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 via the voice lamp control device 113 and the external output terminal plate (not shown). When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, the error content is extracted from the error command, and the notification based on the extracted content is notified by the third symbol display device 81, the voice output device 226, and the lamp display device 227. And execute using.

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S801) as a setting of the power interruption occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111, and the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 32, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S902). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process shifts to S912. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the processing is also shifted to S912 in this case as well.

If the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM. If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and even in such a case, the process is transferred to S912. As will be described later in the process of S1015 in the main process (see FIG. 33), the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S912, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S912). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (working area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized at the time of turning on the power, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erasing switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S913, S914) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S913, S914) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when an abnormality in the backup is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.). .. In the RAM initialization process (S913, S914), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S913), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S914). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S910.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the power off occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S907: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state at the time of power cutoff is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S910. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S910, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S911), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1008 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 milliseconds, and the counter update process of S1011 and S1012 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main processing, first, during the execution of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is input to each control device (periphery) on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 24) is determined, and if the winning detection information is present, the number of acquired balls corresponds to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command. Further, the normal symbol reserved ball number command and the general figure winning information command set in the through gate passing process (see FIG. 29) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command or the like set in the big hit control process (see FIG. 34) and the small hit opening command or the like set in the small hit control process (see FIG. 36) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the error command set in the V-passing process (see FIG. 30) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

The external output processing in the pachinko machine 10 is configured so that various commands can be output to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 by an external terminal board (not shown). For example, various error commands can be output to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. There is.

Next, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is reset to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or the first 1 The jackpot control process for opening or closing the first specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is executed (S1004). The details of the jackpot control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 34. In this embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

When the processing of S1004 is completed, the small hit control processing is executed (S1005). The details of the small hit control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 36. In this embodiment, the small hit control process (S1005) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, an electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 64b attached to the first ball entry port 64a is executed (S1006). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 64b is set by the process of S524 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 28), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64b is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory 64b is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S516 or the processing of S518 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S507). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 26), the variation display according to the variation pattern is started in the first symbol display device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first symbol display device 37, from the start of the fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. At the same time, turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, turn on the red LED.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 26) ends, the variation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is executed. Is terminated, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the first symbol display device 37.

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1008). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S517 or the process of S519 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 28), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83. do. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, variable display is performed in which the symbol of "○" and the symbol of "x" as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S522 of the normal symbol change process (see FIG. 28), the second symbol display device 83 is executed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S513 or the process of S514 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 28) after ending the variable display (see FIG. 28). Lit display).

After that, it is determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009), and if the power outage occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 milliseconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1010). ), If the predetermined time has already passed (S1010: Yes), the process is transferred to S1001, and each process after S1001 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if a predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1010: No), in the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, in the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is reached. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1011, S1012).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1011). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399, 239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1012).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1008 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be updated at random.

Further, in the processing of S1009, if the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: Yes), the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 31 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S1013 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1013), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). (S1014). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1015), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1016), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S1009 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1001 to S1008, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1011 and S1012 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power cutoff occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cutoff state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved, in the initial setting process (S901 in FIG. 32), By setting the stack pointer to a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S1001. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 33), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and the first variable prize is won. This is a process for opening or closing the first specific winning opening 65a of the device 65.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot scenario is set (S1101). Specifically, the processing of S209 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 25) or the processing of S1406 of the small hit ending control processing (see FIG. 37) described later is executed, and it is determined whether or not the big hit scenario is set. do. That is, the result of the lottery of the special symbol becomes a big hit, and the big hit scenario is set based on the lottery result, or the big hit scenario is based on passing through a specific area (V detection switch 650e5) during the small hit game. Determine if it has been set. If it is determined in the process of S1101 that the jackpot scenario is not set (S1101: No), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the processing of S1101 that the jackpot scenario is set (S1101: Yes), 1 is added to the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g (S1102), and the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g is changed. It is determined whether it is the timing of the opening start of the jackpot scenario (S1103). For example, when the jackpot scenario a is set (not shown), the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g corresponding to the opening start (opening start) is 1, so the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g is 1. To determine.

In the processing of S1103, if it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g is a value corresponding to the opening start (in the case of jackpot scenario a, the counter value is 1) (S1103: Yes), the jackpot opening command Is set (S1104), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g does not correspond to the opening start (S1103: No), then the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g corresponds to the round start (in the jackpot scenario a). If so, it is determined whether the counter value is 1251) (S1105).

If it is determined in the processing of S1105 that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g corresponds to the start of the round (S1105: Yes), the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a is opened in the processing of S1106. (Set the specific door solenoid 65f2 on so that the specific door 65f of the first specific winning opening 65a is open), and then set the round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds (set the specific door solenoid 65f2 to be on). S1107), this process is terminated.

The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice lamp is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted toward the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1105, if it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g does not correspond to the value corresponding to the start of the round (S1105: No), then the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a is closed. It is determined whether the condition is satisfied (S1108). Here, as the closing condition of the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a in the present embodiment, 30 seconds have passed since the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a was opened, or specified. When a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are won after the winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a is opened, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

In the process of S1108, if it is determined that the closing condition of the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a is satisfied (S1108: Yes), the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g is set to the currently executed round. It is updated to the value obtained by subtracting 1 from the counter value corresponding to the end of the round (S1109), and the present processing is terminated. If it is determined in the process of S1108 that the closing condition is satisfied, the closing condition is cleared, and it is not determined that the closing condition is satisfied again in the next and subsequent jackpot control processes. ..

Here, the jackpot scenario is configured to update (add) the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g and execute an operation corresponding to the updated (added) counter value. Therefore, when the closing condition is satisfied by winning a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls in the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a, that is, a factor that does not accompany the passage of time (update of the counter value). When the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a is closed, the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g is configured to be updated to the value immediately before the counter value at which the corresponding operation control is executed. (It is configured so that the operation control is executed in the next jackpot control process).

By doing so, the operation control executed by a factor that does not accompany the passage of time (update of the counter value) (for example, the operation control that closes the specific winning opening when a predetermined number of balls win a prize) becomes a big hit scenario. It is possible to execute based on. Therefore, as a closing condition of the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a, the operation is controlled based on the jackpot scenario when the predetermined time elapses, and when the predetermined number of winnings are received, the operation is not based on the jackpot scenario. It is not necessary to perform complicated control such as executing motion control, which has the effect of facilitating the design and preventing the situation where both motion controls are mixed.

Returning to FIG. 34, the explanation will be continued. If it is determined in the processing of S1108 that the closing condition of the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65 is not satisfied (S1108: No), then the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g corresponds to the end of the round. It is determined whether or not the value to be used (counter value is 8750 in the case of jackpot scenario a) (S1110).

If it is determined in the processing of S1110 that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g corresponds to the end of the round (S1110: Yes), the specific winning opening (first specific winning opening) 65a is closed in the processing of S1111. (The specific door solenoid 65f2 is set to be off so that the specific door 65f of the first specific winning opening 65a is closed), and this process is terminated. The discrimination process from S1105 to S1110 described above is repeatedly executed for the number of rounds of the jackpot set in the jackpot scenario.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1110, when it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g does not correspond to the value corresponding to the end of the round (S1110: No), then the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g corresponds to the interval start (corresponds to). In the case of the value jackpot scenario a, it is determined whether the counter value is 8751) (S1112). In the process of S1112, if it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203 g is a value corresponding to the start of the interval (S1112: Yes), an interval command is set (S1113), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1112, when it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g does not correspond to the value corresponding to the start of the interval (S1112: No), the jackpot ending control process (S1114) is executed next. This jackpot ending control process is a process executed during the ending period in the jackpot game, that is, a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) from the end of the final round of the jackpot game to the start of the change of the special symbol. ..

Next, the jackpot ending control process (S1114) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 35. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this jackpot ending control process (S1114). This jackpot ending control process (S1114) is a process executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 34).

In the jackpot ending control process, first, it is determined whether the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g is a value corresponding to the ending start (counter value is 40751 in the case of jackpot scenario a) (S1201). In the process of S1201, if it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g is a value corresponding to the ending start (S1201: Yes), the jackpot ending command is set (S1202), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g does not correspond to the ending start (S1201: No), then the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g corresponds to the ending end (in the jackpot scenario a). If so, it is determined whether the counter value is 42000) (S1203). If it is determined in the process of S1203 that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203 g does not correspond to the end of the ending (S1203: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1203, if it is determined that the counter value of the jackpot scenario counter 203g is a value corresponding to the end of the ending (S1203: Yes), the jackpot scenario setting is cleared (S1204), and then the jackpot scenario counter is set. The scenario counter 203g is reset to 0 (S1205). That is, the operation control of the jackpot game based on the jackpot scenario is terminated. Then, this process is terminated.

Next, the small hit control process (S1005) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this small hit control process (S1005). This small hit control process (S1005) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 33), and the setting of a command for causing the voice lamp control device 113 to execute various effects according to the small hit, and the second specification. It is a process of controlling the operation of the opening / closing piece solenoid 650f2 for opening / closing the opening / closing piece 650b attached to the winning opening 650a, and the switching valve solenoid 650c2 for rotating the switching valve 650b3 for switching the flow path.

In the small hit control process, first, it is determined whether or not the small hit scenario is set (S1301). Specifically, the processes of S402 and S403 of the small hit start setting process (see FIG. 27) are executed, and it is determined whether the small hit scenario is set. If the small hit scenario is not set in the process of S1301 (S1301: No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if the small hit scenario is set in the processing of S1301 (S1301: Yes), 1 is added to the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h (S1302), and the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h is a small hit. It is determined whether it is the timing of the opening start of the scenario (S1303). For example, when the small hit scenario a202g1 is set (see FIG. 16B), the value of the counter 203h is 1 because the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h corresponding to the opening start (opening start) is 1. To determine if it is.

In the processing of S1303, if the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h is a value corresponding to the opening start (in the case of the small hit scenario a202g1, the counter value is 1) (S1303: Yes), the processing of S1304 is small. The hit opening command is set (S1304), and the process proceeds to S1305. Here, in the opening of the small hit, a display mode indicating the start of the small hit game is set on the third symbol display device 81 1 second before the opening timing of the opening / closing piece 650b regardless of the small hit type. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from discriminating the small hit type due to the difference in the length of the display mode of the opening. Further, at the time of a small hit, the effect of the fusion pattern (battle between the hero and the monster) may be continuously displayed without displaying the opening effect. With this configuration, the player recognizes the start of the small hit game as the opening timing of the opening / closing piece 650b, so that the small hit type can be difficult to identify.

On the other hand, if the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h does not correspond to the opening start (S1303: No), the process proceeds to S1305. In the process of S1305, it is determined whether the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h is the timing of turning on the switching valve solenoid 650c2 of the small hit scenario (opening the V passage flow path 650e3) (S1305). For example, when the small hit scenario a202g1 is set (see FIG. 16B), the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h corresponding to the switching valve solenoid on (V passage flow path 650e3 open) is 375. It is determined whether the value of the small hit scenario counter 203h is 375.

In the processing of S1305, when the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h is a value for turning on the switching valve solenoid 650c2 (in the case of the small hit scenario a202g1, the counter value is 375) (S1305: Yes), the processing of S1306. (The switching valve solenoid 650c2 is set to be turned on so that the switching valve 650b3 rotates downward in order to open the V passage flow path 650e3). Then, the process proceeds to S1307.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1305, if the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h is not the value corresponding to the switching valve solenoid on (the counter value is 375 in the case of the small hit scenario a202g1) (S1305: No), the processing of S1307. Move to.

In the process of S1307, it is determined whether the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h is the timing of the switching valve solenoid off (V passage flow path 650e3 closed) of the small hit scenario (S1307). For example, when the small hit scenario a202g1 is set (see FIG. 16B), the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h corresponding to the switching valve solenoid off (V passage flow path 650e3 closed) is 1000. It is determined whether the value of the small hit scenario counter 203h is 1000.

In the processing of S1307, if the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h is a value corresponding to the switching valve solenoid off (the counter value is 1000 if the small hit scenario a202g1 is used) (S1307: Yes), the processing of S1308 is performed. , The switching valve solenoid 650c2 is set to off (to close the V passage flow path 650e3, the switching valve solenoid 650c2 is set to off so that the switching valve 650b3 rotates upward). Then, the process proceeds to S1309.

In the process of S1309, it is determined whether the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h is the timing of the start of the round of the small hit scenario (S1309). For example, when the small hit scenario a202g1 is set (see FIG. 16B), the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h corresponding to the round start (round start) is 376, so that the small hit scenario counter 203h Determine if the value is 376.

In the processing of S1309, if the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h is a value corresponding to the start of the round (the counter value is 376 in the case of the small hit scenario a202g1) (S1309: Yes), the processing of S1310 is small. Set the second specified winning opening 650a to be opened and closed based on the winning scenario (set the opening / closing piece solenoid 650f2 to be on so that the opening / closing piece 650b of the second specific winning opening 650a is in the open state), and proceed to the processing of S1311. Transition.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1309, if the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h is not a value corresponding to the start of the round (S1309: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S1311.

In the process of S1311, it is determined whether the round end condition is satisfied (S1311). Here, in the present embodiment, it is determined that the round end condition is satisfied when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are won in total while the second specific winning opening 650a is open.

If it is determined in the process of S1311 that the round end condition of the second specific winning opening 650a is satisfied (S1311: Yes), the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h is set to 1 from the counter value corresponding to the round end. The value is updated to the subtracted value (S1312), and the process proceeds to S1313. If it is determined in the process of S1311 that the round end condition is satisfied, the round end condition is cleared, and it is configured so that it is not determined that the round end condition is satisfied again in the control from the next time onward. There is.

Here, the small hit scenario is configured to update (add) the counter value of the small hit counter 203h and execute an operation corresponding to the updated (added) counter value, as in the above-mentioned big hit scenario. There is. Therefore, when the round end condition is satisfied by winning a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls in the second specific winning opening 650a, that is, the round ends due to a factor that does not accompany the passage of time (counter value update). (The second specific winning opening 650a is closed), the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h is configured to be updated to the value immediately before the counter value at which the corresponding operation control is executed (the second specific winning opening 650a is closed). It is configured so that the operation control is executed in the next small hit control process).

By doing so, the motion control executed by a factor that does not accompany the passage of time (update of the counter value) (for example, the motion control that ends the round by winning a predetermined number of balls) is based on the small hit scenario. Can be executed. Therefore, as a round end condition of the second specific winning opening 650a, the operation control is performed based on the small hit scenario when the predetermined time elapses, and the operation control is performed without based on the small hit scenario when the predetermined number of prizes are won. It is not necessary to perform complicated control such as executing the above, and there is an effect that the design can be facilitated and the situation where both operation controls are mixed can be prevented.

If it is determined in the process of S1311 that the round end condition of the second specific winning opening 650a is not satisfied (S1311: No), the process proceeds to the process of S1313. In the process of S1313, it is determined whether the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h is a value corresponding to the end of the round (the counter value is 750 if the small hit scenario a202g1) (S1313). If it is determined in the processing of S1313 that the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h corresponds to the end of the round (S1313: Yes), the second specific winning opening 650a is set to be closed in the processing of S1313. (The opening / closing piece solenoid 650f2 is set to off so that the opening / closing piece 650b of the second specified winning opening 650a is closed), and the process proceeds to S1315.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1313 that the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h does not correspond to the value corresponding to the end of the round (S1313: No), the process proceeds to the process of S1315.

In the process of S1315, the small hit ending control process (S1315) is executed. This small hit ending control process is a process executed during the ending period in the small hit game, that is, a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) from the end of the round of the small hit game to the start of the change of the special symbol. Is.

Next, the small hit ending control process (S1314) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing this small hit ending control process (S1314). This small hit ending control process (S1314) is a process executed in the small hit control process (see FIG. 36).

In the small hit ending control process, first, it is determined whether the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h is a value corresponding to the ending start (the counter value is 751 in the case of the small hit scenario a202g1) (S1401). If it is determined in the process of S1401 that the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h is a value corresponding to the ending start (S1401: Yes), the small hit ending command is set (S1402), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h does not correspond to the ending start (S1401: No), then the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h corresponds to the ending end (small hit). In the case of the scenario a202g1, it is determined whether the counter value is 1500) (S1403). If it is determined in the process of S1403 that the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h does not correspond to the end of the ending (S1403: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the counter value of the small hit scenario counter 203h corresponds to the end of the ending (S1403: Yes), the setting of the small hit scenario is cleared and the small hit scenario counter 203h is reset to 0 (S1403: Yes). S1404). Then, the process proceeds to S1405.

In S1405, it is determined whether the V flag 203f is set to ON (S1405). If it is determined in the process of S1405 that the V flag 203f is not set to ON (S1405: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the V flag 203f is set to ON (S1405: Yes), then the jackpot scenario corresponding to the jackpot type indicated by the value of the V flag 203f set in S705 of FIG. 30 is performed. Set (S1406). Then, the V flag 203f is set to off (S1407), and this processing is terminated.

Since all the small hit games are set as one round game in this embodiment, unlike the big hit scenario in which the operation control of the big hit game is executed, the process of setting the command related to the number of rounds and the interval period (round). Although it does not have a scenario corresponding to the interval period), when a small hit game having a plurality of rounds is provided, a scenario similar to the big hit scenario used in the above-mentioned big hit game may be set.

Further, in the present embodiment, the small hit scenario is set for the period during which the small hit game is executed. For example, after the small hit game is completed, until a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses. You may set a small hit scenario for the interval. With this configuration, for example, it is possible to set the V-passing valid period until 1 second has elapsed after the end of the small hit game. Therefore, it is possible to set a period set across different gaming states by one scenario, and there is an effect that the capacity of control processing can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, when the game ball is detected by the V detection switch 650e5 in the small hit game, the big hit is based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired by the fluctuation of the small hit. It is configured to determine the type, but is not limited to this, and is configured to acquire the value of the first hit type counter C2 based on the detection of the game ball by the V detection switch 650e5 and determine the jackpot type. You may.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 38 to 45, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (S1501). Specifically, a predetermined predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power cutoff processing flag is turned on, the power cutoff process of the main process (FIG. 39) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "momentary power failure") in this start-up process. It is determined whether or not the voltage was started during the execution of (see S1618) (S1502). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 39, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see S1615 in FIG. 39), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S1618. The power cutoff processing flag is turned on before the power cutoff process is executed, and the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off after the power cutoff process is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power cutoff process of S1618 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power cutoff process in progress flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S1502: No), the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S1618 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU221 of the audio lamp control device 113 (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1503).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, the data as the keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1506. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data destruction of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1503: Yes), the process proceeds to S1504 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1503: No), the process proceeds to S1508.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1503: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1504. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power cutoff process of S1618 was completed after the momentary power failure occurred, or it was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1503: No), and the data is transferred to the S1508.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S1502: Yes), the start-up processing this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and the voice lamp control device 113 is being executed during the power-off processing of S1618. MPU221 was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power cutoff process is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S1504 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1504, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1504). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, it is read for each byte, it is confirmed whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

If the read / write check is determined to be normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1505: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1506). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1505: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1507), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S1508, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S1508). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1618 is executed (see S1617 in FIG. 39). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1618 is executed, the process of S1508 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power cutoff process of S1618 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1508: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1509), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1510), and then an interrupt is performed. Set the permission (S2211) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1508 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the start-up process is started after the power supply is completely cut off, for example, so that the process from S1504 to S1506 is performed to S1508. This is the case when the process is reached or the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset (without receiving the power cutoff command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S1508: No), S1509, which is the clearing process of the work area of RAM223, is skipped, the process is shifted to S1510, the initial value of RAM223 is set (S1510), and then interrupt permission is set. (S1511). Then, it shifts to the main process.

It should be noted that the reason for skipping the clearing process of S1509 is that when the processing of S1508 is reached via the processing of S1504 to S1506, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1504. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the previous process of S1601 was executed (S1601), 1 millisecond. If the above time has not passed (S1601: No), the process proceeds to the process of S1611 without performing the processes of S1602 to S1610. In the processing of S1601, whether or not 1 millisecond has elapsed is mainly related to display (directing) in S1602 to S1610, and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond). On the other hand, it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S1612, the variation display setting process of S1613, and the pseudo variation setting process of S1614 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1612 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent reception omission of the command transmitted from the main controller 110, and by executing the processing of S2313 and S1614 in a short cycle, it is received by the command determination processing. Based on the command, the settings related to the variable effect can be made without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S1601 (S1601: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1603 to S1614 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1601: Yes). S1602). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S1608 described later (S1603), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1604). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not at the time of turning on the power, the process shifts to the process of S1605 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S1605, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold ball number display update process is executed (S1606). In the customer waiting effect processing, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds), the display of the third symbol display device 81 is switched to the title screen, and the like is set. The setting is transmitted to the display control device 114 as a command. In the hold ball number display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (Ds3) is performed according to the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 223d.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S1607). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player is pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process to set to perform the production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is set.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S1608), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S1609). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 34 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1609, the liquid crystal display execution management process is executed (S1610). In the liquid crystal display execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1608 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal display effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S1609 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

When the processing of S1610 is completed, the effect counter 223g is updated (S1611), and the process proceeds to the processing of S1612.

In the process of S1612, a command determination process for performing a process according to a command received from the main control unit 110 is performed (S1612). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. 40.

Then, after the command determination process, the variable display setting process is executed (S1613). In the variation display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 42.

After the processing of S1613, the pseudo-variation setting processing is executed (S1614). Pseudo-variation is the change start timing of the special symbol and the change of the normal symbol when the change of the normal symbol is newly started during the change of the special symbol and the change of the normal symbol is in progress when the change of the special symbol is stopped. It is a variable effect performed to match the start timing. The pseudo-variation setting process will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 45, but it is determined whether or not the pseudo-variation is executed by the fusion symbol even after the fluctuation of the fusion symbol corresponding to the variation of the special symbol is stopped. Is executed. The process is executed.

When the processing of S1614 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1615). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1615 (S1615: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process in progress flag are turned on (S1617), and the power-off process is executed (S1618). After the power cutoff process is executed, the power cutoff process in progress flag is turned off (S1619), and then the process is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the information on the occurrence of the power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power cutoff occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1615 (S1615: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1616), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1616: No), the process returns to the process of S1601 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1616: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may be used to notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S1612) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1612). This command determination process (S1612) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main control device 110. ..

In the command determination process (S1612), first, the first command received from the main control unit 110 among the unprocessed commands is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the fluctuation pattern is generated from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not a command has been received (S1701). When the variation pattern command is received (S1701: Yes), the variation start flag 223e is turned on (S1702), the variation pattern type is extracted from the variation pattern command (S1703), and the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 42) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

If the variation pattern command has not been received (S1701: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1704). Then, when the stop type command is received (S1704: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223f of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1705), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S1706), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and is referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 42) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S1704: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop command corresponding to the special symbol has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1707). Then, when the stop command is received (S1707: Yes), the pseudo-variation start setting process is executed (S1708), and this process is terminated. The details of this pseudo-variation start setting process (S1708) will be described with reference to FIG. 41. However, if the pseudo-variation is set according to the stop timing of the special symbol, the pseudo-variation is fused. The process to be executed is executed according to the symbol.

Here, the pseudo-variation start setting process (S1708) will be described with reference to FIG. 41. In the pseudo-variation start setting process (S1708), first, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-setting flag 223h is set to ON (S2101). When it is determined that the pseudo setting flag 223h is set to ON (S2101: Yes), the pseudo variation setting is set in the pseudo variation setting area 223i, so that the process of setting the start of the pseudo variation is as a process. The processing of S2103 to S2107 is executed. In the process of S2103, the value of the effect counter 223 g is acquired (S2103), and the effect type (continuous effect or off effect, variation period) set in the pseudo-variation setting area 223i and the acquired value of the effect counter 223 g are used. Pseudo-variation pattern is selected from the pseudo-variation pattern selection table 222d (see FIG. 18B) according to the effect type (S2104). A display pseudo start command indicating the selected pseudo fluctuation pattern is set (S2105). This display pseudo-variation start command is a command for notifying the display control device 114 of the content of the selected pseudo-variation pattern. After that, the pseudo-variation flag 223c is set to on (S2106), and the pseudo-setting flag 223h is set to off (S2107). After that, this process ends. If the pseudo-variation pattern is continuous, the pseudo-variation pattern is set to continue for a maximum of 30 seconds, and the out-of-order pseudo-variation pattern is blacked out when the pseudo-variation period set in the pseudo-variation setting area 223i elapses. It is processed and set for directing.

On the other hand, in the process of S2101, when it is determined that the pseudo setting flag 223h is off (S2101: No), a display stop command is set (S2102), and this process is terminated. The display stop command set here is a command indicating the stop of the special symbol. Based on this command, the fusion symbol and the special symbol auxiliary symbol are stopped and displayed (fixed stop display) in synchronization.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the execution of the pseudo-variation is set at the stop timing of the special symbol (the timing at which the stop command is received), the start of the pseudo-variation is set. Therefore, the pseudo-variation can be smoothly continuously executed, and the natural fusion effect variation can be provided to the player.

Here, the explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 40. In the process of S1707, if the stop command has not been received (S1707: No), then it is determined whether or not the normal figure reserved ball count command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S1709). In the process of S1709, when the normal figure holding ball number command is received (S1709: Yes), the received normal symbol holding ball number command is sent to the normal symbol holding ball number counter corresponding to the received normal figure holding ball number command. The value included in is stored in, and the reserved ball number counter 223j is incremented by 1 and updated (S1710). Specifically, the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110 (the number of holdings of the variation display in the normal symbol M) is extracted from the received normal symbol holding ball number command, and this is used as the voice lamp control device. It is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d of 113. After that, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 223d and the hold number counter 223j is set (S1711), and this process is terminated. do.

Here, in the present embodiment, the display control device 114 sets the display of the reserved symbol based on the value of the reserved number counter 223j. In the configuration of the present embodiment, as described above, when a specific condition is satisfied, pseudo-variation is executed in the fusion symbol over the variation of a plurality of ordinary symbols. In the meantime, in order to make it look as if it is one fluctuation, the display of the reserved symbol of the normal symbol is not subtracted (the effect that the "black circle symbol" is reduced (digested) is executed), and it is the actual number of reserved symbols of the normal symbol. There will be a difference in the number of pending symbols displayed. However, as will be described later, if there is a difference between the actual number of reserved symbols and the number of displayed pending symbols, a special variation is set at the start of the variation of the fusion symbol corresponding to the variation of the ordinary symbol. A short variation that pseudo-stops in seconds is executed, the value of the hold number counter 223j is subtracted at that timing, and the hold symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is also updated based on it. As a result, the difference can be corrected to a normal state, and a defect that gives the player a sense of discomfort can be suppressed. In the present embodiment, the configuration is set to pseudo-stop during the actual fluctuation of the normal symbol, but if the hold corresponding to the next fluctuation in which the difference occurs is not stored, the fusion symbol is pseudo 2 It may be configured to perform an effect of digesting the hold in which the difference has occurred by varying 1 per second.

Here, since the normal symbol reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball passes through the normal symbol start port (through gate) 67 or when the normal symbol lottery is performed, it is through. Every time the passage through the gate is detected, or every time the lottery of the normal symbol is performed, the value of the normal symbol hold ball counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 is set to the value of the normal symbol hold ball counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 by the processing of S1710. It can be adjusted to the value of the number counter 203c. Therefore, for example, even if the value of the normal symbol hold ball counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the normal symbol hold ball counter 203c of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the through gate passage is detected. At the time or at the time of lottery of the normal symbol, the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 can be modified to match the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203c of the main control device 110. Further, for example, when the process of S1711 is executed, a display hold ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 223d and the hold number counter 223j is issued. Set. As a result, in the display control device 114, the hold ball number symbol corresponding to the value of the hold number counter 223j is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the process of S1709, when the normal figure reserved ball number command is not received (S1709: No), then it is determined whether or not the normal figure fluctuation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 (S1712). Then, when the normal map fluctuation pattern command is received (S1712: Yes), the normal map fluctuation start flag 223b is set to ON (S1713), and the normal map fluctuation pattern is extracted from the received normal map fluctuation pattern command (S1713). S1714). After that, this process ends.

In the process of S1712, when the normal figure fluctuation pattern command is not received (S1712: No), then it is determined whether or not the normal figure winning information command is received from the main control device 110 (S1715). Then, when the Fuzu winning information command is received (S1715: Yes), the winning information based on the received Fuzu winning information command is stored in the Fuzu winning information storage area 223a (S1716), and this process is terminated. .. Here, the winning information includes information based on each value of the second random number counter C4 and the general map variation type counter CS2.

In the process of S1715, when the normal figure winning information command is not received (S1715: No), it is determined whether or not the normal figure stop command is received (S1717). When it is determined that the normal map stop command has been received (S1717: Yes), the normal map stop command for display is set (S1718). This display normal map stop command is a command for notifying the display control device 114 that it is the normal map stop timing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal figure stop command has not been received (S1717: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process corresponding to the received command is executed (S1717). ), End this process. The processing of S1719 is, for example, if the other command is a command used in the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and the command is used in the display control device 114. The command is set so that the command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the variation display setting process (S1613) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this variable display setting process (S1613). This variation display setting process (S1613) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and the variation effect is executed in the third symbol display device 81. Various display variation pattern commands are generated and set based on the various variation pattern commands received from the main controller 110. Further, when the pseudo setting flag 223h is set to ON, the pseudo fluctuation start setting process (see S1708 in FIG. 41) is executed.

In the variation display setting process (S1613), first, it is determined whether the variation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1801). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223e is not on (that is, it is off) (S1801: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, so the process of S1804 is performed. Transition. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223e is on (S1801: Yes), the fluctuation pattern selection process is executed (S1802). The details of this fluctuation pattern selection process (S1802) will be described later with reference to FIG. 43.

When the processing of S1802 is completed, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the acquired variation pattern type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (. S1803). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

Next, in the process of S1804, it is determined whether or not the normal map fluctuation start flag 223b provided in the RAM 233 is set to ON (S1804). Then, when it is determined that the normal map fluctuation start flag 223b is not on (that is, off) (S1804: No), the normal map fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110. The process proceeds to S1807. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal map fluctuation start flag 223b is on (S1804: Yes), the normal map fluctuation pattern selection process is executed (S1805). The details of this normal map fluctuation pattern selection process (S1805) will be described later with reference to FIG. 43.

When the processing of S1805 is completed, a display normal map fluctuation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the acquired normal map fluctuation pattern type, and the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. (S1806). By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

Next, in the process of S1807, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223f provided in the RAM 233 is set to ON (S1807). When it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223f is not on (that is, it is off) (S1807: No), the stop type command has not been received from the main control unit 110, so that this variable display is displayed. The setting process is terminated, and the process of S1812 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223f is on (S1807: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223f is turned off (S1808), and then in the process of S1706 of the command determination process (see FIG. 40). The stop symbol in the middle symbol sequence of the fusion symbol in the variation effect extracted from the stop type command is extracted (S1809).

Next, based on the stop symbol in the middle symbol row of the fusion symbol instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110, the stop symbol in the middle symbol row of the fusion symbol of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 is set. (S1810), and set the display stop type command (S1811). After that, the process of S1812 is executed. The display stop type command is a command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop symbol of the middle symbol string of the fusion symbol.

In the process of S1812, it is determined that it is the pseudo stop timing of the pseudo-continuous map fluctuation (S1812). Pseudo-continuous symbol fluctuation is 2 seconds when the fluctuation of the fusion symbol corresponding to the normal symbol is set when the value of the normal symbol hold ball counter 223d and the hold count counter 223j is different. This is a special fluctuation pattern in which the normal symbol starts to fluctuate again after a pseudo stop at. In the process of S1802, it is determined whether or not it is the timing of this pseudo stop. When it is determined that it is the timing of the pseudo stop (S1812: Yes), the value of the hold number counter 223j is subtracted by 1 and updated (S1813), and the values of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 223d and the hold number counter 223j are used. A display-reserved ball count command based on is set (S1814). After that, this process ends. With this configuration, the hold number counter 223j is decremented by 1 at the timing of the pseudo stop, and one hold symbol is also consumed. Therefore, it is possible to correct the actual number of holds and the number of displayed holds. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1812 that it is not the pseudo stop timing of the pseudo-continuous map fluctuation (S1812: No), this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the variation pattern selection process (S1802) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this fluctuation pattern selection process (S1802). The variation pattern selection process (S1802) is a process executed in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.

When the variation pattern selection process is executed, first, the variation start flag 223e is set to off (S1901), and then in the process of S1703 of the command determination process (see FIG. 40), in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command. The variation pattern type is acquired from RAM 223 (S1902).

Then, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-variation flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S1903). When it is determined that the pseudo-variation flag 223c is set to on (S1903: Yes), the pseudo-variation flag 223c is set to off (S1904). Next, the end of the pseudo-variation is set, a display command indicating the end of the pseudo-variation is generated, the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (1905), and then the process proceeds to S1906. .. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the variation of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1903 that the pseudo-variation flag 223c is not on (that is, off) (S1903: No), the processes of S1904 and S1905 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S1906. In the process of S1906, the value of the effect counter 223 g is acquired (S1906). Next, the variation pattern is determined from the variation pattern selection table 222a or the small hit variation pattern selection table 222c corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol based on the acquired variation pattern and the value of the effect counter 223g (S1907).

When the processing of S1907 is completed, it is determined whether or not the result of determining whether the special symbol of the fluctuation is correct or not is incorrect (S1908). If the result of determining whether the special symbol of the change is correct or not is not out of place (that is, it is a hit) (S1908: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the result of the hit / fail determination of the special symbol of the change is wrong (S1908: Yes), it is determined whether or not there is a hit within the 2 hold of the next normal symbol (S1909). If there is no hit within 2 hold of the next normal symbol (S1909: No), this process ends. If there is a hit within 2 hold of the next normal symbol (S1909: Yes), the pseudo setting flag 223h is set to ON (S1910: Yes), and the continuous pseudo fluctuation is set in the pseudo fluctuation setting area 223i in a maximum of 30 seconds (S1909: Yes). After S1911), this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the normal map fluctuation pattern selection process (S1805) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this normal map fluctuation pattern selection process (S1805). This normal map variation pattern selection process (S1805) is a process executed in the variation display setting process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.

When the normal map fluctuation pattern selection process is executed, first, the normal map fluctuation start flag 223b is turned off (S2001), and then, in the process of S1714 of the command determination process (see FIG. 40), it is extracted from the normal map fluctuation pattern command. The normal map variation pattern type in the variation effect is acquired from RAM 223 (S2002). When the processing of S2002 is completed, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d is decremented by 1 and updated (S2003). After that, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is changing (S2004). If the special symbol is not changing (S2004: No), then it is determined whether the pseudo-variation flag 223c is set to ON (that is, whether the fusion symbol is executing the pseudo-variation) (S2006). If it is determined that the pseudo-variation flag 223c is not set to on (that is, the fusion symbol is not pseudo-variable) (S2006: No), then whether the pseudo-setting flag 223h is set to on (that is,). , Whether the execution start of the pseudo-variation is confirmed) (S2007).

When it is determined that the pseudo setting flag 223h is off (S2007: No), the value of the hold number counter 223j is decremented by 1 and updated (S2008). Here, at the timing when the normal symbol variation pattern selection process (S1805), which is a process for starting a new variation of the normal symbol, is being executed, the fusion symbol is not pseudo-variated, and the start of the pseudo-variation is also determined. If not, the fusion symbol will also be displayed in a variable manner at the timing when the fluctuation of the normal symbol starts, so the value of the hold number counter 223j is subtracted and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The number of symbols is also digested (erasing one) and updated.

It is determined whether the value of the hold number counter 223j and the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 223d are equal (S2009). When it is determined that the value of the reserved ball number counter 223d and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d are different values (S2009: No), the pseudo-continuous normal figure corresponding to the type of the extracted normal figure fluctuation pattern is obtained. A fluctuation pattern is set (S2011). After that, the process of S2012 is executed. This pseudo-continuous map fluctuation pattern is provided corresponding to each fluctuation pattern shown in FIGS. 17 (a) to 17 (b), and is temporarily stopped 2 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, and then the fluctuation is restarted. , The variation effect of the fusion symbol similar to the variation pattern of the corresponding normal symbol is executed. In the present embodiment, during the time-saving game, a display is executed in which the game is temporarily stopped in 2 seconds, then re-varies for 1 second, and then stops again.

On the other hand, in the process of S2009, when it is determined that the value of the reserved ball number counter 223d and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d are the same value (S2009: Yes), the value of the effect counter 223g is acquired. , The type of the normal map variation pattern (variation effect of the fusion symbol) is selected from the normal map variation pattern selection table 222b based on the normal map variation pattern type and the value of the effect counter 223 g (S2010). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2004, when the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S2004: Yes), and in the process of S2006, when it is determined that the pseudo-variation flag 223c is set to ON. (S2006: Yes), and when it is determined that the pseudo setting flag 223h is set to ON in the processing of S2007 (S2007: Yes), the variation period based on the acquired normal map variation pattern type is the first. 3 The variable display of the normal symbol auxiliary symbol displayed in the normal symbol display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 81 is set (S2005), and then this process is terminated. In this way, when the pseudo fluctuation is executed in the fusion symbol, the fluctuation of the fusion symbol is not started in response to the start of the fluctuation of the new normal symbol, and the fluctuation is started only in the normal symbol auxiliary symbol. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the pseudo-variation of the fusion pattern becomes complicated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the pseudo-variation setting process (S1614) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this pseudo-variation setting process (S1614). This pseudo-variation setting process (S1614) is a process executed in the main process (see FIG. 39) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113.

When the pseudo-variation setting process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-variation flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2201). When it is determined that the pseudo-variation flag 223c is set to ON (S2201: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the pseudo-variation being executed in the third symbol display device 81 has elapsed (S2202). .. The fluctuation time of the pseudo-variation executed in the third symbol display device 81 is set in S1911 in FIG. 43 or S2209 or S2212 in FIG. 45, and if this fluctuation time has not elapsed (S2202: No), the present invention. Finish the process and return to the main process.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2202, if the fluctuation time of the pseudo fluctuation being executed has elapsed (S2202: Yes), the pseudo fluctuation flag 223c is set to off (S2203), and the pseudo fluctuation is stopped by the stop type command. The stop is set by the set stop symbol (the symbol displayed in the middle symbol due to the pseudo fluctuation) (S2204). Next, a display command indicating the stop of the pseudo fluctuation is set (S2205), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S2201 that the pseudo fluctuation flag 223c is not set to on (that is, set to off) (S2201: No), 5 seconds before the fluctuation of the special symbol that is out of alignment is stopped. (S2206). If it is determined that it is not 5 seconds before the fluctuation of the special symbol that is out of alignment stops (S2206: No), this process is terminated.

When it is determined that it is 5 seconds before the fluctuation of the special symbol of the deviation is stopped (S2206: Yes), it is determined whether the pseudo setting flag 223h provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2207). If it is determined that the pseudo setting flag 223h is set to ON (S2207: Yes), this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the pseudo setting flag 223h is not set to on (that is, it is set to off) (S2207: No), it is determined whether or not there is a hit within 2 hold of the next normal symbol (S2207: No). S2208). If it is determined that there is a hit within 2 holds of the next normal symbol (S2208: Yes), the continuous pseudo-variation is set in a maximum of 30 seconds (S2209). Next, the pseudo setting flag 223h is set to ON (S2210), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no hit within the 2 hold of the next normal symbol (S2208: No), it is the period during which the change of the normal symbol that stops later is executed than the timing at which the change of the special symbol stops. (S2211). Here, the period during which the fluctuation of the normal symbol that stops after the timing at which the fluctuation of the special symbol stops is executed is from the fluctuation of the special symbol in which the fluctuation of the normal symbol that is currently changing is executing the fluctuation. It is a period during which it can be determined that the fluctuation of the normal symbol that will start to fluctuate during the fluctuation of the special symbol will continue to fluctuate even after the fluctuation of the special symbol that is currently fluctuating has stopped.

If it is determined in the process of S2211 that it is not the period during which the change of the normal symbol that stops after the timing at which the change of the special symbol stops is executed (S2211: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the change of the normal symbol that stops later is executed than the timing at which the change of the special symbol stops (S2211: Yes), the change of the normal symbol being executed and the deviation pseudo-variation The off-pseudo fluctuation is set by t1 (see FIG. 10A) from the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol being executed to the end of the fluctuation of the normal symbol so that the stop timings match (S2212). ). Next, the pseudo setting flag 223h is set to ON (S2213), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by displaying the variation between the normal symbol and the special symbol as a variation of 1 in the fused symbol, the complicated game playability is easily notified to the player, and the game can be easily played. Can be done. Further, since the flow speed of the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is reduced upstream of the first entry port 650a so as to correspond to the period in which the normal symbol hits by the crune member 660, the game ball is played by the launcher. Even during the period when the ball is not fired, the chance of winning a prize in the first ball entrance 65a is increased.

Further, when the deviation fluctuation of the special symbol is executed, the determination result within the 2 hold of the normal symbol is determined, and if the holding ball that is a hit is stored, the period longer than the end of the fluctuation. Since the determination result of the deviation is not notified and the pseudo variation is executed, the variation of the special symbol can be connected by the variation of the fusion symbol of one variation and produced by hitting the next normal symbol.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 46 to 62, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. Normally, the MPU 231 executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. When the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 46, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is set in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs initially processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from the read thereof. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231, and as a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d, so that the NOR type ROM has a high speed. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S2301), and the display control device 114 is capable of executing various controls to the third symbol display device 81. To start.

Here, the boot process (S2301) will be described with reference to FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S2301) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the third symbol display device 81 by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it can sufficiently store not only image data but also a control program and the like, while controlling. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S2401). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S2402). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2401.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to the predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2402, the MPU 231 executes various processing while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instructions, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instructions. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S2402, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts (S2403). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S2404), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S2301 in FIG. 46) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S2302 in FIG. 46) (S2405), the execution of the boot program is completed and the boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S2301) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, in the display control device 114. Since high processing performance can be maintained, diversified or complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 47, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S2401 includes all the remaining boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S2401 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S2402. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as an instruction pointer. It may execute the process set in 231a. Then, the processes of S2403 to S2405 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S2401 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfers a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S2401. And S2402 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processes of S2403 to S2405 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. 1 It may be stored in the program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, the process of S2403 to S2405 may be executed without performing the process of S2401 and S2402. This eliminates the need for the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary staging unit in the MPU 231, which is possible after the boot process, earlier.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 46. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S2302). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the register group in the MPU 231, the I / O device, and the like. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct to execute the display process. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S2303). This transfer instruction includes a start address and a final address of the character ROM 234 in which image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, transfer destination information (here, resident video RAM 235), and a transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads out the information of a part of this register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2303, then the power-on variable image A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the image data to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S2304). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. Is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S2304, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S2305). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 60A) described later. The resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S4502 in FIG. 60 (b)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, during that time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 48 (b)), a simple command determination process (FIG. 48 (b) S2608) and the simple display setting process (see S2609 in FIG. 48 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the character ROM 234 can be stored in the resident video RAM 235. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image when the power is turned on and the variable image when the power is turned on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image when the power is turned on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 114. be able to. On the other hand, since the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. By using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the efficiency of the operation check from deteriorating.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, the main image at power-on is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, so that the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, there was a ball entry (starting prize) into the first ball entry port 64a, and the start instruction of the variation effect was controlled by the voice lamp from the main control device 110. When the display variation pattern command is received via the device 113, that is, when the variation pattern command for display is received, the variation image at power-on can be immediately displayed during the variation effect period, and a simple variation effect can be performed. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image is continuously displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 is displayed. Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, so that it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery is possible. Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S2305, the interrupt permission is set (S2306), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S2306, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 48 (a). FIG. 48A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the command interrupt process is executed by the MPU 231.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S2501), and the process is terminated. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt process are read by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 48 (b). FIG. 48B is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 23) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing process or display process is completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 48 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2601), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S2601: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. A command determination process (S2602) is executed so that the display device 81 can display the image, and then a display setting process (S2603) is executed.

In the command determination process (S2602), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. If the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is set. Set the data table in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process (S2602), all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 49 to 57.

In the display setting process (S2603), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S2602) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S2604). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting process (S2603) or the simple display setting process (S2609). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S2605). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously connected. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S2606). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2605), which are determined in the task process (S2604), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 23 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 62.

Next, the update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S2607). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S2607, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command and the stop symbol counter are compared, and the third symbol display device is used. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2601 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S2601: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S2608) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S2609) is executed to shift to the process of S2604.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 49 to 57, the details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S2602), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 49, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S2701), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S2701: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S2701: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S2603) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S2702), and then the command. The type of the unprocessed command stored in the buffer area is analyzed (S2703).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S2704), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S2704: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S2705), the process returns to S2701.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S2705) will be described with reference to FIG. 50 (a). FIG. 50A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This variation pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set to the buffer 233d (S2801).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always performed in the main control device 110 at a distance of several seconds or more, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but a part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly for display. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S2801, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern having a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter variation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may give the player a sense of discomfort.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the variation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S2801 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S2802).

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2801, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the time counting counter 233h (S2803), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233f to 0 (S2804), set both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag to off (S2805)), and end this process.

By executing the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 50A), the display setting processing sets the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S2801 while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S2804. The drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the variable display data table, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and at the same time, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed is specified, and at the same time, S2802 The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e by the processing, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the display setting process, the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table is measured by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S2803, and when the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 49. In the processing of S2704, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S2704: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S2706). If there is a display variable type command (S2706: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S2707), and the process returns to S2701.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S2707) will be described with reference to FIG. 50 (b). FIG. 50B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command process executes the process corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display (corresponding to the stop type table is determined (S2901)), the stop type table and the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 48 (b)). ) Is compared with the value of the stop symbol counter that is updated each time, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set (S2902).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S2902 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is set. Set to on (S2903), end this stop type command processing, and return to the command determination processing.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S2902 is described. In the above-mentioned task processing (S2604), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S2902 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by S2903, and the specified stop is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S2901 in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type is completely out of order. Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete deviation is set by the process of S2902.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 will have a "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out of order". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" will be displayed, which may cause the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in reality, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 is completely disengaged. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 49, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2706, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S2706: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a hit-related command among the unprocessed commands (S2708), and the hit-related command is determined. If there is a command (S2708: Yes), the hit-related command process is executed (S2709), and the process returns to the process of S2701.

Here, the details of the hit-related command processing (S2709) will be described with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing hit-related command processing. This hit-related command processing includes hit-related commands received from the voice lamp control device 113 (display jackpot opening command, display round number command, display final round command, display jackpot interval command, display jackpot ending command, and display. It is a process for executing the process corresponding to the small hit opening command for small hit, the small hit ending command for display, and the V passage command for display).

In the hit-related command processing (S2709), first, it is determined whether or not there is a display jackpot opening command among the unprocessed new commands (S3001), and if there is a display jackpot opening command (S3001: Yes). , The jackpot opening command process is executed (S3002), and the process proceeds to the process of S3003.

Here, the details of the jackpot opening command processing (S3002) will be described with reference to FIG. 52 (a). FIG. 52A is a flowchart showing the jackpot opening command process (S3002). This jackpot opening command process (S3002) is for executing the process corresponding to the jackpot opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the jackpot opening command processing, first, the jackpot opening display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3101). After that, the transfer data table corresponding to the jackpot opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3102), and the time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the set jackpot opening display data table (S3103). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3104). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S3105), the jackpot opening command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the hit-related command processing.

Returning to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display jackpot opening command among the unprocessed new commands in the processing of S3001 (S3001: No), the processing of S3002 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S3003. In the processing of S3003, it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S3003), and if there is a display round number command (S3003: Yes), the round number command processing is executed. Then (S3004), the process proceeds to S3005.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S3004) will be described with reference to FIG. 52 (b). FIG. 52B is a flowchart showing the round number command process (S3004). This round number command process (S3004) is for executing the process corresponding to the round number command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the round number command process, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3201). After that, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3202). Then, the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the set round number display data table (S3203). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3204). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S3205), the round number command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the hit-related command processing.

Returning to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display round number command among the unprocessed new commands in the processing of S3003 (S3003: No), the processing of S3004 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S3005. In the processing of S3005, it is determined whether or not there is a final round command for display among the unprocessed commands (S3005), and if there is a final round command for display (S3005: Yes), the final round command processing is executed. Then (S3006), the process proceeds to S3007.

Here, the details of the final round command processing (S3006) will be described with reference to FIG. 53 (a). FIG. 53A is a flowchart showing the final round command processing (S3006). This final round command process (S3006) is for executing the process corresponding to the final round command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the final round command processing, first, the final round display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3301). After that, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3302). Then, based on the set final round display data table, the time data is set in the time counter 233h (S3303). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3304). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S3305), the final round command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the hit-related command processing.

Returning to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no final display round command among the unprocessed new commands in the processing of S3005 (S3005: No), the processing of S3006 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S3007. In the processing of S3007, it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot interval command for display among the unprocessed commands (S3007), and if there is a jackpot interval command for display (S3007: Yes), the jackpot interval command processing is executed. Then (S3008), the process proceeds to S3009.

Here, the details of the jackpot interval command processing (S3008) will be described with reference to FIG. 53 (b). FIG. 53B is a flowchart showing the jackpot interval command processing (S3008). This jackpot interval command process (S3008) is for executing the process corresponding to the jackpot interval command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the jackpot interval command processing, first, the jackpot interval display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3401). After that, the transfer data table corresponding to the jackpot interval display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3402), and the time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the set jackpot interval display data table (S3403). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3404). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S3405), the jackpot interval command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the hit-related command processing.

Returning to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display jackpot interval command among the unprocessed new commands in the processing of S3007 (S3007: No), the processing of S3008 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S3009. In the processing of S3009, it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S3009), and if there is a jackpot ending command for display (S3009: Yes), the jackpot ending command processing is executed. Then (S3010), the process proceeds to S3011.

Here, the details of the jackpot ending command processing (S3010) will be described with reference to FIG. 54 (a). FIG. 54A is a flowchart showing the jackpot ending command process (S3010). This jackpot ending command process (S3010) is for executing the process corresponding to the jackpot ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the jackpot ending command processing, first, the jackpot ending display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3501). After that, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3502). Then, based on the set jackpot ending display data table, the time data is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S3503). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3504). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S3505), the jackpot ending command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the hit-related command processing.

Returning to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display jackpot ending command among the unprocessed new commands in the processing of S3009 (S3009: No), the processing of S3010 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S3011. In the processing of S3011, it is determined whether or not there is a small hit opening command for display among the unprocessed commands (S3011), and if there is a small hit opening command for display (S3011: Yes), the small hit opening command is used. The process is executed (S3012), and the process proceeds to the process of S3013.

Here, the details of the small hit opening command processing (S3012) will be described with reference to FIG. 54 (b). FIG. 54B is a flowchart showing the small hit opening command process (S3012). This small hit opening command process (S3012) is for executing the process corresponding to the small hit opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the small hit opening command process, first, the small hit opening display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3601). After that, the transfer data table corresponding to the small hit opening display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3602), and the time data is set in the time counter 233h based on the set small hit opening display data table (S3603). ). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3604). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S3605), the small hit opening command process is terminated, and the process returns to the hit related command process.

Returning to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no small hit opening command for display among the unprocessed new commands in the process of S3011 (S3011: No), the process of S3012 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3013. In the processing of S3013, it is determined whether or not there is a small hit ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S3013), and if there is a small hit ending command for display (S3013: Yes), the small hit ending command is used. The process is executed (S3014), and the process proceeds to the process of S3015.

Here, the details of the small hit ending command processing (S3014) will be described with reference to FIG. 55 (a). FIG. 55 (a) is a flowchart showing the small hit ending command process (S3014). This small hit ending command process (S3014) is for executing the process corresponding to the small hit ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the small hit ending command processing, first, the small hit ending display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3701). After that, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3702). Then, based on the set small hit ending display data table, the time data is set in the time counter 233h (S3703). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3704). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S3705), the small hit ending command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the hit-related command processing.

Returning to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display small hit ending command among the unprocessed new commands in the process of S3013 (S3013: No), the process of S3014 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3015. In the processing of S3015, it is determined whether or not there is a display V-pass command among the unprocessed commands (S3015), and if there is a display V-pass command (S3015: Yes), the V-pass command process is executed. Then (S3016), this process is terminated.

Here, the details of the V-pass command processing (S3016) will be described with reference to FIG. 55 (b). S3015 is a flowchart showing V-pass command processing (S3016). This V-pass command process (S3016) is for executing the process corresponding to the V-pass command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the V-pass command processing, first, the V-pass display data table corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3801). After that, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3802). Then, the time data is set in the timekeeping counter 233h based on the set V passage display data table (S3803). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3804). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S3805), the V-pass command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the hit-related command processing.

Returning to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. If it is determined that there is no display V passage command among the unprocessed new commands in the process of S3015 (S3015: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 49, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2708, if it is determined that there is no hit-related command (S2708: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display pseudo start command among the unprocessed commands (S2710), and the display is used. If there is a pseudo start command (S2710: Yes), the pseudo variation display process is executed (S2711), and the process returns to the process of S2701.

Here, the details of the pseudo-variation display process (S2711) will be described with reference to FIG. 56. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a pseudo-variation display process. This pseudo-variation display process is a process for executing a process corresponding to the display pseudo start command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the pseudo-variation display process, first, a pseudo-display data table of the pseudo-variation pattern based on the stop type corresponding to the received command is determined and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3901). After that, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3902). Then, based on the set pseudo display data table, the time data is set in the time counter 233h (S3903). After that, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3904). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S3905), the round number command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the hit-related command processing.

Returning to FIG. 49, the description will be continued. In the processing of S2710, if it is determined that there is no display pseudo start command (S2710: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S2712), and the rear surface is determined. If there is an image change command (S2712: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S2713), and the process returns to the process of S2701.

Here, the details of the rear image change command process (S2713) will be described with reference to FIG. 57 (a). FIG. 57A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process. This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the rear image change command process (S2713), first, the rear image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S4503) of the change of the rear image due to the reception of the rear image change command in the on state is set to on. (S4001). Then, among the rear image discrimination flags provided for each rear image type (back surface A, rear surface B), the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image change command is turned on, and the other rear surface is used. The rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the image type is set to off (S4002), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag set by the process of S4001 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is specified from the rear image discrimination flag set by the process of S4002. .. When the specified back image type is back B, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those back images is not resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. The transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the rear image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the task processing (S2604), when it is specified to display either the back surface A or the back surface B according to the back surface type of the rear image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination set by S4002 is specified. From the flag, the type of back image to be displayed at that time is specified, and the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. The RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the processing of S4002, when it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear image change command may be extracted and the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 49. In the processing of S2712, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S2712: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S2714), and there is an error command. If (S2714: Yes), error command processing is executed (S2715), and the process returns to S2701 processing.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S2715) will be described with reference to FIG. 57 (b). FIG. 57B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S4101). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S4102). Ends the process and returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S4101, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S4102 is determined and the error type is dealt with. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, the error discrimination flag corresponding to all the error types indicated by each error command is set to ON in the process in S4102. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 49. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S2714 (S2714: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S2716), and the process returns to the process of S2701.

In the processing of S2701 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S2701: Yes). ), The processing of S2702 to S2716 is executed again. Then, the processes of S2701 to S2716 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S2701 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area (S2701: No). ), Ends this command judgment process.

The simple command determination process (S2608) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 48B) is also the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment processing, only the commands required to display the power-on image, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are used from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Extract and execute the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 50 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 50 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, and for other commands, Performs the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 50A) executed in this case, the display data table corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image at power-on is set in the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S2801. In addition, the image data of the power-on main image and the power-on variable image required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable dynamic image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S2802, the process of writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S2603), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 58, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S4201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S4201: No). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, the process of S4202 to S4204 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S4205. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S4201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S4202), S4203 to S4204 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S4203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S4203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S4203: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S4204).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 59 (a). FIG. 59A is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error discrimination flag is referred to and all the error discrimination set to ON is set. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S4301).

In the task processing (S2604), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S4301, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S4302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the explanation returns to FIG. 58. After the warning image setting process (S4204) or in the process of S4203, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is turned off (S4203: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4205.

In S4205, the pointer update process is executed (S4205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 59 (b). FIG. 59B is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S4401). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process, so that the respective values are sequentially started from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the process of S4401, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S4402). As a result, if it is End information (S4402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S4403), and if it is a demo display data table (S4403: Yes), the display data The time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the time counting counter 233h (S4404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S4405), and this processing is completed. Then, return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demo effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S4403, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S4403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S4403: No). S4406), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawing contents of the above are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S3202, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S4402: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the process returns to FIG. 58 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S4206). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified based on the drawing content developed in the processing of S4206 together with the warning image expanded earlier, and the display coordinates are displayed for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing, such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S4207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S4208). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S4208: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is 0 or less (S4208: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmed display flag is on. (S4209).

As a result, if the definite display flag is off (S4209: Yes), the definite display effect has not been performed yet, and it is the timing to perform the definite display effect. It is set (S4210), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4211). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the definite display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S4212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4213). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S4214), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S4215), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final symbol display effect of the stopped symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. The drawing content can be set as such. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the confirmed display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the confirmed display data table. Further, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. A wide variety of staging images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S4215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task processing (S2604), from the start of the fluctuation until the predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by S4215, and the stop symbol thereof is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S4209, if the confirmation display flag is on (S4209: No), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S4216). If the demo display flag is off (S4216: Yes), it means that the value of the time counting counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that the demo display data table is displayed. The contents are cleared by setting the buffer 233d (S4217) and then writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S4218). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S4219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S4220), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S4221), the present process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the opening command is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set so that is displayed.

In the process of S4216, if the demo display flag is on (S4216: No), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S2609) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 48 (b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on ends, the image of the variation image at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the stop type command for display for a predetermined time. The process of setting the display data table specified to be stopped and displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61, the details of the transfer setting process (S2605) described above, which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 60A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S4501: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S4502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 60 (b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the processing of S4501, that is, if it is off (S4501: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is the resident video from the character ROM 234. It has been transferred to RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S4503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 61.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S4502), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S2605) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 60 (b). FIG. 60B is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S4502).

In this resident image transfer setting process (S4502), first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S4601), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S4601). S4601: Yes), and further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S4602). In the process of S4602, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237 after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. .. When it is determined by the process of S4602 that the transfer process has not been completed (S4602: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S4602: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S4603. Further, as a result of the processing of S4601, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S4601: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S4603.

In the process of S4603, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S4603), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S4603: No), the non-resident image data has not been transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so that the resident image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S4604), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 describes the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 235. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S4603 (S4603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S4605), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 48 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S2608 in FIG. 48 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S2609 in FIG. 48 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 49 to 57) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 58 and 59) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 61) (see S4501: No in FIG. 60 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, with reference to FIG. 61, a normal image transfer setting process (S4503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S2605) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S4503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S4205) of the display setting process (S2603) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S4701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S4702), and if it is transfer data information (S4702: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is stored from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source final address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S4703) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S4704), and the process proceeds to S4705.

Further, in the process of S6502, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S4702: No), the processes of S4703 and S4704 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S4705. In the process of S4705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S4705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S4705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S4706).

In the process of S4706, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S4706 that the transfer process has not been completed (S4706: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S4706: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S4707. Further, as a result of the processing of S4705, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S4705: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S4707.

In the process of S4707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S4707), and if the transfer start flag is on (S4707: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S4708), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S4703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S4713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S4707: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag is on (S4709).

If the rear image change flag is on (S4709: Yes), it means that the rear image is changed. Therefore, after the rear image change flag is set to off (S4710), the rear image provided for each rear image type is set. Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S4711). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the rear image corresponding to the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (normally). The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S4712), and the process proceeds to S4713.

In the process of S4709, if the rear image change flag is not on and is off (S4709: No), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

When the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the rear A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so that the image should be transferred to the normal video RAM 236. No data exists. Therefore, in the processing of S4709, if the rear image discrimination flag in the ON state is that of the rear surface A, the normal image transfer processing is terminated as it is.

In the process of S4713, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4713). The discrimination in the process of S4713 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. That is, the stored state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the stored state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is a normal video. It is determined that the image data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the stored state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

If, as a result of the processing of S4713, the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S4713: No), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic in the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S4713 (S4713: Yes), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S4714). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 includes the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the given address. Then, when the transfer is completed, the transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the processing of S4714, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated (S4715), and this normal transfer setting processing is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that became the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is the stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, among the image data used in the rear image, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 is used. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the image data to be transferred is stored in the image storage area 236a so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S2606), which is one of the V interrupt processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S2604) and the parameters (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α-blending information) required for drawing each sprite. , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S2605), the drawing list shown in FIG. 23 is generated (S4801). That is, in the processing of S6601, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S2604). Then, the specified stored RAM type and address are associated with the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task processing. Then, after rearranging each sprite in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, the details for each sprite in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. A drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as various drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S2605), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller 237 (S4802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

The image controller 237 draws an image in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands the image by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address is read in order from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. Then, in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the image expanded in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed in parallel at the same time. Can be done.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j after the processing of S4802 (S4803). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when the value is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is performed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 48 (b)) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are used every 20 milliseconds as either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, respectively. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the result of the lottery of the special symbol becomes a specific lottery result (small hit), the variable ball entry means (second variable winning device 650) in which the ball can be won. ), In the variable ball entry means, a specific area (V detection switch 650e5) that gives a privilege to the player by passing the ball, and a guided state and difficulty in passing the ball to the specific area. A guiding means (V gate 650d) that can be changed at predetermined intervals is provided in a regulated state. Then, when a specific lottery result is continuously won, at least one of the consecutively won specific lottery results is configured to be in a gaming state in which the ball easily passes through the specific area. There is.

As a result, it becomes possible to provide a player with a more advantageous gaming state when a specific lottery result is continuously won than when a specific lottery result is won independently, and the player can be continuously specified. There is an effect that the decrease in motivation for playing due to winning the lottery result can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment described above, when the small hit (small hit A) which is a specific lottery result is continuously won, that is, when the specific lottery result is continuously won, the ball covers a specific area. The configuration is shown in which a small hit game (advantageous privilege game) that is easy to pass is easily executed, but if the configuration is such that the advantageous privilege game can be easily executed by winning a specific lottery result multiple times, the present embodiment is used. A configuration other than the configuration used may be used.

For example, when a specific lottery result is won a plurality of times in a predetermined order, a configuration may be used in which the advantageous privilege game is easily executed. It should be noted that the predetermined order is a predetermined order, such as when the specific lottery result used in the present embodiment is won a plurality of times in succession, or when the specific lottery result and the loss are alternately repeated. The specific lottery results include those that win multiple times. In particular, by presetting the order including the case where the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order as a predetermined order, even if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, the advantageous privilege game advantageous to the player is executed. Since it may be easier, there is an effect that the player can always have expectations.

Further, when the small hits are continuously won, the total time of the game time of the small hit game and the fluctuation time of the special symbol corresponding to the second small hit among the continuous small hits is the total time of the V gate 650d. It is configured so that it does not become an integral multiple of the operation cycle.

As a result, when small hits occur continuously, the continuous small hits do not cause the ball to flow down at the same timing with respect to the V gate 650d operating in a predetermined operation cycle. That is, by continuously generating small hit games, it is possible to make the ball flow down at different timings with respect to the V gate 650d operating in a predetermined operation cycle. Therefore, when the player wins the small hit game in succession, it is possible to provide a more advantageous gaming state than the case where the player wins the small hit game alone, and the player wins the small hit in succession. There is an effect that the decrease in motivation for playing can be suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the total time of the game time of the small hit game and the fluctuation time of the second special figure fluctuation display among the continuous small hits is the time corresponding to an integral multiple of the operation cycle of the V gate 650d. On the other hand, the V gate 650d is configured to be different by the time (1.5 seconds) or more in which it is in the induced state.

As a result, among the continuous small hit games, the timing at which the ball is allowed to flow down to the V gate 650d in the first small hit game is V in the second small hit game when the V gate 650d is in the regulated state. The timing at which the ball flows down to the gate 650d can increase the probability that the V gate 650d will be in the guided state, and when the player wins the small hit game in succession, he or she wins the small hit game alone. It is possible to provide a more advantageous gaming state than in the case of the above, and there is an effect that the decrease in the motivation for playing due to the continuous winning of small hits can be suppressed.

It is desirable that the time to be different is equal to or more than the time (1.5 seconds) that the V gate 650d is in the induced state with respect to an integral multiple of the operation cycle of the V gate 650d, but it may be less than that. .. In such a configuration, for example, when the operating cycle (5 seconds) of the V gate 650d is different from the time (for example, 1 second) shorter than the time (1.5 seconds) in which the V gate 650d is in the induced state. By winning small hits in succession for a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times), it is preferable to configure the V-gate 650d to differ by one lap (5 seconds) of the operation cycle.

With this configuration, for example, when the small hit game is played five times in a row, the small hit game that can pass V is executed at least once among the consecutively executed small hit games. There is an effect that when a person is continuously won a small hit, it is possible to provide a more advantageous gaming state than when a single small hit is won.

Further, in the present embodiment, a period that is not an integral multiple of the period (1.5 seconds) in which the V gate 650d is in the induction state is set as the operation cycle of the V gate 650d. By doing so, for example, in a continuous small hit game, the timing for causing the ball to flow down to the V gate 650d with respect to the previous small hit game is the time (1.5 seconds) when the V gate 650d is in the guided state. Minutes) When the small hit games to be different are repeated multiple times (for example, 5 times) (when the total difference is one cycle or more of the operation cycle of the V gate 650d), even for different operation cycles of the V gate 650d. In the small hit game, the timing of letting the ball flow down to the V gate 650d can be changed. Therefore, there is an effect that a more advantageous gaming state can be provided to the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the predetermined condition (7 reserved balls) is satisfied at the timing when the change of the special symbol corresponding to the consecutively won small hits is executed, the consecutively won small hits are the players. It is configured to provide an advantageous gaming state to the player. This has the effect that the player can be enthusiastically played the game in order to always satisfy the predetermined condition, and the operation of the game can be improved.

Although it was shown that the number of reserved balls is 7 in the present embodiment as predetermined conditions, other conditions may be set, or the number of reserved balls satisfying the predetermined conditions may be changed. Further, a requirement other than the number of reserved balls may be set as a predetermined condition. For example, a lottery result of a special symbol may be a predetermined lottery result, and a gaming state different from the normal one may be set as a predetermined condition. Alternatively, it may be set as a predetermined condition that it is within a predetermined period (for example, a period until the change of the special symbol is executed 50 times) after the end of the specific game state such as the jackpot game.

Even with such a configuration, the player will enthusiastically play the game so as to satisfy a predetermined condition, and there is an effect that the operation of the game can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the small hits are continuously won, the small hits that can (easily) pass the ball through the specific area are determined, and the continuous small hit period is determined based on the determination result. A series of effects (continuous) can be executed using the variable display period of the special symbol corresponding to the small hit. With this configuration, for example, the first small hit can pass the ball through a specific area (difficult), and the second small hit can pass the ball through a specific area. When it is a possible (easy) small hit, as an effect corresponding to the first small hit, it is based on the fact that this small hit is an impossible (difficult) small hit to pass the ball through a specific area. It is possible to execute an effect (for example, a chance continuation effect) based on a small hit that allows the ball to pass through a specific area (easily) for the next small hit instead of the effect. Therefore, since it is possible to suppress the frequency of performing the effect based on the (severe) small hit that cannot provide the player with an advantageous game state, it is possible to suppress the effect that the player feels dissatisfied with the game. It has the effect of suppressing the situation where a person gets tired of playing a game.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, in the case where the small hits executed when a specific lottery result is obtained are continuous, it is possible to provide a game state which is more advantageous than the case where the small hits are executed alone. , Based on the fact that the small hit is executed a plurality of times, the configuration may be such that it is possible to provide a gaming state that is more advantageous than the case where the small hit is executed alone.

For example, a gaming state that is more advantageous than the case where a small hit is executed alone based on the fact that the small hit is executed a plurality of times within a predetermined period (for example, 8 times which is the upper limit number of holdings and storage). It may be configured to be available. By doing so, there is an effect that the decrease in motivation for playing due to frequent small hits can be suppressed.

It is also more advantageous than a single small hit based on the fact that the small hits are executed multiple times in a predetermined order (for example, the small hits and the misses are executed alternately). It may be configured to be able to provide various gaming states. By doing so, there is an effect that the decrease in motivation for playing due to frequent small hits can be suppressed. Furthermore, by defining a predetermined order in combination with small hits and misses, it is possible to provide a game state that is advantageous to the player even if the lottery results of a plurality of special symbols are missed. It has the effect of being able to do it.

It should be noted that it is more advantageous than the case where the small hit is executed alone based on the fact that the small hit is executed multiple times in a predetermined order (for example, the small hit and the miss are executed alternately). When it is configured to be able to provide various gaming states, the variation time of the special symbol corresponding to the deviation is the same as the special variation time (special variation B to C) of the special symbol corresponding to the small hit described in the present embodiment. A special fluctuation time may be set in, and the timing at which a plurality of small hits are executed may be configured to be different from the opening timing of the guiding means. As a result, even if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, there is a possibility that the player will be provided with an advantageous gaming state. Therefore, apart from the lottery result of the special symbol, the player can play the game while expecting that an advantageous game state is provided, so that it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage. effective.

In this case, it is advisable to unify (at least partially unify) the special variation time of the special symbol corresponding to the small hit and the special variation of the special symbol corresponding to the deviation. As a result, there are cases where the small hits are continuous and cases where the small hits are executed multiple times in a predetermined order (for example, the small hits and the misses are executed alternately), and the special case during the continuous production. It is possible to execute the same effect as the variation effect of the symbol, and there is an effect that the capacity of the display data displayed by the third symbol display device 81 can be reduced.

Specifically, when the number of balls entered on hold is 5 to 6 in the deviation pattern selection table 202c, which is referred to when the lottery result of the special symbol is deviation, the fluctuation time is 5.5 seconds. The special fluctuation pattern (special fluctuation pattern for deviation) is specified. By configuring in this way, for example, while the number of balls entered on hold is reduced from 7 to 6 to 5, the small hit A (first time) → missed → small hit A (second time) is special. When the symbol lottery is executed, after the first small hit A is completed, the deviation display (5.5 seconds) is executed, and then the fluctuation display of the small hit A (5.5 seconds) is executed. ) Later, the small hit A is executed. Therefore, the interval between the arrival timing of the winning ball V gate of the first small hit A and the arrival timing of the winning ball V gate of the second small hit A is 17 seconds. Since the operation cycle of the V gate 650d is 5 seconds, the timing of reaching the winning ball V gate of the first small hit A is the timing of reaching the winning ball V gate of the second small hit A. The timing differs by 2 seconds (delays by 2 seconds) with respect to the operation cycle.

In the above-mentioned example, the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol is unified between the case where the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order and the case of small hit, but the variation pattern of the special symbol in the case of out of order is shown. As the (variation time), a variation pattern having a variation time that is the total time of the special variation B (5.5 seconds) and the game time of the small hit A (6 seconds) may be used. By doing so, even if the deviation fluctuation is executed between the small hits as in the above example, the time required for the small hit fluctuation (the fluctuation time of the special symbol and the small hit game time). ) Can be unified. Therefore, it is possible to secure the same continuous effect time when the lottery result of the special symbol is in the order of small hit A → miss → small hit A and when the small hit A is won three times in a row. Therefore, by standardizing the continuous effect, there is an effect that the capacity of the display data displayed by the third symbol display device 81 can be reduced.

In addition, by making it difficult to recognize whether the lottery result of the special symbol during the continuous production is a small hit or a miss, it is possible to give expectations to the player until the end of the continuous production. There is.

The above-exemplified configuration shows the case where the lottery result of the special symbol other than the small hit is out of order, but the present invention is not limited to that. It may be a small hit (small hits B to C) in which B is not set. In this case, it is advisable to unify the small hit game time of the small hits B to C with the small hit A to standardize the continuous production.

Further, in the present embodiment, by setting the special fluctuation time as the fluctuation time of the special symbol, when the small hits are continuously executed (when the small hits are executed a plurality of times), the small hits are independently generated. It is configured to be able to provide a more advantageous gaming state than when it is executed, but other configurations may be used, for example, a door 650f (variable means) which is opened when a small hit is executed. The opening period and opening timing may be changed, the operation cycle of the V gate 650d (guidance means) may be changed, or the operation timing of the stopper 650c may be changed.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the small hit is executed a plurality of times, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol is set in advance so that one of the small hits becomes a small hit that can pass through V. However, as another configuration, the operation pattern of the V gate 650d may be set so that one of the small hits can pass through V when the small hit is executed a plurality of times. .. Even if such a configuration is used, it is possible to obtain the same effect as that of the first embodiment.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 63. In the first embodiment, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is configured to enter the crune member 660, and the speed at which the game ball flows down during the fluctuation period of the normal symbol (the speed at which the game ball moves vertically downward in the game area). Was delayed so that the ball could easily enter the first ball entry port 64a according to the period during which the normal symbol hits. In the second embodiment, the rotation holding device 690 is arranged below the through gate 67 instead of the crune member 660. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The rotation holding member 690 has a rotating portion 690c arranged at a position where the first concave portion 690a and the second concave portion 690b into which the game ball can enter face each other with the central axis 690z, and the rotating portion 690c from both the left and right sides. The side cover bodies 690d1 and 690d2 are arranged at positions where the game ball can rotate while the game ball is inserted (held) in the recess 690a or the second recess 690b. The side cover bodies 690d1 and 690d2 are arranged so as to be open so that the game ball can enter the first recess 690a or the second recess 690b of the rotating portion 690c from the upper part. Further, when the side cover bodies 690d1 and 690d2 are not arranged below the rotating portion 690c and the first recess 690a or the second recess 690b of the rotating portion 690c is in the lower position, the ball enters. The game ball can be made to flow down toward the first entry port 64a.

The rotating portion 690a is configured to rotate clockwise in the front view by a rotating motor (not shown) by the rotating shaft 690z. In this case, it is configured at a speed of rotating once in 20 seconds, and when a game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 enters the first recess 690a or the second recess 690b, the hit variation time of the normal symbol is 10 seconds. Therefore, it is configured to be discharged from below according to the timing. As in the first embodiment, the discharged game ball collides with the nail KG and the flow is delayed, and the ball is distributed to the right or left of the nail KG and enters the first ball entry port 64a. It is configured. In the present embodiment, when the first concave portion 690a or the second concave portion 690b of the rotating portion 690c does not face the upper portion, the ball is configured to flow downward without entering the ball, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be held by the side cover bodies 690d1 and 690d2 and may be configured to wait until the first recess 690a or the second recess 690b rotates upward. Further, two recesses in which the game ball can enter may be further provided so as to increase the possibility that the game ball enters the recess and enters the rotating portion 690c. Further, a plurality of rotation holding members 690 similar to those in the second embodiment may be arranged so that the plurality of game balls are held in the game area and the flow is delayed.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 67. FIG. 64 is a view showing a front view of the game board 13 in the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, the start gate 680 is arranged between the crune member 660 and the first ball entry device 64 (above the nail KG) with respect to the first embodiment. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The start gate 680 is a start switch that starts the hit game of the normal symbol when the normal symbol hits. When the determination result of the normal symbol is a hit, the fluctuation time elapses, the stop display is displayed on the hit symbol, and then the game ball is passed through the start gate 680, the hit game of the normal symbol is started. Since the winning game of the normal symbol to be started is the same as that of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

0.5 seconds after passing through the start gate 680, the opening / closing door of the first ball entry device 64 is opened, and the ball can enter the first ball entry port 64a. The game ball that has passed through the start gate 680 collides with the nail KG, is distributed in the left-right direction of the nail KG, and flows down to the first ball entry device 64. The period required from passing through the start gate 680 to being guided to the first ball entry device 64 is about 0.6 seconds to 1 second, and the period during which the first ball entry device 64 is in the open state. It is configured so that the game ball that has passed through the start gate 680 can easily enter the first ball entry port 64a.

In the present embodiment, the nail KG is arranged below the start gate 680 so as to be delayed so as to match the timing until the first ball entry port 64a is opened, but the present invention is not limited to this. The rotation holding member, the croon member, or the like as in the second embodiment may be arranged, or the game ball may be configured to flow down while being in contact with a rubber member or the like that reduces the flow speed of the game ball. Further, the opening period of the hit game of the normal symbol may be set as long as 5 seconds, and the delay member may be arranged according to the period.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment>
Next, the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 65. FIG. 65 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, the flag 203i per normal symbol is added to the first embodiment. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The normal symbol hit flag 203i is a flag indicating that the right to start the normal symbol hit game has been granted. After the normal symbol hit flag 203i is set to ON, when the game ball is passed through the start gate 680, the normal symbol hit game is started. The normal symbol per flag 203i is used in the process of S527 in the normal symbol variation process 2 (see FIG. 66), which is one process in the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment. , Ordinary symbol is set to on when the hit fluctuation period ends. In the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 of the third embodiment, the normal symbol variation process (S106 of FIG. 28) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 24) in the first embodiment is a normal symbol. The difference is that it has been changed to the variation processing 2 (see FIG. 66). As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 66, the normal symbol variation processing 2 (S111) in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal symbol variation processing 2 (S111). In the ordinary symbol variation processing 2 (S111) in the third embodiment, the processing of S519 and S521 is deleted and the processing of S527 is added to the ordinary symbol variation processing (S106 in FIG. 24). do. Since other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The process of S519 and the process of S521 (see FIG. 24) are processes for setting the opening of the first ball entrance device 64 (setting a winning game of a normal symbol), but in the present embodiment, the start gate 680 is used. Since it is configured to start hitting a normal symbol when it passes, it is configured to be deleted and set when it passes through the start gate 680 (see S1458 and S1460 in FIG. 67). Further, in the process of S527, the normal symbol hit flag 203i is set to be on, and the normal symbol hit game is set to start when the game ball passes through the start gate 680. The process of S527 is a case where it is determined that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol set in the process of S522 has elapsed, and further, it is a case where it is determined that the lottery result is a hit in the process of S524. ..

Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the electric accessory opening / closing process 2 (S1020), which is one of the processes in the main process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment, will be described. FIG. 67 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the electric accessory opening / closing process 2 (S1020). In the main process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the third embodiment, the electric accessory opening / closing process (S1006) in the main process (see FIG. 33) in the second embodiment is the electric accessory opening / closing process 2. The difference is that it is changed to (S1020). Since other points are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the electric accessory opening / closing process 2 (S1020 in FIG. 67), first, it is determined whether the flag 203i per normal symbol is on (S1451). When the normal symbol hit flag 203i is off (S1451: No), whether the electric accessory (corresponding to the opening / closing door of the first ball entry device 64) is in the opening / closing operation (that is, the opening operation or the opening operation from the closing operation). (Whether it is waiting for) (S1452). When the electric accessory is in operation (S1452: Yes), it is determined whether the opening time has elapsed (S1453). When it is determined that the opening time has elapsed (S1453: Yes), the corresponding opening / closing operation of the electric accessory is set (S1454). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, if No is determined in the processing of S1452 and S1453, this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1451, when it is determined that the normal symbol per symbol flag 203i is on (S1451: Yes), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the start gate 680 (S1455). If it is determined that the vehicle has not passed through the start gate 680 (S1455: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1455, when it is determined that the start gate 680 has passed (S1455: Yes), the normal symbol per flag 203i is set to ON (S1456), and the time reduction / medium counter 203d is 1 or more. That is, it is determined whether the time is shortened (S1457). If it is determined that the time is being shortened (S1457: Yes), it is determined whether or not the jackpot game is in progress (S1458). If it is not a big hit, the opening period per normal symbol is set to 2 seconds, and the interval is set to 2 times with an interval of 1 second (S1459). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S1457 that the time is not shortened (S1457: No), or if it is determined in the processing of S1458 that the special symbol jackpot game is in progress, the opening period is once every 2 seconds. Set to. The period until the opening is started (opening period) is set to 0.5 seconds regardless of the state.

In this way, since the hit start of the normal symbol is started when the normal symbol has passed through the start gate 680, even the player who has stopped the launch of the game ball during the fluctuation of the normal symbol can also use the first entrance 64. It is possible to suppress the opportunity to enter the ball and make it easier to play the game.

In the example of the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 68, the start gate 680 is arranged at a position where the game ball can easily pass without providing the crune member 660 or the like, and it is early after the game ball is launched. It may be configured to pass through.

<About the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 to 86. The pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is configured so that the reserved ball is not stored for the special symbol, but the pachinko machine 10 in the fourth embodiment is configured so that the reserved ball is also stored for the special symbol. This is different from the first embodiment. The same elements and configurations as those of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIGS. 69 to 72, an example of the display content of the fusion symbol displayed by the third symbol display device 81 when the reserved ball of the special symbol in the fourth embodiment is stored will be described. .. FIG. 69 shows the timing (period) at which each change between the normal symbol and the special symbol is executed when three reserved balls of the normal symbol are stored and one reserved ball of the special symbol is stored. It is a timing chart showing the timing (period) in which the fusion symbol is displayed in a variable manner corresponding to it.

As shown in FIG. 69, first, the variation display of the fusion symbol is started in synchronization with the variation start timing of the normal symbol (see FIG. 6A). As shown in the first embodiment, when the normal symbol is a hit, the fused symbol is displayed in the reach display mode (see FIG. 6 (b)), and the execution period of the normal symbol hit game (normal symbol hit period). ), The reach display mode is displayed during the period when the first entry port 64a is open as shown in FIG. 7A, and the game ball enters the first entry opening 64a. In synchronization with the start of the variable display of the symbol, the display mode of the super reach is displayed in the fused symbol. In the example shown in FIG. 69, two game balls enter the first entrance 64a during the hit period of the normal symbol in which the first entrance 64a is open, and one reserved ball of the special symbol is stored. An example of the case where it is done is shown. During the variation display period of the special symbol (during the special symbol variation A), the hit period of the normal symbol ends, and among the reserved balls of the normal symbol, the variation display corresponding to the first reserved ball is the variation display of the special symbol. It is started during the period during which the special figure change A is being performed. In this case, the variable display of the fused symbol corresponding to the normal symbol is only the blinking display unit, and the auxiliary normal symbol is displayed in a variable display.

In the first embodiment, when the variation of the special symbol is started, the fusion symbol is simulated even after the variation period of the special symbol ends 5 seconds before the variation start time and the end timing of the variation display. It is configured to determine whether to display fluctuations (effects such as shaking). On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, it is configured to determine whether to execute the pseudo-variation at the start of the change of the special symbol and at the end timing of the change display. In the fourth embodiment, the condition for quasi-variating the fusion symbol is limited to the case where the reserved ball of the special symbol is not stored, and the pseudo-variation is executed when the reserved sphere of the special symbol is stored. It is configured so that it will not be done. With this configuration, the fluctuation of the fusion symbol corresponding to the special symbol (the variation of the fusion symbol indicating the lottery result of the special symbol) can be preferentially executed, which is a direct trigger for the start of the jackpot game. Notification corresponding to the fluctuation of the special symbol can be performed by the fusion symbol.

Here, as shown in FIG. 69, at the timing when the first game ball enters the first entry port 64a, the reserved ball of the special symbol is not yet stored, so that the special symbol changes. At the change timing at the start time (at the start of the change of the special figure change A), it is determined whether or not to set to execute the pseudo change of the fusion symbol after the change. The details will be described later, but in the fourth embodiment, when the lottery result in the change of the special symbol (special symbol change A) is out of order, there is no reserved ball of the special symbol and it hits within 2 hold of the normal symbol. If the hold to be is stored, the execution of the pseudo-variation is set (as a reservation set after the end of the variation time of the special symbol). With this configuration, if the reserved ball that is the hit of the normal symbol is stored in the 2 reserves, the first entry port 64a is immediately opened even after the change of the special symbol is completed, and the special symbol is set. Even if the fluctuation of is started (the timing when the game ball enters the first entry port 64a), the pre-variation of the fusion symbol is continuously executed by the pseudo-variation. It is possible to execute the variation of the fusion symbol in synchronization with the variation of the started special symbol, reduce the number of fluctuations of the fusion symbol that notifies the result of the lottery that is out of the game, and make the player think that the probability of winning is high. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that the player gets tired of the game at an early stage.

In the example shown in FIG. 69, at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol (at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol fluctuation B), the hold corresponding to the 2 hold of the normal symbol is not stored, so that the pseudo fluctuation is not set. It is determined whether or not to set the pseudo variation at the timing when the variation period of the special symbol is stopped (the timing when the variation period of the special variation B has elapsed). In addition to the same judgment as at the start of the fluctuation, if the hold ball of the special symbol is not stored and the hold that is a hit is not stored in the 2 hold of the normal symbol, the special symbol is not stored. It is determined whether or not the fluctuation of the normal symbol is continuously executed even after the movement is stopped, and if it is continuously executed, the pseudo fluctuation of the fusion symbol is set until the timing when the fluctuation ends. In the example shown in FIG. 69, since the reserved ball corresponding to the special figure fluctuation B is stored at the timing when the special figure fluctuation A stops fluctuating, the pseudo fluctuation is not set and the fusion symbol is also displayed in the reach display mode. The middle symbol is stopped and displayed with a symbol different from the reach symbol (left and right stop symbol), and the player is notified that the lottery result is out of order.

When the fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation A is stopped, the fluctuation display of the fusion symbol that has been stopped and displayed in synchronization with the start of the fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation B is started. When the fluctuation starts, the fused symbol is scrolled and displayed at a high speed (a speed at which each symbol is invisible) after each symbol row is scrolled vertically at a low speed (a speed at which each symbol is visible). Scroll. At the start of the change of the special symbol, it is determined whether or not to set the pseudo change as in the case of the special change A. In the example shown in FIG. 69, when the special symbol fluctuation B starts to fluctuate, the reserved ball of the special symbol is not stored, but the reserved ball that hits within the 2 hold of the normal symbol is also not stored. Therefore, pseudo-variation is not set.

In the variation display of the fusion symbol corresponding to the special symbol variation A, it is displayed from the start of super reach (see FIG. 7 (b)), but in the variation display of the fusion symbol corresponding to the special symbol variation B, the fusion symbol is stopped. The variation display is started from the state as described above, and after the reach display is reached, a specific variation pattern in which the super reach display mode is displayed is set. In this case, since the fluctuation time of the special symbol is determined on the main control device 110 side, is the variation pattern selection table 222a of the voice lamp control device 113 a variation in which the special symbol variation is executed by the reserved ball? A variation pattern of the fusion symbol in which the start of super reach is executed corresponding to the variation time that can be selected depending on whether or not (the game ball enters the first entry port 64a without the reserved ball). (Selected when the fusion symbol is started), and the variation pattern of the fusion symbol that is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing the lottery result after the reach display mode is set. Has been done.

With this configuration, there are cases where the fluctuation of the special symbol starts to fluctuate due to the reserved ball and cases where the fluctuation starts at the timing when the ball enters the first entry port 64a, and the fusion that has been executed up to that point. It is possible to display the corresponding fusion symbol in a variable state (difference between the case where it is displayed in the reach state and the case where it is displayed in the stopped state) of the symbol, and it is possible to suppress a problem that gives the player a sense of discomfort.

In addition, the timing at which the fluctuation of the fused symbol starts can be matched with the timing at which the fluctuation of the normal symbol starts, the timing at which the fluctuation of the special symbol starts, and the timing at which the fluctuation of the fused symbol stops. Since it is possible to match the timing at which the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped or the timing at which the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the player can be interested in the variation display of the fused symbol.

Next, with reference to FIG. 70, the variation content of the fusion symbol will be described when the reserved ball that is a hit within the 2 reserves of the normal symbol is stored at the start of the variation of the special symbol. FIG. 70 is a timing chart showing the fluctuation timing of the fusion symbol when the holding ball that is a hit is stored in the 2 holdings of the normal symbol at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol (at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol fluctuation C). be. In the example shown in FIG. 70, three reserved balls are stored in the normal symbol, and the reserved balls that are hit by the second stored reserved ball are stored. The fluctuation of the normal symbol during the fluctuation (during the fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation C) is a hit, and when the first entry port 64a is opened, two game balls enter the first entry opening 64a. This is an example showing the variation mode of the fusion symbol when one reserved ball of the special symbol is stored. At the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol fluctuation C, the reserved ball that hits within 2 holds of the normal symbol is stored, and at the start of the fluctuation (at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol fluctuation C), the reserved ball of the special symbol is still stored. It is not determined that the special symbol has been changed (even when the ball is continuously entered into the first entry port 64a, the setting process for starting the fluctuation of the special symbol is performed before the game ball entered later is determined. (Executed), so that a pseudo-variation of up to 30 seconds is set to be executed in the fusion symbol after the end of the special figure variation C. On the other hand, after the variation start setting of the special symbol is set (the pseudo setting start setting (including the process of turning on the pseudo setting flag 223h) is set), the special symbol corresponding to the special symbol variation D is set by the main controller 110. When the hold command of is received, the set pseudo-variation start setting is canceled (the process of setting the pseudo-setting flag 223h to off).

In the variation of the fusion symbol corresponding to the special symbol variation C, the display mode from the start of the super reach is displayed by the fusion symbol as in the special symbol variation A described with reference to FIG. 69. The variation display of the fusion symbol is also stopped and displayed at the timing when the variation time of the special figure variation C elapses (the variation period ends). Since the lottery result of the special symbol variation C is shown as an example of the case where the lottery result is out of order, a symbol different from the reach symbol indicating that the lottery result is out of order is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol row. (See FIG. 8 (a)). It is determined whether or not the pseudo-variation is performed at the end timing of the fluctuation time of the special figure variation C. In the example shown in FIG. 70, the reserved ball of the special symbol is stored. No settings are performed.

Next, it is determined whether to execute the pseudo-variation setting based on the fluctuation start timing of the special figure variation D, and in the example shown in FIG. 70, it corresponds to the second hold (hold 2) of the normal symbol. Since the reserved ball is stored, the pseudo-variation of up to 30 seconds is set to be executed after the end of the special figure variation D. In this case, since the winning game corresponding to the hold 2 of the normal symbol is executed in the fluctuation period of the fusion symbol corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation D (including the pseudo fluctuation period), the third symbol is displayed in the fluctuation period of the fusion symbol. The device 81 is set to display a notice display mode for notifying in advance that the hit game of the normal symbol is executed (open notice is set). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 72 (b), 3 seconds before the hit game of the normal symbol, the characters "Fire a game ball and hold charge chance !!" are fused symbols (directed symbols (designs of monsters, etc.). ) Is set to be displayed in the layer on the front side of). The notice display mode shown in FIG. 72 (b) is a display mode executed during the variable period of the special symbol, and it is notified that the number of reserved balls increases when the game ball is fired. Further, as shown in FIG. 72 (a), the game ball is fired during the period in which the pseudo-variation is executed (the state where there is no reserved ball of the special symbol) after the variation period of the special symbol ends. Then, as a notice display mode indicating that the fusion symbol is re-variable, a display mode of "launching a game ball and re-variation chance !!" is displayed. As shown in FIG. 70, when the notice display mode is set from the change period of the fusion symbol to the pseudo change period, the notice display mode is switched and displayed at the timing of the pseudo change. Has been done.

With this configuration, even for a player who has stopped launching the game ball during the fluctuation period of the fusion symbol, the game ball is hit by the normal symbol and the game ball is inserted into the first entry slot 64a. It is possible to suppress problems that miss opportunities. In this embodiment, when the variation display of the fusion symbol corresponding to the variation of the special symbol is executed, the notice display mode is set to be displayed when the normal symbol hits, but the special symbol When the number of reserved balls is the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment), the notice display mode may not be set. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the problem that the player is wasted to shoot the game ball and the profit is impaired.

In this embodiment, the notice display mode is switched between the change period and the stop period of the special symbol, but the period during which the first entrance 64a is opened (corresponding to the opening period shown in FIG. 70) and before the opening period. It may be configured to switch the notice display mode with and. With this configuration, it is possible to notify the player that it is a period during which the game ball can enter the first entrance 64a, and the player can enter the first entrance 64a. It is possible to raise the degree of expectation for.

At the timing when the fluctuation period of the special figure fluctuation D ends, the determination of whether to execute the pseudo fluctuation setting is executed, and since the pseudo fluctuation setting has already been executed at the start of the fluctuation, a maximum of 30 is executed based on the setting. Pseudo-variations in seconds (see FIG. 8 (b)) are performed. As already described in the first embodiment, when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64a, the fusion symbol also starts to change again based on the new start of the change of the special symbol. To. On the other hand, even if the opening period of the normal symbol (including the ball ejection period, which is the period from when the game ball enters the first ball entry port 64a and is detected by the detection switch) is completed, the first ball entry port 64a If the game ball is not detected by the detection switch that detects the game ball that has entered the ball, the pseudo-variation (variation display) of the fusion symbol is displayed as a fixed stop display. As for the variation of the fusion symbol corresponding to the special symbol variation D, the scroll display is started from the state where the fusion symbol is stopped and displayed, and the super reach display mode is passed through the reach display mode. Is executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which the variation display of the special symbol is super reach has been described, but a non-reach deviation that does not become reach may be set, and variations corresponding to the result of determining whether or not the special symbol is correct or not may be set. It may be configured according to the embodiment.

As described above, in the present embodiment, there are cases where the reserved ball of the special symbol starts to fluctuate, and a fusion symbol corresponding to the normal symbol by entering the first ball opening 64a in a state where the reserved ball is not stored. Since it is configured to switch the variation mode between the case where the variation (scroll display) is executed and the case where the variation of the fusion symbol corresponding to the special symbol is switched and displayed, the fusion symbol starts the variation display. A series of effects up to notifying whether or not a hit (judgment result of a special symbol) is obtained can be executed every variable in the same flow (scroll display starts from the stopped state of the fusion symbol, and the reach display mode is passed. , The flow in which the same medium symbol as the reach symbol is stopped and the hit is notified by doublet). Therefore, it is possible to suppress a problem that gives the player a sense of discomfort.

If the reserved ball of the special symbol is stored and the lottery result for the change is out of order, the fusion symbol is variablely displayed over the fluctuation period of the special symbol stored in the reserved ball. It may be configured to produce a variable display of 1. With this configuration, the number of times the fusion symbol stops due to coming off can be reduced, and the player can be made to think that the frequency of being notified by a hit is higher than the probability of an actual hit.

Further, it may be configured to execute one variation of the fusion symbol over a period during which a plurality of continuous variation displays of the normal symbol are executed. With this configuration, by connecting the fluctuation time to the reserved ball of the normal symbol that is a hit and making it within one fluctuation of the fusion symbol, it is possible to reduce the frequency at which the fusion symbol stops due to disengagement. Further, the fluctuation time corresponding to the deviation of the normal symbol may be shortened so that a plurality of deviation fluctuations can be completed in a short period of time.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 71 to 72, a display mode displayed by the third symbol display device 81 in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 72A is a diagram showing a display area in the third symbol display device 81. The display area of the third symbol display device 81 in the fourth embodiment is the normal symbol display area Ds1 in the lower part of the normal symbol display area Ds1 with respect to the display area of the third symbol display device 81 in the first embodiment. However, it differs from the first embodiment in that the special figure holding actual number display area Ds5 is added to the lower part of the special symbol display area Ds2, and the normal figure holding number display area Ds3 is changed to the fusion holding number display area Ds6. do. The description of the same configuration will be omitted.

The normal figure reserved actual number display area Ds4 is a display area in which a notification mode indicating the reserved number of ordinary symbols is displayed. In the present embodiment, "a" is used when the number of held items is 0, "b" is used when the number of items held is 1, "c" is used when the number of items held is 2, and the number of items held is 2. When it is 3, "d" is displayed, and when the number of reserved pieces is 4, "e" is displayed (see FIG. 71 (b)). In this way, by displaying the symbols, the actual number of reserved symbols is configured so that it is difficult for the player to understand at first glance. With this configuration, in the present embodiment, the number of reserved pieces displayed in the fusion hold number display area Ds6, which will be described later, may be different due to the execution of pseudo-variation or the like, but they are different. This can be made difficult for the player to notice, and the player can play by recognizing the reserved number displayed in the fusion reserved number display area Ds6 as the actual reserved number.

Further, in the special symbol actual reserved quantity display area Ds5, the reserved quantity of the special symbol is displayed. In the display shown here, the reserved number is notified in the same display form as that displayed in the above-mentioned normal figure reserved actual number display area Ds4. By configuring in this way, it is difficult for the player to understand the actual number of reserved special symbols, and it is the variable display corresponding to the normal symbol that the fusion symbol scrolls and fluctuates. It is difficult to understand whether the display is variable and corresponds to the design. Therefore, the player can concentrate only on the result notified by the fusion symbol, and can play the game without understanding the complicated game characteristics.

Here, the reserved symbols displayed in the fusion reserved quantity display area Ds6 will be described with reference to FIG. 71 (b). Based only on the fact that the game ball passes through the through gate 67 and the hold is newly stored, the "black circle" symbol is displayed in the fusion hold quantity display area Ds6, and the right (hold) that the fusion symbol is variablely displayed. It is notified that it is stored. The fusion hold number display area Ds6 is configured to be able to display up to four "black circle" symbols, and is configured to be able to notify that the number of holds in which the fusion symbol fluctuates is four. In the state where the "black circle" symbol is displayed in the fusion hold quantity display area Ds6, that is, in the state where the hold of the normal symbol is stored, the game ball enters the first entry slot 64a during the change of the special symbol. When the reserved ball of the special symbol is stored, the color of the reserved symbol of the reserved symbol (the reserved symbol with the earliest variation order) stored in the front is changed as shown in FIG. 71 (b). Displayed (eg red, etc.). With this configuration, after the changing special symbol stops changing, the reserved special symbol change starts, but the reserved symbol displayed at that timing is digested (the front row displayed). It is possible to erase the reserved symbol and slide the display position of the reserved symbol displayed after that to display it. If the reserved symbol that has already been variably displayed is displayed, the reserved symbol displayed in the non-variable state (“black circle” symbol) displayed next is variably displayed. .. If there is no reserved symbol displayed next, a newly variable reserved symbol is displayed and displayed. When the reserved symbol is not displayed in the fusion reserved quantity display area Ds6, even if the reserved symbol is stored, the newly variable reserved symbol is similarly displayed.

With this configuration, the reserved symbols displayed in the fusion pending quantity display area Ds6 can be updated (digested) and displayed according to the fluctuation start timing of the special symbol, and the player can suppress discomfort. Can provide the game that was played. Further, when the reserved ball is stored in the special symbol, the color of the reserved symbol is variably displayed, so that the player can have a feeling of expectation for a big hit. In this embodiment, the lottery probability of winning a special symbol is set higher than the lottery probability of winning a normal symbol, so that the actual jackpot expectation is also high. In the present embodiment, the color of the reserved symbol is varied, but the color of the reserved symbol is different from the expected degree based on the lottery result of the reserved ball of the special symbol (for example, red is the expected degree). Is high, blue is low, etc.).

Further, by configuring in this way, there is a difference between the actual number of reserved symbols and the number of pending items displayed in the fusion reserved number display area Ds6, but if there is a difference, the deviation of the ordinary symbol will fluctuate. Pseudo continuous fluctuation accompanied by pseudo stop is executed by the fluctuation of the fusion symbol displayed in a variable manner in response to, and the pending symbol displayed in the fusion hold quantity display area Ds6 is digested at the timing of re-variation after the pseudo stop timing. This makes it possible to match the difference in the number of pending items.

In the present embodiment, the maximum number of pending numbers displayed in the fusion pending quantity display area Ds6 is 4, but the maximum number of 8 is limited to the actual reserved number of normal symbols and special symbols. It may be configured to correspond and notify. In this case, the reserved symbols in the fusion reserved quantity display area Ds6 displayed at the timing when the special symbol changes and the timing when the normal symbol starts to change may be updated.

As described above, FIGS. 72 (a) to 72 (b) are diagrams showing an example of a notice display mode in which a normal symbol is hit during the fluctuation period of the special symbol (including the pseudo fluctuation period). Since it is as described above, the detailed explanation thereof will be omitted.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 73. The fourth embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 are changed. Since the other points are the same as those of the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the fourth embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that the content of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed. The difference between the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 73 (b). Since other points are the same as those in the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 73A is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the main control device 110 according to the fourth embodiment. In the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment, a special symbol holding ball storage area 203j and a special symbol holding ball number counter 203k are added to the first embodiment. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special symbol holding ball storage area 203j has four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and each of these areas has a first random number counter C1 and a first hit type counter C2. , Stop type selection counter C3, and small hit type counter CS3 are stored respectively.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball wins the first ball opening 64a (starting winning), the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS3 are acquired, and the acquired data is the four holding areas (4 holding areas (starting winning). Among the vacant areas (holding 1st area to holding 4th area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of each of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203j is the special symbol. It is shifted (moved) to the reserved ball execution area 203a, and a determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS3 stored in the special symbol reserved ball execution area 203a. ..

When the data is shifted from the reserved first area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203j to the special symbol reserved ball execution area 203a, the reserved first area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) having a smaller area number. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203j, the data is shifted only in the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which the winning data is stored.

In the pachinko machine 10, the ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64a, and as soon as each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS3 is acquired according to the starting winning, those values are included. The special figure winning information command (big hit, missed reach, or missed winning information command) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the special figure winning information command is received by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 receives each counter C1 to C3 from the special figure winning information command (big hit, missed reach, or missed winning information command). Each value of CS3 is extracted and stored in the special figure winning information storage area 223k of the RAM 223 as the special figure winning information.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k is performed by the special symbol variation display (third symbol display device 81) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the first ball opening 64a (starting winning prize). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display) up to 4 times. The initial value of the value N of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203k is set to zero, and the maximum value is obtained each time a ball enters the first entry port 64a and the number of reserved balls of the special symbol increases. 1 is added up to 4 (see S424 in FIG. 76), and 1 is subtracted each time a new variation display of a special symbol is executed (see S223 in FIG. 75).

When a ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64a, if the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k (number of holdings of variation display in the special symbol N) is less than 4, a random number per first. Each value of the counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small hit type counter CS3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203j (FIG. 76). S426). On the other hand, if the value of the special symbol holding ball counter 203k is 4 when the ball wins the first ball opening 64a (starting winning), nothing is newly stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area 203j. Not done (S423: No in FIG. 76).

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k (the number of reserved balls N in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S224 in FIG. 75 and S425 in FIG. 76). The special symbol reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 has a special symbol held in the main control device 110 by the special symbol reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 every time the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k is changed. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of reserved balls in the variable display itself. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the special figure reserved ball counter 223 m of the voice lamp control device 113 is the actual number of reserved balls in the variable display held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the deviation, the deviation can be corrected by the special figure reserved ball number command received next.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the special figure reserved ball number command, and notifies the display control device 114 of the reserved ball number of the special figure each time the reserved ball number changes. Send a hold ball count command for display. The display control device 114 sets the special figure reserved ball number symbol in the special figure reserved actual number display area Ds5 of the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number of the special figure notified by this display reserved ball number command. indicate.

Next, with reference to FIG. 73 (b), the details of the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 73B is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 according to the fourth embodiment. In the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment, the special figure winning information storage area 223k, the special figure holding ball number counter 223m, the special figure pseudo-variation flag 223p, and the special figure pseudo setting for the first embodiment. Flag 223q has been added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The special figure winning information storage area 223k has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), and each of these areas stores prize information. In the pachinko machine 10, when the starting prize for the first ball opening 64a is detected in the main control device 110, the first winning random number counter C1 and the first hit type counter C2 acquired according to the starting winning. And various information obtained when a special symbol corresponding to the starting prize is drawn from each value of the small hit type counter CS3 (win / fail, big hit or small hit type in case of big hit or small hit, fluctuation pattern). Is predicted (estimated) in the main control device 110, and various predicted information is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 by a special figure winning information command (big hit, missed reach, or missed winning information command). You will be notified.

When the special figure winning information command is received, the voice lamp control device 113 displays various information (win / fail, big hit or small hit type in case of big hit or small hit, fluctuation pattern) notified by the special figure winning information command. It is extracted as winning information, and the winning information is stored in the special figure winning information storage area 223k. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the 4 areas (1st to 4th areas). Will be done. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored, and the data corresponding to the oldest prize in time is stored in the first area.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223m is a variation effect (variation) of the special symbol performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), similarly to the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k of the main control device 110. (Display), which is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the special symbol variation effect held in the main control device 110 up to four times. That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the special symbol is set based on the special figure reserved ball number command output from the main control device 110.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the special figure reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special figure reserved ball number counter 223 m counts the number of reserved balls of the special symbol. It is designed to manage.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the start winning is detected and the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added, or in the main control device 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted. If this is the case, a special symbol hold ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203k after addition or subtraction is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 acquires the value of the special symbol hold ball number counter 203k of the main control device 110 from the special figure hold ball number command. Then, it is stored in the special figure reserved ball number counter 223 m (see S1736 in FIG. 81). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the special figure hold ball counter 223 m according to the special figure hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, so that the special symbol hold ball of the main control device 110 is used. The value can be updated while synchronizing with the value of the number counter 203k.

The value of the special figure holding ball number counter 223m is used for displaying the special figure holding ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the special figure reserved ball counter 223 m in response to the reception of the special figure reserved ball number command, and the stored special figure reserved ball number. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223m, a display hold ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the number of hold balls corresponding to the value of the special figure hold ball number counter 223 m of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the symbol is displayed in the special figure reserved actual number display area Ds5 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223m is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of special symbol reserved ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k of the main control device 110. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is suspended.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment>
Next, the control process executed by the main control device 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 to 76. For the same processing as in the first embodiment, the illustration and description thereof will be omitted, and only the different control processing will be illustrated and described.

The timer interrupt process 2 executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 74. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the contents of the timer interrupt process 2. In the timer interrupt process 2 (FIG. 74), the special symbol variation process (S104) is changed to the special symbol variation process 2 (S120) with respect to the timer interrupt process (FIG. 24) in the first embodiment, and the special symbol is changed. The difference is that the start winning process (S105) is added after the variation process 2. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Details of the special symbol variation process 2 (S120) and the start winning process (S105) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 75 and 76.

First, the special symbol variation process 2 (S120) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 75. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation processing 2 (S120). In the special symbol variation processing 2 (FIG. 75, S104) in the fourth embodiment, the processes from S203 to S204 are the processes of S221 to S225 with respect to the special symbol variation processing (FIG. 25, S104) in the first embodiment. It differs in that it has been changed to. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.
In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not changing (S202: No), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k (the number of times of holding the variable display in the special symbol N) is acquired ( S221). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k is larger than 0 (S222), and if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k is 0 (S222 :). No), this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k is not 0 (S222: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203k is subtracted by 1 (S223) and changed by calculation. A special symbol reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k is set (S224). The special figure reserved ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure holding ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203k from the special figure holding ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the special figure holding ball number counter of the RAM 223. Store at 223m.

After setting the special symbol reserved ball number command by the process of S224, the data stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203j is shifted (S225). In the process of S225, the data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203j is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, in each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data.

Next, with reference to FIG. 76, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process 2 (see FIG. 74), determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64a, and if there is a starting winning. In addition, it is a process for executing the hold process of the value indicated by various random number counters.

When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64a (S421). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64a is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball opening 64a (S421: Yes), the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k (the number of times of holding the variable display in the special symbol N) is acquired (S422). .. Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S423).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first ball opening 64a (S421: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64a, the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k is less than 4. If not (S423: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64a (S421: Yes) and the value (N) of the special symbol reserved ball counter 203k is less than 4 (S423: Yes), the number of special symbol reserved balls The value (N) of the counter 203k is added by 1 (S424). Then, a special symbol reserved ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 203k changed by the calculation is set (S425).

The special figure reserved ball number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted toward the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure holding ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 203k from the special figure holding ball number command, and uses the extracted value as the special figure holding ball number counter of the RAM 223. Store at 223m.

After setting the special figure reserved ball number command by the processing of S425, the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second, which were updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing 2 described above. Each value of the winning random number counter C4 and the small hit type counter CS3 is stored in the first area of the empty holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203j of the RAM 203 (S426). .. In the process of S426, the value of the special symbol hold ball counter 203k is referred to, and if the value is 0, the hold first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area. After that, the process of S427 is executed.

In the process of S427, it is determined whether or not the counter value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in S426 is determined to be a big hit at the start of fluctuation. Whether the gaming state at the start of the fluctuation is a high-probability gaming state or a low-probability gaming state is determined from the determination result of the reserved ball stored in the special symbol reserved ball storage area 203j, and the judgment of success or failure is made. Perform in advance (pre-reading judgment of hit / fail judgment result). In the process of S427, not only the hit / fail determination result but also the stop type and the fluctuation pattern are determined and stored in the corresponding hold area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203j.

If it is determined to be a big hit in the process of S427 (S427: Yes), a big hit winning information command, which is a kind of winning information command, is set based on the stop type and the fluctuation pattern (S428). Here, for example, if the jackpot A is a super reach, the jackpot winning information command corresponding to the jackpot A is set. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S427 that it is out of alignment (S427: No), it is determined whether the fluctuation pattern is super reach (S429). In the process of S429, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is super reach (S429: Yes), the out-of-reach winning information command, which is a kind of winning information command, is set (S430). On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern different from that of Super Reach (S429: No), a missed prize information command, which is a kind of prize information command, is set (S431). The winning information command is configured so that the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 can identify the type of the selected fluctuation pattern.

When the winning information command is set, the winning information command is output to the voice lamp control device 113 in the processing of the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (FIG. 33) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

<Regarding the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment>
Next, the control process executed by the voice lamp control device 113 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 86. For the same processing as in the first embodiment, the illustration and description thereof will be omitted, and only the different control processing will be illustrated and described.

The main process 2 executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 77. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the contents of the main process 2. In the main process 2 (FIG. 77), the command determination process (S1612) is changed to the command determination process 2 (S1620) with respect to the main process (FIG. 39) in the first embodiment, and the variable display setting process (S1613) is performed. The difference is that the variation display setting process 2 (S1630) is changed and the pseudo variation setting process (S1614) is changed to the pseudo variation setting process 2 (S1640). As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. Details of the command determination process 2 (S1620), the variation display setting process 2 (S1630), and the pseudo variation setting process 2 (S1640) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 78 to 86.

First, the command determination process 2 (S1620) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 78. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the command determination process 2 (S1620). In the command determination process 2 (FIG. 78, S1620) in the fourth embodiment, the pseudo-variation start setting process (S1708) is the pseudo-variation start setting process with respect to the command determination process (FIG. 40, S1612) in the first embodiment. 2 (S1720) is changed, the processing of S1709 to S1711 is changed to the processing of S1729 to S1730, and the processing of S1715 to S1716 is changed to the processing of S1731 to S1732. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When a stop command is received in the process of S1707 (S1707: Yes), the pseudo-variation start setting process 2 is executed (S1720), and this process is terminated. The details of the pseudo-variation start setting process 2 (S1720) will be described with reference to FIG. 79. However, if the pseudo-variation is set according to the fluctuation stop timing of the special symbol, the pseudo-variation is described. The process of executing (see FIG. 8 (b)) by the fusion symbol is executed.

Here, the pseudo-variation start setting process 2 (S1720) will be described with reference to FIG. 79. In the pseudo-variation start setting process 2 (FIG. 79, S1720) in the fourth embodiment, the process of S2120 is added to the pseudo-variation start setting process (FIG. 41, S1708) in the first embodiment, and the processes of S2120 and S2107 are added. The difference is that the process of S2102 is executed after the process of. As for other processes, the same processes as those in the first embodiment are executed, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of S2101, when it is determined that the pseudo setting flag 223h is off (that is, when the pseudo variation setting is not executed) (S2101: No), the pseudo setting process when the variation is stopped is executed (that is, the pseudo variation setting is not executed). S2120), this process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 80, this pseudo setting process at the time of variable stop (S2120) will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the contents of the pseudo setting process (S2120) when the fluctuation is stopped. In the variable stop pseudo setting process (FIG. 80, S2120), first, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol to be variable stop is out of the special symbol (S2121). If it is determined that the special symbol is a hit (S2121: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment (S2121: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the number of reserved balls of the special figure, that is, the value of the counter of the number of reserved balls of the special figure 223m is 0 (S2122). ).

In the process of S2122, if it is determined that the value of the number of reserved balls in the special figure is not 0, that is, 1 or more (S2122: No), the present process is terminated as it is. Here, in the present embodiment, when the reserved ball of the special symbol is stored, the fluctuation of the special symbol is continuously started after the special symbol is stopped, so that it is not necessary to execute the pseudo fluctuation or the like. , Pseudo-variation settings, etc. are not executed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the number of balls reserved for the special figure is 0 (S2122: Yes), it is determined whether or not there is a hit within the 2 reserved balls of the next normal symbol (S2123). If it is determined that there is a hit within 2 holds of the next normal symbol (S2123: Yes), the continuous pseudo-variation is set in a maximum of 30 seconds (S2124). Then, the process proceeds to S2127. In this way, if the result of the hit / fail judgment of the special symbol to be stopped is also wrong when there is no reserved ball of the special symbol, the fusion symbol is also stopped in a manner of notifying the loss, but the normal symbol 2 If there is a hit in the hold, it can be displayed together with the change of the fusion symbol corresponding to the next change of the special symbol by delaying the fixed stop in the off mode by pseudo fluctuation. .. As a result, it is possible to reduce the frequency at which the notification result of the fusion symbol is stopped and displayed when it is out of alignment.

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no hit within the 2 hold of the next normal symbol (S2123: No), it is the period during which the change of the normal symbol that stops later is executed than the timing at which the change of the special symbol stops. (S2125). Here, the period during which the fluctuation of the normal symbol that stops after the timing at which the fluctuation of the special symbol stops is executed is from the fluctuation of the special symbol in which the fluctuation of the normal symbol that is currently changing is executing the fluctuation. It is a period during which it can be determined that the fluctuation of the normal symbol that will start to fluctuate during the fluctuation of the special symbol will continue to fluctuate even after the fluctuation of the special symbol that is currently fluctuating has stopped.

If it is determined in the process of S2125 that it is not the period during which the change of the normal symbol that stops after the timing at which the change of the special symbol stops is executed (S2125: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is a period in which the fluctuation of the normal symbol that stops later is executed than the timing at which the fluctuation of the special symbol stops (S2125: Yes), the pseudo-variation setting process of the first embodiment (FIG. 45). , S1614), the deviation pseudo-variation is performed after the execution of the special symbol change is completed so that the change of the normal symbol during execution and the stop timing of the deviation pseudo-variation match. Is set in the difference second t1 (see FIG. 10A) until the end of (S2212). Then, the process proceeds to S2127.

In the process of S2127, the value of the effect counter 223 g is acquired (S2127), and the effect type (continuous effect or off effect, variation period) set in the pseudo-variation setting area 223i and the acquired value of the effect counter 223 g are used. Pseudo-variation pattern is selected from the pseudo-variation pattern selection table 222d (see FIG. 18B) according to the effect type (S2128). Then, a display pseudo start command indicating the selected pseudo fluctuation pattern is set (S2129). This display pseudo-variation start command is a command for notifying the display control device 114 of the content of the selected pseudo-variation pattern. After that, the pseudo-variation flag 223c is set to ON (S2130), and this process ends. If the pseudo-variation pattern is continuous, the pseudo-variation pattern is set to continue for a maximum of 30 seconds, and the out-of-order pseudo-variation pattern is blacked out when the pseudo-variation period set in the pseudo-variation setting area 223i elapses. It is processed and set for directing.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by displaying the variation between the normal symbol and the special symbol as a variation of 1 in the fused symbol, the complicated game playability is easily notified to the player, and the game can be easily played. Can be done. Further, since the flow speed of the game ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is reduced upstream of the first entry port 650a so as to correspond to the period in which the normal symbol hits by the crune member 660, the game ball is played by the launcher. Even during the period when the ball is not fired, the chance of winning a prize in the first ball entrance 65a is increased.

Further, when the deviation fluctuation of the special symbol is executed, the determination result within the 2 hold of the normal symbol is determined, and if the holding ball that is a hit is stored, the period longer than the end of the fluctuation. Since the determination result of the deviation is not notified and the pseudo variation is executed, the variation of the special symbol can be connected by the variation of the fusion symbol of one variation and produced by hitting the next normal symbol.

Returning to FIG. 79, the description will be continued. After the processing of the fluctuation stop pseudo setting processing (S2120) is executed, the processing of S2102 is executed. Here, the command to indicate that the pseudo-variation is executed when the special symbol is stopped and the pseudo-variation is executed, and the fusion symbol is stopped and displayed when the fusion symbol is stopped and displayed without the pseudo-variation. Each of the indicated commands is set as a display stop command (S2102). After that, this process ends.

Next, the explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 78. In the process of S1707, when it is determined that the stop command has not been received (S1707: No), it is determined whether the reserved ball number command of the normal figure (ordinary symbol) or the special figure (special symbol) has been received (S1707: No). S1729). When it is determined that the reserved ball number command of the normal figure or the special figure is received (S1729: Yes), the reserved ball number command reception process is executed (S1730). In the hold ball number command reception process (S1730), when a command indicating the hold ball number of a normal figure or a special figure is received, the hold ball number is updated and stored, and the third symbol display device 81 displays the command. A process of setting to update the display of each actual hold quantity to be displayed to the number corresponding to the command, a process of instructing the display of the hold symbol to be displayed in the fusion hold quantity display area, and the like are executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 81, the reserved ball number command reception process (S1730) in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the content of the control process of the hold ball number command reception process (S1730).

In the hold ball number command reception process (FIG. 81, S1730), first, it is determined whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1731). If it is determined that the command for the number of reserved balls is not received, the process of (S1733) is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the normal symbol reserved ball number command has been received (S1731: Yes), the reserved ball number of the normal figure is extracted from the received command and the corresponding reserved ball number is set to the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 223d. It is stored (stored), and is updated by adding 1 to the value of the hold count counter 223j. Here, the reserved ball number counter 223j is a counter for displaying the reserved symbol in the fusion reserved number display area Ds6, and is configured to display the reserved symbol corresponding to the value of the reserved ball number counter 223j.

After executing the process of S1732, the process of S1733 is executed. In the process of S1733, it is determined whether or not the special figure reserved ball number command is received from the main control device 110 (S1733). If it is determined that the special figure reserved ball count command has not been received (S1733: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure reserved ball number command has been received (S1733: Yes), the reserved ball number of the special figure (special symbol) is extracted from the received command and corresponds to the corresponding reserved ball number. The value is stored in the special figure reserved ball number counter 223m (S1734). It is determined whether the value of the special figure holding ball counter 223m is a value larger than 0, that is, whether the holding ball of the special symbol is stored (S1735). When it is determined that the value of the special figure reserved ball number counter 223m is 0 (S1735: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure reserved ball number counter 223m is larger than 0 (S1735: Yes), the pseudo-variation setting flag 223h is turned on, that is, the execution of the pseudo-variation is already set. It is determined whether or not it is done (S1736). When the pseudo-variation setting flag 223h is set to on (S1736: Yes), the pseudo-variation setting flag 223h is set to off (S1737), and the process of S1738 is executed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the pseudo setting flag 223h is off (S1736: No), the process of S1738 is executed.

Here, when the special symbol reserved ball count command is received and a new memory is stored from the state where there is no reserved ball of the special symbol, if the pseudo-variation already set is set, the setting is set. It is configured to execute the process of canceling (corresponding to the process of S1737). As a result, it is possible to suppress the problem that the pseudo-variation is executed in the fused symbol when the variation of the special symbol is continuously started.

In the process of S1738, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the fluctuation period (S1738). When it is determined that the special symbol is in the fluctuation period (S1738: Yes), the value of the hold count counter 223j is larger than 0, that is, the hold symbol is displayed in the fusion hold number display area Ds6. It is determined whether the state is present (S1739). When it is determined that the value of the hold quantity counter 223j is larger than 0 (S1739: Yes), the fusion hold symbol corresponding to the special figure hold ball number counter 223m (hold displayed in the fusion hold number display area Ds6). The display of the symbol) is selected based on the lottery result stored in the special figure winning information storage area 223k (S1740). Here, if the lottery result of the newly entered special symbol is a hit, the reserved ball is likely to be changed to a reserved symbol with a high expectation such as red, and if it is out of the range, the expectation such as blue etc. A lottery that is easy to change to a low reserved symbol is executed. When the reserved ball of the special symbol is stored, the color of the displayed reserved symbol is always changed and displayed. On the other hand, when the value of the hold number counter 223j is 0 (S1739: No), 1 is added to the value of the hold number counter 223j to update (S1741). After that, the process of S1740 is executed. When the value of the hold number counter 223j is 0, it means that the hold symbol is not displayed in the fusion hold number display area Ds6. Therefore, in order to newly display the hold symbol, the value of the hold number counter 223j is 1. The color of the newly displayed reserved symbol is determined by the process of S1740. In the process of S1741, a display hold number command indicating the value of the special figure hold number counter 223m and the value of the hold number counter 223j is set. Also in the process of S1749, a display command for variably displaying the reserved symbol is set.

Returning to FIG. 78, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S1712 that the normal map fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S1712: No), the process of S1731 is executed. In the process of S1731, it is determined whether or not the normal figure or special figure winning information command has been received (S1731). When it is determined that the normal figure or special figure winning information command has been received (S1731: Yes), the information indicated by the received normal figure or special figure winning information command is stored in the normal figure winning information storage area 223a and the special figure winning information storage. Each is stored in the area 223k (S1732). After that, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 82, the variation display setting process 2 (S1630), which is one of the processes in the main process 2 (see FIG. 77) executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the contents of the control process of the variable display setting process 2 (S1630). In the variation display setting process 2 (S1630) in the fourth embodiment, the variation pattern selection process (S1803) is the variation pattern selection process 2 (S1820) with respect to the variation display setting process (FIG. 42, S1613) in the first embodiment. ), The normal map variation pattern selection process (S1805) is changed to the normal map variation pattern selection process 2 (S1830), which is different from the first embodiment. Since other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

If it is determined in the process of S1801 that the variation start flag 223e is on (S1801: Yes), the variation pattern selection process 2 is executed (S1820). In the variation pattern selection process 2 (S1820), a process of selecting a variation pattern of the fusion symbol corresponding to the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol is executed.

Next, the variation pattern selection process 2 (S1820) will be described with reference to FIG. 83. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the contents of the control process of the variation pattern selection process 2 (S1820). In the variation pattern selection process 2 (S1820) in the fourth embodiment, the processes S1908 to S1911 are deleted from the variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 43, S1802) in the first embodiment, and the pseudo variation starts. The difference is that the discrimination process (S1920) is added.

Next, with reference to FIG. 84, a pseudo-variation start time determination process (S1920), which is one process in the variation pattern selection process 2 (FIG. 83, S1820) in the fourth embodiment, will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the contents of the control process of the pseudo-variation start time determination process (S1920). In the pseudo-variation start time determination process (S1920), the setting of whether or not to execute the pseudo-variation in the fusion symbol is executed after the variation is completed at the variation start timing of the special symbol.

In the pseudo-variation start time determination process (S1920), first, it is determined whether or not the hit / fail determination result of the special symbol of the variation is out of order (S1921). If it is determined that the hit / fail determination result is a hit (S1921: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hit / fail determination result is out of order, it is determined whether the value of the special figure reserved ball number counter 223m is larger than 0 (S1922). When it is determined that the value of the special figure holding ball counter 223m is a value larger than 0 (S1922: Yes), the special figure fluctuation is continuously executed and it is not necessary to execute the pseudo fluctuation, so that the pseudo fluctuation is executed. Ends this process without setting. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure holding ball number counter 223m is 0 (S1922: No), whether the holding that is a hit is stored in the 2 holdings of the normal symbol, or the general drawing winning information storage area 223a (S1923). When it is determined that the hold that is a hit is stored in the 2 hold of the normal symbol (S1923: Yes), the pseudo setting flag 223h is set to ON (S1924). The fluctuation time of the pseudo fluctuation is set to a maximum of 30 seconds (S1925). After that, this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S1923, when it is determined that the hold that is a hit is not stored in the 2 hold of the normal symbol (S1923: No), this process is terminated.

As described above, in the fourth embodiment, when the change of the special symbol starts, the result of the hit / fail determination at the start of the change is out of order, and in the state where the reserved ball of the special symbol is not stored, the hit is within 2 hold of the normal symbol. If the reserved sphere is stored, the process of setting the pseudo-variation of the fusion symbol is executed after the end of the special symbol fluctuation time at which the fluctuation starts. Therefore, even if the fusion symbol is notified of the deviation determination result, the variation of the next hit normal symbol ends, and the variation of the fusion symbol does not stop until the end of the period in which the winning game is executed. In addition, since it is continued by pseudo-variation, it is possible to suppress the frequency of being notified of the deviation, and it is possible to suppress the problem that the player is discouraged and the motivation for the game is reduced.

In this embodiment, the pseudo-variation is set when there is a hit within 2 holds of the normal symbol, but 1 hold may be used, or 4 holds may be appropriately determined and set. Furthermore, when the reserved ball of the special symbol is stored, the pseudo fluctuation is not set, but the fluctuation period of the fusion symbol is set so as to be combined with the fluctuation period of the reserved special symbol. It may be configured in. In such a case, when the reservation of the special symbol to be a hit is stored, the expectation for the hit can be increased as the fluctuation period of the fusion symbol is longer by configuring the structure so that it can be easily combined.

Returning to FIG. 82, the description will be continued. In the process of S1804, when the normal map variation start flag 223b is set to ON (S1804: Yes), the normal map variation pattern selection process 2 is executed (S1830). In the normal symbol variation pattern selection process 2 (S1830), at the start of variation of the normal symbol, a process of selecting the variation pattern of the fusion symbol or the auxiliary symbol corresponding to the variation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 85, the normal map variation pattern selection process 2 (S1830), which is one process in the variation display setting process 2 (FIG. 82, S1630), will be described. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the contents of the control process of the normal map variation pattern selection process 2 (S1830). In the normal map variation pattern selection process 2 (S1830) in the fourth embodiment, each process of S2021 to S2022 is added to the normal map variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 44, S1805) in the first embodiment. It differs in that. Since other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

After executing the process of S2005, it is determined whether or not the hit / fail determination result of the normal symbol that starts to fluctuate is a hit (S2021). When it is determined that the result of the hit / fail determination of the normal symbol that starts to fluctuate is a hit (S2021: Yes), the opening notice is set corresponding to the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (S2022). Note that this opening notice is set only when the special symbol is changing and it hits the period during which the change of the special symbol is executed (including the period during which the corresponding fusion symbol is quasi-changed). The opening notice set here is a notice mode for notifying the player of the launch of the game ball shown in FIGS. 72 (a) to 72 (b).

With this configuration, when the special symbol is fluctuating, the fusion symbol is scrolled and displayed in response to the fluctuation of the special symbol, and it is difficult to determine the result of the hit / fail judgment of the normal symbol. However, since the opening notice is executed 3 seconds before the normal symbol hits, it is possible to suppress the problem of missing the opportunity to insert the game ball into the first entry slot 64a.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. 77. After the process of the variation display setting process 2 (S1630) is executed, the process of the pseudo variation setting process 2 (S1640) is executed. In the pseudo-variation setting process 2 (S1640), it is determined whether it is the timing to execute the pseudo-variation, and a process of executing the display setting of the pseudo-variation and the like is executed.

Here, the pseudo-variation setting process 2 (S1640) will be described with reference to FIG. 86. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the contents of the control process of the pseudo-variation setting process 2. The pseudo-variation setting process 2 (S1640) in the fourth embodiment is the first embodiment in that the processes of S2221 to S2222 are added to the pseudo-variation setting process (FIGS. 45 and S1614) in the first embodiment. Is different. Since the other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of S2201, when the pseudo-variation flag 223c is off, that is, when the pseudo-variation is not executed in the fusion symbol (S2201: No), it is determined whether it is the stop timing of the out-of-order special figure variation (S2221). ). If it is determined that it is not the stop timing of the out-of-order special figure fluctuation (S2221: No), this process is terminated. It is determined whether the value of the special figure reserved ball number counter 223m is larger than 0 (S2222). When it is determined that the value of the special figure reserved ball number counter 223m is larger than 0 (S2222: Yes), this process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the special figure reserved ball number counter 223m is 0 (S222: No), the process of S2207 is executed.

The processes of S2207 to S2213 have already been described in the first embodiment, but if the conditions for setting the pseudo-variation are met by determining whether to set the pseudo-variation, the setting of the pseudo-variation is executed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the reserved ball is also configured to be stored in the special symbol, and the variation corresponding to the variation between the normal symbol and the special symbol is executed by one variation in the fusion symbol. bottom. As a result, even if the game is complicated, the player can easily play the game by looking at the fusion pattern and playing the game.

In addition, when the fusion symbol corresponding to the change of the special symbol is stopped and displayed, if the normal figure is changing and there is a period until the timing when the next normal figure change starts, the changing normal figure is stopped and displayed. Since the pseudo-variation is executed in the period until it is executed, it is possible to make the stop and start of the fusion symbol continuous at a good tempo.

In addition, when the fusion symbol corresponding to the change of the special symbol is stopped and displayed, if the hold that is a hit is stored in the 2 holds of the normal symbol, the change of the hold that is a hit is stopped and the winning game is played. The fluctuation of the fusion symbol is not fixedly stopped by the pseudo-variation until the period during which is executed is completed, and when the ball enters the first entry port 64a, the fusion symbol continues until the period of the special symbol fluctuation. Since the fluctuation is executed, it is possible to reduce the chance that the fusion symbol is stopped and displayed in the notification result indicating the deviation, and it is possible to suppress the problem of reducing the motivation of the player.

In this embodiment, the pseudo-variation is executed when the fluctuation of the fusion symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, but the pseudo-variation is executed when the fluctuation of the fusion symbol corresponding to the fluctuation of the normal symbol is stopped. It may be configured in.

A pachinko machine may be a combination of some or all of the above-described embodiments.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

Hereinafter, in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments will be shown.

<Characteristic A group> (Displays a design that combines normal and special figures)
A first determination means for executing the first determination based on the establishment of the first determination condition, and a second determination means for executing the second determination based on the establishment of a second determination condition different from the first determination condition. When the first determination result by the first determination means is a specific determination result, the granting means for giving a specific period during which the second determination condition is likely to be satisfied, and the second determination result by the second determination means. In a gaming machine having a privileged game executing means for executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player when is a specific second determination result, the first identification is made based on the establishment of the first determination condition. If the display means for dynamically displaying information and the second determination condition are satisfied during the period during which the first identification information is dynamically displayed, the result of the second determination by the second determination means is used. The gaming machine A1 is characterized by having a notification control means for notifying the information by the first identification information.

Here, for a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, whether to change the state of the starting port provided on the gaming board from the first state in which the gaming ball is difficult to enter to the second state in which the gaming ball is easy to enter. There is one that executes the first lottery of whether or not. In such a conventional gaming machine, a second lottery is executed based on a start winning prize at the start opening, and when a specific lottery result is obtained in the second lottery, a winning game advantageous to the player is executed. In this type of gaming machine, a display device composed of a liquid crystal display or the like is provided, and each time the second lottery is executed, the display device executes a variable display of a symbol indicating the result of the second lottery. It is common. Further, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, a symbol is executed based on the entry of the gaming ball depending on whether the gaming ball has entered the starting port in the first state or the second state. It has also been proposed to improve the interest by changing the display mode of the variable display (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the mode of the variable display of the symbol indicating the result of the second lottery is merely changed depending on whether or not the ball has entered the starting port in the second state, and the first lottery is performed. The result itself was displayed regardless of the result of the second lottery. Therefore, since the result of the first lottery and the result of the second lottery are displayed separately on the display device, it may be difficult to understand the result of each lottery during the game. Therefore, there is a problem that the player may not be able to easily perform the game.

According to the gaming machine A1, the second determination result is also notified by the first identification information dynamically displayed based on the establishment of the first determination condition, so that the player pays attention to the first identification information to play the game. If this is done, the timing at which the first determination condition is satisfied and the second determination result can be known, and the game can be easily performed.

In the gaming machine A1, when the result of the first determination is a specific determination result, the first identification information is the first identification in a specific display mode based on the elapse of a predetermined period. A gaming machine A2 comprising a first display control means for displaying a part of information.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine A1, information based on the result of the first determination is displayed by the first identification information, so that the player can see the first determination and the second by the first identification information. There is an effect that the result of the judgment can be notified together.

The gaming machine A2 has a first period determining means for determining a first period based on the result of the first determination, and the predetermined period is the first period. Machine A3.

In the gaming machine A2 or A3, if the second determination condition is not satisfied even after the specific period has elapsed after the specific display mode is displayed by the first identification information, the first identification is performed. A gaming machine A4 characterized in that the dynamic display of information is stopped.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of either the gaming machine A2 or A3, the effect that the first identification information is dynamically displayed for a long time and the problem that the result of the next first determination cannot be displayed can be suppressed. There is.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, a variable ball-entry means that can be changed into a first state in which the game ball can enter and a second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the first state. The second determination means is established based on the fact that a game ball has entered the variable ball entry means, and the granting means has the variable ball entry means in the specific period. A gaming machine A5 characterized by being variable to a state.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A4, when the first determination is a specific determination result, the variable ball entry means is changed to the first state, so that the player It is possible to set a period during which it is easy to enter the variable ball entry means, and there is an effect that the game is changed and the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the game machines A1 to A5, the first identification information is configured by displaying a combination of a plurality of identification symbol rows, and is displayed in at least one of the plurality of identification symbol rows. The feature is that the result of the first determination is notified by the information, and the result of the second determination is notified by another symbol sequence including the identification symbol sequence to which the result of the first determination is notified. Game machine A6.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines A1 to A5, the symbol sequence in which the first determination result and the second determination result are shared by the first identification information composed of a plurality of identification symbol sequences. It has the effect that it can be notified by and can be configured in an easy-to-understand manner by reducing the number of symbol rows.

<Characteristic B group> (Structure to win a prize according to the usual figure)
It is possible to change between a launching means capable of launching a gaming ball, a first state in which the gaming ball launched by the launching means can enter, and a second state in which it is more difficult for the gaming ball to enter than the first state. The first determination means for executing the first determination based on the variable ball entry means and the game ball entering the variable entry means, and the first determination by the first determination means are specific first. 1 A privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player based on the determination result, a second determination means for executing a second determination based on the establishment of the determination condition, and a second determination means thereof. Based on the fact that the second determination by the determination means is a specific second determination result, the variable control means for changing the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state, and the variable ball entry means. Is also arranged on the upstream side, and is characterized by having a delay means for discharging the game ball in the direction in which the variable ball entry means is arranged after rolling the game ball for a specific period or more. Game machine B1.

Here, for a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, whether to change the state of the starting port provided on the gaming board from the first state in which the gaming ball is difficult to enter to the second state in which the gaming ball is easy to enter. There is one that executes the first lottery of whether or not. In such a conventional gaming machine, a second lottery is executed based on a start winning prize at the start opening, and when a specific lottery result is obtained in the second lottery, a winning game advantageous to the player is executed. In this type of gaming machine, a display device composed of a liquid crystal display or the like is provided, and each time the second lottery is executed, the display device executes a variable display of a symbol indicating the result of the second lottery. It is common. Further, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, a symbol is executed based on the entry of the gaming ball depending on whether the gaming ball has entered the starting port in the first state or the second state. It has also been proposed to improve the interest by changing the display mode of the variable display (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, even if the state of the starting port is changed to the second state based on the first lottery, the game ball reaches the starting port in a timely manner during the second state. If not done, the second lottery would not be executed. Therefore, there is a problem that it becomes difficult to insert the game ball into the start port when the start port is in the second state during the period when the player is not firing the game ball.

According to the gaming machine B1, since the gaming ball is ejected after being rolled by the delaying means upstream of the variable entering means for a specific period or more, the variable entering means is used during the period when the gaming ball is not launched by the launching means. Even in the first state, there is an effect that the gaming ball can easily enter the variable ball entry means.

The game machine B1 has a specific area through which the game ball can pass and a detection means capable of detecting that the game ball has passed through the specific area, and is based on the detection of the game ball by the detection means. , The gaming machine B2, characterized in that the above-mentioned determination conditions are satisfied.

With the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine B1, the determination condition is satisfied when the gaming ball passes through a specific area, so that the player can be interested in the rolling of the gaming ball. There is an effect.

In the gaming machine B2, the delay means is provided by a ball entry portion on which the game ball can enter, a flow speed deceleration section that reduces the flow rate of the game ball that has entered the ball entry section, and a flow speed deceleration section thereof. It has at least a discharge portion for discharging the game ball to the outside of the delay means, and the ball entry portion is arranged at a position where the game ball that has passed through the specific region is easily guided. Characterized gaming machine B3.

In the gaming machine B3, the gaming machine B4 is characterized in that the gaming ball deceleration unit has at least a rolling path in which the gaming ball rolls in a spiral shape.

In the gaming machine B3 or B4, the gaming machine B5 is characterized in that the gaming ball deceleration unit has at least a mortar-shaped rolling path in which the gaming ball rolls in a circumferential shape.

In any of the gaming machines B1 to B5, after the display means for displaying the identification information based on the result of the second determination according to the second determination condition and the identification information displayed on the display means are dynamically displayed. The variable control means has the dynamic display means for stopping and displaying with the identification information based on the result of the second determination, and the variable control means has the identification based on the specific second determination result by the dynamic display means. When the information is stopped and displayed, the variable ball-entry means is changed from the second state to the first state, and the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means during the specific period. The gaming machine B6 is characterized in that it is configured in a period shorter than the dynamic display period.

In the gaming machine B6, the specific period is composed of a period in which the period required for the gaming ball discharged from the delay means to enter the variable ball entry means is deducted from the dynamic display period. The gaming machine B7 characterized by being.

<Characteristic C group> (Pseudo fluctuation after special map fluctuation according to the normal map fluctuation start timing)
Based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, the acquisition means for acquiring information, the storage means capable of storing the information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined number, and the establishment of the first determination condition. Based on this, the first determination means that executes the first determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and the first effect when the first determination is executed by the first determination means. When the first display means for displaying the result of the first determination and the first display means display that the first determination is a specific result after the execution during the effect period, the gaming ball is inserted. A second determination means for executing a second determination and a second determination by the second determination means are executed based on the entry means for facilitating the ball and the entry of the game ball into the entry means. In this case, after the second effect is executed in the second effect period, the second display means for displaying the result of the second determination and the second display means indicate that the second determination is a specific result. When a specific condition is satisfied in a gaming machine having a privileged game executing means for executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player when displayed, the end timing of the second effect period and the first The gaming machine C1 is characterized by having a correction means for correcting the difference from the start timing of the effect period.

According to the gaming machine C1, the difference between the end timing of the second effect period and the start timing of the first effect period is corrected so as to be small, so that the first effect and the second effect can be easily executed alternately. , It is possible to suppress the trouble that the players get tired of the game by enjoying the mutual production. Further, when the first determination is a specific determination result, it becomes easier for the game ball to enter the ball entry means, so that the relationship between the end timing of the first effect period and the start timing of the second effect period increases. There is an effect that the production can be executed more alternately.

From the second effect period determining means for determining the second effect period and the second effect period determined by the second effect period determination means on the gaming machine C1 based on the execution of the second determination. It has a duplication determining means for determining whether the first effect is executed over a period outside the period or based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and the correction means has the first effect over a period outside the period. The gaming machine C2 is characterized in that the correction is executed when it is determined that the above-mentioned correction is executed.

According to the gaming machine C2, the correction is executed only when there is a difference from the execution start of the first effect, so that the effect that the start timing of the first effect and the end timing of the second effect can be closer to each other can be obtained. be.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the determination result determined by the first determination means is determined in advance before the first determination condition for the information stored in the storage means is satisfied. When it is determined in advance by the determination means and the pre-first determination means that the specific determination result is determined, the first effect is executed until the end of the first effect based on the first determination for the information. 2 The gaming machine C3 characterized by having an extension means for extending the production period.

According to the gaming machine C3, since the second effect is extended until the timing when the game ball next enters the ball entry means, the interval at which the second effect is continuously executed is shortened, and the player can be early. It is possible to suppress the trouble of getting bored.

In either of the gaming machines C2 and C3, the duplication determining means executes the determination with the execution start timing of the second effect as the fulfillment of the predetermined condition.

In the gaming machine C4, since the second effect period can be determined in advance at the execution start timing of the second effect according to the execution start timing of the first effect, there is an effect that control can be easily performed.

In any of the gaming machines C2 to C4, the duplication discriminating means executes the discriminating on the condition that the predetermined period has been reached since the start of the second staging period, assuming that the predetermined condition is satisfied. A gaming machine C5 characterized by being present.

According to the gaming machine C5, the end timing of the second effect can be adjusted to the start timing of the first effect during the second effect period, so that when the first effect is executed after the start of the second effect. Has the effect of being able to make corrections.

<Characteristic D group> (Pseudo-change is executed after the special figure change by pre-reading the judgment result of the normal symbol)
Based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, the acquisition means for acquiring information, the storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the establishment of the first determination condition. Based on this, the first determination means that executes the first determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and the first effect when the first determination is executed by the first determination means. When the first display means for displaying the result of the first determination and the first display means display that the first determination is a specific result after the execution during the effect period, the game ball is inserted. A second determination means for executing a second determination based on the entry means for facilitating the ball and the entry of a game ball into the entry means, and a second determination by the second determination means are executed. In this case, after the second effect is executed in the second effect period, the second display means for displaying the result of the second determination and the second display means indicate that the second determination is a specific result. In a gaming machine having a privileged game executing means for executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player when displayed, the information is stored in the storage means before the first determination condition is satisfied. Based on the information, the pre-determination means for preliminarily determining the determination result determined by the first determination means and the second effect period are variable based on the determination result determined by the pre-determination means. A gaming machine D1 characterized by having a variable setting means for setting.

Here, for a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, whether to change the state of the starting port provided on the gaming board from the first state in which the gaming ball is difficult to enter to the second state in which the gaming ball is easy to enter. There is one that executes the first lottery of whether or not. In such a conventional gaming machine, a second lottery is executed based on a start winning prize at the start opening, and when a specific lottery result is obtained in the second lottery, a winning game advantageous to the player is executed. In this type of gaming machine, a display device composed of a liquid crystal display or the like is provided, and each time the second lottery is executed, the display device executes a variable display of a symbol indicating the result of the second lottery. It is common. Further, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, a symbol is executed based on the entry of the gaming ball depending on whether the gaming ball has entered the starting port in the first state or the second state. It has also been proposed to improve the interest by changing the display mode of the variable display (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147965).

However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the mode of the variable display of the symbol indicating the result of the second lottery is merely changed depending on whether or not the ball has entered the starting port in the second state, and the first lottery is performed. The result itself was displayed regardless of the result of the second lottery. Therefore, since the result of the first lottery and the result of the second lottery are displayed separately and independently on the display device, there is a problem that it is difficult to improve the relationship between the first lottery and the second lottery.

According to the gaming machine D1, the determination result of the first determination is determined in advance to change the second effect period, so that the determination result of the first determination is executed after the start of the execution of the second effect. The second effect period can be changed, and there is an effect that the first effect and the second effect can be executed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

The gaming machine D1 has a first effect period determining means for determining one effect period from a plurality of periods when the first determination is executed, and the variable setting means is a front. When the pre-article determination means determines that the first determination has a specific result, the first effect is continued until at least the end of the first effect period corresponding to the determined first determination. The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the second effect period of the second effect being executed or executed is variably set based on the longest period that can be determined by the period determination means.

According to the gaming machine D2, the second effect period is at least continued until the end of the first effect in which the next first determination is a specific determination result, so that the player can continuously execute the second effect in a short period of time. It has the effect of making it easier to play and improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine D1 or D2, when the second determination is the specific determination result, the gaming machine D1 or D2 has a prohibiting means for prohibiting the second effect period from being changed by the variable setting means. The featured gaming machine D3.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1 or D2, when the second determination is a specific determination result, the second effect period is not changed by the prohibition means, so that the privileged game is executed. It has the effect of suppressing the variable start timing.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the first effect and the second effect are at least executed by dynamically displaying a common effect symbol on the display means. D4.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect played by any of the game machines D1 to D3, the first effect and the second effect are executed by dynamically displaying a common effect symbol, so that the player is given the first effect. There is an effect that the first effect and the second effect can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

<Characteristic E group> (Notifies the jackpot judgment by the fluctuation of the normal map and the fluctuation of the special map)
Based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, the acquisition means for acquiring information, the storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the establishment of the first determination condition. Based on this, the first determination means that executes the first determination based on the information stored in the storage means, and the result of the first determination when the first determination is executed by the first determination means. The first effect executing means for executing the first effect based on the above, the ball entry means for facilitating the entry of the game ball when the first determination is a specific result, and the game ball for the ball entry means. A second determination means for executing a second determination based on the fact that the ball has entered the ball, and a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the second determination by the second determination means is a specific determination result. The privilege game executing means to be performed, and the continuous effect executing means for executing the continuous effect based on the result of the second determination, which is the continuation of the first effect when the second determination by the second determination means is executed. The gaming machine E1 characterized by having the above.

According to the gaming machine E1, since the results of the first determination and the second determination are executed in a continuous effect, it is possible to make the player appear as if the two determinations are the result of one determination. effective.

In the gaming machine E1, the first effect executed based on the first determination being a specific result is executed at least continuously during the period when the ball entry means is easy to enter. A gaming machine E2 characterized by being present.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effect of the game machine E1, the first effect is continuously executed during the period when the ball means is easy to enter, so that the game ball enters the ball entry means. There is an effect that it can be easily continued with the continuous effect executed when the second determination is executed.

The game machine E1 or E2 has a display means for dynamically displaying a plurality of symbol sequences as the first effect, and the first effect executing means has the plurality of symbol sequences based on the result of the first determination. Of these, at least two are stopped by a combination indicating the result of the first determination, and the continuous effect executing means uses the second symbol sequence other than the symbol sequence stopped by the first staging executing means. The gaming machine E3 is characterized in that it is stopped by a combination of symbols stopped by the first staging execution means in the previous term and a combination of related symbols based on the result of the determination.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1 or E2, it is possible to combine a plurality of symbols and notify the first determination and the second determination in order, as compared with the case where the symbols are set separately. Has the effect of being able to simplify and notify.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the gaming machine E4 is characterized in that the ball entering means is configured so that the ball cannot be entered except during the period during which the ball can be easily entered.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E3, the second determination is not executed except when the first determination is a specific determination result, so that the second determination is executed. It has the effect of making it easier to understand the timing.

<Characteristic F group> (Game quality)
Based on the establishment of the first determination condition, the first determination means for executing the determination in which the determination probability resulting in the specific first determination result is set to the first probability, and the specific first determination by the first determination means. When it is determined to be the result, the ball entry means in which the period for facilitating the entry of the game ball is set, and the determination that the specific second determination result is obtained when the game ball enters the entry means. A second determination means that executes a determination in which the probability is set to the second probability, and a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the second determination means determines that the specific second determination result is executed. A gaming machine F1 characterized by having a privileged gaming execution means.

According to the gaming machine F1, since the probability that the privilege game is executed can be set by combining the first determination probability and the second determination probability, there is an effect that a novel game can be provided to the player.

When the second determination means determines in the gaming machine F1 that the second determination result is a special second determination result different from the specific second determination result, the area in which the gaming ball can enter and the area in which the gaming ball can enter are entered. It has a specific area through which the ball has passed, and the privileged game executing means is characterized in that the privileged game is executed based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the specific area. Gaming machine F2.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1, even if it is not determined as a specific second determination result, a special second determination result is obtained, so that the gaming ball can pass through a specific area. There is an effect that the interest of the game can be further improved because the opportunity to become is given.

The gaming machine F3 is characterized in that the probability of being determined as the special second determination result is set higher than the second probability in the gaming machine F2.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F2, the frequency of being determined as a special second determination result increases, and the player gets tired of performing a game of trying to enter a specific area. Can be prevented.

In the gaming machine F2 or F3, a variable member that can be changed into a first state in which a gaming ball that has entered the region can pass through the specific region and a second state in which it is more difficult to pass than the first state. The gaming machine F4 is characterized by having a variable control means for varying the variable member from the second state to the first state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F2 or F3, it is possible to change between a state in which the gaming machine F2 or F3 can pass and a state in which it is difficult to pass through the specific area. It has the effect of being able to be controlled.

The gaming machine F4 has a timing determining means for determining the timing at which the gaming ball can enter the region based on the determination of the special second determination result by the second determining means. The gaming machine F5 is characterized in that the predetermined condition is satisfied at a predetermined predetermined timing based on the special second determination result.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F4, it is possible to change whether or not the gaming ball can pass to the specific area at the timing determined by the timing determining means, so that the gaming ball can be easily reached to the specific area. There is an effect that the ratio of passing through can be controlled.

Each of the gaming machines is a gaming machine Z1 characterized by being a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is equipped with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a necessary condition for winning (or passing through the winning opening), the identification information dynamically displayed in the display means may be fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. Further, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

The gaming machine Z2, wherein each gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the display of the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, etc. are typical examples of the game medium.

The gaming machine Z3 is characterized in that each of the gaming machines is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
Here, for a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, whether to change the state of the starting port provided on the gaming board from the first state in which the gaming ball is difficult to enter to the second state in which the gaming ball is easy to enter. There is one that executes the first lottery of whether or not. In such a conventional gaming machine, a second lottery is executed based on a start winning prize at the start opening, and when a specific lottery result is obtained in the second lottery, a winning game advantageous to the player is executed. As a result, both the result of the first lottery and the result of the second lottery were focused on to improve the interest of the player (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-325886).
However, in the gaming machines such as the above examples, it is necessary to improve the interest of the gaming, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.
The present technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in playing a game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 executes a determination in which the determination probability of a specific first determination result is set to the first probability based on the establishment of the first determination condition. When the determination means and the first determination means determine the specific first determination result, the ball entry means for which the period for facilitating the entry of the game ball is set, and the ball entry means for the game ball. Is determined to be the specific second determination result by the second determination means that executes the determination in which the determination probability that becomes the specific second determination result is set to the second probability when the ball enters the ball, and the second determination means. It has a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when the game is played.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 is a game when the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 is determined by the second determination means to have a special second determination result different from the specific second determination result. It has an area where a ball can enter and a specific area through which a game ball that has entered the area can pass, and the privileged game executing means is based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the specific area. The above-mentioned privilege game is executed.
In the gaming machine of the technical idea 3, the probability of being determined as the special second determination result is set higher than the second probability in the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the first determination means for executing the determination in which the determination probability that is the specific first determination result is set to the first probability based on the establishment of the first determination condition, When the first determination means determines the result of the specific first determination, the ball entry means for which a period during which the game ball is easy to enter is set, and the game ball enters the ball entry means. In this case, when the second determination means for executing the determination in which the determination probability for the specific second determination result is set to the second probability and the second determination means determine the specific second determination result. , A privileged game execution means for executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1. That is, when the second determination means determines that the second determination result is a special second determination result different from the specific second determination result, the area where the game ball can enter and the game in which the game ball enters the area. It has a specific area through which the ball can pass, and the privilege game executing means executes the privilege game based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the specific area. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1 or 2. That is, the probability of being determined as the special second determination result is set higher than the second probability. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest can be improved.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
64a First ball entry port (ball entry means)
81 Third symbol display device (display means)
203b Storage means
S304 Second determination means
S512 First determination means
S606 acquisition means
S607 Preliminary first determination means
S1004 privilege game execution means
S2209 Part of variable means

Claims (3)

Based on the establishment of the first determination condition, the first determination means for executing the determination in which the determination probability that is the specific first determination result is set to the first probability, and
When the first determination means determines that the specific first determination result is determined, the entry means for which the period during which the game ball is easy to enter is set, and the ball entry means.
When a game ball enters the ball entry means, a second determination means that executes a determination in which the determination probability that is a specific second determination result is set to the second probability, and
A gaming machine characterized by having a privileged game executing means for executing a privileged game that is advantageous to the player when the second determination means determines the specific second determination result. When the second determination means determines a special second determination result different from the specific second determination result, the area where the game ball can enter and the game ball entering the area are Has a specific area that can be passed through,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the privileged game executing means executes the privileged game based on the passage of the game ball through the specific area. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the probability of being determined as the special second determination result is set higher than the second probability.

Images